Home

Roland E-80 Musical Instrument User Manual

1. 0e sees 37 AOU ee eresi EEN 70 Selecting guitar sounds 00cce eee aces a7 ASSIGN SW buttonS 2 o 02 20 enone eatteou terete 71 About the chord indications 0 0 0 ee 38 Using the D Beam Controller 72 Using the available STRUMM techniques 38 Using optional footswitches 05 75 Playing question and answer phrases 38 FCT PED Merint coh Goc gt ncuadeuseeneeneecenusnoeoaun 75 Guitar Mode OPUON souncandettenpeeseeeeeaeeeeey 39 Hold Footswitch Sustain srcsscsrirrisircrirrceren 76 Working with the Music Assistant 40 Foot Switch n 00 cc cece cece cece eee eee e ee 77 If the desired registration is not displayed 40 Expression Foot Pedal 0 0 es cece eee 78 eae TMG accccenuaaeaunes ans ao oe nanounudeae an 40 Cale HUMIMG yeu wade haa ee eeu E 79 Jemig the HNA cecceces a cee cacatecnraca rn venayantraraitetneatatotvtnte nace 40 Metronome eo ce 81 Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files 41 B Quick location of the song you need n a n 42 Additional Arranger Style functions 82 Starting MlayOaCk o2 o2c6ccn sewer eee 42 Playback functions Style Control 82 Other practical playback functions 00 43 E MUSIC SOC atsksaeeekehennan nnn nnedauueen 82 Using the Song Cover function 0 00 44 SOP PING Shy Paya Kanaa 82 Minus OnE er
2. 132 Page Up DOWM cits ecaaeee es 76 UW caaeeunnueennenebesseuuaess 78 VEAR PM eee ree ee 73 Winwa e ooo ee eee e eee eee ees 33 WIN ance iene aacene eaeeoea s 242 245 VOCAL EFFECT er ee ee 47 Vocal HannOmisl cccccuus cosh bs 46 121 Assign to track 000 ae 175 e ae er re ee 150 EMIECISss annnars 122 FTE cawxeaxeaxeeeeeetenebaidias 129 VOCOCElocasaaagaasueaaass 50 121 153 VOICE cee eek eee eeu ewaveeacus 46 121 Poaanaannananansaas 49 121 122 151 WC EEE 48 NOMIC 2 oe ene taeoaneess 25 143 Drum Instrument 145 USED nd ote Sees awe aed 144 146 KNOD 0 ee ee eee eee 21 28 Makeup fools ccc soesech dled 140 MASTE T uzcuuuusuuueenaeeeee es 241 Ne etree 106 Par areenaa EE 113 Pedal cevee veneer veebeeweeeeees 78 SMildiiworesseessvessocuuwecuxee 154 EO ae eee TEETE 147 S ng Makeup 2044024 ce desnnasials 140 OU EEE 147 Style MIDI anaana annaa 241 Vocoder 0 2c eee eee 153 W Wait NOTE ayes evadeeaeot 176 206 Wal TYDE o o estovecacaitrtiits soso eernmnetocs 123 Wave Expansion warcccune be decteoes 250 Whole 0 0 e eee ee 28 65 75 88 Width oonan kev oa mie acne 39 Words 00 cece eee eee 53 169 Write WINK otros ass uss ass ssy ceeeueeue 158 OVS tect eeebebat 243 One Touch anannaanciunacerasenncs 87 USChweaneuawaeewda 114 115 118 119 User PROG ail 2a annansdncnennees 125 Information EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar Al Askalany
3. The display changes to DECS Mele FORMAT EA e Press SAVE followed by SONG SAVE a Ca MEMORI Ca MEMORI ef FE ca 7 csc This page allows you to save the current song to the internal memory a memory card or a floppy disk It will be saved along with the Lyrics data you synchro nized 18 Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY INTERNAL MEMORY field to cleat the area whee you want to save the song 19 To save the song under a different name press and enter the desired name Repeat this with the entry See page 52 If necessary you can also supply the required ARTIST and GENRE information for use with the SONG FINDER function Note The E 80 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names Choose whichever is more convenient or clearer Note ARTIST and GENRE are not available for files you save to floppy disk 20 Press the field to save the song If the selected memory area already contains a song of that name you are asked whether it is OK to over write It e Press the field to overwrite the file This replaces the song in question with the new version e Press the field to return to the SAVE SONG page change the name then press again E 80 Music Workstation Roland Exporting Lyrics data as text file The Operation Successful message confirms the end of the operation 21 Press the button to return to the main page You can also use the
4. 7 Play the new part 8 Press the RECORDER button to stop recording Saving your song The 16 track sequencer uses a special portion of the E 80 s RAM memory where all editing takes place To ensure that you do not forget to save your song after recording and or editing it you are given the opportu nity to do so upon leaving the 16 track Sequencer page by pressing the button Song has been changed Do you wish to save to disk m n JAZZ GT 42 d PIANO 2 J 43 d muteocr f 14 d CLEAN GT J 415 PIANG 1 J 16 PIANO 4 j Note The Song RAM memory is erased when you switch off your E 80 T73 1 Note If you use the 16 track sequencer to edit a song that already contains Cover modifications the Cover settings are ignored and erased when you save the edited version of your song We therefore recommend saving such songs under a dif ferent name unless you used before you started editing your song See Before saving your settings on page 148 Press to save your changes and the entire song This will take you to the following display page SAVE SJOE E sons neve ARTIST a GENRE M FILE NAME Kiri aran Pens m g i Press to return to the main page without saving the song If you don t want to wait until the above warning Song has been changed is displayed automati cally proceed as follows Using this manual save function has the advantage that
5. Rate 0 127 This parameter sets the speed fre quency at which the chorus sound is modulated Higher values result in faster modulation Depth 0 127 This parameter sets the depth at which the chorus sound is modulated Higher values result in a more pronounced modulation Reverb Send 0 127 This parameter sets the amount of chorus sound that is sent to the Reverb processor The value 127 effectively allows you to connect the chorus and reverb effects in series Chorus before Reverb If you do not want the chorus signal to be processed by the Reverb effect set this value to 0 Delay parameters L R C Delay Sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay time Should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a time msec or a note value L R C Delay msec 0 1000ms L R C Delay Note 1 64T 1 64 1 32T 1 32 1 16T 1 32 1 16 1 8T 1 16 1 8 1 41 1 8 1 4 1 2T 1 4 1 2 1 1T 1 2 1 1 2 1T 1 1 2 1 Specifies the delay time This can be either a time value msec or a note value depending on how you set the Delay Sync parameter above T means triplet and a refers to a dotted note 2 1 means that each oct tor comes after two measures bars The advantage of working with a note value is that the delay effect always runs in sync with the current
6. Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Output Mode Speaker Phones Adjusts the method that will be used to hear the sound that is output to the OUTPUT jacks The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 59 3D Flanger This applies a 3D effect to the flanger sound The flanger sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no filter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Cutoff Frequency 200 8000Hz Basic frequency of the filter Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound Is heard Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed
7. Music Workstation Date May 2006 Model E 80 Version 1 00 Basic Default 1 16 I 10 nei Parts Basic Channel Channel Changed 1 16 Off 1 16 Off NTA NTA2 Default Mode 3 Mode 3 Message Mode 3 4 M 1 Mode 3 4 M 1 Altered Note 0 127 0 127 Number True Voice anne 0 127 Velocit Note ON O 4 O 4 y Note OFF X X After Key s O 4 Touch Ch s O 4 Pitch Bend O 4 O 1 a 0 32 Bank Select Modulation Portamento Time Data Entry Volume Panpot Expression C1 Hold 1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Hold 2 Resonance Realease Time Attack Time Cutoff Decay Time Vibrato Rate Vibrato Depth Vibrato Delay Portamento Control Effect 1 Depth Effect 3 Depth 98 99 NRPN LSB MSB 100 101 RPN LSB MSB 1 1 Program 1 1 System Exclusive C e Song Position Pointer Control Change 76 77 78 84 91 93 4 4 4 Reverb Chorus 4 1 oooo0oo0oo0oo0o0000000000000000000 O oliooooooooo0oo0oo0oo0o00000000000000 O O O O O System 9 1 9 P ARAA Song Sel X X Tune X X System Clock O 1 O 1 Real Time Commands O O 4 All Sounds Off X O 120 126 127 Reset All Controllers X O 121 Aux Local On Off O 4 O Messages All Notes Off X O 123 125 Active Sensing O O Reset X X 2 Recognized as M 1 even if Mz 1 Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No 2 7 2 E 80 Music Workstation
8. ORCHESTR Selects orchestral sounds suitable for classi cal music and film scores BAROQUE Selects instrument sounds suitable for chamber music ROCK Selects sounds suitable for rock music FOLK Selects sounds suitable for folk music COUNTRY Selects sounds suitable for country music ELECTRONIC Selects sounds suitable for dance music POP Selects sounds often used in pop arrange ments JAZZ Selects sounds suitable for jazz combos ETHNIC Selects sounds suitable for world music gt If you want to set everything yourself jump to Preparing your own Settings below Mi lime signature Before recording your first track you must specify the time signature of your accompaniment Select 4 4 for 8 or 16 beat patterns 3 4 for waltzes 2 4 for polkas and 6 8 or 4 4 for marches You can also select more complex time signatures 5 4 7 4 etc This value needs to be set when you initialize the Style RAM memory i e now All Divisions and Modes use this time signature You could however edit the patterns at a later stage see TIME SIGNAT on p 219 and specify that MAIN 1 should use 4 4 MAIN 2 6 8 etc 5 Set the time signature e Press the first field the numerator and enter the desired number of beats using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the second field the denominator and enter the duration of each beat using the dial or the DEC INC buttons You can also already set the t
9. Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Output Mode Speaker Phones Adjusts the method that will be used to hear the sound that is output to the OUTPUT jacks The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 60 3D Step Figr This applies a 3D effect to the step flanger sound The flanger sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no filter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value 2 G35 E 80 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Cutoff Frequency 200 8000Hz Basic frequency of the filter Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from w
10. Selects the preceding User Program for example 6 P1 if you selected 7 P1 before pressing this button Note If you press after selecting 8 P18 the E 80 will call up 1 P1 Likewise if you press after selecting 1 P1 your E 80 will select 8 P18 and so on Note User Programs can also be selected using an optional footswitch connected to the FOOT SWITCH socket on the rear panel See User Program Up User Program Down on p 76 Working with the User Program Finder Your E 80 also allows you to load any User Program from the internal memory or a memory card which is as fast as working with a User Program Set List As Stated above any registration you write is saved as a separate User Program file in the memory area that contains the currently active Set List There may be times when somebody from the audience asks you to play a given song for which you did prepare a User Program but maybe in a completely different Set List Rather than loading another list you can sim ply use the Finder to load just that specific User Pro gram If necessary a User Program loaded with the Finder can be assigned to the currently active Set List using WRITE The Finder can therefore also be used for creating best of compilations from various User Program Set Lists 127 E 80 Music Workstation Working with User Programs 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to USE pereojeire ey CS Ow Qar
11. This may come in handy when you keep forgetting the words of a song you wish to use for your performances and want them to be included in the song file The E 80 only allows you to link synchronize Lyrics data to the music data of the loaded Standard MIDI File The text data proper must be entered on a Windows compatible PC or a Mac and saved as TXT data for Win dows See right for the supported characters Adding Lyrics to a song Here s a step by step tour of how to add Lyrics data to a Standard MIDI File 1 Prepare the text file with the lyrics you wish to associate with a given song Use a word processor program on your computer taking care to type a return after every line or word you wish to synchronize separately The synchroniza tion function see below always works with entire lines of text i e until the following return In any case no line should contain more than 28 characters 2 Export the file as TXT file and save it to a floppy disk a memory card the E 80 can read or transfer it to the E 80 via USB see p 234 3 On the E 80 load the song you wish to add Lyrics to See Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files on p 41 for details about selecting songs 4 Press the button The display changes to Song New Song M 001 1 4 120 47 4 5 Press the field followed by the field I S amp 0123456789 PABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklm
12. Track SMF part 1 Piano 2 Bass 3 Chords 4 Solo Melody 5 Harmony MIDI E 80 parts channel of 2 sa et 7 Not specified 8 Not specified 9 Not specified 10 Drums 11 Not specified 12 Not specified 13 Not specified 14 Not specified 15 Not Specified 16 Not specified Arranger Accomp 1 A Bass Accomp 2 Upper1 Accomp 3 Upper2 Accomp 4 Accomp 5 Accomp 6 A Drums Lower1 M Bass Upper3 Lower2 Melody Intell Melody Intell a There is yet another track called MASTER that is used for recording the time signature the tempo as well as general SysEx data T74 Example 1 Recording a song from scratch Let us first record a song from scratch using the 16 track sequencer If you already played back a song since switching on the E 80 the song RAM memory already contains data we need to erase Even if the E 80 s song RAM memory is still empty using the INI TIALIZE SONG function would be a good idea 1 Press the RECORDER button 80 a Sl 21 o iS aerolite The display changes to meas 0023 2 J 130 474 SOLO MUTE FINGERED BS OVERDRIVE GT QU VAVE 5 Ja JFLUTE 6 d EARITONE SAX 7 J BRASS 1 8 ALTO 3 d TRUMPET OOTA OTTA Ema i3 ajuto GT 2 Press the field The display changes to IUPAC TZS Sense TEMPLATES SETTINGS TEMPO AND TIME SIGNATURE eno Fal Fa cou y f JAZZ TT VOCAL HARMONIST PARAME
13. 1 or e Use the RECORDER gt or button to select a measure slightly ahead of where you want to start recording 20 Press the button or play the first notes if you selected COUNT IN Wait Note Note The function can also be assigned to the D Beam controller or an optional footswitch see Play Stop on p 74 Play Stop Song on p 76 Play Stop on p 77 21 Play the new part 22 Press the RECORDER button to stop recording E 80 Music Workstation Roland Example 2 Adding tracks Example 2 Adding tracks Here s how to add a track to a song in the E 80 s Song RAM memory This is only meaningful after recording at least one part or after playing back an existing song See page 174 for how to start a new song Please bear with us and perform all indicated steps to get a feel for the way the 16 track Sequencer ticks Besides what you learn here will also come in handy for recording your own Music Styles Note See also Easy editing and useful functions on p 179 for some additional functions that are not covered here Note If the song you wish to supplement contains MAKEUP TOOLS settings be sure to freeze those data and to save your new version before changing it See Before saving your settings on page 148 1 Press the button The display changes to wens 0023 2 J 130 4 4 2 J FINGERED Bs 3 J OVERDRIVE GT R SQUARE WAY EOUME 5 J TRUMPET
14. EXECUTE Entering names 15 Use the and fields to select the position for which you wish to enter a new character 16 Use the alphanumeric keypad in the right corner to enter the desired characters This keypad works exactly like the keypad of a cell phone you may have to press an alphanumeric field several times to select the desired character or num ber The field allows you to switch between upper case and lowercase characters The field allows you to delete the character indicated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters Press to insert a blank or the number 0 If you forgot to insert a character use or to select the position where the missing character should be inserted Then press Insert followed by the character you wish to insert 17 If you re happy with the name for your Singer Key settings press EXECUTE The display briefly confirms that your name has been stored JSE jC Maeve Ro Operation complete No 6 xy29 a ose pu Q Precu 18 Press the button to start playback The song may now be playing in a different key If it is not the melody falls within the range you set Note For new songs you add to your repertoire we recom mend saving them once to the same memory location to speed up the recognition process of the HIGHEST and LOWEST notes See page 227 for how to save songs Displaying Lyrics and chord information gt Only ava
15. Important note User Programs are saved on the media that also con tains the list file you are currently using The name of that list is displayed in the upper left corner next to a yellow folder icon The area where your Set List is Stored appears in the right corner USER PROGRAM gesi ees trier HOL SUNG fq MIDI TEXT EBMP a SETTINGS LINE lu LINK LINK Be WRITE i i Swear Ballad Blue Berr y You cannot select a different Set List here T2 6G If the target memory area which cannot be chosen here already contains a User Program of that name you are asked whether it is OK to overwrite it WRITEUSERPRIOGREM Same file on disk 3 Overwrite l a pee pes mec e Press the field to overwrite the file This replaces the User Program in question with the new version Be aware that the new version Is used by any list that contains a reference to that file e Press the field to return to the WRITE USER PROGRAM page change the name then press again Note See Load User Program Set on p 226 for how to load another User Program List The data are saved and a message confirms the end of the operation Selecting User Programs Default For song or Style playback without any customized set tings or whenever you want to start anew you should select the Default setting This allows you to leave User Program mode canceling the settings of the last User Program you may have loaded
16. Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual 10 Press the button to return to the main page 5 Select the media INTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY disk or memory card 6 If available and necessary use the sorting func tions and or the Finder These functions are only available for songs and Styles and only if you select or EXTERNAL MEMORY See also pages 40 and 95 If you like you can select several songs or Styles for deletion by pressing the corresponding lines Use the PAGE lt gt fields to changes pages 2 29 E 80 Music Workstation Disk Media functions To delete all songs or Styles on the selected media press the field This disposes of all files on all pages 7 Press the field of the file you want to delete 8 Press the field The display changes to Delays Soy le DELAIESI MIE A Delete all selected k Delete all selected C ea e J m m ARE YOU SURE i ARE YOU SURE If you selected the DELETE page by accident press NO This takes you back to the previously selected page 9 Check again whether you really selected the file you wanted to delete if possible then press the field to delete the selected file Press the field to return to the DELETE list with out deleting the file You can also press to return to the DELETE page 10 Press the EXI
17. RATIO 1 1 0 1 INF Use this parameter to specify how strongly the level of signals that exceed the THRSHLD level is to be reduced 1 2 0 for example means that the level values in excess of the THRSHLD level are halved 1 INF is useful if you set THSRHLD to OdB or thereabout This produces a limiter effect which means that no signal level will never exceed the THRSHLD value This may help you protect the speakers of the PA system eC GAIN 24 24dB This parameter allows you to establish the desired mix among the three compressor bands Choose a negative value to decrease the level or a positive one to Increase it Choose 0 for a band whose level is OK as Is To save the settings you have just made press the field There is only one USER memory By saving new set tings you therefore overwrite the previous ones Press the field if you want to set the Equal izer or the button to return to the main page 115 E 80 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions amp effects Effects for Songs and Styles The Arranger and Recorder 16 track Sequencer share the same effects processors which is no problem because Style playback is impossible while a song is running and vice versa There are three multi effects processors for songs and Styles as opposed to one for the Keyboard parts Here is how to select different effects for the selected song or Style 1 2 Press the button once or twice to ca
18. The equalizers can be used to refine the sound image by avoiding unpleasant overlaps in certain frequency ranges In other words the equalizers should mainly be used to reduce the level of certain frequencies Con versely Increasing the level of certain frequencies can be used as an effect 1 Press the TONE ASSIGN button it must light of the part whose equalizer you want to set 2 Press the button to call up the following page KEV BOARD ER EGIS Mrx MEX PART OFF EDIT ASSIGN oO MAS 7 UG ele c i EavaLIzeR OFF EDIT AUDIO hd had o T wil hd i EG a pe_____ io Ss 2 lt MOD UG ATHRU OO O st 3 Press the field The display changes to SERED ree rap SO AL Er Ain wi iil a A c oD i r LO FREQ HZ D oo an If you like you can still switch parts while this page is displayed The name of the currently selected Key board part is displayed in the upper left corner The name of the sound assigned to that part appears below it You can use the TONE ASSIGN buttons to select a different part if you like 4 Press the button icon to the right of the display to switch the equalizer on or off for the selected part The field indicates that you can change the parameters on this page It cannot be switched off 5 Press the field of the parameter you wish to change 6 7 8 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Equalizers for the
19. sonG Amazing Grace C Memory 1 Strummlin Pop Dect Gospel Love ed oweR2 Pad With Vintage EP1 UPPER ass XY Ac_Bass But let us not return to the main page just yet Mi Changing the pitch of other notes Changing the pitch of other notes than the ones already highlighted is a matter of pressing the desired on screen buttons in question And defeating the pitch change of a note whose button Icon lights is as easy as pressing that field again the button icon then goes dark Press all lit on screen button icons to switch the Scale Tuning function off again Mi Customizing the pitch changes _ At first pressing an on screen button means that Its pitch is lowered by 50 cents 1 4 tone or 50 There may be situations where you want to raise the pitch of a note or select a different tuning Press the value field of the note key whose pitch you want to change That field now lights As stated earlier the pitch of all notes is at first set to 50 one quarter tone down You can however select any value between 64 slightly lower than a quarter tone down and 63 slightly higher than a quarter tone up Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to set the desired pitch You can also press the dial and enter the value using the on screen numeric pad If you selected a field the EDIT message is displayed to indicate that the stored settings have changed S O 6 Repeat step
20. tion press the RECORDER or the button The main page When you leave Demo mode or any other display page or if you do not change any of the E 80 s settings the display looks more or less as follows 9 ONG Amazing Grace Strummlin Pop Gospel Love OWER2 vere Pad With pVintage EP1 The information shown here depends on the E 80 s current settings the data you loaded etc but the above illustration should be fairly close to what you see on your instrument Unlike on previous Roland arranger instruments almost all information displayed is assigned to fields you can press to jump to a different page set a parameter or select a parameter for editing Pressing field G for instance takes you to the ARRANGER SETTING page Press 2 if you want to change the split point settings The and buttons 8 look different and therefore also behave differently press one of them to select the section whose tempo should be dis played You can change the tempo value of the selected section using the and buttons after stopping playback They do not allow you to switch from Style to Song mode however because that is handled automatically depending on whether the or button currently lights By pressing the TEMPO dis play field you jump to the ARRANGER SETTINGS ARRANGER OPTIONS page Note While on the main page you can also set the tempo using the dial and the DEC INC buttons The fields indic
21. 2 Press the field 3 Select the Style that contains the track s to be copied WSelecting a factory Style Use the STYLE buttons and the fields in the display to select the desired Style The blue field shows the name of the Style selected as source WSelecting an external Style You can also work with a Style saved in the internal memory area on a floppy disk or a memory card e Press the field to jump to the STYLE FINDER page STYLE LIST Daw en Z5AMBA 110 ZSLROCKI 60 ZSLROCK2 64 ZSLSWNG1 60 A FOUND 553 KIHET e See Style Finder quickly locating Styles on p 95 for the complete procedure e Press the field of the Style you need it appears on an orange background e Press the field to return to the STYLE TRACK EDIT COPY page 4 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track to be copied You can also select ALL to copy all tracks of a given Mode Division In that case DESTINATION TRACK is also set to ALL 5 Repeat this operation with the and fields to select the Mode Major Minor 7th ALL and Division Int 1 4 Int ALL Main 1 4 Main ALL FDw 1 3 FDw ALL FUp 1 3 FUp ALL End 1 4 End ALL E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using existing Styles 6 Press the field to listen to the pattern you are about to copy Note LISTEN is not available when you select ALL for the MODE or DIVISION fie
22. 4 button The Arranger will play an ending phrase When it Is finished Arranger playback and recording stop e Press the button This will stop Arranger playback and recording e Press the button This will stop Arranger playback and recording Listening to your song You probably want to listen to your song now If you like it be sure to save it see Saving your song on p 63 8 Press the RECORDER button This causes the Recorder to return to the beginning of your new song 9 Press the button to start playback Note See Song Arranger Start Priority on p 246 if playback does not start 10 Press again to stop playback and to return to beginning of the song Recording without accompaniment Let us now look at how to start recording without automatic accompaniment You can nevertheless start the Arranger at a later stage after your ad lib introduc tion for example it will play in syne with the song tempo 1 Press the button its indicator flashes 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note Whenever you press the button and start recording see below the song RAM memory is erased Be sure to save the current song data before recording a new song see p 63 Press the EASY SETTING button To record a guitar part activate the E 80 s Guitar mode by pressing the EASY SETTING button Use the buttons the button or if the main page is displayed the dial to set the desired
23. AccDrums track the display looks Slightly different O M wos mzaz popsii 0 Diea a Pea 3 Select the DIVISION and MODE whose settings you wish to change and possibly also all clones page 204 4 Press the field and use the DEC INC buttons to select Mix Let us assume that your track already contains data 5 Select the new sound or Drum Set to be assigned to the selected track and division by pressing the field and using the on screen fields and TONE buttons Finally press to return to the page shown above Note See Drum Instrument amp Pitch for the additional parameters for the AccDrums track you may want to set them before performing step 6 6 Press to start recording 7 Press again after the first or second beat but wait until the count in if any is fin ished This completes sound selection The new sound address replaces the old one M Drum Instrument amp Pitch SVL aoj ASE fae STAMOS TRACK INSTRUMENT m NRPN DRUM After selecting the AccDrums track you can change the pitch of certain sounds of the selected Drum Set The eligible sounds and corresponding note numbers are C 2 37 Side Stick D2 38 Stand 2 Snare 1 E2 40 Stand 2 Snare 2 F2 41 Low Tom 2 E3 52 Chinese Cymbal G 3 56 Cowbell A3 57 Crash Cymbal 2 F4 65 High Timbale Note The names of the drum percussion sounds depend on the currently selected Drum Set The sounds are usual
24. Before installing a wave expansion board turn off the power of the E 80 and all connected devices and disconnect all cables including the E 80 s power cable On the E 80 remove the screws shown in the fol lowing diagram and detach the cover The cover is located on the bottom panel Screws to be removed s When turning the unit upside down get a bunch of newspapers or magazines and place them under the four corners Always orient the E 80 in such a way that no buttons or controls get damaged When turning the E 80 upside down handle with care to avoid dropping it or allowing it to fall or tip over Plug the connector of the Wave Expansion Board into the connector of one of the slots and at the same time insert the board holder through the hole of the wave expansion board Position as shown before you install the board Wave expansion boards SRX or SR G01 series The slot you choose is of no importance Be aware however that there are two expansion sound groups A and B and that the slot you choose here speci fies which group you need to select on the front panel 4 Use the installation tool supplied with the wave expansion board to turn the holders in the LOCK direction so the board will be fastened in place Installation tool 5 Use the screws that you removed above to fasten the cover back in place Wis the board recognized After installing the wave expansion board check to co
25. MIVALUE 1920 1920 This parameter sets the amount by which the notes are shifted The value refers to CPT units one CPT 1 120 J Note Notes on the first beat of the first bar cannot be shifted further to the left because that would mean shifting them to the 0 measure which doesn t exist WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data TRACK LENGTH Sto earen nance erocx enera sinar E 0002 00 000 0002 00 000 0002 00 000 E 0004 00 000 0004 00 00 0004 00 00 MODE E 0004 00 000 0004 00 000 0004 00 000 o _ The TRACK LENGTH function allows you to modify the length number of bars beats and clocks of a pattern after recording Data that lie outside the range you decide to keep are discarded The various fields display the settings that are cur rently in effect Obviously you only need to change the settings of the Mode whose length you want to MAJOR MINOR 7TH O 0001 00 000 0001 00 000 0001 00 000 modify The white part of the window shows the cur rent length settings for the selected TRACK ADrums in the example above and DIVISION Main4 The three columns MAJOR MINOR 7TH refer to the modes There are only three lines 1 3 for Fill Ins Note There is no way to recall the previous version so be sure to save your Style before continuing see p 207 MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track whos
26. Note You can also start recording using an optional foot switch connected to the FOOT SWITCH jack See Start Stop on p 77 You could start by playing only the bass drum part If you specified the track length see above before recording the Style Composer jumps back to the beginning of the pattern after the set number of measures The second time around you could add the snare drum the third time the HiHat and so on When recording another part ABass Acc6 do everything you would do during a live performance add modulation Pitch Bend and to use an optional hold pedal connected to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH jack 21 Press again to stop recording The display changes to STYLE A __ ZOG Auditioning your Style and adding more tracks 1 Press the button again to listen to your track The STYLE COMPOSER page contains two fields that allow you to select the pattern you want to audition Here s how to select it SHALES GOMEO SER 2 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select Major minor or 7th Only one mode can be selected for playback Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select one of the Divisions Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Intro 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 143 End 1 4 Only one Division can be selected for playback 3 _ If you like your drum part continue with Saving your Style If not record a new version 4 Press the but
27. Press it again to specify the denominator the note value of each beat W SysEx After selecting a SysEx line and pressing gt the dis play looks more or less as follows HLS SrA Shy SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE EDIT fail 41 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 63 29 20 4D 49 44 149 20 53 4F 4E 47 53 20 5E F7 Use the lt gt buttons to select a byte a pair of num bers in the current line and a to change lines SysEx refers to messages only the E 80 or another GS compatible sound source understands Changing these values requires a thorough understanding of the purpose and structure of SysEx messages Here are some guidelines however e SysEx messages are usually found in the fine print of an owner s manual If not the distributor or dealer can supply a copy of that information e SysEx messages need to be entered in hexadecimal format hence the A F fields that are considered numbers Hexadecimal means that each group contains 16 different numbers rather than 10 41 in hexadecimal notation actually represents the number 65 in decimal notation 4 x 16 1 x 1 e SysEx messages always start with FO to signal the beginning of such a message and end with F7 end of exclusive message Some manufacturers like Roland use a byte that allows the user to check whether the SysEx message is correct That byte is called the checksum If you don t know how to calculate that value press the
28. Press to insert a character at the current posi tion All characters behind this position move one position further to the right 5 Press the field and enter the file name See p 95 for details Here you can enter 18 charac ters All characters will be capitals 6 If you want to add more Finder information press the and fields and enter the desired characters See Working with the Song Finder on p 159 for details about the Song Finder Note These two indications are not available for files you save to floppy disk Press the field to save your song The display tells you that the data are being saved after which it returns to the SAVE SONG page Press the or the RECORDER button to return to the main page 7 _ 8 _ E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs Editing 16 track songs Easy editing and useful functions After recording a few tracks you may want to do some touching up Here are some easy things you can do See Editing one or several tracks TRACK EDIT on p 179 for more elaborate functions WE Muting tracks When recording rhythmically intricate parts it may be necessary to mute already recorded parts that might distract you To do so return to the 16 track Sequencer s main page press the field and then the tracks you don t want to hear Such tracks are flagged with an M SWEET P Qe mens 0023 2 3 130 4 4 SOLO MUTE TRACK E T DI
29. Sets the speed of the vibrato effect Vibrato DEPTH Allows you to set the vibrato intensity Vibrato is an effect that changes modulates the pitch The higher the DEPTH value the more outspoken these periodic pitch changes will be Vibrato RISE TIME Allows you to set a swell for the vibrato effect This parameter specifies how long it takes before the DEPTH value is reached once the Delay Time IS Up Vibrato DELAY TIME Allows you to set a delay between the moment you start singing and the moment the vibrato effect kicks in e Press the field to leave this page Note If you select another preset the Pitch and Vibrato parameters on the EDIT page are reset to their factory values If you press the field the VOCAL EQUALIZER page appears It contains a simple equalizer for the Voice FX Auto Pitch and Singer parts See p 151 Auto Pitch settings When the indicator lights only the words you say are used The melody added to these words is generated by the Vocal Harmonist This is similar to the Vocoder part except that Auto Pitch is monophonic and thus meant as solo voice f YOICE FX AUTOPITCH AUTO PITCH ASSIGN KA 2 Co icii 1 Press and hold the button 2 Press the field to add an automatic vibrato effect to the generated voice The Vibrato parameters can be set on the EDIT page OCTAVE If you are not happy with the register of the generated voice you can transpose it up o
30. complexity of the introduction and then the but ton S 2 This starts Style playback with a musical introduction The length of the Intro depends on the Style you select At the end of the Intro the Arranger switches to the pattern you selected with one of the VARIATION buttons STYLE CONTROL SYN INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START STOP Senir AUTO START FILL IN STOP mio o Note The Intro is renewable i e you can press the button again while the Intro is playing Doing so on the fourth beat of the first Intro bar for instance will retrigger the begin ning of the Intro in the second bar Press the SYNC button and play a chord or just one note in INTELLIGENT mode see p 89 In this case the Arranger starts as soon as you play a note or chord in the chord recognition area see p 88 Note Do not play chord changes while the Intro is running Unlike the MAIN patterns INTRO patterns usually contain chord changes Chord recognition is not deactivated during Intro playback so that the beginning of a song may jump from one key to another in a rather unnatural way Chord recogni tion during Intro and Ending playback can be switched off however see Intro amp Ending Alteration on page 89 Note You can also start and stop the Arranger with the D Beam controller page 74 Stopping Style playback There are three ways to stop Style playback e Press to stop playback right away e Press the
31. e to save a song under a different name or to a differ ent media Note The SONG MAKEUP COVER and MARK JUMP settings can only be read by the E 80 and are thus of no use to other sequencers or SMF players 1 Press the button 2 27 E 80 Music Workstation Disk Media functions 2 Press the field followed by the field oO O Oe CT 215 tfacc 2 loer 3 ele ot fn Jno 3 Select the target media INTERNAL MEMORY disk or memory card Select or if you wish to take advantage of the Song Finder function page 42 4 Enter the name for the file 5 1 2 3 4 5 See page 227 Note The E 80 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear Press the field to save the data W Save Style This page allows you to save the Style that is cur rently in the E 80 s RAM memory Even if it is not a newly recorded Style there are other reasons why you may want to use this function to save the changes you made using the MAKEUP TOOLS and or COVER function see page 140 and fol lowing to save a Style under a different name or to a differ ent media Press the button Press the field followed by the field wal ose _ Select the target media INTERNAL MEMORY disk or memory card Select or if you wish to take advantage of the Style Finder function page 95 Enter the name for the
32. 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Level 0 127 Output level 65 VS Distortion Produces a more intense distortion than the above The parameters are the same as for 64 VS Overdrive 66 GT Amp Simul This is an effect that simulates the sound of a guitar amplifier Pre Amp Sw Off On Turns the amp switch on off Pre Amp Type JC 120 Clean Twin Match Drive BG Lead MS19591 MS1959II MS1959I II Sldn Lead Metal 5150 Metal Lead OD 1 OD 2 Turbo Distortion Fuzz Type of guitar amp Pre Amp Volume 0 127 Volume and amount of distor tion of the amp Pre Amp Master 0 127 Volume of the entire pre amp Pre Amp Gain Low Middle High Amount of pre amp distortion Pre Amp Bass 0 127 Pre Amp Middle 0 127 Pre Amp Treble 0 127 Tone of the bass mid treble fre quency range Middle cannot be set if Match Drive is selected as the Pre Amp Type Pre Amp Presence 0 127 Match Drive 127 0 Tone for the ultra high frequency range 2 65 E 80 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Pre Amp Bright Off On Turning this On produces a Sharper and brig
33. 1E SP MODELING i n On this page you can switch the SPEAKER MODEL ING processor on and off by pressing the button icon to the right of its display If you only need another speaker model press the SP MODELING display and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select it If you also need to change certain aspects of that effect Press the SP MODELING field to access the following page Sree MOS le INTERNAL SPEAKERS DIGITAL BASS ENHANCER Press the or OFF field to switch the proces sor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above Press the field of the effect type you wish to use 5 The options are Thru No change whatsoever to the E 80 s sound same effect when you switch this processor off Super Flat Boom Box Low Simulations of various ref erence monitors including low quality or small speak ers Recording engineers often listen to their mixes on various speakers to check whether all important parts and effects are preserved on different speaker configu rations These simulations apply both to the internal speakers and to the OUTPUT and PHONES sockets If necessary press one of the DIGITAL BASS ENHANCER button icons to change the bass con tent of the E 80 s signals Note that this parameter only applies to the E 80 s internal speakers It has no effect on the signals transmitted to the OUTPUT MAIN sockets OFF
34. Beam for switching on and off the ADrums and ACC1 6 parts Tempo Up Select this option to increase the current Arranger or Recorder tempo By moving your hand out side the D Beam s range you return to the previous tempo value Tempo Down Select this option to decrease the cur rent Arranger or Recorder tempo By moving your hand outside the D Beam s range you return to the previous tempo value Note Options marked with a only apply to the currently active Keyboard parts Pitch Up By moving your hand over the D Beam you can generate a value between 64 no Pitch Bend and 127 maximum upward bend As soon as you move your hand outside the D Beam s reach higher than 40cm above the eyes or further to the left or right the value returns to 64 no Pitch Bend The maximum bend interval is two semi tones L A Pitch Down By moving your hand over the D Beam you can generate a value between 64 no Pitch Bend and 0 maximum downward bend As soon as you move your hand outside the D Beam s reach the value returns to 64 no Pitch Bend D Modulation Select this function if you want the D Beam to duplicate the modulation function of the Bender Modulation lever Cut amp Reso Up Only for Upper1 2 and or 3 By moving your hand over the D Beam you can vary the current TVF Cutoff value see also p 144 of the Upper1 2 3 part The Resonance parameter will be set to 63 maximu
35. CC91 i e how strongly the selected track should be processed by the reverb effect PANPOT The track s stereo placement 00 L 64 127 R E 80 Music Workstation Roland Recording Styles from scratch CHORUS Chorus Send CC93 i e how strongly the selected track should be processed by the cho rus effect These settings may come in handy to ensure that all ACC1 parts for example use the same amount of reverb and are always located in the right half of the stereo image You can also change these settings later see p 211 e Repeat steps a d for the remaining tracks Modes and Divisions f Press the first field the numerator and enter the desired number of beats using the dial or the DEC IINC buttons g Press the second field the denominator and enter the duration of each beat using the dial or the DEC INC buttons See Time signature above You can already set the tempo 20 250 here or leave that for later 6 Press the field The display returns to the STYLE COMPOSER page which only contains the sound assignments you have just made SALE Ee les sy TRACK EDIT MUTE ADRUMS 4 POP1 e ASS SLIDE i ABASS Julens Getting ready for the first track 7 On the STYLE COMPOSER page press the DIVISION field and use the dial to select the Division you want to record Intro Main Fill or Ending 8 Press the RECORDER button The display changes to SPL aoj Aoa Mee
36. COMPOSER STEMS W irunction A HAND GO MIDI CONTROLLERS ANIYA at FOOT e lt USB DATA CONTROLLERS STORAGE 2 Press the field T VIBRATO T F T A ENY____ lt lt Cc RATE ATTACK lt a RELEASE RESO CUTOFF TORRE oa 3 Press the field of the Keyboard part you wish to edit Note Rather than performing steps 1 3 you could also press and hold the corresponding TONE ASSIGN button 4 To quickly reset all parameters press the field 5 To reset only the selected parameter press the field 6 To edit one of the displayed parameters press its field Its display is now surrounded by a red frame E 80 Music Workstation Roland Tone Edit editing Keyboard parts 7 Set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons You can also use the assignable sliders below the display to directly edit the parameters above them Here are the parameters you can edit C1 The function of this parameter depends on the sound you assigned to the selected part It may influence the filter and resonance setting switch between the organ samples with the fast and slow Rotary modu lation TONE sounds etc Here s an exam ple select the B3 Sermon sound on page 1 of the bank and use this function Note The C1 parameter is only available for Tones that are flagged with a tick in the Parameter Reference booklet If you are working with a sound of an optiona
37. Continue messages CLOCK This option means that the Arranger STYLE or Recorder sequencer SONG sends MIDI Clock messages that tell the receiving instrument or MIDI device which tempo to choose SONG POSITION only for SONG If you switch this parameter on the Recorder sequencer sends Song Posi tion Pointer SPP messages that indicate the current playback position Note See your external sequencer s etc manual to find out whether it accepts Song Position Pointer messages MESYNC RX The SYNC RX parameters allow you to specify whether and how the Arranger STYLE and or Recorder sequencer SONG should be synchronized to external sequencers drum machines etc The available options are Auto This is a good setting for remote control of song or Style playback using a PK 5A dynamic MIDI pedal board for example If the E 80 receives a MIDI Start message FA it waits for Clock messages that specify the tempo If those Clock messages are not received a PK 5A for instance doesn t send them the E 80 starts playback using its internal tempo If however Clock messages F8 follow after the Start message the E 80 uses the external tempo You can nevertheless go on using the Recorder sequencer or Arranger without MIDI Start Clock messages which is not possible when you select MIDI Internal The Recorder sequencer SONG or Arranger STYLE uses its internal tempo MIDI Song or Style playb
38. Free Pnl 01 003 upg Free Pnil gt Free Pnl 01 004 upg Free Prl gt Free Pnl_01 127 upg Free Pil gt Free Pril 01 128 upg 2 gt G70 User Program conversion number 02 from G1000 Set G1000upg UPS 3 gt myBapyuu J gt MYBABYJU_02 001 upg lt 4 YOUMENEE gt YOUMENEE 02 002 upg MBAKYU 5 ee MYBABYJU gt MYBABYJU_ 02 192 upg You can transfer that file to your PC via USB See page 234 for how to establish the required connection and transferring the file to your computer Note that the information has no effect on the imported User Programs it is merely intended as a log that may help you find a given User Program more quickly C Tells you not to modify or delete the file in the E 80 s Text folder if you want the conversion report to be updated at every import session 2 Number of the conversion session since the creation of this text file Source instrument VA VA7 VA 76 7 G1000 G 1000 EM 2000 Name of the converted User Program set file 3 Original name of the User Program 4 Name of the converted User Program The first number 01 02 etc refers to the conversion session This may help you tell User Programs with identi cal names from different conversion sessions apart The second number 001 002 etc refers to the original User Program memory the VAs have 128 the G 1000 and EM 2000 have 192 Note After 99 conversion sessions the imp
39. INTELLIGENCE TYPE THRESHOLD Big Band ee 2ND TONE Traditional _ Romance Press the field of the desired harmony type TYPE Selecting a Harmony Type also means that the E 80 automatically assigns a suitable sound to the MEL ODY INTELL part e g a trumpet and sax sounds for Big Band etc More specifically the following sounds are added to the UP1 part which also plays certain intelligent melody notes Type UP1 sound MEL INT sound DUET Trumpet Brass 1 ORGAN Chorus Or Chorus Or COMBO Clarinet Trombone 84 4 5 _ Type UP1 sound MEL INT sound STRINGS Strings St Slow Str CHOIR St Choir Aahs St Choir Aahs BLOCK Vibraphone w Piano 1w BIG BAND Trumpet St Tenor Sax COUNTRY Jazz Gt JC Chorus Gt TRADITIONAL The Grand X BROADWAY Celesta Theater Org GOSPEL Trem Organ St Choir Aahs ROMANCE Strings Nylon StrGt LATIN The Grand X COUNTRY GUITAR Jazz Gt Nylon StrGt COUNTRY BALLAD The Grand X WALTZ ORGAN Theater Org Trem Organ OCTAVE TYPE 1 The Grand X OCTAVE TYPE 2 The Grand X If a second sound is available this depends on the selected TYPE the display looks as follows ARRAS Sarre e Oio Hapa TYPE HRESHOLD i Cewe 2ND TONE St Tenor Sax If the desired option is not displayed use the PAGE 1 PAGE 3 fields to select another page Note For Traditional Latin CntryBallad Octavelype1 and Octavelype2 only the UP1 part is us
40. If you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Delay 1 Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay 1 4 Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of Delays 1 4 Delay 14 Level 0 127 Output level of Delays 1 4 EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level E 80 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters 71 Reverse DLY This is a reverse delay that adds a reversed and delayed sound to the input sound A tap delay is connected immediately after the reverse delay Threshold 0 127 Volume at which the reverse delay will begin to be applied Rev Delay Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the reverse delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a time msec or a note value Rev Delay
41. In the latter case the display changes to SENS Orpen ts SETTINGS STAFF 1 STAFF 2 a P 3 KEV Pen PITCH e Select the track s whose notes should be displayed Press the corresponding field and use the dial to select the track STAFF 1 is the upper staff STAFF 2 the lower one e f you happen to know the key your song Is In press the field and use the dial to select the correct setting This is only necessary to avoid that the score is clut tered up with accidentals sharps and flats e Use the gj and B fields to specify what clef should be used for displaying the notes Press whichever is more convenient for you this setting has no effect on the octave the notes are actually played in it is only used for display purposes e Use the button icons in the PITCH row to specify how the note names should be displayed next to the note symbols means that the note names are not displayed refers to the Anglo Saxon German Dutch sys tem while corresponds to the French Ital lan system e Use the button icons in the DRUM RANGE row to specify which notes of the drum track usually track 10 should be displayed means that you will only see the notes between note numbers 35 and 59 FULL on the other hand means that you will see all drum notes This setting is only used if you set one of the TRACK field s to 10 or number of a track that plays a drum part Most drum parts only
42. MASTER TUNE field TROTTING KEYBOARD The Keyboard parts are transposed Since the Arranger s key depends on the notes you play on the keyboard the Arranger parts are also transposed oJ a Note Parts that play Drum Sets are never transposed SONG During Recorder playback only the song parts are transposed Though it is perfectly possible to switch on both options at least one of them must be on KEY BOARD could be useful for transposing only the Key board parts so that you can play to a song In your key but sound in the song s key 3 Use the and fields to transpose the E 80 s Note If you also want note messages received via MIDI to be pitch transposed you must set TRANSPOSE RX On Off on p 242 The setting range is 6 0 5 semitones This setting to ON applies to all sections and all User Programs 4 Press the button to return to the main page GLOBAL TRANSPOSE See Octave The Octave function is another useful parameter that allows you to change the pitch of the selected part in octave steps 12 semitones at a time You could take advantage of this function for solo parts where you need the UP1 and UP2 parts to trigger the same Tone while UP2 plays one octave above or below UP1 This probably only works when you use a Keyboard part MBS LW2 LW1 UP3 UP2 UP1 in WHOLE Keyboard Mode page 65 Working in SPLIT mode indeed means that you can only play the notes up to a certain
43. Play a chord in the left half of the keyboard to specify the key of the Intro pattern 3 Press the and the numeric button 1 4 that corresponds to the Intro pattern you want to use STYLE CONTROL BASS INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START STOP AUTO FILL IN 4 Press the button to start Arranger playback The Arranger plays the introduction of the currently selected Music Style The MEASURE field on the main page now counts backwards 4 3 etc to indicate the Intro s duration If you like you can now try out the remaining three Intro patterns by pressing and 1 4 The number refers to the degree of complexity Note Do not play while the Intro is running Most Intro pat terns indeed contain chord changes so that playing different chords may lead to highly annoying results During Arranger playback the button flashes red on the downbeat and green on the remaining beats of the bars to indicate the tempo While the Arranger is stopped this visual tempo indication is provided by the button that only flashes in red though See Flashing Met ronome on p 247 for how to switch that indication off 5 Press one of the VARIATION 1 lt 4 buttons to select the pattern that should be played after the Intro is finished the button flashes By pressing at this stage you leave the Intro pattern on the next downbeat i e before the Intro phrase is finished 6 Wait until the selected M
44. Polarity Inverse Synchro Selects whether the left and right phase of the modulation will be the same or the opposite INVERSE The left and right phase will be oppo site When using a mono source this spreads the sound SYNCHRO The left and right phase will be the same Select this when inputting a stereo source Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Cross Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the phaser sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the step rate should be syn chronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parame ter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Step Rate Hz 0 10 20 00Hz Rate of the step wise change in the phaser effect Step Rate note Musical Notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Mix Level 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Level 0 127 Output level 49 MLT Phaser Extremely high settings of the phase difference produce a deep phaser effect Phaser Mode 4 stage 8 stage 12 stage 16 stage 20 stage 24 sta
45. Quarter tone srsriisriciiiciiricei 79 Oue k S sannenannnanoweues 44 R eer EEE 150 152 l e NE E 145 VUO seere teteu ewin E NA 48 e a TEETE ETT EET 115 REC Mode Style onanan 205 Ue e 175 178 E ee E TSN 244 User Program lt lt yernntennaes none 133 Record TO e E EEEE 177 MIX ee ee ee 205 Lol a ee eo eee eee 205 ECORV ee cee ewer a 60 ReECOrding 0 cece eee eee eee 60 SCIECE oo cee een epee enn awe de enue 177 Red arrOW 2 e eee eee eee aee 30 32 ReflectionS 0 ee0 eae 123 124 Registrations 0 cece eee eee 125 Relative n u 242 Release nnana naana 104 115 145 Remote est rasan it aaa ae 241 ROMO VG in 65444444444445eenicisituiaitse 166 Rename Diskk amp Media 0 0 cee eee 228 Ist Gl See ee ee ee nner 136 163 Pe LSD acncccsauase nes eae 168 SONG FINGel s2caccendeusnuasade 97 161 User Prg Genre sdk deh cdedctctolotoncs ans 134 Re Co A TE 183 Dai ee ne 183 RECOM sococx esse seakn eens 205 Ug ee es re 209 We Se ancanaaanannaaasasans 42 161 247 OLA eea AANRAAI ate eae 71 78 Stall WOO 524444204 nedndeeescns 75 WeSO atte EEEE 144 145 RESOLUMONscessasaannneguseeduuw 214 ReESONANCe ciaccaensdeouwieseenure 104 Bie EE 74 PETOJ eee eee ee eee eee 39 ReverO eee 143 Drum IMStUMeNT cceceee cacscans 145 Keyboard parts 05 108 NEVE ve neeneceaneasenesunt 116 147 Send ce cee eee ee 51 120 122 123 Song Style 00 140 147 Sty
46. Recording other tracks and divisions You can now record the second track probably the bass If you d like to do the guided tour again return to page 203 Do not forget to set the key for the bass part see Specifying the key for melodic parts on p 204 Once the first Division is finished you can record other Divisions Use the clone function page 204 to record several patterns in one go Do not forget to record the Fills Intros and Endings to complete your Style There are two groups of three fills Up 1 3 and Dwn 1 3 Up fills are used when you switch on the button and then press a VARIATION button of a higher number transition from to 2 for example Dwn fills are used when you switch on the button and then press a VARIATION but ton of a lower number Intros are usually used at the beginning of a song and End patterns provide professional closing sections Note The ABass track is monophonic You can only record sin gle note patterns E 80 Music Workstation Roland Auditioning your Style and adding more tracks Muting tracks while recording others After programming a few tracks you may find that cer tain parts tend to confuse you That is why the E 80 allows you to mute tracks that you do not want to hear during recording 1 On the STYLE COMPOSER page which should be displayed now press the field and the lines of the Style tracks you don t want to hear Such tracks are flagged with an M
47. Reset All Ctrl CC 10 Pan CC 93 Chorus 20 CC 91 Reverb 74 CC 11 Expression 127 CC 7 volume 30 Pitch Bend 0 CC 0 Bank Select MSB 0 Program Change 74 Note 65 F 4 100 11 Note 8 amp 3 18 Note 67 G 4 95 79 19 04 010 Note 69 4 4 31 65 am e Note For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting event types that should not be included in the copy See VIEW on p 191 e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a blue back ground e Press the button icon Each new selection will replace the previous one MPLACE EVENT This function is only available if the sequencer s clip board already contains events that you copied using COPY EVENT For safety reasons it would be a good idea to use this function immediately after copying events Press the button icon The following pop up appears TRACK Note Number 102 033 CC 121 ESA A Cote 0 EST MiM 5 030 2 eme G4 95 2 19 04 010 Note 69 4 4 31 65 PLACE 3 i ia e Specify the position where the first event you copied should be inserted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new event s Pres
48. Reverb Send messages CC91 CHORUS Chorus Send messages CC93 CAF Channel aftertouch RPN Registered parameter number CC100 101 NRPN Non registered parameter number CC98 99 SysEx SysEx messages system exclusive CC16 General purpose controller that allows you to influence the C1 parameter see p 103 Note TX EVENT parameters with a symbol are not available for Style parts 2359 E 80 Music Workstation MIDI RX Mi CHANNEL 1 16 Allows you to assign a MIDI receive channel to the selected part The default settings usually work best but you are most welcome to change them Note Unless you have a very good reason to do otherwise we Suggest using the same IX and RX channel numbers for a part Note Assigning the same channel to two or more parts is usu ally not a very good idea MISHIFT 48 48 This parameter allows you to transpose the received note messages before sending them to the E 80 s tone genera tor The maximum possible transposition is four octaves up 48 or down 48 Each step represents a semi tone LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW C G9 LIMIT HIGH and LIMIT LOW allow you to set the note range to be received If not all note messages received on a given MIDI channel should be played by the selected E 80 part narrow down the range Note The LOW LIMIT value cannot be higher value than HIGH LIMIT and vice versa RX EVENT The data filters of the R
49. See Saving your Style on page 207 11 Press the field and use the DEC INC buttons to select Replace or Mix 12 Press the field and use the dial to select the track you wish to copy the data to Note AccDrums data can only be copied to AccDrums tracks Likewise you can only copy ABass data to other ABass tracks If you selected ALL for SOURCE TRACK this parame ter is also set to ALL 2 O9 E 80 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer 13 Repeat this operation with the and fields to select the Mode Major Minor 7th ALL and the Division Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 143 Fill Up 13 End 1 4 ALL Note If you selected ALL for SOURCE MODE DIVISION this MODE DIVISION parameter is also set to ALL 14 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify the number of copies to be made Select 1 to copy the excerpt only once 15 Press the field to listen to the destination track The INTO position indicates where the beginning of the source excerpt will be after the copy operation To copy the source data to the beginning of the des tination track select BAR 1 BEAT 1 and CPT o 16 Press the BAR or field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the target INTO position 17 Press the field to copy the data Editing Styles on the fly via additional recordings Adding notes in real time To add notes to an
50. See page 159 e Press the fields of all songs you wish to assign to the selected Index category Selected songs are displayed on an orange back ground To remove a song from the selected cate gory press its orange field so that it turns gray e f necessary use the PAGE fields to go to previ ous or Subsequent list pages Note When you change pages new assignments or removals are automatically updated which means that the contents of the selected category changes e Press to return to the SONG LIST page Press to return to the main page Windex Copy This function allows you to copy one Index category along with all its song assignments to a another category You could take advantage of this for merg ing two categories to free up one category for new assignments Note There are eight Index categories in all You cannot cre ate additional categories e After performing step 4 above press the field Sar pearly Ip iba My Favorites a e n the left column SOURCE press the field whose assignments you wish to copy to another Index cate gory You can also use the a fields e In the right column DESTINATION press the field of the index category you wish to copy the assignments to You can also use the a fields e Now specify how the song assignments should be copied Ios E 80 Music Workstation More refined song functions 6 Press the field if the assignments of the DESTINAT
51. Small functions so please see above Note When the ENSEMBLE part is used together with VOICE FX or AUTO PITCH only three harmony voices are available Note The and fields allow you to jump to the effect or tone controls If you press the field PART 1 PART 2 PART 34 PART 42 Zp tm Gm Om Om Om Om Gm Gm taj Back Press the field to select this page See page 154 155 If you press the field the display looks as follows Bene FITCHEEND eae mee ite memes See the explanations under Small settings e Press the field to leave this page If you press the field the display looks as follows ee 6 A A y m mn j se te W L ALL PARTS This page contains a simple equalizer for the four ENSEMBLE parts as well as an EO band that applies to all four voices simultaneously for added flexibility e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons EQUALIZER Press this field to switch all equalizers on this page on or off The equalizer can be used for two things a emphasizing a specific frequency range to create a special effect or make the part more distin guishable b to reduce the level of frequencies that mask other sounds or produce a boomy sound The ALL PARTS FREQUENCY HZ parameter affects the sound of all four parts 1 4 FREQUENCY Hz Use this parameter to s
52. Street ARD E1 Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 20 2 417 1828 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA T O M S Sound amp Music Pty Ltd 11 Melle St Braamfontein Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 403 4105 FAX 011 403 1234 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd Royal Cape Park Unit 24 Londonderry Road Ottery 7800 Cape Town SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 799 4900 CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai 200090 CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd BEIJING OFFICE 10F No 18 3 Section Anhuaxili Chaoyang District Beijing 100011 CHINA TEL 010 6426 5050 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 Parsons Music Ltd 8th Floor Railway Plaza 39 Chatham Road South T S T Kowloon HONG KONG TEL 2333 1863 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 409 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1 Cideng Timur No 15J 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA Roland Asia Pacific Sdn Bhd 45 1 Block C2 Jalan PJU 1 39
53. Style tracks you only just recorded do not contain it It allows you to use a revolu tionary system for adapting the recorded notes to a more natural behavior also known as voicing There are two options Degree This setting refers to the old system for real time conversion of track information during Style play back Based on the fundamentals of the chords you play during Arranger playback it often leads to odd jumps of certain parts Nearest Refers to a new more musical system for real time shifts of the recorded Style notes during Arranger playback See also page 222 for an explanation of this concept Select if the selected pattern should ignore this set ting Note This parameter is not available for ADrums and ABass tracks Intro3 amp 4 and End3 amp 4 patterns E EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data SHIFT CLOCK SHIFT CLOCK allows you to shift the notes within the selected FROM TO range See page 188 for details MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks EMODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th W DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 WDATA TYPE Allows you to select the data to be edited See the list on page 215
54. USB port data storage amp MIDI communication MIDI IN OUT THRU E 80 Music Workstation Roland W Internal amplification Speakers Rated power output General settings 2x 13 cm woofer 2x 6 6 cm tweeter 2x 35W 2x12W with bass reflex system Dedicated SPEAKER OFF switch W General specifications Power supply Dimensions mm Weight Supplied accessories Options 100 240V universal 56W 1176 W x 489 D x 198 H 22 5kg Owner s Manual power cord metal music stand CD ROM PK 5A Dynamic MIDI Pedal FC 7 Foot Controller MSA MSD MSE series floppy disks Roland amp third party RH 25 50 200 Headphones DP 2 Pedal switch DP 6 Pedal switch piano type BOSS FS 5U Foot switch EV 5 7 Expression pedal BOSS FV 300L Volume Expres sion pedal KC 150 350 550 Keyboard amplifiers Memory cards third party manufacturers Wave Expansion boards SRX series and SR G01 Note Specifications are subject to change without prior notice 249 E 80 Music Workstation Appendix 21 Appendix nstalling wave expansion boards Cautions when installing a wave expansion board To avoid the risk of damage to internal components that can be caused by static electricity please carefully observe the following whenever you handle the boards e Before touching a board first grasp a metal object such as a water pipe so you are sure that any static electricity you might have been carrying has been discharged
55. W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 40 Flanger DLY This effect connects a flanger and a delay in parallel Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 41 CHO Flanger This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in parallel Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between
56. While the button lights the assignable slid ers are even available for V Link control when this page is not displayed Use the 16 4 and 2 1 sliders or the V LINK keys highest octave to manipulate the video pic tures CLIP Allows you to select the Edirol DV 7PR s clips or palettes 1 32 You can also press the keys in the highest octave to switch clips 1 8 PALETTE Allows you to switch between palettes 1 20 DISSOLVE TIME Allows you to set the transition speed between images The velocity values of the keys in the highest octave can also be used to control the transition speed but only for the eight clips that can be selected via the key board SPEED PLAYBK Moving the slider upwards speeds up play back moving it downwards slows down play back At the center position playback speed is normal VFX Allows you to change video effects This func tion is not available if the receiving video processor is set to Off Note VFX2 is not supported by the DV 7 BRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness of the image 2 15 E 80 Music Workstation Miscellaneous 4 COLOR CB Allows you to change the color There are five steps that can be selected by pressing the lever several times green violet blue red original clip color COLOR CR Allows you to change the color green violet blue red original clip color Allows you to control several effects this depends on the function you assign to th
57. a Rare DATA oe Pe no Rare 2 Press the field followed by the field SPITTS TOUGH EnA LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 PORTAMENTO TIME m m SPLIT LOWER 1 a HOLD Lower 2 Far mono Portamento means that the pitch doesn t change in clearly defined steps it produces glides from one note to the next Portamento Time 0 Rough pitch changes in semitone steps normal Portamento Time 1 127 Pitch glides from one note to the next Instead of jumping in semitone steps as you would expect the pitch glides from one note to the next whenever the Portamento time is higher than 0 The higher the value you set the slower the glide This effect is particularly useful for synthesizer sounds 3 Press the field of the Upper UP1 or Upper2 UP2 part to select it 4 Set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons TOW E 80 Music Workstation Advanced Keyboard part functions Portamento Mode Mono Poly The E 80 also allows you to set the Upper1 and Upper2 parts to mono phonic mode MONO means that you can only play one note at a time You could select this mode to play a trumpet or woodwind part in a more natural way POLY on the other hand means that you can play chords using the selected part 5 Press the or field of the Upper part whose setting you want to change 6 Press the button to return to the main page Note Portamento and POLY
58. back as soon as the current song Is finished Note The MARK JUMP buttons are also available during Play List playback so feel free to use them see p 43 Press again to continue with the next step To switch off the Play List function press the button it goes dark Selecting another single song via the Song Finder or a User Program with a song link will temporarily deactivate Play List function This is signaled by the flashing indicator When the external song is finished the Play List function resumes and the indicator of the button lights steadily Note If Play List playback is stopped at an entry for which NEXT SONG is not active and if you then select a User Program with a song link the Play List function is switched off Pressing then starts playback of the song recalled by the User Program Managing Play Lists Play Lists can be renamed and deleted e f necessary insert the memory card that contains the list you wish to rename or delete into the slot 1 Press the button 2 The display looks more or less as follows PLAY LIST x EXTERNAL INTERNAL Saturday Live Use the scrollbar or the dial move through the available Play Lists if available and necessary 167 E 80 Music Workstation More refined song functions 3 Press the field that corresponds to the list you need M Renaming a Play List To change the name of the selected Play List press the IRENAME field P
59. c ccc ee eee 89 tO E e O DEEE EEEE 89 MOIE cc aveacceaceanewadeeews 218 222 PWG ge ioe tata e dae aed 81 AIDEN UO fe annanaaaqaqedauaaeedas 37 74 De ean ene ene eee ene ae 89 Arr M BasS cc cece cece eeee 77 BUTON a2 62035aceeeceuuuuen 25 Chord OM ote estes 75 FIOM doncuawe waves eee asuuuneau 72 ARRANG 00 00 cece eee eee 70 Arranger 0 e eee eee 24 82 Chord s seenen E EA 89 CONTO e 83 Hold isan czetcteararciein ctr i 71 89 ORT OS ot oe ee eee aa 90 P ee nase aseecu en A 82 RIT SHINING sirrcna 71 SUG E E E EEE 25 ee EEEE 30 32 A ERETT 40 42 TANSO I a 0 2 cece eee eee eee 48 51 De EIEEEI EEEE 71 Atenik ccaccsacaaaaeannaes 127 238 PACK lt 4 cencaceaaacanens 104 115 144 AUdIO II ae ca ca ce crcrco teeter ce trer entre teceoes 119 PU MON tere cane E 159 AUtO ce eee eee een 91 PAW x seecoasueeneaneec 26 74 130 Harmony 2 cc eee eee eee eee 48 Harmony ASSIGN 00 20 eee 51 Page UME so eneseeeeeeeencn se 57 59 PIEI cg sonics teaeensucucy cy auevenences 49 121 152 SUSTAIN eee eee 39 e e o caeweeeeereeneeeeeestae lt 240 TO ea e a 122 B Background cee eee 53 58 Backup vaccdceeeecenaasadecuxKusrs 236 Pel NCes sscnneseaeeonesennsetaasue 28 Keyboard parts 005 106 Song Makeup Tools 140 Bank Select 0000 eee 243 PoC eat aeseossenssecnnneneantasss 241 PASS ee eu es asses oa Gaba bab ao basen 4
60. card e After performing step 2 press the field in the upper left corner THALES Jy lave GEJ renane tie CEs EZ Listening Latin My Favorite e Either press the field that corresponds to the desired Style category or if you re not sure which category the Style belongs to press ALL e Now return to the previous page by pressing BACK The display returns to the page shown under step 1 above This time however only the Styles belonging to the selected Index are displayed Continue with step 3 to select the Style you want to USE 95 E 80 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions Searching for Music Styles The powerful part starts as soon as you press the FINDER field STYLE FINDER ALPHABETIC a SERCH Y erena NAME ae COUNTRY E GENRE a TEMPO TEE s ee e TAME E Emn Decide what you want to look for e Press the field if you want the E 80 to look for Style names then enter the name or part of it Press the field if you want to look for a country then enter the name or part of it Press the field to locate a specific genre Rock n Roll 16 Beat etc then enter the desired characters Press the field and enter the tempo value you are looking for Note It would be a good idea to enter at least 2 characters possibly even 3 so as to narrow down your search to a work able size Search the database The next step is
61. gak 02 060 Tempo Change 46 03 000 Tempo Change 140 This page lists all events already present on the MAS TER track It allows you to modify the existing data to delete data you do not need and to add informa tion that is missing To avoid unpleasant surprises be sure to save your song before editing the MASTER track Note To leave this page either press the field return to the sequencer s main page or the button return to the E 80 s main page Editing existing events The MASTER track of each Standard MIDI File con tains at least the following information Tempo This is the Tempo Change value located at 1 01 000 It cannot be erased Time signature This is the Beat Change value located at 1 01 000 It cannot be erased SysEx The SysEx string located close to the beginning of the song It tells the sound source what format is being used how the effects processors should be set types parameter settings etc Song length The End of Data value refers to the posi tion of the last event which can be located on any track and thus to the end of the song This value cannot be edited manually You can however extend the song by recording additional data or by inserting blank measures page 184 To change information already available on the MAS TER track proceed as follows 1 Use the a v buttons or the dial to select the list entry you want to edit The name of the selected p
62. if available to scroll further down Note This function always replaces the contents of all 8 inter nal MIDI Set memories 5 Press the field to load the data Note The E 80 does not support MIDI Sets of other Roland instruments Saving data Note When saving files to floppy disk whose capacity is too small for the data you wish to save the E 80 will display a DISK ERROR message That does not necessarily mean that the disk is damaged Important remark If you select the media that contains the original ver sion of the file you are about to save the following message is displayed MAVE SONG A file of this name already exists Overwrite e Press the field to overwrite the old version or e Press the field if you do not want to overwrite this file and return to the SAVE page instead Then enter a different name or select a different media Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual WSave User Program Set This function allows you to save the Set List cur rently assigned to the USER PROGRAM buttons This also includes all GLOBAL parameters see the list in the Parameter Reference booklet You can also use this function to copy the Set along with all User Programs i e the registration data it refers to from one media to another 1 Press the button 2 Pre
63. increase the volume of that frequency negative values cut attenuate it If you like your equalizer settings so much that you also want to use them for other Keyboard parts proceed as follows Set the EQ parameters to your liking Press the field Press the TONE ASSIGN button of the Keyboard part that should use the same settings Press the field to assign the equal izer settings to the newly selected part Press the field to return to the previous page or the button to return to the main page Note Do not forget to save your settings to a User Program if you want to keep them Tis L E 80 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions amp effects Using the Keyboard Mastering Tools The E 80 contains two effects processors that apply to all Keyboard parts there is a second set for the Style and Song parts These processors are collectively called the Mastering Tools because they allow you to perfect the signal mix output by the E 80 so as to adapt it to the sound sys tem you are using Though they are not meant to be changed for every song you intend to play switching settings is relatively easy and could therefore be used to great effect Note The MASTERING TOOLS settings are global parameters that are not saved to individual User Programs You can however archive them by saving the current User Program Set to the internal memory or a memory card 1 Press the button to call up the following pa
64. jaah STYLE CONTROL section Use these buttons to select the desired Music Style pattern and to start stop Music Style playback see p 25 LCD CONTRAST Aawwbod Csi MAKEUP r The D BEAM buttons 6 allow you to assign the desired function to the D Beam controller See p 72 LCD CONTRAST knob Use this knob to adjust the display s contrast if it is difficult to read The display itself is a touch screen and therefore needs to be clear at all times so that you know what you are doing Note The display may take some time to warm up That is why you may have to change the contrast several times after pow ering on COVER button This button provides access to pre programmed tem plates that allow you to quickly modify a song s or Music Style s character Press it once or twice to select the Song or Style level See pages 44 and 85 MAKEUP TOOLS button Press this button to modify the settings of the cur rent song or Music Style if the pre programmed Cover settings do not provide what you re looking for See page 140 MENU button Press this button to call up a menu that provides access to more in depth E 80 functions you may only wish to set from time to time EXIT button Press this button to return to the previously selected display page or the E 80 s main page i 16 51B Se 42 2130 Soe oA d ve TYPE PANPOT CHORUS VOLUME REVERB E 80 Music Workstation Roland Front panel
65. ly or has been dropped For the U K IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN AND YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol Qor coloured GREEN or GREEN AND YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED This product must be disposed of separately at your local waste recycling centre Do not dispose of in household waste bin The technology used in the E 80 is covered by patents pending in certain countries throughout the world Roland Hi2 cs SMF au MUSIC WORKSTATION Owner s Manual Thank you for purchasing the Roland E 80 Music Workstation The E 80 is Roland s most complete arranger keyboard yet a collection of all major advantages a Roland instrument can offer perfect accompaniments high class sounds the possibility to expand the number of sounds via two optional expansion boards SRX series a D Beam controller virtual harmonic organ bars profes
66. oo g oo 1 1 0 0 16 Disk Media functions The E 80 s DISK amp MEDIA functions allow you to save edited data and settings to the internal memory a memory card or floppy disk to save and load User Pro gram Sets and MIDI Sets to format various storage media to delete files and to copy data If you re still wondering whether to use a floppy disk or a memory card consider this e Memory cards have a much bigger capacity up to 4GB and are more reliable than floppy disks e Though you can also use 2DD or 2HD floppies the most helpful functions Song Style User Program Finder the PLAY LIST function and automatic song links to User Programs are only available for files on memory card or in the internal memory 2HD disks have twice the capacity of 2DD disks so use 2HDs whenever you can The how to s 1 Press the button The display changes to Oeics Maeve IMPORT pe USER PROGRAM f FORMAT E 2 If you intend to work with a floppy disk or memory card insert it into the drive or slot 3 Select the function you need by pressing the cor responding field in the right column 4 Select the data type you want to save load rename or delete by pressing one of the big fields MIDI SET USER Ld tia cy E 80 Music Workstation Roland The how to s 5 On the display page that appears now select the media INTERNAL MEMORY or memory card 6 Do o
67. play other notes This function is switched on by default so that you can briefly play the chord for a EA given bar and then release all keys in the chord recog nition area If the icon indicator is dark the melodic accompaniment bass and other parts stops as soon as you release all keys in the chord recognition area only the drums keep playing j 2 Press the button icon to switch the Arranger s velocity sensitivity off dark or on lights oS E 80 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions This function only becomes meaningful if you also 4 f specify how the various Arranger parts should Tem po related settings Arranger respond to your velocity Options 3 Press the field The E 80 provides two parameters that allow you to The display changes to play with the Style tempo 1 Press the button The display changes to 4 Press the field of the Arranger part whose velocity sensitivity you wish to change There are eight Arranger parts ADRUMS the drums GA tune qe m AE oeat A BASS the bass and ACCOMP 16 the melodic SPLIT amp gt vocaj Fe accompaniment parts ree eee oo LINK j 5 Set the desired value with the dial or SPpprnancen S g sTyLe ZS mn the DEC INC buttons 3 You can specify positive and negative sensitivity val Los ees Cen ues Positive values mean that the volume of the part in question increases when you strike the ch
68. to the velocity playing dynamics The MICRO EDIT page adds a third message to that pair 2 Press the white field the event list to be able to select events using the DATA ENTRY section 3 Use the a buttons or the dial to It describes the duration of the note in question You select the list entry you want to edit may remember this value from the TRACK EDIT environ The name of the selected parameter appears in the ment where it is called Gate Time upper right hand corner of the display Control Change These messages usually add some thing to the notes being played like modulation a dif ferent volume a new stereo position The E 80 recog nizes and allows you to edit all control change numbers the Arranger uses CC01 10 11 91 93 and displays their official name 22 E 80 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer Note CC64 Hold events generated by a footswitch con nected to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket are converted into the equivalent GATE TIME values at the time of recording You may therefore have to change the duration of the notes themselves Program Change These messages are used to select sounds within the current bank As there are only 128 possibilities these messages are usually preceded by control changes CCOO and CC32 That s why the E 80 inserts all three when you use the CREATE EVENT func tion Note The CCOO value of ADrums tracks cannot be edited Pi
69. ur Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired value You can also press the dial and use the numeric pad VOLUME The volume of the selected instrument Nega tive values decrease the current volume positive values increase It PANPOT Use this parameter to change the stereo placement of the selected instrument Note In the case of Drum Sets this setting applies to all drum percussion instruments There is also a parameter that can be set for certain drum instruments See page 145 REVERB Use this parameter to set the Reverb Send Level The send level refers to the amount of the signal transmitted to the reverb effect and hence to the strength intensity with which the instrument is pro cessed CHORUS Use this parameter to set the Chorus Send Level The send level refers to the amount of the signal transmitted to the chorus effect and hence to the strength intensity with which the instrument is pro cessed Note The four parameters discussed so far can also be set on the SONG STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS mixer page see p 140 VELOCITY This parameter allows you to modify the velocity range of the instrument in question O means that the recorded values are left untouched negative values reduce all velocity values by the same amount leaving differences between notes intact while positive settings increase all velocity v
70. whether to use a TRACK EDIT or the MICRO EDIT func tion if you don t need to see the events you want to change choose a TRACK EDIT function If the TRACK 17S E 80 Music Workstation Using the 16 track Sequencer EDIT level does not provide the function you need or If you want to see the notes MIDI messages etc choose the MICRO EDIT environment Here is how to select functions 1 Load the song you wish to edit if it does not yet reside in the E 80 s Song RAM memory See p 41 2 Press the RECORDER button 3 Save your song before continuing by pressing the field That way you can always return to the original if your changes do not work out as expected See Sav ing your song on p 63 for details On the SAVE SONG page press the field to return to the 16 track Sequencer s main page 4 Press the field in the right column of the display TRACK EDIT a S i ii ROM NOTE ae ROM 5 Press a field in the top two rows to select the desired TRACK EDIT function If after selecting one of these functions and setting parameter values you decide not to execute the transformation do not press the field 6 Select the track s you wish to modify 7 Select the range FROM and TO for the edit operation The FROM and TO parameters allow you to specify the positions measure beat clock of the track excerpt you want to change Example to change measures 1 4 of the selected tr
71. you need to switch on the and or button icon Note The Punch In Out function can also be assigned to an optional FC 7 pedal unit see p 76 or a footswitch see p 77 For those applications there is no need to set the PUNCH IN amp OUT positions beforehand But you still need to press the field 13 If necessary press the field and set the required octave transposition 4 4 This allows you to record special noises usually assigned to the lowest notes numbers like the ones of fingers sliding over guitar strings etc If the selected sound provides them 14 Specify how long the count in should be before recording starts press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select one of the following options Off No count in Recording starts as soon as you press the button while flashes 1 Meas Recording starts after a 1 bar count in 2 Meas Recording starts after a 2 bar count in Wait Note Recording starts as soon as you play a note on the keyboard There will be no count in 15 If you want to record tempo changes press the field and use the DEC INC but tons to select On This option allows you to use the TEMPO buttons and or to vary the tempo while recording Those changes are recorded to the MASTER track 16 Press the field and set the desired resolution Quantize corrects the timing of your notes by shift ing them to the nearest grid mark Use the dial or
72. 1 4 The footswitch can be used to switch to the VARIATION level you select here That Music Style pat tern is used from the next downbeat onward Bass Inversion Allows you to switch the Bass Inversion function on and off page 83 Arr M Bass Allows you to set the Arranger Chord parameter to Off chord recognition plus ABS recogni tion off see p 88 and at the same time activate the KBD MODE button and the MBS part and vice versa Piano Standard You can alternate between Standard and Piano Style Arranger Chord modes When the former is selected the chord recognition area page 89 is automatically set to LEFT When you switch to Piano Style the chord recognition area is automatically set to WHOLE Furthermore the KBD MODE button is switched on and the Upper 1 part is activated if it was off Half Bar on Fill In The footswitch allows you to switch the Half Bar function on and off Certain pop songs in 4 4 contain bars that only last two beats The usual place for such a bar is between the first and the second verse This does not change Style playback right away Only when a Fill In starts will the Half Bar function be acti vated and play half the number of beats of the fill you selected Arranger Hold Allows you to switch the Arranger Hold function on and off See p 89 Dynamic Arranger Allows you to switch the Dynamic Arranger function on and off See page 89 for details Rotary HB S
73. 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 16 St Flanger This is a stereo flanger It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls like a jet airplane taking off or landing Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no filter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Cutoff Frequency 200 8000Hz Basic frequency of the filter Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range 254 Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 17 Step Flanger A Step Flanger is a flanger effect with clearly noticeable steps rather than continuous pitch changes Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay ti
74. 2 a FILL IN ON USER FILL IN ON USER Direct change PROGRAM CHANGE PROGRAM CHANGE First plays a fill INTRO MAIN END RIT INTRO MAIN END RIT VARIATION VARIATION Setting stored in the User Program Automatic functions for User Programs If doesn t light the change to g VARIATION 3 occurs as soon as you select the User Song Link Program in question This function means that by recalling a User Program Given that it is fairly easy to forget about the you also prepare the associated song Such a song must button while playing the E 80 allows be available when you load the User Program in ques tion for this system to work All you need to do then Is you to specify that the Arranger should never play a vara ROH ia ciare E or fill in when a switch to a different Style pattern is trig pay gered by User Programs you select that song 1 Press the button The display changes to ae Tyaga CONTROLLERS a Your E 80 only memorizes the song name If at the time you recall such a User Program that song is not available the display will respond with Ie over 1 SE Slow Str G NaturalPiano e wera Pad With Vintage EP1 2 Press the field followed by the field Remove the memory card because the internal mem ory is always available insert the proper card and select that User Program again If you don t the E 80 will start playback of the previously loaded song wh
75. 5 SRX 5 SRX 6 SRX 6 SRX 6 SRX 6 SRX 7 SRX 7 SRX 7 SRX 7 SRX 8 SRX 8 SRX 8 SRX 8 SRX 9 SRX 9 SRX 9 SRX 9 SRX 10 SRX 11 SRX 12 SR GO1 Patches 1 41 1 50 1 128 1 128 1 128 129 256 257312 1 128 129 256 257 384 384 448 1 128 129 256 257 384 385 475 1 128 129 256 257 384 385 448 1 128 129 256 257 384 385 414 1 100 1 30 1 50 1 76 ccoo 93 J3 Ja 93 93 Ja Jo Ja Ja Ja Ja 93 93 Ja J3 J3 93 Ja Ja 93 Ja Jd Ja Ja 93 Ja Jd 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 25 Note If you are using the leaflet supplied with the board to locate sounds please see the Patch List and Rhythm Set Key Assign lists labeled For RD 700 RD series or G 70 Note You can select sounds of an SRX series expansion board for any track you like Some boards contain loops or grooves whose tempo is automatically synchronized to the Arranger or song tempo 2 Dn E 80 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters MFX and IFX types and parameters 1 Thru The effect processor is bypassed 2 Stereo EQ This is a four band stereo equalizer low mid x 2 high Stereo signals like certain piano sounds are thus not combined to a mono signal before being processed EQ Low Frequency 200 400Hz Frequency of the low range you wish to boost or cut 0 Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range Negative values reduce the level 0 High Freq
76. 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing individual Style events Style Micro Edit W Monitoring note events 4 Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the The Style Composer can play back the note events first value you select This may help you identify the occurrence you want to edit Switch on the speaker icon and 7 move the cursor to a note event to hear that note One eee oo oo oo CC 32 Bank Select LSB 4 1 000 Program Change 4 mVIEW l l ee eae eal a Press this button icon if the list of track events has a listaabt F CC 93 Chorus 1 000 Note 35 B 1 000 Note 59 B 3 68 1 000 Note 70 Bb4 37 1 060 Note 59 B 3 48 1 060 Note 70 Bb4 33 02 000 Mote 38 D 2 127 OE Ero si 5 Modify the value e Rotate the dial or e Set the value using the DEC INC buttons or e Press the dial and enter the value using the numeric pad that appears in the display become so long that finding the events you wish to edit takes too long The following pop up appears eeeceeessoces oS 3 5 gt d ad ad ad d A A rie e _ VIEW SELECT e Switch on the button icons of events you want to see If you choose to work with the numeric pad proceed in the list the button icons in question must light in as follows green e Press the numeric button icons to enter the desired The names of most available options are probably value Use to delete the last figure you c
77. 90 150 180 300 360 600 This parameter allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the low band this is a shelving filter LO GAIN DB 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected LO frequency Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency negative values The following parameters allow you to set the cut attenuate it sound s envelope See page 104 for details ATTACK This parameter adjusts the onset of the sound CUTOFF This filter parameter allows you to make the selected sound darker or brighter Positive Cutoff set tings mean that more overtones will be allowed to pass so that the sound becomes brighter The further this value is set in the negative direction the fewer over tones will be allowed to pass and the sound will become softer darker See page 104 for a graphic Note For some sounds positive Cutoff settings will cause no noticeable change because the preprogrammed Cutoff parameter is already set to its maximum value RESO This is a parameter one invariably associates with a synthesizer When the Resonance value is increased the overtones in the area of the cutoff frequency will be emphasized creating a sound with a strong character Note For some sounds negative RESO settings may pro duce no noticeable change because the Resonance is already set to the minimum value If you like your equalizer settings so much that you Negative values speed up the
78. Arranger or Recorder tempo C Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS L R C Level 0 127 Volume of each delay line there are three left center and right 7 Press the button to return to the main page Note Do not forget to save your settings to a User Program if you want to keep them O Music Workstation Roland Using the multi res nee of the Keyboard parts MULTI FX Using the multi effects processor of the Keyboard parts MULTI FX Your E 80 contains a multi effects processor that can be used for processing any Keyboard part you like There is a similar processor for external audio signals with the same algorithms which is covered on page 119 And there are also 3 MFX processors for the Style Song parts But let s first look at the MFX processor for the Key board parts 1 Press the PART ON OFF button it must light 2 Select the Distort Gt1 sound on page 3 of the family 3 Play a few notes on the keyboard and switch the button on off to hear the difference The MFX is available for all Keyboard parts e Press the button to call up the following page KEY BOARDERREGI S MX SEA RT SIGN S
79. CHR PERC ORGAN ACCORDION A GUITAR SAX VOCAL BRASS TRUMPET WIND 4 USER PROGRAM section These buttons allow you to select the desired User Program registration memory Press the but ton to call up the display page where you can select the desired User Program and save your current panel settings to a User Program You can also select the previous DOWN or next UP User Program By pressing these two buttons simultaneously you leave the User Program environment The button allows you to ignore several set tings of subsequently loaded User Programs see p 129 Note You can press and hold most buttons to jump to an associated display page C FINDER gt STYLE USER PRG eD TONE E GUITAR BASS STRINGS E PERCUSS HARMONIC SFX BAR SRX EXP am A PAD SYNTH ETHNIC DRUMS FINDER section Press one of these buttons to quickly locate songs SONG Music Styles STYLE or User Programs USER PRG in the internal memory on floppy disk or an external memory card See pages 42 95 and 127 TONE section The TONE buttons allow you to select one of 16 inter nal Tone families You can then use the display to specify the desired sound within that family The button is only available after you install one or two optional wave expansion boards into the E 80 After doing so you can alter nate between the first A and the second B board by pressing this button repeatedly 15 E 80
80. COMO EE 242 ClOCK 1 sc525caneeeseeseecsoccecenws 240 ClONES EEEE T 204 Coarse TUNE 100 Ui eee eee 100 Vocal Harmonist 151 COMO COMUOlpeaseteaeeqteeeeeeee 242 Colour PrESEL 224 22244 222042200ds 53 58 Soa re 147 Eoee E 186 Ooo l nucagaeciaeeacacaaaaaaaes 60 COMPRESS 422222602220002e 00encece lt 47 COMpresSSor n n n onnan 46 115 118 OIC SIE EErEE 123 COMME WONS tatecesuaaaseeecseecs 20 COWL caducapdonsianaaeesaeeaaeeda 240 Contrast 00 0 eee eee eee 14 21 Controls D PeAWtunecadcecageastesesesaces 73 DVI COMPOS arrra 203 Converter Style ic i2cciccgcccacenee 197 Converting User Programs 232 2 1D E 80 Music Workstation Index Copy DISKGIVICOIA lt t oanacannnnaneaanat SUV EEEE SEQUENCE 2c ccanancacannannaaani SVE COMPOSE earannan COUN oeren Cover Event Note oc caweereeesrenees 196 223 CUS OMe veces E CUSTOMIZE picccetatercnnanacaneneaat CULGIRESO cero iad ou cannes CO errereen WGC ERTE E TETEE ETET DECAY PIENE 104 144 EITE SETTI TTTETEEETITT Disk amp Media onanan naana naana Last Note o an naaa Play MSE 2gaceeeeed ann ennsnses SEQUENCE naonnu anuanua nnana DONG FING E EEEE EEE EEEEE EEEE SUE Err EE EAEEREN DIVE COMPOSE esasi Jeer Progra wansnnaeauunananad 2 7 6G DEMO ee eee 22 DGGE xeseesse esse AOE 151 152 VP aaceeaneanenede anew ne eevee 145 NIDI GLO AELE 48 Destination a an annuun aeann 209 Bo o NTT EEEE 124 Digital B
81. Dataran Prima 47301 Petaling Jaya Selangor MALAYSIA TEL 03 7805 3263 PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below SINGAPORE SWEE LEE MUSIC COMPANY PTE LTD 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 6846 3676 SRI LANKA Penguin Electronics Pvt Ltd 115 Maya Avenue Colombo 06 SRI LANKA TEL 11 2552376 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN R O C TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Soi Verng NakornKasem New Road Sumpantawongse Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 224 8821 VIETNAM SAIGON MUSIC DISTRIBUTOR TAN DINH MUSIC 138 Tran Quang Khai Street Dist 1 Ho Chi Minh City VIETNAM TEL 08 848 4068 AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA For Australia Tel 02 9982 8266 For New Zealand Tel 09 3098 715 CENTRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BARBADOS A amp B Music Supplies LTD 12 Webster Industrial Park Wildey St Michael Barbados TEL 246 430 1100 BRAZIL Roland
82. E As soon as you play a chord in the CHORD area however the E 80 memorizes and uses it until you play a different chord 7 Play a different chord in the CHORD area and again use the string keys in the ARPEGGIO area to sound the constituent notes Additional ARPEGGIO functions The keys indicated in the previous illustration corre spond to the natural behavior of a guitar But there are other things you can do in the ARPEGGIO area most of these functions involve the black keys of the ARPEGGIO area Lowest chord note Strum down slow 6 strings Strum down slow 4 strings Root of the chord Fifth of the chord Lowest chord note 1 Play a chord in the keyboard area called CHORD in the display 2 Press one of the following keys to use the effect assigned to It Lowest chord note B3 amp F 4 These keys allow you to sound the lowest note of the chords you play in the CHORD area Here s an example if you play a C chord using the C E G keys this function sounds a C If you play that same chord using G C E this function sounds a G Strum down slow 6 strings C 4 This key causes all six strings to sound more or less at the same time Later on you will discover there is also a fast variety where all strings are hit almost simultaneously Down by the way means that the simulated plectrum or thumb fin ger moves from the upper part of the guitar the low E string towa
83. E 80 allows you to use as many drum tracks as you like simply assign a Drum Set to the desired track and start recording This requires no particular initialization procedure Track 10 however can only play Drum Sets and should therefore be used for your main percussion applications Assigning the Vocal Harmonist to track 16 by 5 initializing the song RAM memory The field allows you to decide whether or not the Vocal Har monist s settings should be used in your new song Switch this button icon on if you want to assign the Vocal Harmonist to track 16 in which case track 16 can no longer be used as regular track Otherwise leave this parameter in the Off position To record changes to the Vocal Harmonist like switching on off and or the notes for the AUTO PITCH part the VOCODER etc select track 16 start recording and do everything you normally do when you operate the Vocal Harmonist in real time Press the field to really initialize the Song RAM memory which you haven t done so far The E 80 now initializes the Song RAM memory and jumps to the main 16 track Sequencer page Preparations 6 Press the RECORDER button E 80 Music Workstation Roland Example 1 Recording a song from scratch The display changes to eA Pyle fee Spey Bs TT fe Ee ee a PUNCH FOOT PUNCH at Our INfOUT SETTING RECORDING SELECT a AFTERTOUCH Bp CONTROL CHANGE FUNCH IN 10DE ARIA
84. EASY This is another intelligent chord fingering sys tem used on instruments by other manufacturers It works as follows If ALTERATION is off the Arranger only switches to the special chord once the Intro Ending is finished 1 Select the ARRANGER CHORD page see step 1 of Chord recognition area ZONE on p 88 2 Press the button icon to switch that function off dark or on lights 3 Press the button to return to the main page or continue with the next step Major chords Press the key that corresponds to the chord s fundamental Minor chords Fundamental any black key to the left of the fundamental Seventh chords Fundamental any white key to the left of the fundamental i Dynamic Arranger The DYNAMIC ARRANGER function allows you to con trol the volume and timbre of the Arranger parts via the way you Strike the keys in the chord recognition area velocity sensitivity 1 Select the ARRANGER CHORD page see step 1 of Chord recognition area ZONE on p 88 Minor seventh Fundamental any black key to the chords left any white key to the left 5 Press the EXIT button to return to the main page Note The choice you make here also affects the Arpeggio Oct and Chord Oct options of the D Beam Controller See page 74 Arranger Hold ma apa The ARRANGER HOLD function sustains the notes you PONE TIPE HOD play in the chord recognition area ZONE until you 3
85. EASY SETTING button Note You can also select this page by pressing button gt GUITAR MODE In that case you may need to switch the Guitar mode on using the switch icon see below The indicators of these two buttons light and the dis play changes to SUPA Mone p o ELECTRIC ACOUSTIC The switch icon allows you switch the Guitar mode on or off If you selected this page by pressing EASY SETTING GUITAR it is already set to on If you now return to the main page by pressing the button the display changes onc New Song Strummlin Pop Free Panel PROGR o Caos ower 1 St_ Slow Str ss n T The UPPER1 field below GUITAR MODE shows the name of the currently selected guitar sound You cannot select other guitar sounds for UPPER 1 simply by pressing this field press the GUITAR MODE field to jump to the page shown above then change the settings you don t like UPPER2 s guitar sound is assigned automatically and can never be changed First steps 2 Press the ELECTRIC or ACOUSTIC switch icon to specify whether you need an electric or an acoustic guitar Your choice is reflected by the big guitar picture in the upper right part of the display 3 Play a chord in the keyboard area called CHORD 4 5 6 in the display Play chords here You can release those keys right away if you like Note The keys in the CHORD area unlike the ones
86. EEEE 67 Wit WiGissna cAnnaccanceeaacdaneeinists 242 MEX 112 OIF ROU 0a ee eh eee A 109 Intelligence Threshold 85 SONG occ cecceceeceeeeceeevee 131 Guitar nananana nanana 36 176 205 INTELUGENT serrata aat tapbh 89 TXT LLL LLL LL LL LLL 132 EUN epenn Tees 39s Internal 0 0c cece eee e eee Oa AA 125 H Memory 0 ccc eee e eee eee 247 ISIE Ne eaeeseeeceeeeeeeseuseeeeus 209 OT 71 75 77 92 M a ee VOIPI EEEE 2 EV 123 Hall 0 00000 109 116 123 147 POSITION 6 ee eee eee NOAG ot nce ce A ees 226 peed 34 INTO oe eee eee 184 210 MIDI Set ee eee 226 a UCtC S Ow S MU Oss oxexaodgaceceess 26 71 75 1782 User Program Sel ssrrrisrssrstai 226 Harmonic BarS a a aaa aaa naa eens 33 TE jG 120 Intro Ending 000e eee ee 87 Local onaaannanaa anaana nnana anana 239 UU AITEFATION 425555onnnbbbhbaeawbnars 89 OnJOff cece eee eee eee 238 PGE ee ee ea 122 l VCP SIO oaan aa a aaaaaaaan a aa 83 Eo a SEEE EEEE ae eee 91 IID eeeeeeeeeeeereee r iua 243 i b HArMONY oaaao aaau 84 121 J Aaaa Hoa OW PEPEPEPE A mniena aca 48 51 154 Jump to TSE NOEs cccaceeasans 142 198 vey Touch Qin O EEEE EEEE EEEE 76 78 PP A nee eer eeeaman aaa maa ss HIgh cece cc cecccceeeceeeee 100 240 K Pass Filter 20 10 eee anes Key Touch 0ccccceceeeeee 68 CU IIIS 54 0 saaaasasrnrrnrrrrrrrnn HIGHER LLL LLL LL LL 181 182 21 4 KBD Mode E SEES 28 64 Lowest me a ae
87. EVENT This function allows you to move one or several events Note If the position to which you move the selected event already contains other events the moved event is added at the end of that group e Select the event you want to move Note Events located at 1 01 00 cannot be moved further to the left e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a blue back ground e Press the button icon The following pop up appears SAAS SMT AGIC SBT 1 01 000 Beat Chanae 6 HOVE EVEN 1 02 017 Sus Ex FO41 1000 000812100002 1 02 021 Sys Ex FO 41 10 00 00 08121000 33 e Specify the position to which the first event in chro nological order of the selected group should be shifted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to confirm your settings and move the event Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes E COPY EVENT This function allows you to copy one or several events Use PLACE EVENT to insert a copy of those events at the desired position PLACE EVENT 3 SILE MIGROTEDI I 1 01 000 1 01 000 1 01 000 1 01 000 1 01 000 CC 11 Expression CC 31 Reverb 01 000 CC 93 Chorus 0 02 000 Note 67 G 4 0
88. Ending phrases but also relies on a more musical real time conversion of the chords you play into meaningful accompaniment phrases Roland s patent applied for ACV technology can indeed transpose Music Style parts in such a way as to eliminate unnatural jumps of Strings lines plano chords etc Guitar mode The E 80 features a Guitar mode that allows you to play Super realistic electric and acoustic guitar parts Those parts can be used both alongside the Arranger live applications and recorded using the E 80 s 16 track Sequencer Recorder and the Style Composer A multitude of effects The E 80 provides a host of effects processors for all parts and sections There are three separate multi effects processors MFX A C for songs and Styles that can be set independently from the MFX that Is available for the Keyboard parts Furthermore each part and instrument has its own 3 band equalizer Even the drum instruments of Standard MIDI Files and Music Styles i e the kick snare HiHat toms etc can use their own individual equalizer Viewer The E 80 incorporates a VIEWER function you can use to display texts e g song lyrics or BMP picture files on the internal display or an external screen There is even a PAGE TURNER function that turns the pages of the selected text file or creates a slideshow of several pic tures 2 slots for SRX series expansion boards The E 80 s sonic arsenal can be expanded with two optional SRX
89. FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN 01510 Vantaa FINLAND TEL 0 9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE CYPRUS STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland G2 Calmount Park Calmount Avenue Dublin 12 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 4294444 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 2273 0074 POLAND MX MUSIC SP Z O O UL Gibraltarska 4 PL 03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Roland Iberia S L Portugal Office Cais das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 Porto PORTUGAL TEL 22 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 535500 Gheorgheni ROMANIA TEL 266 364 609 RUSSIA MuTek Dorozhnaya ul 3 korp 6 117 545 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 981 4967 SPAIN Roland Iberia S L Paseo Garcia Faria 33 35 08005 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 493 91 00 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 0 8 702 00 20 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzer
90. Fast to Slow Tweeter Level 0 127 Volume of the tweeter Spread 0 10 Sets the rotary speaker stereo image The higher the value set the wider the sound Is spread out EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Level 0 127 Output level 58 3D Chorus This applies a 3D effect to the chorus sound The chorus sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no filter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Cutoff Frequency 200 8000Hz Basic frequency of the filter Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed E 80 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note
91. Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity of the flanger effect Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level 39 CHO Delay This effect connects a chorus and a delay in parallel Paral lel means that the input signal is processed by two effects that do not interact Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay
92. INC buttons to set the STEREO WIDTH parameter Here is what the parameters mean and do 3 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Playing realistic guitar parts Guitar mode RETRIGGER This parameter allows you to specify whether the arpeggio notes of the key s you are press ing in the ARPEGGIO or STRUMM area are replayed again when you play another chord in the CHORD area This function is on by default CHORD OFF MUTING Switch this function on when you want to mute the virtual guitar strings by releasing all keys in the CHORD area That way your left hand can be used for occasional mute instances whose effect is similar to the one obtained with any of the mute patterns in the STRUMM area V NOISES Guitar parts usually also contain gentle squeaking and sliding noises Use this function to add such noises to your virtual guitar parts or to switch them off if you don t like them ADAPT CHORD Switch this parameter on if your virtual guitar should adapt its chord voicings to the inversions you play in the CHORD area As you know each chord can be played in a variety of ways on a keyboard and a guitar Though the Guitar mode always voices its chord in a typical guitar fashion even when this parameter is off you may need even more flexibility than this basic system can provide In that case switch on this parame ter and try out different inversions to discover how that affects your guitar
93. If none of the PART ON OFF buttons lights the notes you play on the keyboard will not be audible It would how ever be possible to go on controlling the Arranger By the way selecting WHOLE does not mean that the Arranger is automatically switched off or can no longer be used See Arranger Type chord mode on p 89 for details Note Your settings can be written to a User Program and recalled at a later stage See p 125 65 E 80 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Let us now have a look at the E 80 s performance func tions Also called controllers they allow you to add expression to your playing which is a very important aspect for simulating glissando s bendings and other changes that will make your melodies even more con VINCING Pitch Bend and Modulation The BENDER MODULATION lever to the left of the E 80 s keyboard can be used to add two kinds of effects to the Keyboard part notes Upper Lower M Bass You can even use these effects simultaneously if you like 1 Press the lever towards the rear of the E 80 to add a vibrato effect wobble to the notes you are playing MODULATION Lowers the Raises the pitch pitch BENDER p The Modulation axis can also be used for switching between the slow and fast Rotary speeds for the HARMONIC BAR sounds and sounds only when the MFX uses a Rotary algorithm 2 Turn the lever to the left to temporarily lower the pitch of the not
94. Keyboard parts Set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons PART VOLUME This parameter duplicates the VOLUME parameter on the mixer page See page 106 for details The reason why it s also available here is that some equalizer settings may lead to rather noticeable level drops or hikes HI FREO HZ 1500 2000 3000 4000 6000 8000 12000 This parameter allows you to set the cutoff fre quency of the high band this is a shelving filter HI GAIN DB 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected HI frequency Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency negative values cut attenuate it MID FREQ HZ 200 8000Hz This parameter allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the middle band this is a peaking filter MID Q 0 5 1 2 4 8 Use this parameter to specify the width of the MID FREO band that you want to boost or cut Smaller values mean that neighboring frequen cies above below that value are also affected MID GAIN DB 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected MID frequency Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency negative values cut attenuate it LO FREQ HZ 90 150 180 300 360 600 This parameter allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the low band this is a shelving filter LO GAIN DB 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected LO frequency Positive values boost
95. Movie French Java Epic Movie Irish Holiday 1 Southern Twang Holiday 2 SteamtrainCountr Holiday 3 Posaunenpolka PAGE4 PAGES The display shows a list of 10 Music Styles available for the family you selected If the name of the desired Style is not displayed 2 Use the PAGE 1 PAGE 5 fields to switch pages The number of pages depends on the selected family Some families have only one page while others may have two three four or five 3 Press the field of the Music Style you want to use cco 6 DISK E a World Shite as a USER ie Western Movie French Java Epic Movie Holiday 1 Holiday 2 Holiday 3 Posaunenpolka PAGES PAGES If the Arranger is running while you select another Style the new Style starts on the next downbeat 27 E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start 4 Press the button to return to the main page Changing the tempo If the accompaniment is too fast or too slow here is how to change the Music Style tempo 1 Press to decrease the tempo in steps of one unit Press to increase the tempo in steps of one unit On most pages where the tempo is not already dis played the following popup window appears to con firm the value you have set 2 _ You can also press the button several times to Specify the desired tempo The new tempo Is dis played in the upper right hand corner of the display ONG Amazing Grace Strummlin Po
96. Music Workstation Panel descriptions Press the button to activate the Harmonic Bar section whose sound can be set using the assignable sliders D that double as virtual har monic bars m n gt aan EASY 2S EC m KBD VODEN a b gt ARR ORGAN GUITAR PIANO SPLIT WHOLE en CANCEL DS TEMPO METRO NOME TAP LJ Ld KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN IT TT MBS LW2 LW1 UP3 UP2 UP1 lt SLOW FAST gt Ltt CLI PART ON OFF 63 2 TRANSPOSE section These buttons allow you to transpose the E 80 up or down b in semitone steps You can also specify which parts are to be transposed page 66 If neither button lights no manual transposition is used 9 EASY SETTING section This key pad allows you to reconfigure the E 80 by pressing just one button use the Arranger in split mode the name says it all select the E 80 s Guitar Mode p 36 and assign a piano sound to the entire keyboard See also page 64 KBD MODE section Press the button if you want to play different sounds with your left and right hands page 64 It is even possible to add a second split point see page 99 Press the button to assign one or several sounds to the entire keyboard without a split See page 64 G VOCAL HARMONIST section The buttons and knobs in this section are used to set the Vocal Harmonist function the microphone level and the effects applied to the signals received via the Vocal Harmonis
97. NOTE 0 eee eee eee 44 User Program coneneevensess3eec 128 SECOND BAR LLL MA WAT O O 247 L FONT PaE lessan 13 Init PONQUAUE serasa adaa 22 PPL ie ahh ise tsa EEEE E 55 All Values 00 0 0 0 ccc eee eee ee 103 large al eee ee 123 PUD cccccanunesaasaunienieseuuests 209 Single VAE ssnin 103 239 CD Contrast o aoua 21 FWD oaaae 43 Value a AAA AA A A E 187 218 LEAKAGE LLL LLL 34 an TT T a RN aa eaee BT efiop 88 G Nedd a2ececerereeeseseesemeue ss 231 Length 0 cccccccceceeee ee 205 219 DIV e s 652 54040552654058500004544 202 lieve 115 0 ee oY a eee eee ee eee 63 179 aar Pps Gain aaan 115 151 154 155 156 Sequencer o on 184 a METIONOME ouc4ceceneneaanany mani 81 Gale ans nae a ease ene nee wed 46 47 Style Composer 005 216 Brees 109 116 Gender Gy sarah a arr err a 151 152 153 154 WSIDE suet oeeeaneneeeas 181 182 214 Cem alea Volume Voice Input 2 seeeseeee eee do _ Well EREA E 146 Mitar 242 Genre 40 42 128 133 159 O Kivi kbebeonoveweoennbheknnns 146 High Low Be 240 Style 0 eee ae N44 146 Limiter 00 eee e eee eee 115 GETIT oo eee eee 93 131 132 209 WIG Mavencocenssusacuaccensreeees 73 LINE 46 Global 2 eee ee 130 246 Instrument equalizer re 143 1 re 130 131 CHOC gt Gannananaasaagdceat 187 218 Instrumentation canaasaenarnaeeet te 44 BMP 132 00C 4 a ee 146 INSTRUMENTS re 72 Melody Intelligence g5 WANS E EEEE EEEE PN
98. Off Allows you to switch the Arranger s chord recognition off in which case only the drum per cussion of the selected Music Style keeps playing or can be used See also page 88 Arranger Hold Allows you to switch the Arranger Hold function on and off See p 89 Dynamic Arranger Allows you to switch the Dynamic Arranger function on and off See page 89 for details Arranger RIT Tempo Arranger ACC Tempo The assigned footswitch performs the same function as the RIT or ACC parameter page 91 Arranger Default Tempo The assigned FC 7 footswitch allows you to reset the Arranger tempo to the preset value contained in the Music Style itself Reset Start Tempo This function allows you to have the Arranger start on the first beat of the currently selected Music Style pattern when you press the assigned footswitch Use it when you are accompanying a singer or soloist whose timing is a little shaky and sud denly notice that the Arranger lags one or two beats behind the singer soloist Tap Tempo Same function as the button Bass Inversion Allows you to switch the Bass Inversion function on and off page 83 Melody Intelligent Same function as the button on the E 80 s front panel it allows you to switch Melody Intelligence on and off 1 D E 80 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Scale Upper Scale Lower Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 79 setting to the thre
99. PROGRAM CHANGE INPUT QUANTIZE PITCH BEND SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE 7 Press the field and use the dial or the DECI INC buttons to select the track you want to record to 8 Press the field and use the 9 If you select GS or if dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify how the track should behave some are always GS tracks KEYBOARD PART MELODY INTELL C If you select the corre sponding part Sound and tone generator of the selected part Song parts there is no alternative Track REC TYPE 1 3 GS cannot be changed 4 GS UP1I 5 GS cannot be changed 6 GS UP2 7 10 GS cannot be changed 11 GS LW1 12 GS MBS 12 GS UP3 14 GS LW2 15 GS MELODY INTELL 16 GS or VH see below The track uses a normal sound that is not produced by the HARMONIC BARS section This can be an internal sound or a sound of the SRX series expansion board you installed The track uses the same sound as the Keyboard part it is linked to In the case of the UP1 LW1 and MBS parts this can also be the corresponding Harmonic Bar part The important thing to remember is that whenever you assign a different sound to the connected Keyboard part the track in question automat ically switches to that sound as well VH Sets REC TRK to 16 and allows you to record setting changes including Pitch Bend as well as the notes used for
100. Press the field followed by the field SOIP olap E Cite LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 LOWER 1 PORTAMENTO TIME PORTAMENTO TIME HOLD Played by the UP1 part ee a ITN AT 5 Press the button to return to the main page rono Ese DYNAMIC SPLIT 3 Press the field if you want to change the UP2 part s pitch in semitone steps That field now lights 4 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECI INC buttons TOO means that UP2 s pitch is lowered while values without a sign mean that UP2 s pitch is shifted up Avery popular setting for UP1 UP2 layers is 12 for UP2 so that it sounds one octave above Upper or any other active Keyboard part The setting range for this parameter is 24 24 5 Press the field to change UP2 s pitch in small steps cents 6 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECI INC buttons FINE TUNE can be set between 99 almost a semi tone down and 99 almost a semi tone up 7 Press the button to return to the main page E 80 Music Workstation Roland Portamento for UP1 and UP2 Portamento for UP1 and UP2 Here are two functions that may come in handy for even more impressive solos involving the UP1 and UP2 parts Portamento Time 1 Press the button The display changes to MEWN j GUITAR TUNING ge utaR X Beam ee te rote La rote ae E vam LINK ee y RE E STYLE Pe aren eo RE as ZS mn BP Firncrion ae O mof
101. Press the field to start your search The display returns to the Music Assistant window and displays the entries that correspond to your search criteria Note If no Music Assistant registrations were found the fol lowing message appears and no entries are displayed in which case you need to press the ARTIST or field to display all entries again MUSIC ASSISTANT LIST Press the field of the Music Assistant registration you need and start playing Note To return to the previous page without searching for registrations press the field Note To once again display all file names after a search which causes only matching entries to be displayed press one of the alphabetical sort icons INAME ARTIST GENRE on the Music Assistant page Note See Music Assistant Mark on p 134 and Music Assis tant functions on p 137 for how to create or edit Music Assis tant data E 80 Music Workstation Roland Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files Your E 80 contains all kinds of functions for customiz ing the songs you play back via easy to use routines Let us first look at the playback functions proper 1 Press the FINDER button You can also press the field on the main page to select songs oNG A lazing Grace The display changes to Ole Br Qa Qiu fu FEVER FEVER MID RSTDAY i FIRSTDAY MID FORCA IFORCA MID f FR
102. Program you are after The character string you enter can be used in two ways see below e See page 52 for how to enter names Note There s no field here because the Finder makes no distinction between upper and lower case letters e To enter numbers without cycling through the char acters first press the button icon After entering the numbers switch it off if you need to enter characters again 8 Press the field to start your search 9 Press the field of the User Program you need and Start playing Note If no User Programs were found the following message appears and no file names are displayed in which case you need to press the USER PRG STYLE LINK or field to display all User Programs again ER SONG LINK No Match Found ZJ eA m If the E 80 did find one or several matches the FOUND number will be smaller than the GLOBAL number Note See also Editing User Program Finder information on p 133 for how to make the Finder functionality even more powerful Selectively loading User Program settings User Program Hold Your E 80 allows you to filter certain User Program set tings when new User Programs are loaded 1 If you need a different User Program whose set tings should be used first select it 2 Press the button and the field _or Press and hold the button Story we a a a ODI laa l The display changes to UL Sep iil Sei ETE ecm
103. Programs you want to appear in the Music Assistant list then press their fields to add and again to remove the MA label Music Assistant registrations are in fact a virtual concept because they only exist if there is a User Program file they can refer to That explains why deleting a User Program file see above also discards the associated Music Assistant entry Mi Copy This function allows you to copy the selected User Program to another memory area Be sure to select a User Program before pressing the field on the USER PROGRAM LIST page Bear in mind that the COPY page only lists User Programs that match the last search criteria you used for the USER PROGRAM FINDER On the other hand if you only need to copy certain User Programs on memory card or in the internal memory using the FINDER is actually a good idea it helps you to avoid too many presses of the PAGE or gt field On the USER PROGRAM OPTIONS page press the field USE PRUSKA GATE COUNT MEMORY GF LOPFY DISK S777 immet MEMORY _ Start by specifying the source that contains the User Program s you wish to copy Press the but ton icon to select the memory area INT MEMORY The E 80 s internal memory EXT MEMORY The memory card in the E 80 s PCMCIA slot Do not forget to insert it before select ing this option FLOPPY The floppy disk in the E 80 s drive e Now specify the target you wish to copy the selected User Program s to Press the bu
104. Roland dealer for details 2 O E 80 Music Workstation Roland Front panel Switching the E 80 on off After connecting the E 80 to the other devices proceed as follows Internal Memory Protect VIDEO VIDEO After unpacking your E 80 and before switching it on you al nee need to defeat the protection of its internal memory a solid 1 e ad e state hard disk if you intend to save data in the internal ot m memory e Slide the switch to the position to unlock the memory To once again lock the internal memory slide the switch back to the position Switching on the E 80 1 Insert the included power cable into the AC inlet and then plug it into an electrical outlet gt j e E E He J 3 He ee he 2 Press the E 80 s button located at the far left 3 If you connected the E 80 to a mixing console switch it on now 4 Switch on the amplifier your active speakers or the keyboard amplifier s 5 Use the MASTER knob to set the E 80 s out put volume Setting the display contrast The information in the LCD display may be difficult to view after turning on your E 80 or after extended use Your viewing angle or the current lighting conditions can also affect the appearance of the display In such cases use the knob to the left of the display to adjust the contrast Switching off the E 80 1 Switch off all external devices 2 Use the E
105. Roland s KC series for example But you can also use optional headphones Roland RH 25 RH 50 RH 200 or RH 300 for example Be sure to switch off both the E 80 and the external devices you want to connect before making or breaking audio and or MIDI connections If you do not have access to the sound system of the venue where you are performing ask the local engineer to set the volume to the minimum level ee een Mixing console keyboard amplifier active speakers Dynamic microphone select MIC Other signal source select LINE Microphone DR 10 or DR 20 Gi Connect the microphone using an Expression pedal unbalanced mono 1 4 or a bal EV 5 EV 7 anced XLR jack Footswitches DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U CD MP3 player etc ee CEEEEEEEEETEEEETEELEEEEEEEEEEEEEELEEEEELEEEEEEEEELEEEELEEE Lad Stereo headphones To wall outlet MAIN AC R MONO VOCAL HARMONIST INPUT EXTERNAL U U SOURCE METRONOME PEDAL PEDAL UT EXPRESSION amp SWITCH amp Stereo headphones RH 25 RH 50 RH 200 or RH 300 Note Try to use dynamic microphones whenever possible You can also connect a condenser microphone however provided you use a DI box with power supply Note Except for the power cable all other items shown above are optional See your
106. SLE EO ylroosy 2 474 2 Press the field again to switch off the func tion of the same name Note This mute setting only applies to the STYLE COMPOSER page During normal Arranger playback all tracks that contain data are played back Use the ERASE function to remove parts that should not appear in your accompaniments see p 214 W Solo If you need to listen to a track in isolation press the field and the field of the track you want to solo and start playback This mutes all other tracks while the selected track is flagged with an S You can also select the track to be soloed using the a buttons Press the field again to switch off the func tion of the same name Remarks MWorking from top to bottom programming hints If you listen carefully to the factory Styles you will notice that most Divisions of a Style are very similar to one another and that the element of evolution or amplification between the various levels is usu ally derived from adding instruments to otherwise identical patterns The MAIN 2 division may for instance add an electric guitar to the drums bass and organ lines of the MAIN 1 level while the foun dation of the MAIN 2 level is still the same Therefore always start by recording the most com plex accompaniment MAIN 4 while cloning all other looped divisions page 204 Then move to the MAIN 3 Division and delete certain tracks page 214 so t
107. Simulates the tuning noise of a radio As this value is raised the tuning drifts further Radio Noise Level 0 127 Volume of the radio noise EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range 2 69 E 80 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 79 Telephone This effect simulates the tonal character of a telephone trans mission Voice Quality 0 15 Audio quality of the telephone voice Treble 15dB 0 15dB Bandwidth of the telephone voice Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 80 Phonograph Simulates a sound recorded on an analog record and played back on a record player This effect also simulates the various types of noise that are typical of a record and even the rota tional irregularities of an old turntable Signal Distortion 0 127 Depth of distortion Frequency Range 0 127 Frequency response of the playback system Decreasing this value will produce the impression of an old system with a poor frequency response Disc Type LP EP SP Rotational speed of the turntable This will affect the frequency of the scratch noise Scratch Noise L
108. Speaker en 120 Speaker ICO sarene 221 Speaker Modeling lt lt lt s4 lt lt 4s20 120 SOCCMICANONS eedd diddi didika 248 20 ee ee 65 OC E 68 1 2 Compressor 00 115 Anrango soicoe2222224233322222245 65 DynamicDynamic Split 99 Keyboard Mode 005 65 Lower WVONO oa acdc acacdetete het racebcteteddc 102 POW PEEPI EEEE EEE EEEE EEN 65 99 UO eea AAA 99 SRV eV NOs ern 109 OR EE EE EEEE EET 32 250 EL O AEETI EEEE EEEE E EEE EE 109 Standard odie wane eae T2759 47 09 CE Boerne E ee 41 63 E 80 Music Workstation Index DAE augue sane eeueeiee 25 240 PHO 2 anaanannaaganqunaaaanes 246 Start Stop oana 25 74 15 47 82 alU etccaaaacananankans 31 133 244 DUO sande adnate eee oes 223 stereo PIACEMENE s220002 140 143 145 SECO WIC nx uee ce ecceeeeeennncade 39 DlO isesieaetteteqaaaaaaanaaaaasas 240 Storing see Save SI RENGIG cacedgaaqoaneanaaaenund 214 SEIN Uere raan 39 SUMMING tc cccdanaannnanannaaaaen 36 SUC Obani era a can ddeescan sane aes 123 OU G ncecisnsseeesansaseacaaaancans 24 CH OWUS 2 cencncaaan acu ceeeeeeeeuueue 147 COMPOSED sa sevnaccacacssaccaaaus 201 Control 0 eee 82 CONVENE ce ee eut annus nensennnans 197 COVET cade caradas i EAEEREN 85 Custom programming s s 92 Data UIS E eean asenaan 95 DENOMI erreen rra rrara 82 BS S n EE E eee ee ese ee sere ores 97 Discard recording 342 cneueeeee nes 206 Ee EESE EEEE EEEE EEE 210 EW CS EEEE ENEE R
109. Spey ibehy REC DIVISION TRACK INSTRUMENT a Fh EPianol o GUITAR MODE SETTING A 2 O3 E 80 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer 9 Selecting the track the Mode and the Division To keep things easy let s start with the drums of the MAIN 1 Division Press the field and use the dial to select the track you wish to record to Select AccDrums This causes the display to change as follows because there are more options for drum tracks SL SOMwrOosss Mee SPA Ibete RECT CK TRACK INSTRUMENT g Ci Now select a pattern Let s start with MAIN 1 10 Press the field and use the DATA ENTRY dial to select Main 1 W Working with clones On this page you can use two clone functions that allow you to record one part and copy it to up to four Divisions and three Modes each The sign means that more than one pattern will be recorded 11 Use the field to select the mode s This parameter allows you to specify whether you are about to record the accompaniment for major minor or seventh chords If you listen to the Styles prepared by Roland you will notice that there are slight differ ences in the looped patterns and sometimes strik ing differences for Intros and Endings with com pletely different phrases Such variations can be pre pared using the REC DIVISION MODE parameter Let us use the following settings which
110. Standard EFFECTS he followin 1 Press the button to call up the following rok E Cel a page 3 Pop The settings you make on this page can be saved to a User memory and recalled as and when necessary Here s how to edit the parameters 5 Press the field of the parameter you wish to change 6 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECI INC buttons See p 114 for a detailed discussion of the available parameters On this page you can switch the STYLE SONG MAS 7 To save the settings you have just made press the JAS SOs ERREGI S TERING TOOLS processors on and off by pressing the button icons to the right of the EQUALIZER and COMPRESSOR displays field There is only one USER memory By saving new set tings you therefore overwrite the previous ones If you only need another effect type press the 8 Press the field if you want to set the com EQUALIZER or COMPRESSOR display and use the pressor or the button to return to the main dial or the DEC IINC buttons to select page it If you also need to change certain aspects of that effect Compressor This is a multi band compressor limiter that allows you to process three frequency ranges separately A com pressor reduces high levels peaks and boosts low lev els smoothing out fluctuations in volume 1s 1 On the EFFECTS page see above press the COM PRESSOR field The display changes to MASTERING Loos BCLEVEL BC GAIN DE
111. Style Finder information 96 Advanced Keyboard part functions 99 Upper Topli aaanseeaueneeh eau aen ae EENEN 99 Dynamit Splis serrer da eueerex es 99 Tuning Upper2 Coarse Tune and Fine Tune 100 Portamento for UP1 and UP2 101 Portamento NMG o4 0 lt n0000c00cneeeeererewaaee 101 Portamento Mode Mono Poly 00 102 Lower Holdes egaat anael eet ered de Oamudes eee 102 Tone Edit editing Keyboard parts 103 Using the mixer functions amp effects 105 Mixing Keyboard PaltS o 22ssaecreansndeoosss 106 Volume and status of the Style parts 107 Editing the Keyboard effects processors 108 Reverb for Keyboard DAIS ic cc 45 0 0n05saeeeeee eee rs 108 Chorus for Keyboard parts 6esscsceecdaeeees 110 Using the multi effects processor of the Keyboard parts MULI PX en coop renees dn aes abacees 111 Selecting another MFX type and editing it 112 Linking Multi FX type selection to the Upper1 part Upper 1 M FX Link 0 0 0 c cece eee 112 Equalizers for the Keyboard parts 113 Using the Keyboard Mastering Tools 114 oE ic Ce oe ne ee ree 114 COMPFeSSOK onnan eee eee 115 Effects for Songs and Styles 0 116 Reverb for Style Song instruments 116 Chorus for Style Song instruments 116 Using the multi effects processors of the S
112. Successful informs you that the E 80 has been initialized Note This operation does not affect the data in the E 80 s internal memory they are not erased the E 80 just doesn t use them anymore SRX Expansion Board Displays the name of the installed wave expansion board if available Free Space Internal Memory Informs you about the remaining storage capacity of the internal memory Free Space Memory Card Informs you about the remaining storage capacity of the connected memory card Version Displays the version number of the E 80 s operating system along with its creation date and time 217 E 80 Music Workstation Specifications W Keyboard 20 Specifications 61 note synthesizer action keyboard with aftertouch W Sound source New WX sound engine Max polyphony Sounds SRX series expansion board Multitimbral parts Compatibility E Effects Keyboard parts External audio input MIC input section Vocal Harmonist section Style Song sections WE Harmonic Bars 128 voices 1100 tones 54 Drum Sets Dedicated EQ for each oscillator Keyboard Style Song parts and for each drum instrument Style Song 2 slots boards optional SR G01 compatible 32 GM2 GS XG Lite Reverb 12 types Chorus 6 types MFX 84 types Mastering Tools parametric EO multi band compressor Harmonic Bar Rotary Vibrato Overdrive MFX 84 types Noise Gate Comp
113. The E 80 s bass response is flat LOW The E 80 s low end is boosted slightly creating a more powerful sound HIGH The E 80 s low end is boosted in a similar fashion as for high quality car stereos you can hear from miles away Press to return to the display page with the modules or Press the button to return to the main page Note The settings on this page are saved to the E 80 Global area and archived along with User Program set data Note You may hear some slight noise from the internal speakers when the E 80 is turned on in a very quiet environ ment while the Digital Bass Enhancer is set to Low or High That noise is too faint to be audible once you start playing In any case it is not transmitted to external speakers or head phones Note You may hear a clicking noise from the internal speak ers when you switch the Digital Bass Enhancer function from Low or High to Off or from Off to Low High This is not a malfunction This clicking noise is not transmitted to external speakers or headphones E 80 Music Workstation Roland Mixing Vocal Harmonist signals Mixing Vocal Harmonist signals Your E 80 provides three knobs VOICE and that you can use without even bother ing about the MIXER environment That is why there are no MIXER functions for this section But the Vocal Harmonist does have separate effects processors Note For the following it would be a good idea to set the knob
114. These settings can be recalled any time i e even after selecting a regular User Program Simultaneously press USER PROGRAM and UP a Ee e5 Note Unless you specified a User Program for the Startup function page 133 you can also load the Default settings by powering off your E 80 and turning it back on again Choosing User Programs manually The procedure for selecting User Programs does not fol low the usual routine for selecting Styles or sounds So please carefully read the following 1 Press the field on the main page Strummlin Pop Gospel Love a pere Vintage EP1 PERZ Note If the currently displayed User Program was loaded with the User Program Finder the E 80 now displays the USER PRO GRAM FINDER page where you can select another registration in the internal memory or on a card To work with User Pro grams of the currently active Set List proceed as follows Press the USER PROGRAM button Bracy SAPRA s NG MIDI TEXTAEMP HOLD SONG J WR SETTINGS LINK lu LINE LINK amp E WRITE i Blue Berry Swear Ballad Celebrating 3 Blue Shoes Fame Rock F Know Him Hands Up Party i Misty Jazz P4 P5 11m 2 Use the P fields and to select the page 1 18 of the required registration 3 Press a big field 1 8 to select the memory Press a numeric button 1 8 to select the corre sponding memory the button you pressed lights You can
115. UP1 4 UP2 6 UP3 13 LW1 11 LW2 14 MBS 12 MELODY INT 15 VOCAL HARMONIST 16 UP1 2 3 and or LW1 2 can also be used as additional drum part if you assign them a Drum Set TONE button For the following we will assume that you recorded the melody using the UP1 part track 4 and that you now want to add some chords using the LW1 part 1 Start by taking note of the track you wish to re record See the tables above For our example we will use track 11 LW1 2 Press the RECORDER button E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start You have just selected the more detailed recording function the sequencer The display changes to SWEETPOT mens 0023 2 4 130 474 SoLo MUTE NEEG i2 d PIANO 2 13 d MUTED GT on i4 d CLEAN GT J 3 OX aton eetet orrs SS A ERE AEA The colored bars in the right part of the display indi cate the tracks that already contain data 3 Press the RECORDER button The display changes to Pan Ce et RECORDING SELECT ARAO PROGRAM CHANGE s e CONTROL SYSTEM CHANGE EXCLUSIVE 4 Press the field and use the DATA ENTRY 5 6 7 dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track you want to record to For our example select 11 If necessary press the field and use the dial or the DEC JINC buttons to select LW1 This allows you to use the LW1 part for play ing an organ line using the Harmonic Bars section o
116. Workstation Working with User Programs 6 7 _ The display changes to WHI bu Strib Hu lraeaty ee co ETT gt fare 2 aer 3 el 270 Dee po Drem Ben The blue field indicates the name of the User Pro gram settings originally assigned to that memory here Rainbow If you do not want to overwrite that memory press the field and continue with step above 3 to select another memory Enter a name for your new User Program in the black field At first the black field contains the name of the set tings you changed If you don t want to use that name start by pressing the field See page 52 for how to enter names You only need to do this the first time you save new settings to a User Program You can also name your User Program at a later stage and then save it again Use a name that somehow summarizes the purpose of this User Program The name of the song you will use these settings for is probably the most explicit name you can think of It is perfectly possible to program several User Pro grams for one song Selecting a User Program is a lot faster than calling up one of the E 80 s functions modifying the settings etc while playing You could program one User Program for the first part of a song another one for the bridge and a third one for the closing section Doing so allows you to play with the effect settings of the various processors for example Press the field
117. Your E 80 also provides a PLAY LIST function for pro gramming sequences of several songs page 164 43 E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start MPlayer Data Update and Quick Start 1 Press the button 2 3 4 The display changes to Loe zal ae ee Pere en A d CONTROLLERS Press the UTILITY then the field UTILITY PLAYER FEEDBACK KEYBOARD TOUCH SCREEN UFRER1 MF LINK FROM Ist NOTE m FLASHING METRONOME GRA HE RANG Use the button icon next to the field to specify whether on or not off SysEx messages contained in the song you play back are updated while you fast forward rewind or use the MARK JUMP buttons Press the field and use the dial to specify where and how song playback should begin FROM SECOND BAR This function causes playback to Start from measure 2 of the selected Standard MIDI File This is often useful because the first bar of most Stan dard MIDI Files contain SysEx and control change data that configure the E 80 s sound source Playing back that measure on stage may lead to a rather long blank which you probably want to avoid FROM FIRST NOTE This is basically the same as the above except that playback is started on the first note of the selected song OFF Playback starts at the very beginning of the song file and may thus contain a few silent bars SONG ARRANGER START PRIORITY Allows you to specify whether starting a song
118. a2 554454455 505e saad kaa eee 135 Music Assistant functions 00000 137 Creating new Music Assistant registrations 137 Editing Music Assistant registrations 138 Saving a Music Assistant entry 00000 138 Song and Style Makeup Tools 140 Mixing Song or Style parts 008 140 Using the Makeup Tools 42s cdceewde Sowa eae 141 General procedure i et ireeeceeenaeeeesaanwe 141 PALETE 2 65 ee ne eso 142 SOUND EDIT for sounds 5 cs ese cd dhol hhh ib behets 144 SOUND EDIT Tor DIUM SEIS 225444040405060840046004 145 DRUMINSIR EDI one onscnuew ade abae ead e482 145 COMMON EEE E 147 Before saving your settings 008 148 Saving your modified song or Style 148 Editing the Vocal Harmonist parts 150 Soer SC WMO Gai Scie eae do beet dar ea ee on 150 Voce TASUN 2 eer dace eiro ripets ewedess as 151 PUTO Piteh SUING Sed sisiresrsssricesrirsiras 152 V co er Se INOS 2 ce vince en eouducecueeeweca ds 153 Sid GOUUNGS scudwe caere nce eee eee eee oe 154 Ene Mlle SENIN Ss 23 dance ceudatececauemen ed 155 More refined song functions 157 Using the Fade In Out function 157 Programming MARK amp JUMP locations 158 Working with the Song Finder 159 Locating files with the Song Finder 159 Editing the Song Finder information 160 Editing ON NQOG ccccccineranacr d
119. above procedure to resynchro nize lyrics already contained in the song file if you feel the synchronization isn t perfect See step 4 and following on page 169 Exporting Lyrics data as text file Here s what you need to do to export the Lyrics data contained in a Standard MIDI File as text data This may be useful for editing or printing the lyrics using your computer Note This only works if the Standard MIDI File contains lyrics data 1 Load the song whose Lyrics data you want to export as text file See Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files on p 41 for details about selecting songs 2 Press the button my LYRICS amp SCORE If the display is blank at this point the selected song doesn t contain Lyrics data It is therefore impossible to export It as text 3 Press the field followed by the field The display changes to Tye Cie 6 THT FILE NAME Gas Sy EE E emam EXECUTE 4 Name the text file This is only necessary if you do not agree with the suggested name i e the one of the song in question See page 52 for how to enter the desired name 178 5 Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY or field to select the area where you want to save the text file 6 Press the field to save the file The E 80 returns to the LYRICS page 7 Press the button to return to the main page E 80 Music Workstation Roland About the sequencer s main page 14 Using the 16 track S
120. all songs that are currently dis played on all available pages press the field Note If the target media memory card or floppy disk is not formatted a message will be displayed that allows you to for mat it before the songs are copied If you chose EXT MEMORY or FLOPPY DISK for TO disable the card s disk s write protection and insert it into the PCMCIA slot or disk drive To disable the write protection of a floppy disk close the little window see p 11 See the owner s man ual of the memory card for how to disable its write protection Note Not all cards have a write protection function Press the field Press if you do not want to proceed or to select other files T G2 You are asked whether it is OK to overwrite all files on the destination media TO that have the same file names as the files you are about to copy Replace files of the same name 7 Press the field if it is OK to overwrite files with the same names on the destination media Press the field if files on the source FROM media that have the same name as existing files on the destination TO media should not be copied only files with original names will be copied in that case The data are copied and a Operation Successful message confirms the end of the operation 8 Press the button to return to the main page Editing an Index You can change the assignments of songs to a category and even edi
121. also use these buttons without first pressing to use a User Program of the last page you selected If you only press a numeric button the page shown above does not appear or Press the dial and enter the number using the on screen numeric pad E 80 Music Workstation Roland Selecting User Programs Each User Program also has a fixed number right edge of its field that allows you to select it directly Sometimes an asterisk is displayed This happens when you change a parameter setting after recalling a User Program to alert you to the fact that the cur rent settings no longer correspond to the ones you recalled If you like them better than the original set tings you must save them again See page 125 Note By pressing the numeric button of the memory with the asterisk once again you restore the original settings of that memory thus cancelling any changes you have made Selecting User Programs with The following method is especially useful if you pro grammed two or more User Programs for a song or If the User Program sequence corresponds exactly to the song sequence you are about to play i e settings of the first Song or song part in memory 1 on page 1 set tings of the second song or song part in 2 on page 1 etc With or UP you always select the preceding or next User Program Selects the following User Program for example 3 P1 if you selected 7 P1 before pressing this but ton
122. and CPTs are to be inserted BAR BEAT CPT See above E EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and insert the requested number of bars beats and clocks 2 1G TRANSPOSE n STYLE TRACK EDIT C_m ey eres SERS earen Groner crock enara siemar ms ajor Maine gagi Gia al al a EZ For Baw ER f oursio This function allows you to transpose the notes of the selected track non note data obviously cannot be transposed MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks When combined with FROM NOTE and TO NOTE see below TRANSPOSE is also useful for the AccDrums track It allows you to select another snare or kick sound for exam ple EMODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th W DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 MVALUE 127 127 This is where you can set the transposition interval in semi tone steps Select 2 for example to transpose pattern in C to D Note Be careful when applying Transpose to the AccDrums track Transposing all notes of this track leads to dramatic changes MFROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range It is not disp
123. and activate the LW2 part and vice versa the FOOT PEDAL field Note If neither LW1 nor LW2 are on when you first press the footswitch one of them is activated FOOI fe preejel aren Break Mute When you press the footswitch Arranger zie Cosi Ge Ci Ga Ge w ARR PART KBD PART playback is muted for the remainder of the current mea sure This is great for rock n roll songs Reset Start This function allows you have the Arranger start on the first beat of the currently selected Music Style pattern when you press the footswitch Use it when you are accompanying a singer or soloist whose timing is a little shaky and suddenly notice that the Arranger lags one or two beats behind the singer soloist Viewer Page Down Allows you to select the previous 3 Use the ARR PART and KBD PART fields to select TXT or BMP page in the E 80 s internal memory See the Arranger or Keyboard part whose setting you Viewer Page Up Allows you to select the next TXT or 4 Press the Haid and use the BMP page in the E 80 s internal memory See page 56 DATAENTRY di DATA ENTRY idea DATA ENTRY dial or the DEC INC buttons to select Expression Select Off if the part in question should not respond to movements of the expression pedal 5 Press the or field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the value 4 Press the button to return to the main page 7s You can also press the dial to call up t
124. arm Co Qe 3 4 5 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Selecting User Programs Press the fields of the settings you do not want to recall Style Press this field if the settings related to the Arranger Style and Division should be ignored Song Press this field if the song see Song Link on page 130 should no longer be loaded MIDI Set Press this field if the linked MIDI Set page 131 should not be recalled The current MIDI channels filter settings etc page 237 therefore remain as they are Tempo Press this field if the tempo setting contained in every User Program should be ignored Tone Press this field to ignore sound selection for the Keyboard parts when a different User Program is recalled Harmonist Press this field to ignore the various VOICE FX AUTO TUNE etc settings you have made See Editing the Vocal Harmonist parts on p 150 Transpose Press this field to ignore the Transpose value and mode contained in every User Program KBD Mode Press this field to ignore the Keyboard Mode Whole Split and Arranger Chord settings Stan dard Piano Style Left Right etc Bass Inversion Press this field to ignore the setting of the BASS INVERSION button Press to activate all button icons and to switch them all off Pressing one of the above fields without selecting a User Program afterwards has no effect Only when you select another User Program
125. at least to W to hear what you are doing 1 Press and hold a button to the right of the or the knob VO GAIMHARMOWNISI VOICE FX TYPE This takes you to the page of the selected Vocal Har monist function 2 To set the effects press the field HIC INPUT VOICE HARMONY vocerx SMALL om You can also select this page by pressing the button gt field gt field The parts affected by the VOICE section are SINGER VOICE FX and AUTO PITCH gt Processors Reverb Delay Now look at the front panel VOICE VOICE TALK FX HARMONY VOCODER AUTO PITCH SINGER SMALL ENSEMBLE Only one button of these two sections can be on at any one time It therefore makes sense to use one set of effects processors for the VOICE section and a sec ond for the HARMONY section The parts affected by the HARMONY section are VOCODER SMALL and ENSEMBLE Processors Reverb Chorus Delay Note When you switch on the function the display looks a little different because there is also a parameter See page 51 for details 128 E 80 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions amp effects 3 Press the field of the parameter you wish to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons VOICE column Reverb Send Allows you to specify how strongly the currently selected VOICE part should be processed by the VOICE Reverb processor Delay Send Allows you to spe
126. attack so that the sound also want to use them for other instruments proceed becomes more aggressive as follows DECAY This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound s volume and Cutoff frequency fall from the high i Set the EQ parameters to your liking est point of the attack down to the sustain level e Press the field e Press the field and use the buttons to Select the instrument that should use the same set tings Taa Note Percussive sounds usually have a sustain level of 0 Piano and guitar sounds are in this category Holding the keys for a long time will thus have little effect on the dura tion of the notes you are playing even if you select a high value here RELEASE This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound will decay after the note is released until it is no longer heard The cutoff frequency will also fall according to this setting Use the following three parameters if you think the instrument in question has too much or could use a little more vibrato Note Some sounds already contain natural sampled vibrato whose depth or speed cannot be changed VB RATE This parameter adjusts the speed of the pitch modulation Positive settings make the preset pitch modulation faster and negative settings make it Slower VB DEPTH This parameter adjusts the intensity of the pitch modulation Positive settings mean that the wobble becomes more prominent whi
127. be set by turning the dial by pressing the DEC INC but tons or by pressing the dial and using the on screen numeric pad CHORUS LEVEL allows you to set the output level of the Chorus processor Setting this parameter to 0 means that you no longer hear the effect in question allows you to specify where the processor s output signal should go to the MAIN outputs Main the Reverb processor Rev or both Main Rev The latter two options mean that the chorus signal is also processed by the reverb effect you select Chorus 1 3 and Flanger parameters Filter Type Off LPF HPF This allows you to specify whether or not the incoming signal should be filtered before being processed by the chorus This may be help ful to avoid a cluttered sound image or to preserve the punch of bass signals Select OFF if you don t need any filtering LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff Freq HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff Freq Cutoff Freq 200 8000Hz Basic frequency of the fil ter This has no effect if you select OFF as filter type Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Rate Sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate Should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a
128. but sequential numbers 01 02 etc If you import the PartyO2 omp file the PAGE TURNER first shows that picture and then moves on to Party03 omp PartyO1 omp is skipped The Page xx yy field tells you which picture is cur rently selected and how many start with the same characters In the following cases the PAGE TURNER function will not work i e there will be no automatic switch ing Files that only contain characters Files that only contain numbers Files that do contain characters and numbers but whose names are unique i e not shared by other files with different numbers 14 If you set the PAGE TURNER function to Off Use the DATA ENTRY a buttons to turn pages You can also turn pages with an optional foot switch page 78 or FC 7 page 76 15 Press the display to hide the the upper and lower menu bars and select full screen view The display then looks as follows D7 E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start The PAGE TURNER function and DATA ENTRY a v The display changes to buttons or optional footswitch remain active Press the display again to return to the view with the upper and lower menu bars 16 Press the button to return to the main page Page 1 1 7 Press the field VIEW ERTO P ONS This switches off the VIEWER function A TaT EMP Ban Ea Working with text files TXT Import TEXT BACKGROUND COLOUR PRESET Here is
129. button so that it lights and one of the VARIATION 1 4 buttons to activate the End ing function The Ending or coda pattern will start at the beginning of the next measure next down beat Note Do not play chord changes while the Ending is running Unlike the MAIN accompaniments ENDING patterns usually contain chord changes Chord recognition is not deactivated during Ending playback so that the ending of a song may jump from one key to another in a rather unnatural way Chord recognition during Ending and Intro playback can be switched off however see p 89 Press SYNC and release all keys in the chord recognition area of the keyboard The accompani ment stops immediately There is no need to restart Style playback manually if you also activate SYNC see above Note You can also use a Fade Out See page 157 for details About Sync Start amp Stop If you ve never used an arranger keyboard before the status of the SYNC button is the single most important function to look out for after switching on your instrument If it is on playing just one note on the keyboard may cause the Arranger to start playing when you don t want it to STYLE CONTROL SYNC ___ INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START STOP ooo BOB VARIATION 1 2 3 AL Once you get to know the E 80 a little better you will appreciate this function though SYNC START means that the Arranger starts as soon as you play a note or chord
130. button icon to have the E 80 insert it for you This is a very important step for Roland tone genera tors If the checksum Is wrong or missing the entire string will be ignored Note The checksum is only calculated for SysEx strings of a certain length more than 7 bytes Use the 0 9 and A JF fields to enter the value for the selected white on blue byte A stands for 10 B for 11 C for 12 D for 13 E for 14 and F for 15 Press the field to remove the selected byte All subsequent bytes will move one position to the left Press the field to insert 00 at the current position The originally selected byte and all subse quent bytes move one position to the right You can then replace the inserted 00 with the value you need Press the field to transmit the SysEx string in its current state to the tone generator This allows you to check the result before confirming it e Press the field to confirm your settings E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs Press if you don t want to use the SysEx mes sage after all By pressing or CLOSE you return to the MASTER TRACK EDIT page SAS TSAO SUT gt O1 Beat Change 4 EVENT J 01 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F 01 031 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 01 037 Sys Ex FO 41 10 4212 40 01 38 06 01 F7 EENT 01 043 Sys Ex FO 41 10 4212 40 01 33 5432 F7 01 050 Sys Ex FO 41 10 4212 40 01 34 5431 F7 01 056 Sys
131. button to start Arranger playback Play along using the organ sounds you selected and perhaps modified See page 27 for how to select another Music Style If the accompaniment is too fast or too slow here is how to change the Music Style tempo 6 Press to decrease the tempo in steps of one unit Press to increase the tempo in steps of one unit You can also press the button several times in the rhythm of the desired tempo 7 To quickly return to the default tempo hold down and simultaneously press FAST gt 8 If necessary use the VARIATION 1 4 buttons to vary the drum accompaniment 9 Press again to stop your beat box 35 E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start Playing realistic guitar parts Guitar mode Your E 80 provides a Guitar mode that allows you to play extremely realistic guitar parts via the keyboard As you will see this mode relies on a special approach which is nevertheless very musical and surprisingly log ical once you have come to grips with the underlying principle When you activate the Guitar mode the UP1 part acts as main guitar while the UP2 part is used as additional guitar that doubles the notes of the main guitar part This means that while the Guitar mode is active UP1 and UP2 cannot be used for other melodic purposes Though with a little practice you can also use It in realtime the Guitar mode will prove invaluable for song and Style recording 1 Press the
132. by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new event Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Adding notes If you press the field the display changes to ilaro Spy E EHENIE EVENT NOTE Abe a OTE T 6944 123 60 72C5 123 60 77F5 124 60 009 BEAT CPT TE TIME _ sein nea one TO G This pop up window allows you to enter up to 10 notes for each position see the BAR fields The velocity values of the keys you press are also adopted To enter chords press and hold the key of at least one constituent note then press the remaining keys Any key you press after releasing the keys of notes already entered in the table replaces the old notes Press one of the note icons to specify the duration of the note s shown in the table This is possible both before and after playing the required note s on the keyboard Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new note or chord W ERASE EVENT Use the dial or the a buttons to select the event you want to delete To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction Press the button icon to remove the event you Selected E MOVE EVENT This function allows you t
133. can already load a new song while the current Standard MIDI File is still play ing If you want the Recorder to start playback of the newly selected song automatically press this button If the button lights this button allows you to select the next song of the selected List button Press this button to switch off the part you want to play or sing yourself The part to be muted is selectable page 45 button Press this button to access the E 80 s sequencer MIDI recorder This sequencer goes way beyond anything you may know from previous Roland arranger instruments see p 173 I lt P gt PLAY STOP gt m These buttons allow you to return to the beginning of the current song rewind or fast forward in one measure steps and to start and stop playback of the selected song Press the button to record a new song see p 60 9 ASSIGN SW section and are assignable buttons You can use them to directly access fre quently used functions that are only available via the function menu The ASSIGN SW assignments belong to the settings that can be written to a User Program ASSIGN SW 1 2 FADE FADE IN OUT 13 E 80 Music Workstation Panel descriptions If you don t change their assignment they can be used to trigger the FADE IN and FADE OUT functions MUSIC ASSISTANT PERCUSSION LYRICS amp SCORE n 2 Fa b 3 N a EFFECTS m DISK amp MEDIA DISK am
134. change Set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons EQ LEVEL 0 127 Use this parameter to set the equal izer s input level This may be necessary when the level of the signals sent to this processor is so high that the sound distorts Note Do not set this parameter to 0 if the equalizer is switched on because doing so means that the OUTPUT MAIN sockets transmit no signal whatsoever EO GAIN 9 0 9dB Use this parameter to correct the level at the equalizer s outputs If the settings of the remaining parameters lead to a significantly lower level which can be checked by switching the Equalizer on and off for A B comparisons select a positive value If your settings lead to a significantly higher level select a neg ative value O means that the level is neither boosted nor attenuated HI FREO HZ 2000 12000 This parameter allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the high band this is a shelving filter HI GAIN DB 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected HI frequency Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency negative values cut attenuate it MID FREQ HZ 200 8000Hz This parameter allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the middle band this is a peaking filter MID Q 0 5 1 2 4 8 Use this parameter to specify the width of the MID FREQ band that you want to boost or cut Smaller values mean that neighboring frequen cies ab
135. data created on and for a G 70 without any conversion Note In the following the word User Program also refers to the G 1000 s Performance Memories Here is what happens when you import User Program sets from a floppy disk Action Instrument The 128 VA or 192 G EM User Pro VA 76 VA 7 grams are imported into the E 80 s G 1000 EM 2000 Finder database no List is created VA 76 VA 7 VA 76 VA 7 G 1000 EM 2000 The VariPhrase data are ignored Tone and MFX type selection are adapted to the E 80 s sounds algo rithms The parameters of the Delay effect are VA 76 VA 7 ignored G 1000 EM 2000 The EQ parameters are ignored VA 76 VA 7 G 1000 EM 2000 The VOCAL HARMONIST and HAR E 80 MONIC BAR sections are initialized Any other differences are either VA 76 VA 7 adapted or ignored G 1000 EM 2000 Note User Programs created on or imported into the E 80 can not be exported in the VA G EM series format During the conversion the E 80 creates a text file called Import_UPG_Report that allows you to keep track of the conversions This file can be found in the Text folder of the E 80 s internal memory The infor mation it contains is structured as follows q gt Do not delete nor edit this File C G70 User Program conversion number 01 from VA VA7 Set VA7upg UVA 3 Free_Pnl gt Free_Pnl_01 001 upg lt 4 Pree Pol gt Free Phil 01 002 upg Free Pnl gt
136. drown in the accompaniment We therefore suggest you assign the Arranger Hold function see above to the other ASSIGN SW button and use it to switch off the Arranger Hold function so that the Arranger only plays the drum pattern of the selected Style Piano Standard By pressing the ASSIGN SW button you alternate between the Standard and Piano Style Arranger Chord modes When the former is selected the chord recognition area page 89 is automatically set to LEFT When you switch to Piano Style the chord recogni tion area is automatically set to WHOLE Furthermore the Upper 1 part is activated if it was off Break Mute This function can only be accessed via the ASSIGN SW button you assign it to When you press it Arranger playback is muted for the remainder of the cur rent measure This is great for rock n roll songs 3 Press the button to return to the main page Using the D Beam Controller The D Beam Controller allows you to control various aspects of your performance or to add something to the music by moving your hand head etc in the air You only need to make sure that you do so over the two eyes and within a 40cm 16 range Your movements are translated into musical expression Let s first try out the DJ GEAR functions 1 Press the D BEAM button that is assigned to the function you wish to use here the but ton D BEAM DJ GEAR SFX INST CTRL This switches on the D
137. e When handling a board grasp it only by its edges Avoid touch ing any of the electronic components or connectors e Save the bag in which the board was originally shipped and put the board back into it whenever you remove it from the instru ment Use a Phillips screwdriver that is suitable for the size of the screws If an unsuitable screwdriver is used the head of the screws may be stripped To remove a screw rotate the screwdriver counter clockwise To tighten the screws rotate the screwdriver clockwise Loosen Tighten Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation or removal of a circuit board When installing wave expansion boards remove only the specified Screws Be careful that the screws you remove do not fall into the interior of the E 80 Do not leave the bottom cover removed After installing or remov ing a wave expansion board be sure to replace the cover Be careful not to cut your hand on the opening for installing a board Do not touch any of the printed circuit pathways or connection terminals Never use excessive force when installing a circuit board If it doesn t fit properly on the first attempt remove the board and try again When circuit board installation is complete double check your work Install only a circuit board of the Roland SRX or SR G01 series Remove only the specified screws How to install a wave expansion board 1 2 3
138. eft half is used for playing chords that the Arranger uses for transposing the Style patterns in realtime The right half on the other hand can be used for adding a live melody to the Arranger s auto matic accompaniment This melody can be played using the Upper1 UP1 part Feel free to add other parts for creating richer sounds See p 65 Arranger control UP1 This setting is also used when you press the button In addition the E 80 switches on the LW1 part that can be played using your left hand Arranger control UP1 LW1 The settings affected by the EASY SETTING but ton are 64 e SPLIT mode with the split point at the C4 The KBD MODE button lights Only the UP1 part is active in the right half of the keyboard see page 29 for an explanation of this con cept ZONE LEFT page 89 INTELLIGENT chord recognition TYPE page 88 One button here ARR therefore allows you to pre pare the main parameters for working with the auto matic accompaniment called Arranger Except for the addition of the LW1 part the EASY SETTING button has the same effect In PIANO mode the Upper1 part UP1 is assigned to the entire keyboard 1O Upper 1 UP1 using a piano sound Later on you will discover that this way of using the keyboard is also called Whole and that you do not need to work with a piano sound The settings affected by the EASY SETTING button are e Whole mode with only UP
139. existing part proceed as follows e On the STYLE COMPOSER page select the Division you wish to change page 204 e Press the RECORDER button the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select Mix e Select the track and start recording by pressing the button Play the notes where you want them to sound Adding controller data in real time To add controller data modulation Pitch Bend Hold expression to an existing part select REC MODE Mix Operate the performance function BENDER MODULATION lever optional footswitch for Hold data optional foot controller for expression data where needed Adding or changing settings of existing parts The following operations require that you record in Mix mode without touching the keyboard or control lers Unless you want to program continuous value changes Panpot data for example you can stop recording after the first beat Static settings are indeed always written at the beginning of the track in ques tion 2 1 O E Sound Drum Set selection To select another sound or Drum Set for an existing Style track proceed as follows 1 Press the RECORDER button SRS MEO SER REGS ANDE Y Er y REC DIVISION MODE REC DIVISION TRACK INSTRUMENT pa FM EPianol GUITAR MODE GUITAR Me ODE gt SETTING MEASUR NGTH 2 Press the field and use the dial to select the track you wish to assign another sound or Drum Set to If you select the
140. expression pedals you risk caus ing malfunction and or damage to the E 80 About the touch screen e Wipe off stains on the touch screen using ethanol but do not allow the ethanol to soak into the joint of the upper fume and the bottom glass for it may otherwise cause peeling or malfunction Do not use organic solvents or detergents other than ethyl alcohol ethanol Before using floppy disks handling the floppy disk drive e Install the E 80 on a solid level surface in an area free from vibra tion If the unit must be installed at an angle be sure the installa tion does not exceed the permissible range upward 2 down ward 18 e Avoid using the E 80 immediately after it has been moved to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly different than its former location Rapid changes in the environment can cause con densation to form inside the drive which will adversely affect the operation of the drive and or damage floppy disks When the unit has been moved allow it to become accustomed to the new envi ronment allow a few hours before operating it e To insert a disk push it gently but firmly into the drive it will click into place To remove a disk press the EJECT button firmly Do not use excessive force to remove a disk which is lodged in the drive e Never attempt to remove a floppy disk from the drive while the drive is operating the indicator is lit damage could result to both the disk and the
141. field to confirm your settings and edit the data T3 G CHANGE GATE TIME This function allows you to modify the duration of the notes in the selected time FROM TO and note FROM TO NOTE ranges We recommend you only use this function to shorten notes that suddenly seem too long when you assign a different sound to the track in question You cannot view the duration of the notes here which makes editing the data en bloc a little bit hazardous Use the MICRO EDIT envi ronment to change the duration of individual notes WAS SUIT After selecting a sound with a slow release i e a sound that lingers on after all notes have been released however CHANGE GATE TIME will help you cut the notes down to size and thus avoid undesir able overlaps METRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 80 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your ed
142. field to suppress or add the drum sounds e Use the field to suppress or add the percussion sounds If necessary press the field to save your set tings page 148 DRUM INSTR EDIT If the instrument icon to the left of the sound name depicts a drum kit you can also press the field Doing so takes you to the following page where you can make more refined settings for specific instruments of the selected Drum Set y DRUM INSTR EDIT B Cs 2 nee J COMMON a E O Gu Fa EA Instr EDIT This page effectively allows you to reconfigure your Drum Set but you cannot select sounds from another Set Note The names of the drum percussion sounds depend on the currently selected Drum Set The sounds are usually similar in nature however Use PAGE to select the drum instrument you want to replace with a different sound watch the icon that appears to the left of this field Use the dial or the DEC IINC buttons to select another sound The first sounds you can select for a given instrument are usually variations of the snare bass drum etc But turning the dial long enough you could also select any other sound even a melodic one JUMP TO 1ISTNOTE dazd INSTR EQUALIZER Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired value Note The following parameters are not available for SRX Drum Sets you may have assig
143. files from Backup to E80_SSD or E80_CARD Return to the Backup folder and select its entire contents Ctrl A or Command A Drag all selected folders to the E80_SSD or E80_CARD window and release the mouse key e Wait until the operation is completed e Disconnect the E 80 from your computer see above Just in case e Factory data The E 80 s factory data User Programs MIDI Sets Styles can be found on the supplied CD ROM Please see the instructions in the document called Recovery_PC html or Recovery_Mac html on that CD ROM depending on the computer system you are using for how to proceed Always make a backup copy of the E 80 s internal memory before transferring data from the CD ROM because the contents of the E 80 s internal memory is erased 2 3 6G GFR Mini E 80 Music Workstation Roland The how to s MIDI is short for Musical Instrument Digital Interface The acronym refers to many things the most obvious being a connector type that is used by musical instruments and other devices to exchange messages relating to the act of making music When you play on the E 80 s keyboard or start song or Style playback your instrument transmits MIDI data to its MIDI OUT socket or to the USB port If you connect that socket to the MIDI IN socket of another instrument the external instrument may play the same notes as one of the E 80 s parts select sounds etc MIDI is a universal
144. filled using the COPY function or by recording new phrases in that area using PUNCH IN OUT for example page 183 Note This function provides no TO pointer Instead you have to specify the length of the insert using the FOR values METRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 80 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should Start after the selected beat EFOR Specifies how many bars beats and CPTs are to be inserted BAR BEAT CPT See above TIME SIGNATURE If TRACK ALL you can use these fields to set the time signature of the new measures 1 32 amp 2 4 8 16 W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data Bak T34 TRANSPOSE AEDI This function allows you to transpose the notes of the selected track non note data obviously cannot be transposed METRACK ALL 1 1
145. frequency ranges When turned on the counter channel of stereo sound is inverted and added to the signal Anti Phase Low Level 0 127 Adjusts the level settings for the Low frequency ranges Adjusting this level for cer tain frequencies allows you to lend emphasis to specific parts This is effective only for stereo source Anti Phase Mid Sw Off On Turns the Anti Phase func tion on and off for the Middle frequency ranges When turned on the counter channel of stereo sound is inverted and added to the signal Anti Phase Mid Level 0 127 Adjusts the level settings for the Middle frequency ranges Adjusting this level for certain frequencies allows you to lend emphasis to specific parts This is effective only for stereo source Low Boost Sw Off On Turns Low Booster on off This emphasizes the bottom to create a heavy bass sound Low Boost Level 0 127 Increasing this value gives you a heavier low end Depending on the Isolator and filter set tings this effect may be hard to distinguish Level 0 127 Output level 43 Low Boost Boosts the volume of the lower range creating powerful lows Boost Frequency 50 125 Hz Center frequency at which the lower range will be boosted Boost Gain 0 12 dB Amount by which the lower range will be boosted Boost Width Wide Mid Narrow Width of the lower range that will be boosted EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre que
146. generating Vocal Harmonist voicings This would allow you to automate the Vocal Harmonist s behavior Note Your singing is not recorded because the sequencer only handles MIDI data To record a guitar part onto the selected track not available for track 10 175 E 80 Music Workstation Using the 16 track Sequencer e Press the display and use the dial to select Acoustic or Electric Select Off if you want to use the track for some thing else e Press the field to jump to the GUITAR MODE page and set up your guitar See page 36 for details Note however that the available sound have Slightly different names ELECTRIC ACOUSTIC 01 Jazz Man 01 Nylon 02 OpenHard 1 02 Steel 2 03 Dist Guitar 03 Steel 3 04 OpenHard 2 04 Steel 4 05 Warm Drv 05 Steel 5 06 Strat Clean 06 12 Strings 07 CleanHalf 07 Nyl Steel 08 Distorsion 08 Nyl Steel 2 09 Overdrive 10 Power 11 Power 2 e Press the button to return to the REALTIME REC STANDBY page e Skip to step 11 Note The DOUBLING function Guitar Mode Options is not available here because only one track can be recorded at any one time 10 Assign the desired sound to the recording track you selected See Selecting sounds for the Keyboard parts on p 29 You can play on the keyboard to check whether the sound matches the mood of the part you wish to record You can select sounds of an SRX series expansion board for any
147. genre to specify which entry you want to look for Enter only as many characters as you think are necessary to find the registration you are after The character string you enter can be used in two ways see below Use the and fields to select the position for which you wish to enter a new character Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the desired characters This keypad works exactly like the keypad of a cellphone you may have to press an alphanu meric field several times to select the desired charac ter or number Note The Finder makes no distinction between upper and lower case letters The field allows you to delete the selected character Press and hold it to clear all characters Press to insert a blank or the number 0 If you forgot to insert a character use or to select the position where the missing character should be inserted Then press Insert followed by the character you wish to insert If you only want to enter numbers activate the field Decide how the Finder should look for the files Press the field to search for all entries that start with the characters you entered BEA for example Names that match the specified criteria will be displayed at the top of the list _ e Press the field to have the E 80 search 5 6 for names that contain the supplied information This would allow you to also locate a file called Raggabeat if you entered BEA
148. how ever save them thus burning them into the Style or song by pressing the button and the field on the page that appears then see p 148 1 Press the MODE or button below the display MODE HARMONIC SONG STYLE PART Jae o The display changes to J SONG DIGS A BE OS SR Re Aie maaa an uk VOLUME inal OF STYLE MAKE UP TOOLS rile hemja o al lE i i i ll MEDE A nE Each channel strip on the displayed mixer page is assigned to the slider below it Thus the leftmost channel strip can be set with the slider the sec ond from the left with the slider and so on TAO 10 Song and Style Makeup Tools 2 If the icon of the instrument whose settings you want to change is not displayed press the MODE or button again The number of mixer pages depends on the number of sounds being used in the selected song or Style In certain cases there may be only one page with fewer than nine channel strips 3 Press the row that corresponds to the setting you want to change CHORUS REVERB PANPOT VOLUME or Use the TYPE and buttons to the left of the MODE pad to select the parameter you want to change The row of the selected parameter is displayed on a light background You can also press the control icon of the instrument whose setting you want to change and then use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set It The available parameters are r
149. i0 a juazz it J a sazz 6 E J PIANO 2 13 d MUTED GT 14 d CLEAN GT 15 Piano 4 16 PIANO 4 STYLE CLA CONVERTER The MEAS field at the top of the display informs you about the current measure The tempo and time Signature are displayed next to it Use the RECORDER and gt buttons to jump to another measure or to return to the beginning of the song 2 Press the RECORDER button 177 E 80 Music Workstation Using the 16 track Sequencer The display changes to MOREA TIMER ESS TAN 0 mre Dai E E A ee mim a SELECT PROGRAM CHANGE a AFTERTOUCH B PITCH BEND CONTROL SYSTEM CHANGE EXCLUSIVE 3 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track you want to record to 4 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify how the tracks linked to the Keyboard parts should behave see p 175 5 See step 7 and following on page 175 for what to do now Note Select a track that either contains no data or whose data may be overwritten Replace If you select REC MODE Mix the new data are added to the data already present on the selected track 6 Press the button or play the first notes if you selected COUNT IN Wait Note Note The PLAY STOP function can also be assigned to the D Beam controller or an optional footswitch see Play Stop on p 74 Play Stop Song on p 76 Play Stop on p 77
150. indication of the selected MARK JUMP button T5553 5 6 7 8 _ _ The indicators of MARK amp JUMP buttons for which a location has been programmed light Pressing a MARK JUMP button for which no measure location has been entered and whose indicator therefore does not light has no effect Want to save time Here s the quickest way to program MARK JUMP locations e Select the song you want to program MARK locations for Select the MARK amp JUMP page see above Press to return to the beginning of the song then to start playback Press the 1 field to select it Press the field where you want the first marker to be This position is memorized Press the field where you want the sec ond marker to be e Repeat the previous two steps for memories 3 and 4 e Continue with step 5 The MARK JUMP locations are additional information for song files that need to be saved Press the field De ee el mva ooo pre Press the INTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY or field to select the save desti nation If you choose FLOPPY or EXTERNAL MEMORY do not forget to insert floppy disk or card If necessary change the song s name You only need to do this if you want to preserve the original version of your song The MARK JUMP infor mation can only be read by the E 80 or a DisCover 5 5M and is of little use to other sequencers or SMF players they simply ignore it So you might a
151. insert the memory card or floppy disk with the desired Music Style into the slot or disk drive 2 On the STYLE page see above press the field cc 00 22 DISK N m World STYLE CG 32 ep USER 4 PC Western Movie French J The display changes to STYLE LIST STYLE COUNTRY NAME Y Y amn aa i a FOUND 16 ack f FINDER GLOBAL 6 KJ Pe gt 3 Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY or field to select the memory area that contains the desired Style Note It is perfectly possible to use older Styles with the E 80 They are automatically converted to the new VARIATION 1 4 system GENRE TEMPO w 941 4 5 6 7 Press the field that contains the name of the Style you want to load If the desired Style is not displayed use to select another group of 5 Styles You can also use the dial and the DECI INC buttons for selecting other pages with dif ferent Music Styles Note The E 80 contains a powerful search engine for quickly locating the desired Music Style on a card or in the internal memory page 95 It is not available for Styles on floppy disk however The display page does not change when you select a Style This was done to allow you to load another Style Start playing with the newly selected Style The selection of the DISK USER Style will be written to a User Program page 125 The User Program in question refers to the name and memory area Next time yo
152. make the region narrower EQ High Frequency 2000Hz 4000Hz 8000Hz Fre quency of the high range EQ EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Amount of high range boost cut Level 0 127 Output level 83 VIB OD Rotary This effect combines an overdrive and a rotary with Vibrato Chorus The vibrato effect cyclically modulates the pitch of organ sounds which is not the same as the Rotary effect The chorus effect mixes the normal sound of the organ with a sound to which vibrato has been applied adding richness and spaciousness to the sound Vibrato Chorus Switch Off On Turns the Vibrato Cho rus on off Vibrato Chorus Type V 1 V 2 V 3 C 1 C 2 C 3 V 1 V 2 V 3 This applies vibrato pitch modulation Increasing the value will produce a deeper effect C 1 C 2 C 3 This applies chorus to add depth and spa ciousness to the sound Increasing the value will produce a deeper effect Vibrato Chorus Vintage 50 60 70 Tonewheel sounds of the 1950s 60s and 70 Vibrato Chorus Level 0 127 Level of the Vibrato Cho rus effect Overdrive Switch Off On Turns the Overdrive on off Overdrive Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Overdrive Level 0 127 Sets the Overdrive output level Rotary Switch Off On Turns the Rotary on off Rotary Speed Slow Fast Rotational speed of the rotat ing speaker Rotary Woofer Slow Speed 0 05 10 00Hz Low speed rotation speed
153. moment the vibrato effect kicks in 6 Press to leave this page or to try out other Gender settings Voice FX Ever wondered what your voice would sound like if you were a woman for men man for women robot or something else You re about to find out 1 Press the button 2 Sing into the microphone and listen to yourself You may have to switch off the or button if it lights to hear how this function works 3 Press and hold the button The display now looks as follows VOGAL Pl eyle ioe VOICE FX TYPE 4 Press one of the twelve TYPE fields to try out other possibilities 5 For added strangeness or realism you can press the field right 6 If you feel the general idea is OK but would like to fine tune the effect press the field at the bottom edge of the display See page 151 for the Edit and Equalizer parameters Note To keep your settings you must write them to a User Program Note You can add the or harmonies to this effect 7 Press the button to return to the main page E 80 Music Workstation Roland Vocal Harmonist function Auto Pitch Here s another interesting effect that can either be used as gimmick or to ensure that even the flattest of renditions suddenly sounds in tune Of course the voice will sound somewhat artificial because the emphasis is on tuning here However even if you just speak the words of a song It will be sung just the s
154. more or less as follows BITAY Saturday Live 2 Use the scrollbar the dial or the DECI INC buttons to scroll through the Play Lists if available and necessary 3 Press the field that corresponds to the list you want to use 4 Press the button to return to the main page The indicator now lights to indicate that the Play List function is active 5 Press the button to start playback of your play list At the end of the first song step the next song Is selected automatically if the RECORDER button lights If you stop playback halfway into the song then start it again the next step is played back If the button does not light playback Stops at the end of the current step the next step Is loaded but playback needs to be started using the 6 7 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Play List function button If you stop playback half way into the song then start it again playback con tinues from the place where you stopped it The two fields laa gt l that appear on the main page during list playback allow you to navigate in your play list The added display shows the name of the currently selected play list onc Saturday Live Strummlin Pop Free Panel wer2 Pad With p Vintage EP1 l Jazz Scat Use the laa field to select the previous step and gt gt to select the next step If you do so while playback Is running the previous or next song will be played
155. mulm 200 WRITE us 2 Press the or OFF field to switch the com pressor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above 3 Press the field below COMPRESSOR that displays the name of the currently selected preset 4 Select the desired preset with the dial or the DEC INC buttons The available presets are 1 Hard Comp 4 Mid Boost 6 Standard 2 Soft Comp 5 High Boost 7 User 3 Low Boost The settings you make on this page can be saved to a User memory and recalled as and when necessary Here s how to edit the parameters 5 Press the field of the parameter you wish to change 6 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECI INC buttons See p 115 for a detailed discussion of the available parameters 7 To save the settings you have just made press the field There is only one USER memory By saving new set tings you therefore overwrite the previous ones 8 Press the field if you want to set the Equal izer or the button to return to the main page Co Using the audio inputs Your E 80 sports two EXTERNAL EXTERNAL SOURCE SOURCE AUDIO IN sockets to which you ee can connect an external instrument sound module or a CD MD player These RCA phono sockets accept 10dBu line level signals i e you cannot con nect a microphone here The level of the audio signals can be set with the knob on the front panel The signals rec
156. music during recording and now realize that the tim ing is not quite what you expected it to be If only certain notes in a given time range need to be quan tized you should narrow down the edit range using the FROM TO parameters WETRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks EMODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th W DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 13 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 WE FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signature CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 80 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should Start after the selected beat BIO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern This is where you specify the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number o
157. need them these messages should definitely be erased because they use a lot of memory MFROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter is only displayed if DATA TYPE see above is set to Note It allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tuning the setting range WTO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range MFROM CC 0 127 This parameter is only displayed if DATA TYPE see above is set to something else than Note It allows you to set the lower limit of the control change numbers or values to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER WETO CC 0 127 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the con trol change numbers or values to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range WE Fine tuning the setting range Before setting TO NOTE and possibly FROM NOTE or TO CC and possibly FROM CC it might be a good idea to decide how you want to use the note or value indica tions Depending on the option you choose FROM NOTE or FROM CC may not even be available so that setting it beforehand would be a waste of time EQUAL Only the selected note or value will ch
158. note you played C The name of the corresponding chord is displayed in the upper left hand corner of the display onc Amazing Grace Strummlin Pop Gospel Love Ow wer2 Pad With j Vintage EP1 UPPER 2 ASS T PERS Note See Song Arranger Start Priority on p 246 if Arranger playback does not start 7 Play another chord in the left half of the keyboard The same pattern is now played in that key You don t even have to play full chords e For major chords playing just the root note is enough e g C for C major A for A major etc e For minor chords playing the root note and the third key to its right will do 2 D E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start 8 9 1 2 key to its left is enough C major C minor Only the key that corresponds to Root note third key to the the chord s name right C7 Root note second key to the left Note The function that takes care of this easy fingering is called INTELLIGENT page 89 See also p 273 for a list of other chords that can be played using this system augmented diminished etc What you hear now is the MAIN 1 pattern the and VARIATION 1 buttons light This is the simplest accompaniment of the selected Music Style Let s listen to the accompaniment you could use for your choruses Press the VARIATION 2 button the and buttons light and 2 flashes _ STYLE CONTROL BASS SYNC ___ MAIN END RIT INVER
159. of the ARPEGGIO and STRUMM areas see below also trigger other Keyboard parts you may have switched on Depending on the Keyboard parts you switch on those keys may play the MBS LW2 LW1 left half and the UP3 part right side in the Upper3 Split area Even the Arranger s chord recognition remains active The notes you play in the CHORD area are not played by the E 80 s Guitar section They only specify what you will hear when you Press the first C key to the right of the CHORD area _ Low E string A string D string High E string B string G string This sounds the note a guitarist would play on the low E string The key you are pressing now belongs to the ARPEGGIO section Now press the D to the right of the C you used above This sounds the note a guitarist would play on the A string Continue with the E F G and A keys to sound the remaining guitar notes for the chord you specified Let us summarize all this the six keys you have pressed so far are assigned to the virtual guitar strings This allows you to play guitar arpeggios that use the chord information you supplied in the CHORD area The exact phrasing of your arpeggios depends on the order in which you press the keys If you start pressing these string keys right after switching on the E 80 and before specifying a chord the Guitar mode sounds the basic pitches of the six strings i e E A D G B
160. of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range E EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data E 80 Music Workstation Roland Style Track Edit functions DELETE d em o eaS carer ennnce Eroe enera sinar ADrums Drum eea iana E FROM Unlike the ERASE function DELETE not only erases the data but also the measures beats and or CPT units so that all data that lie behind the TO position are shifted towards the beginning of the track s You cannot choose the data type to be erased WETRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit Select ALL to edit all tracks EMODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th W DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 Mi FROM TO FROM refers to the position where the edit operation is to begin That position is specified as a Bar Beat CPI cluster TO designates the position where the edit operation is to end Bar Beat CPT See page 213 for details WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data COPY l l Mil bet bs e citer Gaaner Eroe enor sinar TRACK DIVISION Sane See page 208 for a step by step discussion This function also allows you to copy tracks from other Styles 215 E 80 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Co
161. of the woofer Rotary Woofer Fast Speed 0 05 10 00Hz High speed rotation speed of the woofer Rotary Woofer Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time it takes the rotor woofer to reach the newly selected speed Fast or Slow Lower values correspond to slower tran sitions Rotary Woofer Level 0 127 Sets the woofer level Rotary Tweeter Slow Speed 0 05 10 00Hz Low speed rotation speed of the tweeter Rotary Tweeter Fast Speed 0 05 10 00Hz High speed rotation speed of the tweeter Rotary Tweeter Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time it takes the rotor tweeter to reach the newly selected speed Fast or Slow Lower values correspond to slower tran sitions Rotary Tweeter Level 0 127 Sets the tweeter level Rotary Separation 0 127 Spatial dispersion of the sound Rotary Level 0 127 Sets the output level of the effect E 80 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters 84 Center Canc Removes the sounds that are localized at the center of the stereo input This is a convenient way to eliminate a vocal L R Balance 50 0 50 Volume balance of the L left and R right channels for removing the sound Range Low 16 15000Hz Lower frequency limit of the band to be removed Range High 16 15000Hz Upper frequency limit of the band to be removed E 80 Music Workstation Appendix MIDI Implementation Chart 22 MIDI Implementation Chart
162. on the EFFECTS page see above Press the field below COMPRESSOR that displays the name of the currently selected preset Select the desired preset with the dial or the DEC INC buttons The available presets are 1 Hard Comp 4 Mid Boost 6 Standard 2 Soft Comp 5 High Boost 7 User 3 Low Boost The settings you make on this page can be saved to a User memory and recalled as and when necessary Here s how to edit the parameters Press the field of the parameter you wish to change Set the desired value with the dial or the DECI INC buttons BC LEVEL 0 127 Use this parameter to set the com pressor s input level The higher the value the stronger the three frequency bands wil be compressed The value you set here is indeed added to the LEVEL settings of the three bands If you set this parameter to 0 the com pressor has no effect on the output signal BC GAIN 12 0 12dB Use this parameter to correct the level at the compressor s outputs If the settings of the remaining parameters lead to a significantly lower level which can be checked by switching the compressor on and off for A B comparisons select a positive value If your settings lead to a significantly higher level select a negative value 0 means that the level is neither boosted nor attenuated 7 8 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the Keyboard Mastering Tools SPLIT 1 80 800 SPLIT 2 2000 12000 On other devices
163. pad proceed as follows Press to clear the currently selected figure e g the 7 of 127 Press the or field to increase or decrease the current value by 10 e Press JENTER to confirm the value Press to close the numeric pad window with out changing the value The parameters you can change are Mi Tempo Change BPM 20 250 Specifies the song tempo If necessary you can insert tempo changes anywhere within the song This could even be done in real time using the TEMPO REC SW parameter See page 176 Beat Change Numerator Denominator SILAS TSIEN SOT f Beat Change Numerator eran J 01 037 Sys Ex FO 41 10 4212 40 01 38 06 01 F7 EENT 01 043 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 33 5432 F7 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 01 050 Sys Ex FO 41 10 4212 40 01 34 5431 F 1 01 056 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 Fare 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 01 000 Tempo Change 100 01 000 Beat Change 4 01 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F 01 031 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F y 01 099 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 00 20 28 04 060 Tempo Change 60 02 000 Tempo Change 52 EVENT 02 060 Tempo Change 46 03 000 Tempo Change 140 EVENT Numerator 1 32 Denominator 2 4 8 16 Specifies the song s time signature If necessary you can insert time signature changes anywhere within the song After pressing gt for the first time you can specify the numerator the number of beats per bar
164. point the split point For the noises you need to select the G7 E 80 Music Workstation Using the performance functions setting 3 Note that this also means that you need to play the real notes at the right end of the keyboard because the entire part Tone is transposed down OCavE 0 P oe A A C2 c3 OTE oe A A C2 G3 This parameter also comes in handy when you wish to trigger Drum Set sounds that are not accessible via the keyboard in its normal state Remember that there are 61 keys while some Drum Sets provide drum percussion sounds for all 128 notes supported by the MIDI standard Finally you may need this parameter when you take advantage of the UPPER 3 SPLIT function see p 99 to avoid that the UP3 notes are way too high for what you have in mind Use the TONE ASSIGN buttons to select of the Key board part you wish to transpose in octave steps 1 _ KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN 2 If the main page is not displayed press the button several times until it appears 3 Use the OCTAVE ally fields to set the desired interval up to 4 octaves higher or lower 4 If necessary repeat this with the remaining Key board parts 6 3 Key Touch velocity sensitivity Of course the E 80 s keyboard is also velocity sensitive This allows you to control the timbre and volume of the Keyboard parts by varying the force with which you strike the keys 1 Pr
165. right of the V or the HARMONY knob VOICE FX AUTOPITCH VOICE FX TYPE This takes you to the page of the selected Vocal Har monist function 2 To edit the effect parameters press the field VOCAL rll MO sy VOICE EFFECT HARMONY EFFECT WALL TYPE inns nes O asna n n REVERB SEND REVERB TIME mpe Sp mam op a 3 Decide which effect processor you wish to edit e To edit a VOICE effect press the or field below VOICE EFFECT e To edit a HARMONY effect press REVERB or below HARMONY EFFECT Only the HARMONY parts Vocoder Small Ensemble have a Chorus processor Ihe parameters and presets for the Reverb and Delay processors differ between the VOICE EFFECTS and HARMONY EFFECTS sections 4 Press the VOCAL HARMONIST button for which you want to program the effect and talk sing into the microphone while setting the following parame ters VOICE FX VOICE TALK HARMONY VOCODER Q AUTO PITCH SINGER SMALL ENSEMBLE If necessary you can use the or knob to temporarily set the volume of the part you don t want to hear to 0 Reverb W Reverb for VOICE EFFECT VOICE EFFECT HARMONY EFFECT REVERB DELAY REVERB DELAY WALL TYPE aise n REVERB SEND REVERB TIME Oman op am e Press the field of the Reverb type you wish to use Note The preset you choose affects the settings of the param eters below Always start by selecting the type and then set the program
166. scratch 202 Starting the Style Composer n nannan nannan 202 Clearing the RAM memory Initialize Style 202 Getting ready for the first track 203 FO CONC cee see necnceceseees E cee 4 206 Auditioning your Style and adding more tracks 206 Saving VOUS DG hte fo iit S 207 Recording other tracks and divisions 207 Muting tracks while recording others 207 RE MIANG osscnqeetcacenennetee AEAEE EEEE 207 USING existing SIVIESns beccnceeerenaeaidadeeds 208 Starting with all tracks of an existing Style 208 Copying individual Style tracks 008 209 Editing Styles on the fly via additional recordings 210 Adding notes in real time 00 eee 210 Adding controller data in real time 210 Adding or changing settings of existing parts 210 Expression Panpot Reverb Chorus 08 211 Changing the Preset MPO sbbungsesessseseaeuure 212 Style Track Edit functions 005 212 Editing individual Style events Style Micro Edit 220 General notes about STYLE MICRO EDIT 220 SSA CVCNIG 1045 ccanuenceneagenasouussssuuesss 222 Other edit operato Stree EE Ra 223 16 Disk Media functions 0 e008 225 The NOW lOS cats Gan eats cates eared wee Bee 225 kao E e ae ceusacetveceieeondewady E 226 Saving data cc cece eee eee eee eee 226 Rename TUNCHON S os wanes aeeusemdn
167. series The PAGE TURNER would not proceed to PartyO5 omp Part06 omp etc Also be sure to use consecutive numbers Any gap will end the series Note For public performances be aware that commercial pic tures or pictures you download from the internet may be pro tected by a copyright You may have to ask the photographer or reseller for the permission to use them Roland assumes no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third party copyrights arising through your use of this unit 3 Copy the file s to a memory card the E 80 can read a floppy disk or to the E 80 s internal mem ory via USB see page 234 If you select a card or the internal memory as desti nation be sure to copy the picture s to the Text folder Playback 4 Insert the floppy disk or card into the E 80 s disk drive or PCMCIA slot 5 Press the button 0 Wi 6 Press the field if it doesn t light The display changes to Page 1 1 7 Press the field 7 G Om Text ap a Qi COLOUR Za gm PAGE TURNER ns Se 8 Press the PAGE TURNER display field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the speed at which the pictures should change The setting range is 10 600 seconds To switch off the slideshow function select Off This setting can also be changed after loading pictures Note You can also switch pictures with an optional foot switch pag
168. set tings of the LW1 organ part Press TONE ASSIGN if you need to change the UPPER 1 part s registration again WARNING The E 80 s assignable sliders are not motorized It is therefore very likely that their physi cal positions no longer correspond to what you see and hear on the HARMONIC BARS UPPER 1 page We recommend quickly moving a slider all the way up or down before actually setting it to the desired position _ If you like a registration You can save it to one of the eight memories press the field it lights then one of the numeric fields i 8 Note This only saves the registration of the currently selected part You will have to repeat this for the other sections if you want to save their registrations too Press another numeric field to recall the settings stored in that memory in which case the sound changes About the MANUAL field The field on the HARMONIC BARS page allows you to change the organ sound so as to corre Spond to the current positions of the sliders This will change the sound After selecting another memory the physical slider positions usually no longer corre spond to the sound you hear Using just one organ sound and bass pedals As stated earlier pressing the EASY SETTING button creates a split that involves two organ sounds UP1 and LW1 This actually simulates a two manual instrument If you only need one organ sound assigned to the entire keyboard press the K
169. speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate Note 1 64T 1 64 1 32T 1 32 1 16T 1 32 1 16 1 8T 1 16 1 8 1 4T 1 8 1 4 1 2 T 1 4 1 2 1 1 T 1 2 1 1 2 1 T 1 1 2 1 Specifies the modula tion speed This can be either a frequency Hz or a note value depending on how you set the Rate Sync param eter above I means triplet and a refers to a dotted note 2 1 means that each cycle akes two measures bars The advantage of working with a note value is that the chorus will undulate in sync with the current Arranger or Recorder tempo Depth 0 127 This parameter sets the depth at which the chorus sound is modulated Higher values result in a more pronounced modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound i e the stereoness of the effect Chorus Feedback 0 127 This parameter sets the level at which the chorus sound is re input fed back into the chorus By using Feedback a denser Chorus sound can be created Higher values result in a greater feedback level GM2 Chorus parameters Pre LPF 0 7 Cuts the high frequency range of the sound coming into the chorus Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies Level 0 127 Output level of the chorus signal Feedback 0 127 Adjusts the amount of the chorus sound that is fed back into the effect Delay 0 127 Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard
170. standard which means that musical data can be sent to and received by instruments of different types and manufacturers Furthermore MIDI allows you to connect your E 80 to a computer or hardware sequencer You can also use the USB port for MIDI applications Connect your E 80 as shown below Transmits MIDI IN data External MIDI instrument MIDI communication via the USB port is also possible MIDI can simultaneously transmit and receive messages on 16 channels so that up to 16 instruments can be controlled Nowadays most instruments like your E 80 are multitimbral which means that they can play several parts simultaneously with different sounds Note All E 80 parts are set to receive MIDI messages If they do not seem to respond to the messages you send from the external controller check the MIDI connections and the channel settings on the E 80 The transmit and receive channels of the Keyboard parts are set as follows Keyboard part Recorder track UP1 4 UP2 6 UP3 13 LW1 11 LW2 14 MBS 12 MELODY INT 15 VOCAL HARMONIST 16 Note The VOCAL HARMONIST only transmits and receives set ting changes and MIDI note messages The audio signals it receives and generates are not converted into pitch informa tion The E 80 receives data External MIDI instrument computer The E 80 transmits data The how to s Accessing the MIDI functions Do the following to gain access to the MIDI function
171. that allows you to record the music the way you want it to sound Input Quantize INPUT QUANTIZE is a function that corrects minor timing problems It shifts the notes whose timing Is not exactly right to the nearest correct unit Always select a resolution value that is fine enough to accept all note values you play If the shortest notes of your accompaniment are 1 16th note trip lets set the INPUT QUANTIZE value to 1 16t 16 Press the field and use the dial to specify the quantize value The preset value 1 16 is OK for most situations If you do not want quantize your playing while record ing set this parameter to Off You can also quantize the track after recording it page 213 Recording a guitar part To record a guitar part onto the selected track only available for the Accomp tracks e Press the display and use the dial to select Acoustic or Electric Select Off if you want to use the track for some thing else e Press the field to jump to the GUITAR MODE page and set up your guitar See page 36 for details Note however that the available sound have Slightly different names ELECTRIC ACOUSTIC 01 Jazz Man 01 Nylon 02 OpenHard 1 02 Steel 2 03 Dist Guitar 03 Steel 3 04 OpenHard 2 04 Steel 4 05 Warm Drv 05 Steel 5 06 Strat Clean 06 12 Strings 07 CleanHalt 07 Nyl Steel 08 Distorsion 09 Overdrive 10 Power 11 Power 2 08 Nyl Steel 2 E 80 Music
172. the correct channel AV or something to that effect see the manual that came with your set 6 Press the VIDEO OUT SOURCE button icon if you want the lyrics to be displayed on the exter nal screen 7 Press the button to return to the main page sae i oT w oo 80 Displaying scores gt Only available for Standard MIDI File playback and only in the E 80 s display If you don t remember the notes of the song you are about to play you can ask the E 80 to display them on screen 1 Select a song page 41 2 Press the button my LYRICS amp SCORE 3 Press the field if it doesn t light The display changes to Song HEYMAMA M 030 3 100 474 cone J eves ewer pe c 4 Start song playback and watch the display 5 Press the button if the notes are difficult to read Press ZOOM to select the normal size again Now maybe the way in which the notes are displayed is not quite right In that case E 80 Music Workstation Roland Displaying Lyrics and chord information 6 Press the button 7 Press to see the notes again If necessary you can return to the OPTIONS page to correct settings you don t like after all SETTINGS STAFF 1 1 STAFF PITCH KEY Qu fe There are several things you can decide here e Do you want see the notes of one song part or of two If you only need one activate 1 STAFF To see two parts activate 2 STAVES
173. the notes will be arpeggiated over 1 2 or 3 octaves Note Do not forget to assign a suitable Tone to the LW2 part which acts as D Beam part Chord Oct 1 2 3 By holding your hand inside the D Beam s range you cause the D Beam part to sound the notes extracted from the current song You could use this function to add syncopated brass or guitar hits to your melody The velocity value used for playing these notes is 100 The number 1 2 or 3 bears on the octave of this added chord 7 Ab3 G4 2 Ab4 G5 and 3 Ab5 G6 Move your hand outside the D Beam s range to stop the D Beam part from sounding the chord Note Do not forget to assign a suitable Tone to the LW2 part which acts as D Beam part Minus One By holding your hand inside the D Beam s range you switch off the parts that can be muted with the button at that time page 45 Rotary HB S F Allows you to select the slow or fast Speed of the Rotary effect for the Harmonic Bars 4 Press the button to return to the main page Using optional footswitches FC7 PEDAL The E 80 allows you to connect an optional FC 7 Foot Controller to the FC7 PEDAL socket FC 7 PEDAL PEDAL lt lt _______ HOLD SWITCH EXPRESSION e e At first the switches of this pedal board are assigned Arranger control functions You can however assign other functions to these switches Note The FC 7 assignments apply to the E 80 and are not writ ten to individua
174. the E 80 which User Program it should recall whenever you switch it on 1 Press the button et USB DATA a LERS STORAGE CONTROLLERS 2 Press the field followed by the field es Cipp USER PROGRAM RECALL i ve MIDI SET RECALL SOUND SET MODE Deeps EXTENDED 3 Press the field and use the dial to select the User Program to be recalled when the E 80 is switched on 4 Switch on the field Switch off this button icon if no User Program should be recalled when the E 80 is switched on If the User Program contains one or several links the corresponding icons are displayed 5 Press the button to return to the main page E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing User Program Finder information Editing User Program Finder information The User Program Finder is used for quickly locating the User Programs you need in a given situation Some information is added automatically to User Programs you save while other information needs to be supplied by hand Here we will concentrate on how to prepare that infor mation for real life use 1 Press the FINDER button USER PRG The display changes to 5 a j E i 2 Specify the memory area that contains the User Program whose information you want to change or expand EXTERNAL MEMORY or FLOPPY The display shows a list of 5 User Programs in the selected memory area The USER PRG STYLE LINK GENRE and SONG LI
175. the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level 29 OD gt Delay This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in series Overdrive Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Overdrive Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 30 DST Chorus This effect connects distortion and a chorus in series Distortion Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Distortion Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the distortion sound Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0
176. the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Modulation frequency of the chorus effect Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity of the cho rus effect Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Modulation frequency of the flanger effect Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity of the flanger effect Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level E 80 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters 42 Isolator This is an equalizer which cuts the volume greatly allowing you to add a special effect to the sound by cutting the vol ume In varying ranges Boost Cut Low Mid High Level 60 0 4 dB These boost and cut each of the High Middle and Low frequency ranges At 60dB the sound becomes inaudible OdB is equivalent to the input level of the sound Anti Phase Low Sw Off On Turns the Anti Phase func tion on and off for the Low
177. the memory card for how to disable its write protection Press the field Press if you do not want to proceed or to select other files 97 You are asked whether it is OK to overwrite all files on the destination media TO that have the same file names as the files you are about to copy 6 Press the field if it is OK to overwrite files with the same names on the destination media Press the field if files on the source FROM media that have the same name as existing files on the destination TO media should not be copied only files with original names will be copied in that case The data are copied and a Successful message con firms the end of the operation 7 Press the button to return to the main page E 80 Music Workstation Roland Upper 3 Split Advanced Keyboard part functions Upper 3 Split On p 65 you learned how to split the keyboard into a See p 29 for how to assign the desired sound to the left half with the LW1 LW2 and possibly also the MBS UP3 part part and a right half with the UP1 UP2 and or UP3 Note UP3 SPLIT only works if the UP1 or UP2 part is active It part is impossible to use an Upper 3 split without using the Upper Ea l or Upper2 part If UP1 2 3 are off the UPPER 3 SPLIT function You can program an additional split between the UP1 snore UP2 and the UP3 parts which is great for playing ques tion and answer types of melody lines with a brass sound for Upp
178. the same function RPN Registered parameter number messages They work like NRPN messages and are understood by many GM and GM2 compatible tone genera tors CAF Channel Aftertouch messages When you select Note a FROM NOTE and TO NOTE field appear that allow you to set the upper and lower limit of the notes to be copied See also Fine tuning the setting range on p 182 MEVALUE CPT 4800 4800 This parameter sets the amount by which the notes are shifted The value refers to CPT units one CPT 1 120 J Notes on the first beat of the first bar cannot be shifted further to the left because that would mean shifting them to the 0 measure which doesn t exist W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs TRACK XCHANGE TRACK EXCHANGE allows you to move the data of the source track left to the destination track right and at the same time the data of the destination track to the source track IASC Sh _ CHANGE CHANGE MERGE GLOBAL Ay VELO GATETIME CHANGE MITRACK 1 16 This is where you select the first track to be exchanged Obviously there is no ALL option here MTRACK 1 16 This is where you select the second track to be exchanged Obviously there is no ALL option here This track cannot be set to the same number as the above Note Be careful when exchanging a drum track and a melodic track
179. the tempo is currently J 100 the value 20 means that the tempo drops to J 80 or rises to J 120 Press the first field ACCELER RITARD and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the ratio by which the tempo should increase decrease CPT 15 3825 Use this parameter to specify how long a Ritardando Accelerando should take In most cases 480 CPT i e one measure is probably the most musical choice E 80 Music Workstation Roland Tempo related settings Arranger Options Mi Using the Ritardando Accelerando functions 4 For general applications any Style division pro ceed as follows Assign the RITARD and or ACCELER function ASSIGN SW buttons Arranger RIT Tempo amp Arranger ACC Tempo on p 71 FC 7 footswitches Arranger RIT Tempo Arranger ACC Tempo on p 75 Press the button to start Style play back Press the assigned button or footswitch By assigning two controls you can increase ACC and decrease RIT the tempo 5 For Ritardandos that apply to Ending patterns pro ceed as follows Press the button to start Style play back Press the button twice in succession dou ble click STYLE CONTROL BASS S END RIT INVERSION START STOP A O a AUTO FILL IN 0 o This selects an Ending pattern and slows down the tempo according to the ACCELER RITARD and CPT settings When the Ending phrase is finished and Arranger playback stops the tempo is rese
180. the value of the desired note Delay 3 Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of the tap delay negative values invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Frequency at which the low frequency content of the tap delay sound will be cut BYPASS no cut Delay 1 Panpot L64 0 63R Delay 2 Panpot L64 0 63R Panning of the tap delay sounds Delay 1 Level 0 127 Delay 2 Level 0 127 Volume of the tap delay sounds EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 267 E 80 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters 72 Shuffle DLY Adds a shuffle to the delay sound giving the sound a bouncy delay effect with a swing feel Delay Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay time Should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a time or a note value Delay Time msec 0 2600ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Sp
181. three umlauts etc won t be interpreted as they should corresponds to black If you have ever worked with a You can import tiles with a size up to SOKB graphic program this concept may be familiar to you Note Bold type italics underlining etc are not saved nor e Press one of the knobs red green or blue in the can they be read by the E 80 red g BACKGROUND column and use the 3 Copy the file s to a memory card the E 80 can dial to increase or decrease the value read a floppy disk or the E 80 s internal memory 9 Press the PAGE TURNER display field and use the via USB see page 234 dial or the DEC INC buttons to set If you select a card or the internal memory as desti vig the speed at which the pages should be turned nation be sure to copy the file to the Text folder The setting range is 10 600 seconds To switch off i Playback the automatic function select Off This setting can 4 Insert the floppy disk or card into the E 80 s disk also be changed after loading the text file drive or PCMCIA slot You can use the DATA ENTRY a l buttons to turn back line by line You can also turn pages with an optional footswitch page 78 or FC 7 page 76 10 Press the VIDEO OUT SOURCE button icon if you want the text to be displayed on the exter nal screen Let us now select the text file to be displayed 11 Press the field 5 Press the button pages The lt gt buttons allow yo
182. to decide how the Style Finder should look for files Press the field to search for all entries that start with the characters you entered BEA for example Files that match the specified criteria will be displayed at the top of the list The order depends on the button icon you activated STYLE NAME COUNTRY GENRE or TEMP O Press the SEARCH ONLY field to have the E 80 search the selected entry for files that contain the supplied information This would allow you to also locate a file called Raggabeat if you entered BEA See page 52 for how to enter characters The field allows you to delete the character indicated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters To enter numbers without cycling through the char acters first press the field After enter ing the numbers switch it off if you need to enter characters again e Press the field to start your search 1 3 Note If no Styles were found the following message appears and no file names are displayed in which case you need to press the STYLE NAME COUNTRY GENRE or TEMPO field to display all entries again an No Match Found options FOUND Q f af 7 Boe atmo I lt FR e Press the field of the Style you need and do your thing If the E 80 did find one or several matches the FOUND number will be smaller than the GLOBAL number Editing the Style Finder information The Finder infor
183. to enter names E 80 Music Workstation Roland Play List function 11 Press the field to save your list to the indicated memory area Note This only saves the Play List i e the references to exist ing song files The songs themselves are not saved because that is unnecessary On the other hand if you delete a song see p 161 that is referenced by a Play List step playback stops at that empty step during playback and the File not found message appears The display shows a confirmation message and then returns to the PLAY LIST page Saturday Live 12 Press the button to return to the main page That page now looks as follows onc Amazing Grace Strummlin Pop Free Panel PROGR 2 Pad With Vintage EP1 T l T Scat See Using Play Lists on p 167 for how work with your list If you need to return to the Play List either press the PLAY LIST field in the upper left corner or press and hold the button Editing Play Lists If while programming or using a Play List you notice that one song is missing from the list or if you decide not to use a given song after all you need to edit your Play List Steps 1 3 below are only necessary if you want to edit a different list than the one you have just programmed 1 Press and hold the RECORDER button to jump to the PLAY LIST page 2 Press the field of the list you wish to edit 165 E 80 Music Workstation More refined song functions Depend
184. to pre serve at least part of the original feel If the result is not acceptable repeat the operation with the same or a higher value WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs ERASE IAGIC SUIT ROM oe execute EXECUTE ERASE allows you to selectively delete data either within a specified range of measures beats or clocks or from the entire track s When DATA TYPE is set to ALL ERASE substitutes the required number of rests for the data you delete so that you end up with the equivalent number of blank measures If you also want to eliminate the measures themselves use DELETE see below METRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks except the MASTER track The MASTER track can only be selected and edited in isolation see p 189 FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 80 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a
185. to switch the proces sor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above 3 Press the field of the effect type you wish to use The options are SRV Room This effect simulates the reverb characteris tics of a room The name SRV refers to Roland s SRV 3030 a stand alone reverb processor which is also used by certain Fantom series synthesizers SRV Hall This is another SRV algorithm that simulates the acoustics of a concert hall SRV Plate Digital simulation of a metal plate that is sometimes used for creating reverb effects Works well for percussive sounds GM2 Reverb This reverb effect is Roland s standard type for GM2 compatible tone generators Room1 Room2 These types simulate the reverb char acteristics of a room The higher the number 1 or 2 the bigger the room becomes Stage1 Stage2 These types simulate the reverb char acteristics you get when you perform on a concert stage The higher the number 1 or 2 the bigger the stage becomes Hall1 Hall2 These types simulate the reverb of a small 1 or large 2 concert hall and thus sound much big ger than the Room types above Delay A Delay effect no reverb Works a lot like an echo effect and thus repeats the sounds Pan Delay This is a stereo version of the above Delay effect It creates repetitions that alternate between the left and right channels REVERB LEV
186. track you like Some boards contain loops or grooves whose tempo is automatically syn chronized to the song tempo 11 Specify how the data will be added to the track during recording REC MODE Select Replace if the track contains data you wish to replace with new data This erases all data of the selected track from the place where you start record ing until the end Replace is selected by default for empty tracks Select Mix to add new notes to the ones already recorded on the selected track This recording mode is particularly useful for recording the rhythm track 10 because you can first record the bass and snare drums then add a few tom hits here and there and record the HiHat for example Mix is selected by default for tracks that already contain data 12 If you don t want to start and stop recording man ually use the PUNCH fields e Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to specify the measure where recording should start If you start playback a few bars before this position the sequencer will activate recording as soon as it reaches this measure e Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to spec ify the measure where recording should end i 7G Recording is deactivated when the sequencer reaches this position Playback will continue however and needs to be stopped using the but ton e To take advantage of the PUNCH IN OUT function
187. trigger MIDI notes between numbers 35 and 59 D5 E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start each file name should begin with at least one charac Using the VIEWER function The E 80 contains a VIEWER function you can use to display text or pictures in the display and on an exter nal screen The BMP function can be used to create the right mood for the song you want to play i e an exotic beach for a samba a motorbike for a metal song etc or for announcements advertising etc The IXT function on the other hand is akin to the LYRICS function discussed above it displays the text you prepare on a computer which could be the lyrics of the songs you perform or anything else you want to tell your audience That text is not synchronized but you can tell the E 80 to turn pages automatically at set intervals or assign that function to an optional foot switch or FC 7 You can use the DATA ENTRY a but tons to turn pages The lt gt buttons allow you to advance or go back line by line Working with picture files BMP Import Here is how to illustrate your songs or performance with bitmap picture files You can use the PAGE TURNER function for automatic changes at set intervals see below W Preparation 1 Use a graphic program like Paint Adobe Photo shop CorelIDRAW etc to prepare the pictures you want to use See the owner s manual of the software you use for details Here are a few guide
188. up one entry Exam ple if you delete step 04 of a list that contains 10 Steps step 05 becomes 04 step 06 becomes 05 etc 8 Press the field to save your edited list ree EI seve Saturday Live MEMORY If the new Play List has the same name as an existing one the following message appears PLAY List SAVE n EXTERNAL INTERNAL Saturday Live MEMORY MEMORY D fae Same file on disk z an Overwrite Press to replace the old file with your new ver sion Press if you want to rename your new Play List before saving it Note By pressing the field you return to the EDIT page Note When you press the button the following mes sage appears yra LIST anp Ex HTERNA L INTERNAL EMORY MEMORY 7 Theo ERTER Play List m has not been saved Exit anyway Press to return to the main page and discard any changes you have made up to that point Press to return to the EDIT page without deleting your changes M Clear ALL The PLAY LIST EDIT page contains a field you can use to remove a steps from the currently selected Play List In effect this means that only the name is preserved while the list can must be pro grammed again Using Play Lists Here s how Play Lists can be used for your perfor mances e f necessary insert the memory card that contains the list and songs you need into the slot 1 Press the button You can release it as soon as the display looks
189. use than SysEx messages but basically have the same function RPN Registered parameter number messages They work like NRPN messages and are understood by many GM and GM2 compatible tone genera tors CAF Channel Aftertouch messages When you select Note a FROM NOTE and TO NOTE field appear that allow you to set the upper and lower limit of the notes to be copied See also Fine tuning the setting range on p 182 MIDST TRACK This is where you select the track to which you want to copy the selected data If you set SRC TRACK to ALL the DST TRACK setting cannot be changed 133 E 80 Music Workstation Using the 16 track Sequencer MINTO The bar beat and CPT values of the position the first data of the source track will be copied to E EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and copy the data Note Though you can also copy data from track 10 the offi cial Drum track to a melodic track and vice versa this is only useful if you assign a Drum Set to the selected destination DST track A drum track indeed sounds odd when played by a piano for example and a piano part is not necessarily suited for drumming INSERT RAGED Le mead Eo ee Eo l FOR ooo loo looo TIME SIGHATURE BEAT BER BEA INSERT allows you to insert space and shift data that lie behind the FROM position further towards the end of the song this is the exact opposite of DELETE These empty measures can be
190. use the keyboard because it will help you understand how the Vocoder works Note If you use the Vocoder along with the E 80 s Arranger you will probably have to play the melody yourself because the Arranger does not contain it while a Standard MIDI File does 4 Play a chord on the keyboard hold those notes and talk into the microphone The Vocoder only works if you a talk or sing and b if there is a musical sound that can be processed Play various chords and listen to how that affects the signal generated by the Vocoder Note The Vocoder can produce four voices at once Playing more than four notes simultaneously is thus unnecessary Note The Vocoder can be used alongside SINGER or AUTO PITCH Again there are several parameters for customizing the Vocoder s behavior 5 Press and hold the button The display changes to MOEA rl MOvIUST YOCODER ENSEMBLE VOCODER TYPE i GENDER These button icons MALE FEMALE MIX allow you to change the timbre of the effect so as to create a masculine feminine or mixed character The GENDER choice determines which 8 preset settings are available There are thus 24 Vocoder presets 8 for Male 8 for Female and 8 for Mix The 8 fields in the middle e g OPERA MY VOICE etc specify the voice character These presets are based on the parameters you can change on the Edit page 6 Select the desired TRACK value with the dial The VOC
191. where you can store your favorite tunings These are three global memories that apply to all User Programs 1 2 3 Press the button The display changes to MENU iG GUITAR tunmef g UITAR 3 n BEAM Rea tn Bets EA vam z eec Bets vie pS eure 4 EE as STYLE pS eure ae EE as Ewn BP Firuncrion San dii A enone pm TONE Roms DATA Ee Roms Note Scale Tuning is not available for the Harmonic Bar sounds Press the field followed by the field TONING Press a MEMORY 1 sI MEMORY 3 field to select a Scale Tune memory This will change the pitch of the following notes 50 means that the note in question is tuned a quarter tone down Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 E 50 E 50 C 50 B 50 A 50 F 50 The pitch of the other notes is left unchanged The button icons corresponding to the notes whose pitch is changed light for easy identification 49 E 80 Music Workstation Using the performance functions 4 5 You will notice that every note can be selected only once That is because the value you specify applies to all notes of the same name If you change the tuning of the C that value is added to or subtracted from all Cs C1 C2 C3 etc If you now returned to the main page you would notice that the E 80 alerts you to the fact that the Scale Tuning function has been switched on Off On MEMORY 1 3 C min ie RVG erasanak 1 gt
192. will be stored 1 Defeat the disk s or memory card s write protection if available Floppy disk Close the little window page 11 Memory card See its owner s manual this depends on the kind of card you are using 2 Insert the floppy disk into the drive or the memory card into the PCMCIA slot 3 Press the button E 80 Music Workstation Roland Format 4 Press the field DISKESAMEDIA The display changes to KORMANY MEDIA FORMAT EXTERNAL MEMORY 5 On the display page that appears now press the or field This obviously depends on whether you Inserted a floppy disk or a memory card The display now responds with KORMANY AIl the Data on the EXTERNAL memory will be lost Are You Sure In the case of a floppy disk the External Memory message will read Floppy Disk of course 6 Press the field to format your disk card Press or to return to the FORMAT display page without formatting 7 Wait for the confirmation to appear then press the button to return to the main page Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual 23N E 80 Music Workstation Disk Media functions Import User Program function The E 80 allows you to import User Programs or Perfor mance Memories created with a VA 76 VA 7 or G 1000 EM 2000 You can also load all
193. your settings and edit the data 217 E 80 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer GLOBAL CHANGE This function allows you to make quick changes to certain settings The changes always apply to entire tracks you cannot use GLOBAL CHANGE for just a few measures You can apply global changes to the four editable Style track parameters EXPRESS REVERB PANPOT and CHORUS when you notice that the effect is too prominent or not strong enough You can also use it to upgrade older Styles to ensure that they use the E 80 s new sounds Be aware however that Style tracks cannot use HAR MONIC BARS sounds MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks EMODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor 7th or ALL W DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 ALL MINIT VALUE Press this field to reset all values on this page to their initial state if you want to start again There are two kinds of changes that can be performed on this page FROM TO and INC DEC E FROM TO Enter the original data value i e the value that is being used right now by the selected track s in the FROM col umn For TO specify the new value that should replace the FROM value These are what we call absolu
194. your settings and edit the data TIME SIGNAT o emesa foc fons fmmunen pararam fin Sotto Jenrerme nance eroek _ tener sinar TIME SIGNATURE C O44 6 44 amp 44 O4 MAIN OL O 44 6 44 8 44 g FILL DOWN O 44 GB 44 amp 44 FILL UPL oO O 44 amp 44 Dy i B B B ENDING O44 6 44 8 44 O 404 The TIME SIGNAT page allows you to check and set the time signature of the patterns he major minor and seventh Modes of a pattern must always use the same time signature which is why you cannot edit them separately de l BEAT BEAT Main VARIATION Use this parameter to specify the time signature of the selected pattern DIVISION see below The MAIN INTRO and ENDING instances comprise four varia tions which is why there are four TIME SIGN values you can select using the VARIATION 1 4 button icons When you select Fill Up or Fill Dwn for DIVI SION only three TIME SIGN icons are displayed The most commonly used time signatures are 2 4 3 4 4 4 6 8 and 12 8 Other values such as 7 4 13 8 etc are also possible Note When you change the time signature of an already recorded pattern its notes and events are reshuffled so that you may end up with incomplete measures None of your data are deleted however DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro Main Fill Dwn Fill Up End MVARIATION Use these button icons to select the pattern
195. 1 Press and hold the button The display now looks as follows FONGNON VOLUME LEVEL MEDIUM COUNT IN METRONOME INTERNAL Note When neither the Arranger nor the Recorder 16 track sequencer is running the button flashes to indicate the current tempo 2 Set the available parameters to your liking MIVOLUME LEVEL Press the LOW or field to specify the metronome s basic level The default setting is MEDIUM You probably only need to change this setting after switching off See below MCOUNT IN This parameter allows you to switch the Count In function on to 1 BAR or 2 BAR or off When on the metronome will count in the specified number of measures bars before the Arranger starts playing Note This count in is also available when you are using the Sync Start function In that case playing a chord means that the Arranger only starts after 1 or 2 measures OFF The count in function is off 1 BAR 2 BAR Whenever you start Arranger play back the metronome counts in 1 or 2 bars before the selected Style pattern starts playing E 80 Music Workstation Roland Metronome Note The Count In function can be used independently of the metronome There is thus no need to activate the metronome in order to hear the count in EMODE Yet another option on the above display page is to specify when the metronome should sound ALWAYS The metronome even counts when play back is st
196. 1 Reverb 80 0 93 Chorus 5 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track you want to edit 6 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the Mode you want to edit Major minor 7th 7 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the Division you want to edit MAIN 14 Fill Up 1 3 Fill Dwn 1 3 Intro 1 4 Ending 1 4 General notes about STYLE MICRO EDIT W Graphic representation of your data piano roll To getter a better idea of where your data are located and how they are distributed press the field The display then changes to SHES Laro D CREATE EVENT J ERASE EVENT Except for a perhaps clearer representation of the data on the selected track all other operations are the same as in standard view Press B20 again to see more values again Use the dial and a Y buttons to scroll through the available events W Position indications Sequencers only register events whose positions and distances specify when the notes are to be sounded or when they should change i e their sequence Each event is executed at a given point in time which is why they all have a position indication 1 01 119 for example The first figure refers to the bar the second to the beat within that bar and the third to the clock CPT between the current beat and the next Each beat of a 4 4 bar comprises 120 clocks E
197. 1 Reverb with greater late reverberation Stage2 Reverb with strong early reflections Hall1 Reverb with clear reverberance Hall2 Reverb with rich reverberance Reverb Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard Reverb Time 0 127 Time length of reverberation Reverb HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range 0 High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range 2 56G Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 26 Gate Reverb This is a special type of reverb in which the reverberant sound is cut off before its natural length Reverb Type Normal Reverse Sweep 1 Sweep 2 Type of reverb NORMAL Conventional gated reverb REVERSE Backwards reverb SWEEP17 The reverberant sound moves from right to left SWEEP2 The reverberant sound moves from left to right Reverb Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard Reverb Gate Time 5 500ms Adjusts the time from when the reverb is heard until it disappears 0 Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gai
198. 1 active e The Natural Piano Tone is assigned to UP1 e Arranger ZONE WHOLE page 89 Press the button to start and stop the Arranger See page 27 for how to select internal Styles e Arranger TYPE PIANO STYLE page 89 Split and Whole modes Using the SPLIT Keyboard Mode Split means that the keyboard is divided into two halves You can use the LW1 LW2 and MBS parts in the left half and the UP1 UP2 UP3 parts in the right It is also possible to use an additional split between UP1 UP2 and UP3 see Upper 3 Split on p 99 LW1 LW2 MBS UP1 UP2 UP3 Here s how to activate the SPLIT keyboard mode 1 Press the KBD MODE button 2 Press the PART ON OFF buttons of the parts LW2 LW1 etc you want to play via the keyboard and switch off the parts you do not need If a part is on its button lights Note If you like you can activate a Hold function for the LW1 2 parts That way briefly pressing the notes to be played by the LW1 2 parts is enough The Arranger has a similar func tion called ARR Hold See also Lower Hold on p 102 Note If none of the PART ON OFF buttons lights the notes you play on the keyboard will not be audible It would how ever be possible to go on controlling the Arranger Note Your settings can be written to a User Program and recalled at a later stage See p 125 MSetting the split point When the button lights the keyboard is split in two halves The split
199. 10 min utes especially if the target media already contains several sets This is due to the fact that the Database information needs to be updated for User Program Finder use Do not switch off the E 80 while this operation is in progress E 80 Music Workstation Roland Saving data MSave MIDI Set After programming 8 MIDI Sets you may find that you need a few more and that you have to make room for the new MIDI Sets To do so without losing existing MIDI Sets you must save the old set Even if you do not program more than 8 MIDI Sets it is a good idea to make a backup copy of your MIDI Sets This function allows you to save all 8 MIDI Sets as a set 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the field e gt ra Dee oso 3 Select the target media INTERNAL MEMORY disk or memory card 4 Enter the name for the file See Save User Program Set Note The E 80 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear 5 Press the field to save the data WSave Song This page allows you to save the song that is cur rently in the E 80 s RAM memory Even if it is not a newly recorded song there are several reasons why you may want to use this function e to save the changes you made using the MAKEUP TOOLS and or COVER functions see page 140 and following e to save the newly programmed MARK JUMP loca tions see page 158
200. 127 Adjusts the level of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect when the REVERB CHAR ACTER setting is Delay or Pan Delay Parameters of the remaining types Room1 Pan Delay Time 0 127 Time length of reverberation for Room1 Hall2 or delay time for Delay and Pan Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which the high frequency content of the reverb sound will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Feedback 0 127 Only available for Delay and Pan Delay Adjusts the amount of delay feedback 6 Press the button to return to the main page Note Do not forget to save your settings to a User Program if you want to keep them 109 E 80 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions amp effects Chorus for Keyboard parts 1 _ 2 3 4 5 Chorus broadens the spatial image of the sound and creates a stereo impression You can choose from 8 types of Chorus Press the KEYBOARD button to call up the following page KALJUD apra Z REVERE Cuorus _e LCE EQ PART y EDIT 4 A amp BOARD S EavaLizeR COMPRESSOR See OFF EDIT OFF EDIT k On this page you can switch the CHORUS processor on and off by pressing the button icon to the right of its display If you only need another chorus type press the CHO RUS display and use the d
201. 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected HI frequency Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency negative values cut attenuate it MID FREQ HZ 200 8000Hz This parameter allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the middle band this is a peaking filter If you want to take advantage of the drum instru ment s equalizer and edit it to your liking 146 MID Q 0 5 1 2 4 8 Use this parameter to specify the width of the MID FREQ band that you want to boost or cut Smaller values mean that neighboring frequen cies above below that value are also affected MID GAIN DB 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected MID frequency Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency negative values cut attenuate it LO FREQ HZ 90 150 180 300 360 600 This parameter allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the low band this is a shelving filter LO GAIN DB 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected LO frequency Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency negative values cut attenuate it If you like your equalizer settings so much that you also want to use them for other drum instruments proceed as follows Set the EO parameters to your liking Press the field Press the field and use the buttons to select the drum instrument that should use the same settings Press the EQUALIZER field
202. 2 3 4 You can also add a musical phrase to your songs if you wish to take advantage of the Play amp Search facility See page 42 for how to use that facility in a real life situation Here s how to program the phrase Note This information cannot be entered for files that reside on a floppy disk Be sure to copy your song to the internal memory or a memory card see p 161 and to edit that copy On the SONG OPTIONS page press the field OIG ripe hs Play the melody on the keyboard to be assigned as Play amp Search signature J a ine dadete RENAME Play the notes of the main theme the one you ll most likely play when using Play amp Search for locating this song The key and rhythm are of little importance you must get the intervals right though The boxes will display a quarter note for every note you played Five note boxes thus mean that you played five notes If you make a mistake proceed as follows to cor rect it Press the field if you only wish to correct the last note you entered Press to erase all notes you have played so far Then play the notes again Press the field to save this information i e the selected song file in the internal memory or on memory card Songs for which there is Play amp Search information are flagged with a note symbol 4 to the left of their names Mi Copy This function allows you to copy the selected song to anot
203. 2 Specify the memory area that contains the User Program you need EXTERNAL MEMORY or FLOPPY The display shows a list of 5 User Programs of the selected device internal memory card or floppy disk Note The E 80 does not support User Programs of the old Roland E and KR series 3 Press the field of the User Program you need If the name is not displayed use PAGE to go to a different page then press the field of the settings you are interested in This page lists the names of all individual User Pro grams contained on the selected media Quick location of the User Program you need There are several ways of quickly locating the User Pro gram you are after W Sorting files Press a field to sort the User Program files USER PRG The files are sorted alphabetically according to User Program name STYLE LINK The files are sorted alphabetically according to Style name all User Programs refer to a Style GENRE The files are sorted alphabetically according to genre kind of music SONG LINK User Program files with an active link to a song file are sorted alphabetically according to song name The right column now contains the selected entry only one of them can be displayed along with the User Program name Continue with step 3 to select the User Program you want to use T 2 3 W Using the Index function The highest hierarchical level of the User Program Finder database is called Index All search op
204. 2 000 Note 55 G 3 02 000 Note 60 C 4 123 02 000 Note 62 0 4 04 000 Note 55 G 3 Ee COPY E A EVENT amp gt ad ad ad d Note For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting event types that should not be included in the copy See VIEW on p 221 e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a blue back ground e Press the COPY EVENT button Icon Each new selection will replace the previous one Mm PLACE EVENT This function is only available if the Style Composer s clipboard already contains events that you copied using COPY EVENT Press the button icon The following pop up appears SILAS SMT AGIC SBT 1 01 000 Beat Chanae 6 PLACE EVENT 2 017 Sys Ex FO 41 10000008121 2 021 Sys Ex FO H 10 00 00 08 121 Specify the position where the first event you copied should be inserted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new event s Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Note Events inserted with PLACE EVENT are added to any events that may already exist in that area Existing events are thus not pushed towards the end of the song oo
205. 2 large sealed enclosure 2x4 condenser mic MS STACK 1 large sealed enclosure 2x4 condenser mic MS STACK2 large sealed enclosure 2x4 condenser mic 1 1 1 METAL STACK large double stack 12x4 condenser mic 1 1 2 STACK large sealed enclosure 2x4 condenser mic 3 STACK large sealed enclosure 2x4 condenser mic Mic Setting 1 2 3 Adjusts the location of the mic that is recording the sound of the speaker This can be adjusted in three steps with the mic becoming more distant in the order of 1 2 and 3 Mic Level 0 127 Volume of the microphone Direct Level 0 127 Volume of the direct sound Level 0 127 Output level 48 Step Phaser The phaser effect will be varied gradually Phaser Mode 4 Stage 8 Stage 12 Stage Number of Stages in the phaser Phaser Manual 0 127 Adjusts the basic frequency from which the sound will be modulated Step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Step Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Frequency i e modula tion speed Step Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync param eter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation
206. 3 Selecting MUSIC SIVICS 2 9 2 445 anes 27 Changing the tempo 0 cece eee eae 28 About the Keyboard modes 64 Using the Keyboard parts 0 005 28 Arranger Organ Guitar and Piano modes 64 Playing with an Upper and or Lower part 28 Split and Whole Modes cxcewdaduxdecevudasee des 65 Alternating between sounds 0005 29 Using the SPLIT Keyboard MOUE orsssisaiiarrissrsssi 65 Selecting sounds for the Keyboard parts 29 Using WHOLE mode 0 0 cece eee eee 65 Drumming on the keyboard 200005 31 Switching parts on and Off ssscceeeesseeeeenesueee ds 65 eect aes nom Bin eX NOISE cee Using the performance functions 66 Using the Harmonic Bars 0 00000 e eee 33 ie Pitch Bend and Modulation 8 66 iT VOU likea FEQISH AON ssiri 34 a About the MANUAL field 0 00ec0ees0eee 34 Transposition sess seese ae ee oN Using just one organ sound and bass pedals 34 Setting the transposition interval via the display 67 Using effects 0 0 aooaa LaL 34 Global Wransp0sess 560 420052ea2asneeersanauccees 67 Playing realistic guitar parts Guitar mode Se 26 Octave nainen PE 67 PUSS at he e R E a at 36 Key Touch velocity sensitivity ssrisssaersesss 68 Additional ARPEGGIO functions 37 Master TUNG 1 eee cece 69 Leaving the E 80 s Guitar mode
207. 4 82 INVErSION noana aaan 77 83 129 BC GAIN rie esse rs os ping a 115 LEVEL s ovovreerererarswnertnibods 115 Beat COX nnnnninnninnnii ienaa 35 DO as ee EEE NE aG 247 Best Selection z sre sesisicessntreseriesnin erinran 30 Se a EE 217 BMP Laa E a tteceeeeeeeeeenerrvate ee e 56 Ws a N 132 Break MUTE erreur u 72 76 78 BUDDIES a E A 123 P rA 43 C Ea E 103 MD E 239 COPIE ss cccacccecenanesancsnnuueen 52 Card Memory non annnaanaannnnnaan 247 Category 0 cece eee 42 159 CCOO c2scececananncaeend 187 218 243 CONG sa segeccanconcaaeaaauecaseene 239 D 188 218 243 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Index Celeste ic bbboicecctabeecneaewewen 124 CHAI ceo aa 164 Change Gate M oo 6at cit d betes eeand 186 217 a A 185 217 CHANING E 239 240 BasIC E 241 243 CRO ceca ca es aapna 25 POdOL ETTE E 39 Displaying nnna ppp anaana nana 53 i ae eee 155 O e ie aa aed 74 89 OTT MUUING 2 00000000sseeeeeeenacs 39 Chord TeCOQniON 5 244444544444 wees 88 NOS 2544 asrencececaosennesennes 143 Drum Instrument wvccescneexnaed 2 145 POMMOWICDelscceticcseaeeeeceness 35 Harmony Effect eececaceceeu geaeace aa 124 Keyboard parts 0008 110 HOVE ieee teem nme mn nase nee 147 it EEE 120 122 124 Song Style 116 140 147 Style COMPOSEr 32222222522422 00 211 Sle DON Ki adnknccnecaneressnee 116 Vocal HarmoOnist vccscicictceteiiteeaanane 122 Sic ere 123 Clear ALL nananana 166 C SPE 245
208. 4 0 12 semitone Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift A in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Pitch B Coarse 24 0 12 semitone Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift B in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Pitch A Fine 100 0 100 cent Makes fine adjust ments to the pitch of Pitch Shift A in 2 cent steps 100 100 cents One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Pitch B Fine 100 0 100 cent Makes fine adjust ments to the pitch of Pitch Shift B in 2 cent steps 100 100 cents One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Pitch A Pre Delay 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift A sound is heard 25 E 80 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Pitch B Pre Delay 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift B sound is heard Pitch A Panpot L64 0 63R Adjusts the stereo location of the Pitch Shift A sound L64 is far left O is center and 63R Is far right Pitch B Panpot L64 0 63R Adjusts the stereo location of the Pitch Shift B sound L64 is far left O is center and 63R is far right Level Balance A100 0B A50 50B AO 100B Adjusts the volume balance between the Pitch Shift A and Pitch Shift B sounds When set to A100 0B only the sound of Pitch Shift A is output when set to A0 100B only the sound of Pitch Shift B is output Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between th
209. 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should Start after the selected beat Erase NOTE From 2 1 0 To 4 1 0 eS eS SS 6 Eo TO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat 131 E 80 Music Workstation Using the 16 track Sequencer MEDATA TYPE Allows you to select the data to be erased ALL All parameters listed below Note Only note messages P Bender Pitch Bend data Control Control change messages Change Prog C Program change messages NRPN Non registered parameter number messages These are parameter control functions of the GS GM2 format that are easier to use than SysEx messages but basically have the same function RPN Registered parameter number messages They work like NRPN messages and are understood by many GM and GM2 compatible tone genera tors CAF Channel Aftertouch messages If you don t really
210. 5 48 FROME Wa Nelnaas cateune E aaaeee 13 Not convinced SOT4l non ccanscvecesanasaendddabe ds 48 Rear panel oo 0 c cece cece cece cece eee rrai 18 e T EE TE EET 49 AUOT Oor terrere Er A EEEE 49 Setting up and demo songs 20 Using the VOCODEl 42 525 saivwae vealelele eae ene e s 50 ConA UONE eisg oe tctd an e a ate tert 20 ae ee ee 51 Switching the E 80 on off 0 21 Automatic transposition Singer Key 0 51 Internal Memory PIOlECl lt lt 5 2ncnaenenqnnuneakeaeus 21 Displaying Lyrics and chord information 53 Seung Ce CisplayCONWAST a 21 Displaying SCOPES Setar canorceenenee0aa0000eeuaeanns 54 Switching ON Wie ECU onanntiiccctedececcedddas x 21 Using the VIEWER function 56 Interactive demo of the E 80 22 Working with picture files BMP Import 56 The man AO Cra b tenses dacdasien eudacewunet asad 23 Working with text files TXT Import 58 Quick Start ccccccceceeeceeeceeeueees 24 a A V U ae a e 60 Recording with Style backing srrccsscssissrrisirssm 60 he general idea nnnn nnan nn naana anaa 24 may l l Listening to Your SOND 2 eee eee eee 60 Playing to an automatic accompaniment niin 25 Recording without accompaniment 61 Professional PaHSIONS A Messsissss sistin 26 Adding more parts oaoa aaoo aa 61 Intro amp Ending EEPE TT AET E TTET 26 Saving yOUr SONG aoaaa aaa 6
211. 5 ps 3 2 1 NWBoco oO Note the UPPER 1 message in the upper right hand corner It means that by moving the sliders below the display you change the sound of the right hand organ assigned to the UP1 part This information is confirmed by the TONE ASSIGN button it lights Play a few notes with your right hand and move the sliders below the display to change the organ registration The numbers appearing on the harmonic bars allow you to rapidly set the bars to the desired value If you push a virtual harmonic bar inward until no number is visible its volume will be 0 and no sound will be heard If you pull a harmonic bar all the way out the volume will be at the maximum Each harmonic bar is assigned to a sine wave pure tone of a set pitch By mixing these sine waves you can create a variety of organ sounds If necessary press the PERCUSSION fields left side to switch the organ percussion on off and change its speed and timbre Note While percussion is on the 1 pitch is not available Play a few notes with your left hand 33 E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start 7 The organ sound you hear now is assigned to the LOWER 1 part To change it press the TONE ASSIGN button or the MODE button below the sliders and move the sliders eres HARMONIG BARS co LOWER REGISTRATION E G Ee Ee m a aG a ee lif 2 H lij k ham A E Of course you can also change the PERCUSSION
212. 6 Allows you to select the track you wish to transpose You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks When used with the option TRANSPOSE is also useful for drum tracks It allows you to select another snare or kick sound for example Most Drum Sets provide at least two snares one assigned to note num ber 38 D2 and a second assigned to note number 40 E2 By entering FROM NOTE 38 pressing the field and selecting 2 you can change your D2 snare to the E2 snare WE FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 80 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should Start after the selected beat TO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of ava
213. 80 s button to switch it off Note If you need to turn off the power completely first turn off the POWER switch then unplug the power cord from the power outlet Note Be sure to wait 2 3 seconds before switching the E 80 back on E 80 Music Workstation Setting up and demo songs Interactive demo of the E 80 Your E 80 contains an interactive demo that introduces all of its highlights It might be a good idea to try it out now The demo Is self explanatory so we l just show you how to start and stop it 1 2 3 4 Simultaneously press the PLAY LIST and MINUS ONE buttons PLAY NEXT MINUS LIST SONG ONE 2 E 80 uses Roland s most powerful sound engine ever vith a huge internal wave emory it boasts the best ounds from the Roland library f HARMONIST i ttle If necessary press the LANGUAGE field and select the language for this interactive demo function LANGUAGE gt Se English UK English U 5 4 Deutsch Fran ais Espa ol Italiano Nederlands Pyccknit Press if you didn t mean to select this page The current language selection will not change Press the field that provides access to the desired demo function There are 12 sound demo songs 12 Style demo songs 1 lyrics amp score demo and one Vocal Harmonist demo If you can barely hear the music set the knob far left MASTER section to a higher level 5 To stop the demo and leave the E 80 s Demo func
214. 9 Rotary 39 CHO Delay 69 Serial Delay 10 Compressor 40 Flanger DLY 70 MLT Tap DLY 11 Limiter 41 CHO Flanger 71 Reverse DLY 12 Hexa Chorus 42 Isolator 72 Shuffle DLY 13 Trem Chorus 43 Low Boost 73 3D Delay 14 Space D 44 Super Filter 74 Long Time DLY 15 St Chorus 45 Step Filter 75 Tape Echo 16 St Flanger 46 Humanizer 76 LoFi Noise 17 Step Flanger 47 Speaker Sim 77 LoFi Comp 18 St Delay 48 Step Phaser 78 LoFi Radio 19 Mod Delay 49 MLT Phaser 79 Telephone 20 3 Tap Delay 50 Inf Phaser 80 Phonograph 21 4 Tap Delay 51 Ring Modul 81 Step Pitch 22 Time Delay 52 Step Ring 82 Sympa Reso 23 2 Pitch Shifter 53 Tremolo 83 VIB OD Rotary 24 FBK Pitch 54 Auto Pan 84 Center Canc 25 Reverb 55 Step Pan 26 Gate Reverb 56 Slicer 27 OD gt Chorus 57 VK Rotary 28 OD gt Flanger 58 3D Chorus 29 OD gt Delay 59 3D Flanger 30 DST gt Chorus 60 3D Step Figr Note Each MFX A B and C can be assigned to as many instruments as you like Be aware however that selecting a different type will affect all instruments that use this MFX pro cessor e f you also want to change the parameters of the selected type press the AxC button field to jump to the following page MRATA e al Si Pt seno 68 LONG DELAY CO e See Selecting another MFX type and editing it on p 117 for details e Press the field to return to the previously selected page W Equalizer e Press the
215. AIN pattern is playing then press the button STYLE CONTROL BASS SYNC ___ INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START STOP AUTO FILL IN At the end of the current pattern cycle the Arranger Starts playing the Ending pattern and then stops While the Ending phrase is playing the MEASURE field on the main page counts backwards 4 3 etc to indicate the pattern s duration Again there are four Ending phrases to choose from If you don t press a numeric button 1 lt 4 after switching on END RIT the Arranger automatically uses the ENDING phrase that corresponds to the MAIN number you have been using up to that point E 80 Music Workstation Roland Playing to an automatic accompaniment Note Here again it would be wiser not to play chords while the Ending phrase is running Note See Additional Arranger Style functions on p 82 for more Arranger functions Note You can also select patterns via the Aftertouch function See p 83 Selecting Music Styles So far we have been using only one Music Style the one that is selected automatically at power on Here is how to select a different accompaniment 1 Press a button of the STYLE pad to select a Music Style family _ STYLE LIVE DISCO 8 BEAT 16 BEAT BAND ROCK DANCE CONTEMP BALL JAZZ BOSSA ROOM BLUES 50 s amp 60 s SAMBA LATIN WORLD The indicator of that button lights and the display looks as follows WE Bee ts S Western
216. AL Phase is not changed INVERT Phase is inverted FBK Phase Right Normal Invert Select the phase of the right delay sound NORMAL Phase is not changed INVERT Phase is inverted Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS 0 Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 19 Mod Delay This effect adds modulation to the delayed sound producing an effect similar to a Flanger Delay FBK Mode Normal Cross Select the way in which delay sound is fed back into the effect NORMAL The left delay sound will be fed back into the left delay and the right delay sound into the right delay CROSS The left delay sound will be fed back into the right delay and the right delay sound into the left delay Delay Left 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay Right 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay sound is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the a
217. AUTO SUSTAIN When this function is on default set ting all guitar notes you trigger using the ARPEGGIO keys have a longer decay If you switch it off the notes are a lot shorter HOLD PEDAL This function only works if you connect an optional DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U footswitch to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket The pedal s behavior depends on whether is on or off When is on while is also on pressing the Hold pedal temporarily bypasses the setting and thus causes the guitar notes to have a short decay If is off while is on pressing the Hold pedal temporarily produces a normal Hold damper effect Note This Hold function is added to the one that allows you to hold notes played by the active Keyboard parts MBS LW2 LW1 and or UP3 if they have been assigned to that footswitch see p 76 DOUBLING This section allows you to add a second guitar to the main guitar part That added guitar uses the same sound as your main guitar The purpose of this added guitar is to create the impression that the guitar part is played by two musicians STEREO WIDTH 0 50 This parameter allows you to specify the distance between the two guitars in the ste reo sound field The higher the value the further they are panned to the left and right sides respectively STRUMM UP These button fields are mutually exclu sive and only apply to the two D notes of the STRUM MING section NOTE ON means that the strum is played when you
218. All Vocal Harmonist parts except the ALK option provide additional parameters Procedure for selecting these pages 1 Press the button Lasse por Lasse ee ARRANGER i E SETTING Ge old Ltt Proctor ION 0 ml W ores DATA W IT E ores 2 Press the field The display changes to mein ee tae SHALL TYPE cee p gt ae am ae a Ka pikaj 3 Press or to specify which sec tion you wish to edit 4 In the second row press the field that corresponds to the VOCAL HARMONIST part you wish to edit You could also press and hold the corresponding but ton on the front panel We suggest connecting a microphone and to sing talk while making the following settings Tr me 4 oo TSO 11 Editing the Vocal Harmonist parts Singer settings When the indicator lights your solo singing is output Press and hold the button to jump to the following page VOCAL eao e GENDER VOICE INPUT eke MALE f pape 1 Press the MALE or FEMALE field This is an important clue for the HARMONY processor Vocoder Small or Ensemble It does not change the character of your live singing though Press the field that corresponds to your voice type That way the added harmony voices will sound even more convincing 2 Press the field to add an automatic Vibrato effect to your singing Note that this is probably only useful as gimmick your natural vibrato no doubt s
219. B On Off Allows you to switch the Rotary effect on first time and off second This only works if the Harmonic Bars are being used by UP1 LW1 and or MBS User Program Up User Program Down Allows you to select the next Up or previous Down User Program Play Stop Song Starts and stops the Recorder Same function as the button Jalk The footswitch performs the same function as the button in the VOCAL HARMONIST section Harmony On Off The footswitch allows you to switch the currently selected HARMONY function VOCODER or ENSEMBLE on and off Select this function if you want to switch the harmonies on for the choruses and off for the verses for example while playing on the keyboard Minus One The footswitch allows you to switch the Minus One function on and off See page 45 for how to select the option that will be used when the Minus One function is on Break Mute When you pess the footswitch Arranger playback is muted for the remainder of the current mea sure This is great for rock n roll songs Viewer Page Down Viewer Page Up Allows you to select the previous Down or next Up TXT or BMP page in the E 80 s internal memory See page 56 for details 5 Press the button to return to the main page 7G Hold Footswitch Sustain Also called Sustain or Damper pedal the footswitch you connect to the PEDAL HOLD socket allows you to hold the notes you play on the key
220. BD MODE but ton its indicator must light Press PART ON OFF to switch off the LOWER 1 part Note You could connect a PK 5A MIDI pedal to the E 80 s MIDI IN socket and use it to trigger the MBS M BASS part See page 237 for the E 80 s MIDI functions Using effects An organ sound without rotary speaker modulation is only half an organ sound right So let s have a look at this and the other effects because the E 80 provides a lot more than just a convincing rotary effect 1 On the HARMONIC BARS page UPPER 1 LOWER 1 or M BASS press the field in the upper left hand corner These effects are shared by all three organ sections It therefore doesn t matter on what page you press the field HARMONIC BAR EFFECTS lt LEAKAGE B 6 ad HARD MIN MAK MIN MAH ROTARY SOUND IBRATO CHORUS SLOW HARMONIC BAR OVERDRIVE This effect distorts the sound giving it an edge and making it suitable for hard rock and similar musical genres Press the field to switch this effect on or off To change the setting press the display icon and rotate the dial or use the DEC INC buttons LEAKAGE On tone wheel organs the sound of the note that was pressed is slightly contaminated by audio signals from tone wheels not related to that note Formerly this was seen as a problem but today this idiosyncrasy is considered an important element of the distinctive sound of a traditional instrument
221. Back e Specify the position to which the first event in chro nological order of the selected group should be shifted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to confirm your settings and move the event s Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Mm COPY EVENT This function allows you to copy one or several events Use to insert a copy of those events at the desired position b po Change ii 01 000 Beat Change 4 4 EENT 01 037 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 38 06 01 F7 01 056 Sys Ex FOH 104212 40 01 00 20 28 MASIEHRAGKEDIII 01 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F EVENT 01 043 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 33 5432 F7 01 099 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 00 20 28 Tempo Change 0 0 01 031 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F 0 0 01 050 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 34 5431 F move 0 0 04 060 Tempo Change 0 0 2 000 Tempo Change 52 2 060 Tempo Change 46 03 000 Tempo Change 140 Note For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting event types that should not be included in the copy See VIEW on p 191 e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a blue back ground e Press the COPY EVENT button
222. Beam controller while the dis play changes to DIBEAM You can also select this page by pressing the button gt field field But the above method is a lot faster 2 Start playback of a Style page 25 or song page 41 3 Move your hand towards and away from the D Beam s eyes What you hear now is the VinyIRPM effect Now let s do some scratching 4 Press the field 5 Again move your hand towards and away from the D Beam Now you should hear a scratch sound Try out some other effects by pressing the SOUND EFX INSTRUMENTS and CONTROL fields and selecting one of the available options 6 Press the button to return to the main page D Beam functions The D Beam Controller has two sensors that detect motion such as your hand or body movements in front of it These sensed positions are translated into MIDI messages that can be assigned to a variety of parameters 1 If you want to assign another function to the D BEAM without actually selecting it press and hold the D BEAM button that is assigned to the func tion you wish to use If you also wish to switch this function on briefly press the corresponding button D BEAN i y DJ GEAR rsm CONTROLS Cro rare Rind TT Motor Style f TT Motor Song eB i There are 4 groups DJ GEAR SOUND EFX INSTRUM and CONTROLS Press the field that corresponds to the desired function see below Use the
223. Before saving your made up song or Style to the internal memory a card or a floppy disk you can but you don t have to commit your changes thereby turning them into regular song or Style data MAKEUP TOOLS settings are SysEx data only the E 80 understands This may come in handy for two reasons e To be able to edit the final version of your song or Style with the 16 track Sequencer Style Converter or Style Composer Those functions ignore the cos metic SysEx data you add using the MAKEUP TOOLS e To play back your new song version on another sequencer or your computer The Styles can only be read by the E 80 anyway To commit your changes press the FREEZE DATA field on any of the pages discussed So far zels lt P The display responds with Operation Complete when the data have been converted Careful this operation cannot be undone Note This operation is unnecessary for files you only want to use with the E 80 143 1 2 Saving your modified song or Style The changes saved with the following procedure affect the selected song or Style file directly They are not part of the settings that are saved to a User Program If you are happy with your changes and wish to preserve them press the field The display changes to SAS SOS res were B ARTIST GENRE B FILE HAME KICS mza Dee po OF SAVE STYLE EXTERNAL INTERNAL MEMORY ME
224. Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 COLOMBIA Centro Musical Ltda Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 Medellin Colombia TEL 574 3812529 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CURACAO Zeelandia Music Center Inc Orionweg 30 Curacao Netherland Antilles TEL 305 5926866 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez Calle Proyecto Central No 3 Ens La Esperilla Santo Domingo Dominican Republic TEL 809 683 0305 ECUADOR Mas Musika Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma Guayaquil Ecuador TEL 593 4 2302364 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II Edificio No 4010 San Salvador EL SALVADOR TEL 262 0788 GUATEMALA Casa Instrumental Calzada Roosevelt 34 01 zona 11 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala TEL 502 599 2888 HONDURAS Almacen Pajaro Azul S A de C V BO Paz Barahona 3 Ave 11 Calle S O San Pedro Sula Honduras TEL 504 553 2029 MARTINIQUE Musique amp Son Z I Les Mangle 97232 Le Lamantin Martinique F W I TEL 596 596 426860 Gigamusic SARL 10 Rte De La Folie 97200 Fort De France Martinique F W I TEL 596 596 715222 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluc
225. CO0 127 and displays their official name wherever possible not all control change numbers have universally accepted functions The value can be set between 0 and 127 Program Change These messages are used for select ing sounds within the current bank 1 128 Pitch Bend These messages are used for temporary changes to the pitch of the notes being played at that time Pitch Bend messages can be positive higher or negative lower Setting range 128 128 Poly Aftertouch This refers to aftertouch messages the E 80 does not generate it uses channel aftertouch Its sound source recognizes them however The difference between polyphonic aftertouch and channel aftertouch is that the former is related to a single note while the latter applies to all the notes the track is currently play ing Channel Aftertouch See above These messages are generated by the E 80 s keyboard Editing events W Editing Pitch Bend messages Pitch Bend messages can be positive or negative the range is 128 128 The value 0 means that the pitch of notes being played in that area is not altered E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing song data using Microscope Edit If a Pitch Bend occurrence is not reset to 0 at some Stage all notes will keep sounding flat when you no longer want them to Mi Editing control changes and aftertouch messages These messages CC Poly Aftertouch and Channel Aftertouch can be set to the desir
226. DINARY roti SmilePop tg Oe Pop 100 i o Groovy Rock i E Back xf ror FOUND 43 Pe d ack PA Pi JB a GLOBAL 48 5 6 7 User Program Set and MIDI Set files only have a file name you can change As there Is no Finder function ality for such files the display looks a little different Factory Live 2004 My User Program Select the media INTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY disk or EXTERNAL MEMORY memory card If available and necessary use the sorting func tions and or the Finder These functions are only available for songs and Styles and only if you select or EXTERNAL MEMORY See also pages 40 and 95 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Delete Delete Use these functions to delete the selected User Pro gram Set MIDI Set set song or Music Style from the internal memory a memory card or floppy disk Carefully check whether you selected the right file type and the right file before pressing EXECUTE Deleted files cannot be restored Also note that MIDI Sets contain 8 different settings which means that you may lose a lot more than origi nally intended And if you delete a song that is used in a Play List that list changes loses one step while a User Program whose Link function you activated no longer finds the required song On the other hand deleting a User Program Set only does away with the List and GLOBAL settings the User Programs it refers to remain intact Press th
227. DJ GEAR SOUND EFX and fields to select the remaining groups and assign the desired function as well The assignments of all four groups DJ GEAR SOUND EFX INSTRUM CONTROLS will be written to a User Program one per group so that you can also alter nate between these groups while playing and still use your favorite settings 2 _ 3 _ DJ Gear Vinyl RPM Allows you to simulate the sound you hear when manually turning a vinyl record to locate cue the position where you wish to start playback Cutting This is a very powerful filter effect that allows you to suppress the high frequencies in a rhythmic way like a DJ does sometimes IT Motor Simulates the effect you hear when you sud denly stop a turntable the playback speed decreases while the pitch drops and the sound becomes muffled Scratching The D Beam Controller can be used for add ing scratch noises You know what that is don t you Tape Rewind Allows you add the sound you hear when you rewind a cassette tape without stopping playback the music plays backwards and at high speed E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the D Beam Controller Sound EFX Here you can select various noises to be added to your music simply by moving your hand over the D Beam We will not try to describe them just try them out DBEAM DJ GEAR SOUND EF INSTRUM M CONTROLS exe Qer If necessary u
228. Dw 3 Fill Dw ALL Intro 1 Intro 2 Intro 3 Intro 4 Intro ALL End 1 End 2 End 3 End 4 or Ending ALL WE EXECUTE 15 After setting everything to your liking press this field to launch the conversion If you don t want to convert the Standard MIDI File phrases into a Music Style press the field to return to the 16 track Sequencer s main page 16 Now save your Music Style e Press the button The display changes to DES Mele pA obey e Press SAVE followed by STYLE Sess SAE EXTERNAL MEMORY cou 4 G 4 f INTERNAL MEMORY This page allows you to save the current Style to the internal memory a memory card or a floppy disk e Press the INTERNAL MEMORY EXTERNAL MEMORY or field to select the area where you want to save the Music Style e Enter the name for the file See page 52 If necessary you can also supply the required COUNTRY and GENRE information for use with the STYLE FINDER function ZOO Note The E 80 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names Choose whichever is more convenient or clearer 17 Press the field to save the data If the selected memory area already contains a Music Style of that name you are asked whether It is OK to overwrite it already exists ss Overwrite e Press the field to overwrite the file This replaces the Music Style in question with the new version e Press the field to return to the
229. EL allows you to set the output level of the Reverb processor Setting this parameter to 0 means that you no longer hear the effect in question If you don t want to edit the effects parameters con tinue with the next step otherwise jump to step 5 4 Press to return to the display page with the modules or Press the button to return to the main page 5 After selecting a reverb type you may want to fine tune some of its parameters If so proceed as follows e Press the field of the parameter you wish to change the number of fields and their functions depend on the selected type e Set the desired value Parameter values can be set by turning the dial by pressing the DEC INC but tons or by pressing the dial and using the on screen numeric pad SRV Room SRV Hall SRV Plate parameters Pre Delay 0 0 100 0 ms Adjusts the delay time between the direct sound until the reverb sound is heard This is used to simulate the distance between the original signal and the reflective surfaces Time 0 127 The duration of the reverb signal The higher the value the longer the simulated room becomes Size 1 8 Determines how the later reverberations are propagated which gives the listener important clues about the height of the simulated room High Cut 160 12500Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which the high frequency content of the reverb will be reduced If you do not want t
230. EQUALIZER field to switch the equalizer on or off for this instrument The equalizer can be used to refine the sound image by avoiding unpleasant overlaps in certain frequency ranges Conversely increasing the level of certain fre quencies can be used as an effect 143 E 80 Music Workstation Song and Style Makeup Tools e Press the EQUALIZER field to change the equal e Press the EQUALIZER field to call up the izer settings The display changes to INSTRUMENT EQUALIZER page e Press the field to assign the equal izer settings to the newly selected instrument e Press the field to return to the previously selected page DIST ROUMENITT SDAD Er INSTR VOL D gim Ai SOUND EDIT for sounds SS Pressing the field on any of the 9B VALUES VALUES STNOTE iad dtz wd cr So ed MAKEUP TOOLS pages takes you to the following page where you can make more refined changes to the selected instrument see SOUND EDIT for Drum Sets on p 145 if you selected a Drum Set The name of the currently selected instrument is dis played in the upper left corner You cannot select dif ferent instruments here though e Press the button icon to the right of the Ei N EUP TOOLS display to switch the equalizer on or off for the Cerere COREY eor selected instrument or The field indicates that you can change the B B parameters on this page It cannot be switched off eres e Press the field of the parameter you wish to c
231. ERESET 140 a E EEE 128 133 Makeup TOOlS s seee a 140 Melody Intell Link 85 Micro Edit ptuaeoeerereoeeeencces 220 MIDI parameters n a nannaa 241 NC EE 108 a i PEIEE oe eee 29 80 Pars ono iz cate a etetetetatatatoteteteta 108 eee Sere er erer Tees Terr ree 241 Programming eee eee 201 Quick location 95 RECOMiMVOOCswacasancaaaaasscee 205 ROCOPING a22c2a02oaneeaeatetenes 60 MEVE D teat changaeadiaaaaaanans 147 DANG esc ccueeteacewee aero 148 228 E ae a sya 5 4444445545505552 27 AITA oe 0 ee eee es 82 LER Oare tear eer 147 205 CCIE i EEE 212 A stata EE 25 VOUE e errrsrreccestisteaai 147 241 DUCT HAW sercreteccesnaeeaecnee eens 121 Sustain wee a annann anaana anaa 39 76 DEY ETTE EEEE EEE 47 LONE eE E 102 Switch on off 20 eee 21 DV iCjecacaecedtecaaaeaasaaaaanae 25 83 Synchro Lyrics 002 ee eee 170 SVNCHTONIZANON sy aneceseaccesena we 240 DVS e O EO 44 243 PICT i tintin eae aaaaaannnas 239 OV SICMI RARA EEEE 240 T TA pete pee pe 51 76 78 122 ROU Oaceceaeeanneennuenaneee 123 WAN iced ay atatatt tated date oe aces 28 75 Style Composer Style Converter Synchronization Transpose settings Link BMP or TXT Program change Select manually MIDI parameter Song MIDI Set Link Style Composer Drum Instrument Video Out Source 0 00 54 57 58 OUTPUT oe ee ee 54 NICU Glace ieee ah na eae 56 Link to User Program
232. Ex FO 41 10 42124001 00 20 28 ENE 01 099 Sys Ex FO 41 10 4212 40 01 00 20 28 04 060 Tempo Change 02 000 Tempo Change 52 02 060 Tempo Change 46 Tempo Change Press to return to the 16 track Sequencer s main page or bear with us Other edit operations You probably noticed the fields in the right half of the MASTER TRACK EDIT page They allow you to reduce or expand the number of events of the MAS TER track mVIEW Press this button icon if the list of MASTER track events has become so long that finding the events becomes a little difficult The following pop up appears aa UIEW SELECT T 7 Gh 8 x sz 2 i Switch on the button icons of the events you want to see in the list the indicator in question must light green refers to tempo events to time sig nature changes and to SysEx messages Press to switch on all button icons or to switch them all off in which case the MASTER TRACK EDIT list only contains the End of Data message Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Press to close the pop up window and use your changes 198 E 80 Music Workstation Using the 16 track Sequencer E CREATE EVENT Press this button icon to add a new event to the MASTER track The following pop up appears SILAS SISA SUT CREATE EVENT Gam al EXCLUSIVE PLACE EVENT a e Press the button icon that corresponds to the kind of event y
233. F Allows you to select the slow or fast speed of the Rotary effect This only works if the Har monic Bars are being used by UP1 LW1 and or MBS Rotary HB On Off Allows you to switch the Rotary effect on first time and off second This only works if the Harmonic Bars are being used by UP1 LW1 and or MBS Scale Upper Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 79 setting to the three Upper parts Scale Lower Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 79 setting to the Lower parts Arr Chord Off Allows you to switch the Arranger s chord recognition off in which case only the drum per cussion of the selected Music Style keeps playing or can be used See also page 88 User Prg Up User Prg Down Allows you to select the next Up or previous Down User Program Punch In Out The footswitch can be used to activate and switch off punch in out recording using the E 80 s sequencer page 176 VAY A E 80 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Portamento Switches the Portamento function Expression Foot Pedal page 101 on and off An optional EV 5 EV 7 or BOSS FV 300L expression Soft Sostenuto Hold The footswitch can be used as a pedal connected to the FOOT PEDAL socket allows you Soft Sostenuto or Sustain Hold pedal Note that Hold to control the volume of all parts by foot You can can also be controlled using a dedicated but optional DP 2 DP 6
234. F frequencies in the region of the cutoff HPF frequencies above the cutoff NOTCH frequencies other than the region of the cutoff Filter Slope 12 24 36 dB Amount of attenuation per octave 36dB extremely steep 24dB steep 12dB gentle Filter Resonance 0 127 Filter resonance level Increas ing this value will emphasize the region near the cutoff frequency Filter Gain 0 12 dB Amount of boost for the filter output Level 0 127 Output level 46 Humanizer Adds a vowel character to the sound making it similar to a human voice Drive Sw OFF ON Turns Drive on off Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the vol ume Vowel 1 a e i 0 u Vowel 2 a e i o u Selects the vowel 2 GO Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the rate should be synchro nized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Frequency at which the two vowels switch Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Effect depth Input Sync Sw Off On Determines whether the LFO for switching the vowels is reset by the input signal ON or not OFF Input
235. Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no fil ter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Post Filter Cutoff 200 8000 Bypass Center frequency of the filter W P Noise Type White Pink Switch between white noise and pink noise W P Noise LPF 200 8000 Bypass Center frequency of the low pass filter applied to the white pink noise BYPASS no cut W P Noise Level 0 127 Volume of the white pink noise E 80 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Disc Noise Type LP EP SP RND Type of record noise The frequency at which the noise is heard depends on the selected type Disc Noise LPF 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter applied to the record noise If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Disc Noise Level 0 127 Volume of the record noise Hum Noise Type 50Hz 60Hz Frequency of the hum noise Hum Noise LPF 200 8000Hz Bypass Center frequency of the low pass filter applied to the hum noise BYPASS no cut Hum Noise Level 0 127 Volume of the hum noise EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect so
236. For the LINE setting to work with electric guitars or basses you need to connect such instruments to an effects pedal or rack effect in bypass mode and connect the effect s output to the INPUT socket INPUT socket This is where you can to connect an optional microphone like a Roland DR 10 or DR 20 or other external signal source you wish to process using the E 80 s Vocal Harmonist facility This is a combo socket to which you can connect either a bal anced XLR or unbalanced 1 4 jack The socket does not provide phantom power Note The INPUT socket is mono E 80 Music Workstation Roland Front panel OUTPUT MAIN R amp L MONO sockets These sockets need to be connected to an external amplifier mixing consoles etc There is a switch that allows you to switch off the E 80 s internal speakers when using these sockets See 40 above Note If you can want to use only one channel on your exter nal amplifier connect the L MONO socket to its input For opti mum sound quality we recommend working in stereo though AC socket This is where you need to connect the supplied power cord 19 E 80 Music Workstation Setting up and demo songs Setting up and demo songs You must be dying to try out your new E 80 to see what it is capable of We ll get to that in a minute But first we need to connect It Connections The E 80 contains internal speakers You therefore don t need to connect it to an external amplifier
237. Gate Time 0 127 Duration of the pitch shifted sound at each step 2 7 O Fine 100 100 Pitch shift adjustment for all steps 2 cent units Delay Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a time or a note value Delay Time msec 0 1300ms Delay time from the original sound until the pitch shifted sound is heard Delay Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the pitch shifted sound that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 82 Sympa Reso On an acoustic piano holding down the damper pedal allows other strings to resonate in sympathy with the notes you play creating rich and spacious resonances This effect simu lates these sympathetic resonances Depth 0 127 Depth of the effect Damper 0 127 Depth to which the damper pedal i
238. HARMONIC RT BAR GQ C prace 2 Chace gt USER PROGRAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 U DEFAULT J 1 Assignable sliders These sliders can be used as virtual harmonic bars when the button lights In that case refer to the footage indications above the slid ers for their specific function page 33 Note The HARMONIC BAR function is only available for the following parts UP1 LW1 and MBS TYPE buttons The TYPE buttons are used to select the parameter that can be changed using the sliders stereo position or volume reverb or chorus MODE buttons These four buttons allow you to specify the part group whose settings you want to change Recorder parts Arranger parts Keyboard parts and HARMONIC BAR 25 DATA ENTRY NUMERIC PAD PUSH 26 SONG DATA ENTRY section The dial can be used to set the value of the parameter field that is currently highlighted Turn it to scroll through the available settings You can also press it to call up a numeric key pad that allows you to enter the desired value by pressing the corresponding fields in the display To change the selected value in small steps press lower value or higher value The al v gt lt buttons are used to select a parameter for editing something you can also do by pressing the corresponding display field While the main page is displayed the dial and DEC INC buttons also allow you to set the tempo E PIANO PIANO KEYBOARD
239. HZ Use this parameter to select the fre quency whose level you wish to change with the GAIN parameter The smaller the value the lower the fre quency that will be boosted or cut The ALL PARTS FRE QUENCY HZ parameter affects the sound of all four parts 1 4 GAIN dB This parameter sets the level of the selected frequency 0 means that the frequency s level does not change no difference between equalizer on and off The ALL PARTS GAIN dB parameter affects the sound of all four parts 1 4 e Press the field to leave this page Small settings When the indicator lights two part harmonies are added to your singing Press and hold the button to select the following page where you can specify what kinds of voices will be used for these harmonies VOCAMAHARMONIST GENDER SHALL TYPE 1 Press and hold the button 2 In the GENDER column right press the field that corresponds to the kind of choir you want to add to your singing T54 Press for a man s choir or for female voices Press to create a mixed choir The field you press here determines what presets are available The preset sets the number of voices 1 or 2 that will be added Note For an optimum effect be sure to set the GENDER VOICE INPUT parameter to match your voice type See page 150 3 Set the desired HARMONY ASSIGN value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons See Who specifies the harmonies on p 48 OCTAVE 1 1 Thi
240. Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output level 31 DST gt Flanger This effect connects distortion and a flanger effect in series Distortion Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Distortion Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the distortion sound Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level E 80 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters 32 DST Delay This effect connects distortion and a delay effect in series Distortion Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Distortion Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the distortion sound Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts th
241. IDAYNI FRIDAYNLMID HEREWEGO HEREWEGO MI OPTIONS A S Bo BS 2 If it isn t already highlighted press the field in the upper right cor ner The E 80 is shipped with a few example songs that can be used here This function is also available for songs you record or save to the internal memory or a memory card The display shows a list of 5 songs Standard MIDI Files in the internal memory If you prefer to listen to one of your own songs on floppy disk insert it into the drive and press the field To listen to a song on memory card insert the card and select EXTERNAL MEMORY then continue with step 3 3 If the name of the song you want to listen to is already displayed press its line 4 To display the next 5 songs press the field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed You can also use the dial or the DEC INC buttons To return to a previous group of 5 songs press or use the dial or the DEC INC buttons E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start Quick location of the song you need There are several ways of quickly locating the song you are after Sorting files Press the SONG NAME ARTIST or field to sort the song files according to artist names kind of music Genre or file name which is usually rather incomprehensible The right column now contains the selected entry only one of them can be displaye
242. ION Index should be erased and replaced by the entries of the selected SOURCE field Press if the song assignments of the SOURCE category should be added to the assign ments of the DESTINATION Index the DESTINATION category will contain more assignments than before Note No song files are copied during this operation Press the field to return to the SONG LIST page Note Press the button to return to the main page i GA Play List function The Play List function allows you to prepare play lists of all the songs you want to use during a performance The advantage of working with such chains is that you do not need to select files between songs Programming Play Lists e f necessary insert the memory card that contains the desired songs into the slot The Play List function is only available for songs on memory card only one such card at a time and in the internal memory You may therefore have to copy all desired songs to that area before proceeding See page 230 for details 1 Press the button The display looks more or less as follows PLAY LIST The names refer to Play Lists already available in the selected memory area 2 Specify the memory area you want to work with or INTERNAL MEMORY Note This is your last chance to select the memory area Be aware that all songs you wish to assign to a Play List must reside in the selected memory area Play Lists can only access the memory area w
243. Icon Each new selection will replace the previous one See also below Mi PLACE EVENT This function is only available if the sequencer s clip board already contains events that you copied using COPY EVENT For safety reasons it would be a good idea to use this function immediately after copying events Press the button icon The following pop up appears MASTER TRACK SDT 1 o 000 Beat CHA l l DE a PLACE EVENT l 1 02 017 Sys Ex FO 41 10 00 00 0S 12 10 00 02 1 0 02 021 Sys Ex FO 41 10 00 00 08 12 10 00 33 i EVENT la Specify the position where the first event should be inserted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Press the field to confirm your settings and paste the new event s Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Note Events inserted with PLACE EVENT are added to any events that may already exist in that area Existing events are thus not pushed towards the end of the song E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing song data using Microscope Edit Editing song data using Microscope Edit Select this mode whenever you only need to change small details of an otherwise perfect Standard MIDI File In this section we will use the word event for any kind of message You can only view and edit one track at a time There fore be sure to check the TRACK setting before editing the eve
244. In this example you will learn how to record your solo playing and the Arranger s accompaniment 1 Press the button it flashes Note Whenever you press the button and start recording see below the song RAM memory is erased Be sure to save the current song data before recording a new song see p 63 2 Press the EASY SETTING button 3 Select a Music Style see p 27 and a sound for your right hand see p 29 You can also press a ONE TOUCH button and select a Style In that case there is no need to select a sound for your right hand in step 3 because that is done automatically See also p 29 Switch on additional Keyboard parts by pressing their PART ON OFF buttons if you want to double your melody using one or several instruments You can even work with a second split page 99 Note Rather than performing the above steps you could recall a User Program with the desired settings page 126 4 If you want to start your song with an introduc tion press the button and a VARIATION button 1 lt 4 GO 5 Press the button to start recording Arranger playback and recording start Note See page 81 for setting the Count In function 6 Play the Arranger chords with your left hand and the melody with your right Note You can also use the E 80 s performance functions for your melody playing See page 66 for details 7 To stop recording do one of the following e Press the and a VARIATION 1
245. LAY LIST RENAME EXTERNAL DINTERNAL MEMORY MEMORY Enter the desired characters page 52 and press the field After a brief confirmation the dis play returns to the Play List page Note You do not need to save a Play List after renaming It Mi Deleting a Play List See steps 1 3 above and then press the field As this may ruin your work you need to confirm this command yaf LIS paraj EXTERNAL INTERNAL MEMORY MEMORY This File will be DELETED from Internal Memory gt Play List Saturday Live ARE YOU SURE You have three options here Be aware that a deleted Play List cannot be recalled deletes the list file out not the Standard MIDI Files it refers to leaves the list intact and takes you back to the PLAY LIST page leaves the list intact and takes you back to the PLAY LIST page where you could select another Play List to be deleted Note Even if you delete the selected list this only disposes of the play list proper The songs assigned to the list are not deleted and can thus be used in isolation or assigned to new other Play Lists 16S Editing Lyrics E 80 Music Workstation Roland Adding Lyrics to a song Your E 80 contains functions that allow you to add Lyrics to Standard MIDI Files that do not contain them It is also pos sible to edit the Lyrics data of Standard MIDI Files that conform to the Tune 1000 format as well as other Lyrics for mats
246. LERS STORAGE LINK 2 Press the field EASY SETTING SELECT OUTPUT MODE Keyboard amp Gz ee E 80 Music Workstation MIDI 3 Press the 1 8 field that corresponds to the MIDI Set you want to use the two SELECT button icons go dark You can also select a preset SELECT and work with those settings in which case all eight MIDI Set icons go dark 4 Press the button to return to the main page MIDI Set selection at power on When you switch on the E 80 it automatically selects default MIDI settings If they do not match the settings required for your setup you can tell the E 80 which MIDI Set it should recall when you switch it on 1 Press the button The display changes to MENW E TUNING aee aee z DF opam een een Pees frame E vam LINK Y be eee ke ws STYLE be eee ane ke ws ASQ rue BP Frencrion etme nol ol aii A arrota p Tone Pe rno acer DATA oe Pe rno acer 2 Press the field followed by the field Uren Sy STARTUP Caoa Creer Cmo Cipp USER PROGRAM RECALL T B MIDI SET RECALL SOUND SET MODE 3 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the MIDI Set to be recalled when the E 80 is switched on Switch on the field Switch off this button icon if no MIDI Set should be recalled when the E 80 is switched on Note If the E 80 is also set to recall a User Program that con tains a MIDI link that s
247. LODY cccceSesanvuusasusseeasans A5 INTELL eee 29 Melody INTCING CIOS erssrssrrssrasss 84 Vocal Harmonist 00 155 Merge VOW aCK EEEE 176 COO r A 183 WIETPONONG oxcxrsve sve sveoveov oys 81 Flashing pattern iste tacacacatatatate tetris 247 TE idlic carters o seo se osteo sees ys 81 WOGEs 22220240ceneuneuneuneueeess 81 tyle anonn aannaaien aran 208 MFX oaan 106 111 252 M ftachbteeannnaeaaaanad 85 112 SIVIE SONG auaatkcxecuxewaueunewe 143 Style Song instruments aly Type oc eee cece cece eee eee 112 117 WSs eeseenceeeescudaansseasneenass 46 INPUT ooa 122 Nicro Edit come erriads sees eee 193 220 ICT ODIMONC meaag 46 UN AAAA dae a seeps tok 68 MIDI tei cite cat car stoccocoed anion nanns 237 Basic channel n u 241 CHANGE ET 239 E S era e S 240 lE errer rrr nrnna 239 240 PONCIO oe terete ees 237 ParameterS 0 0 00 0s 239 242 Pas a Achaeickatea a 239 240 De Ciceacdeadeeetaneaeaeaaaananen 243 Set Automatic selection 244 Set Link to User Program 131 Set load 0 eee eee ee eee 226 Del oa ING seeceutsceeeeeeddddns 227 SOC ICT ICOM eiee eeehe a ea 131 E ar ee ee 240 SVACHVONIZANION 2 ccceneeeennnnes 240 i e N E EE 239 User Program link 005 131 Vocal Harmonists ssrrrssrsssai 243 VT ereraa aaan 69 MINO giana or ddt EENENRERSE ER 206 MINUS OHCs sccaceeneeaad 45 74 76 78 273 MiG eccesnceuenaeaet 47 153 154 183 PeCORG rrr EErEE OLEGA EEE 205 S
248. MONO are not available for the Harmonic Bar sounds gt Lower Hold The E 80 is an instrument that allows you to change many settings in realtime Because you can trigger the Lower 1 2 parts and the Arranger simultaneously selecting another Music Style pattern usually means that you have to lift your left hand from the keyboard If the LOWER HOLD function is not active in SPLIT mode the Lower LW parts stop sounding as soon as you release all keys in the left area If you press a field however so that is its displayed in blue the notes of that Lower part go on sounding until you play other notes in the left keyboard area If both the LW1 or LW2 and MBS parts are active the selected LOWER HOLD function sustains the notes of both parts Note The LOWER HOLD functions are only available in SPLIT mode 1 Press the button The display changes to MENU SPLIT amp Mo vocaLf pea y TOUCH m a a E vuk SR ARRANGER T a STYLE f SETTING COMPOSER i FUNCTION Ae HAND CONTROLLERS TONE Ps FOOT e lt USB DATA EDIT CONTROLLERS STORAGE UTILITY 4 MIDI 1TOoO2 2 Press the field followed by the field SPLIT amp TOUGH Tilon LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 EET PORTAMENTO TIME HOLD d DYNAMIC SPLIT FINE TUNE 3 Switch on at least one LW part its PART ON OFF button must light 4 Press the or field to
249. MORY insert the memory card or floppy disk with the desired song into the slot or drive See Playing back songs Stan dard MIDI Files on p 41 for details about selecting SONGS e Select the song by pressing its field Mi Before changing the MAKEUP TOOLS settings of a Style e Press a button of the STYLE pad to select a Music Style family 8 BEAT 16 BEAT BAND ROCK DANCE CONTEMP BALL JAZZ BOSSA ROOM BLUES 50 s amp 60 s SAMBA LATIN WORLD e f necessary use the PAGE 1 PAGE 5 fields to switch pages The number of pages depends on the selected family e Press the field of the Music Style you want to use See pages 27 and 95 for details about selecting Music Styles General procedure 1 Press the MAKEUP TOOLS button once or twice MAKEUP TOOLS a Tr rade This depends on whether you want to change the settings of the selected Song or Style The display changes to ais NETR EDI a ae On mE o Me i VELOCITY OcTAY EER EAER EQUALIZER eot i 141 E 80 Music Workstation Song and Style Makeup Tools 2 3 4 oo RUM o FM EPianol Pant gt E PANPOT Ea Ea Er Ca ier d o ocTaAY EDIT EQUALIZER E i O 25 Go es If this page is not displayed press the field in the upper left corner 120 4 All modifications on this page and the related pages are SysEx data that alter the actual song data wit
250. MORY Y srme NAME B COUNTRY 7 GENRE Cool Live and Er j rons row of wre ra dee po If necessary change the song s or Style s name You only need to do this if you want to preserve the original version and only if you want to save the new version to the same memory area The edits you have just performed can only be read by the E 80 and so are of little use to other SMF players or arranger instruments Specify the memory area where you want to save the Style or song EXTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY or INTERNAL MEMORY Press the STYLE NAME or SONG NAME field 5 Enter the name page 52 6 Next press the following fields if necessary and 7 enter the following information SONG ARTIST GENRE FILE NAME STYLE COUNTRY GENRE Press the field _ If you selected the drive that contains the original version with the same name the following message is displayed e Press the field to overwrite the old version Press the field if you don t want to overwrite this song or Style and return to the previous page Then enter a different name or select a different media If the song or Style doesn t yet exist in the selected memory area the data are saved and the following message is displayed E 80 Music Workstation Editing the Vocal Harmonist parts In addition to the effect settings discussed earlier there are other VOCAL HARMONIST settings that can be cus tomized
251. MPORT page where the previous lyrics are displayed Now you re all set for the synchronization work Dees ATE SETTINGS Eir atin M0001 M Lyrics Synchronization ee lt SEX BOMB AW PRESS REC TO START THE SYNC SESSION This page can also be selected with the field This display page should contain the first line of the text you imported The function can also be used to correct the synchronization of Lyrics data contained in a song you loaded Here s what we re going to do every line of the text you imported can be associated with a given quarter note of the song We ll do this while the song Is play ing back Synchronizing text lines is a matter of pressing the TEMPO button on the beats where the currently selected line should appear during nor mal playback of the Standard MIDI File Each press of the button associates the text line below the arrows B lt with the quarter note where the but ton was pressed The preceding line automatically scrolls above the B a section while the next line appears below the arrows Press to return to the beginning of the song or use or to jump to a measure that lies a little ahead of the place where the first line should be displayed during normal operation Note If the song already contains Lyrics they will follow the measures indicated in the upper right hand corner when you press or FWD T 7O 10 Press the RECORDER but
252. N OFF e Qn the main page press the row of the part you wish to assign a different Tone to ower2 Pad With Vintage EP1 PER Jazz Scat The E 80 directly jumps to the TONE page that con tains the currently selected sound The red arrow indicates which part is active for Tone selection its TONE ASSIGN button also lights 2 Press the button TONE E PIANO E GUITAR SRX EXP PIANO KEYBOARD CHR PERC ORGAN ACCORDION A GUITAR BASS STRINGS csp SAX PAD PERCUSS ONIC VOCAL BRASS TRUMPET WIND SYNTH ETHNIC SFX DRUMS AR Press it once to select the expansion board in slot A or twice to select the board in slot B If your E 80 only contains one board the other slot cannot be selected It is perfectly possible to connect that board to slot B and to leave slot A empty The display now responds with a list of Tones avail able on the selected wave expansion board SAX 05 SupBance PPansion S822 uppers Hit Specials d Hean Streets Motivation E tronic i Sine Yibrato License2chil Acid Punch Scratch Menu i E_Gtr Menu PAGES PAGES i Note The names of the Tones that are displayed depend on the SRX expansion board you installed and the slot you selected 3 Press the field of the sound you are interested in If you don t like it press another field Some boards contain loops or grooves whose tempo is automatically synchronized to the Arranger or song tempo 4 If you are still not happy with the Tone us
253. NK fields allow you to sort User Programs in alphabetical order 3 If the name of the User Program you want to use to is already displayed press Its line 4 To display the next 5 User Programs press the field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary until it is no longer displayed You also use the dial and the DEC INC buttons To return to a previous group of 5 user Programs press See page 127 for details about locating the desired User Program 133 E 80 Music Workstation Working with User Programs Editing the User Program Finder information The Finder information is based on search criteria that need to be added to User Program files User Program Options The field in the lower left corner provides access to a display page where you can add database information This also works for User Program files that already contain entries you wish to modify 1 First select the User Program whose database information you wish to change or edit by pressing its field 2 Press the field TS 21 5 tac 2 per 3 KIS pons row jera ave bee po 3 Now do one of the following M Rename This function allows you to change or supply the USER PRG and GENRE information of the selected User Program STYLE LINK and SONG LINK cannot be edited in this way See page 131 for how to do that Note In the case of a floppy disk you can only change
254. NSTR EQUALIZER Instr The drum instrument uses its own equalizer Press the field to set it to your liking Global The drum instrument uses the equalizer settings of the Drum Set it belongs to See page 143 DROUMINSIR EGU AWZERK a banal l Off The drum instrument is not equalized This selection can also be made on the DRUM INSTR iil Go 2 Om EQUALIZER page see below There may be times i roy Ol Oo when you want to compare the version with drum D Gum Sam instrument EQ with the version without to check S omm ole whether you are making any progress Bse irn darma The E 80 provides two without versions one where the Drum Set s equalizer is used Global and a sec The name of the currently selected drum instrument ond where the Drum Set s equalizer is also bypassed is displayed in the upper left corner You cannot Off If you select Glbl or Off the field select different instruments here though next to the INSTR EQUALIZER display disappears The field indicates that you can change the parameters on this page It cannot be switched off Press the field of the parameter you wish to change Set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons INSTR VOL This parameter duplicates the VOLUME parameter on the DRUM INSTR EDIT page The reason E why it s also available here is that some equalizer set CE tings may lead to rather noticeable lev
255. Name SHUFFLE International Country a Genre Standard Tempo 159 ARE YOU SURE i deletes the Style file leaves the file intact and takes you back to the initial Style Finder page with the Style list leaves the file intact and takes you back to the STYLE LIST page W Copy This function allows you to copy the selected Style to another memory area Note It is perfectly possible to use older Styles with the E 80 They are automatically converted to the new VARIATION 1 4 system Even though you can already select the files you wish to copy on this page there is no need to select a Style prior to pressing the field on the STYLE LIST page Be aware however that the COPY page only lists the Music Styles that match the last search criteria you used for the STYLE FINDER On the other hand if you only need to copy certain Styles on memory card or in the internal memory area using the FINDER would be a good idea it helps you to avoid too many presses of the PAGE or field You can also use the dial and the DEC JINC buttons E 80 Music Workstation Roland Style Finder quickly locating Styles e On the STYLE OPTIONS page press the field FROM ff EINT MEMORY to fj COINT MEMORY GEFLOPPYDISK GEFLOPPY DISK DSIERT MEMORY EERIERT MEMORY fut I UNKNOWN Qe Joce e Start by specifying the source that contains the 4 5 Style s you wish to copy Press the butto
256. O uned L MIC Set to LINE Pe ee oe SSeS Dohi Sasi GA CII IE WWT n Synthesizer sound module etc 3 Set the knob on the front panel to MIN 4 Press the button it must light and switch off the VOCODER or button 5 Sing into the microphone and gradually increase the setting Set it to the highest possible value taking care to avoid that the OVER indicator lights It would be best to sing at the level you will be using during your per formances 6 If your singing is inaudible in the speakers con nected to the amp or the headphones turn the knob towards the right towards MAX Note If a howling sound a k a feedback is produced your microphone may be pointed at a speaker Try orienting it dif ferently or slightly reduce the setting 7 Use the knob to set the balance between your original singing and the effects that are added to your voice Note You can start song playback and sing to it See Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files on p 41 and Minus One on p 45 for details Compressor Gate and effects Your E 80 provides a compressor effect you might want to set up now The compressor reduces volume peaks and thus levels out differences in the micro phone signal The gate effect on the other hand can be used to avoid that background noises cause the Vocal Har monist etc to start working
257. O P I lt 5 J LTT TETIT OFF EDIT OFF EDIT lt i Jt Bonai e Press the MFX PART ASSIGN field MFX PART ASSIGN e Press the field s of the Keyboard part s that should use the selected MFX effect Note There is only one MFX processor that is shared by all Keyboard parts 113 E 80 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions amp effects e Press the button to return to the main page Selecting another MFX type and editing it The E 80 provides 84 different Multi FX types some of which are combinations of two effects for added flexi bility Here is how to select another Multi FX type 1 Press and hold the TONE EFFECTS but 2 3 4 5 ton until the display looks as follows REVERB SEND CHORUS SEND You can also select this page by pressing the button field and the field But the above method is a lot faster Press the or OFF field to switch the proces sor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above Press the field below MFX where the name of the currently selected type is displayed Select the desired type with the dial or the DECI INC buttons Note Multi FX type selection can be linked to Tone selection for the Upper part See page 112 The available types are If the required parameter is not displayed press the PAGE fields to jump to another page Some effects only have one p
258. ODER ASSIGN section s current default setting is AUTO This means that song files indi cated as With MIDI Harmony for Your Vocal Har mony Processor with harmony note information on track 5 automatically switch on the Vocoder If you like you can still add additional chord information by playing on the keyboard If you stop song playback and then play a chord on the keyboard the note information thus generated is used If you are using a Standard MIDI File set the TRACK value to select a song part 1 16 As the melody is usually monophonic 1 note at a time 4 may not be the best possible setting Try to select a track that plays several notes at a time If you want to play the melody yourself press the or field or both and play the desired notes while you speak or sing into the microphone Note See page 153 for the parameters Note To keep your settings you must write them to a User Program 7 Press or to leave this page Talk The Talk function is meant for announcements between songs it switches off any other Vocal Harmonist effect Voice FX Auto Pitch Singer Vocoder Small Ensemble that may be on Furthermore it mutes the Vocal Har monist s effects processors Reverb Chorus Delay etc You can however add some reverb and or delay if you like That way your voice has its normal sound when you wish or need to address your audience The Talk func tion can even be set in such a wa
259. OP O O oO O I VARIATION ____ AUTO START 1 2 3 4 FILL IN STOP AL The fill in that is played between the current and the next VARIATION pattern depends on where you come from Each transition from one VARIATION pattern to another e g from 1 to 2 is different from the others from 2 to 3 from 3 to 4 and from 4 to 1 There are three Fill Ins for the upward direction Up and three for downward moves Dw Note You can also press in the middle of a performance In that case the button flashes until the end of the current bar and then lights on the next downbeat to indicate that the Arranger is playing the introductory pattern Other ways of selecting Arranger patterns You can also switch among Style patterns using the aftertouch function the ASSIGN SW buttons or a foot switch Here are the pattern selection functions you can assign Aftertouch Fill Up Fill Down Fill Remain Variation Up Variation Down Intro Ending page 70 ASSIGN SW Half Bar on Fill In Main page 71 D Beam Fill Up Fill Down page 74 FC 7 PEDAL Start Stop Intro Variat 1 Variat 2 Variat 3 Variat 4 Ending page 75 Intro Ending Variat 1 4 Half Bar on Fill In page 77 Foot Switch Note Even aftertouch messages generated outside the chord recognition area see p 88 trigger the selected switching func tion Bass Inversion The Bass Inversion function allows you to change the way the Arranger reads
260. PETERET 26 71 75 77 82 Ensemble 005 47 121 155 Env AC EPET TESTES TEE EEEE 104 DEO ELITAT TTA TETT 104 palee AEE E 104 ENVelOpe eee eee eee eee 103 144 0 eee eee ee ee ee 113 See also Equalizer EQUAL 2 eee eee 181 182 214 BZ a a ets a ee eve 114 118 Drum Instrument 146 Ensemble sci edd ceded eee 156 Instrument 0 00 0 0000 143 Keyboard parts oeeiesseudencaas 113 SIGE EEEE EEEE 151 Vocal Harmonist 155 VOCO ET es eka weaweeeewsaeaaeaan 154 Erase EVel sssuesaneeaeeuvaseens 196 224 SEQUENCE 25505 S55S5SRRnbees eos 181 Style COMPOSE e ccccee assesses 214 E aaa 196 223 EEE scan ao aee ave aaa marae or eaactnets 239 ECONO C 42s aaaeneeenasenae eae 189 EXECUTE a dace dace dente dete dette de tk etapa 179 EX csi acGabee eee eee eee ne ene neonwns 247 EEEE sides ee ee 30 EXOQNSION 45562455545555H0e05 32 250 Expression Pedal 00 cece eee eee 78 Style COMPOSE sarsaran 211 2 4 0 O a rnrn aia 30 External SOUICE 6452655245 664454445 119 F Factory RSC s escueeeaeeeavaervnsadd 247 5c eee rere terre ree 71 74 157 e ee EEEE EEE 28 35 Fast forward 2 00000 43 PCS7 EEEE 75 E hao ae ee 209 FEGDDACK o stccnveeeenyed 117 124 147 TAE EE 47 48 52 153 154 File CODY eee ETE 230 NaNe a 231224 42 i ee ee ee ee TEEST EPE 26 83 DOWht teem 71 74 83 DV Hasse sasshaeshhaehaansadaeons 206 Half Batik annann 71 75 77 92 In On User Pr
261. PRESET VIDEO OUT STANDARD PAL NTSC VIDEO OUT SOURCE 53 E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start 3 Press the field to return to the LYRICS page Using an external monitor Your E 80 also provides a VIDEO OUTPUT socket you can connect to the video input of a TV screen or moni tor That monitor or screen always displays the Lyrics if available even if you or the E 80 select s other display pages Scores on the other hand are never dis played by the external monitor 1 Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT socket to the video input of the TV set or monitor USB PCMCIA VIDEO os OUTPUT m Gl Le E a 2 Switch on your TV set or monitor and start play back of a song with Lyrics If the lyrics and chords do not appear correctly on the external screen proceed as follows 3 Press the button uy LYRICS amp SCORE The display changes to Song New Song M 001_ 14 120 47 4 I can tell by the look in your eyes That you conquer to kill You need blood for your thrills You use your charms Never notice the harm That you do do you E oe GJ e 4 Press the field The display changes to LYRICS BACKGROUND COLOUR PRESET Qs om G aa ce Mel COLOUR Gs Go VIDEO OUT STANDARD NTSC PAL VIDEO OUT SOURCE gt 5 Press the or field to select the desired setting or the one that works Note If you work with a IV set do not forget to select
262. PY DISK The disk in the E 80 s floppy drive Now specify the target you wish to copy the selected files to Press the button icon to select the destination media Note FROM and TO cannot be set to the same media you cannot copy FROM INTERNAL MEMORY TO INTERNAL MEM ORY for example If the name of the file you want to copy is already displayed press Its line You can also select several files To display the next 5 files press the field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a pre vious group of 5 files press If you need to copy all files on all available pages press the field Note If the memory card or floppy disk is not formatted a message will be displayed that allows you to format it before the files are copied 10 If you chose EXT MEMORY for TO disable the card s write protection if available and insert it into the PCMCIA slot See the owner s manual of the memory card for how to disable its write pro tection If you chose FLOPPY DISK for TO disable its write protection see p 11 and insert it into the drive 11 Press the field You are asked whether it is OK to overwrite all files on the destination media TO that have the same file names as the files you are about to copy GORY STYLE CINT MEMORY EINT MEMORY GEFLOPPY DISK CCFLOFPY DISK EBERT MEMORY EXT MEMORY Replace fil
263. RACK EDIT functions pro ceed as follows 1 Load the Style you want to edit if it does not yet reside in the E 80 s Style RAM memory 2 Press the button then the STYLE COMPOSER field STYLE GOMPOSER S 2 474 SOLO ADRUMS d Y POP1 dle 3 Press the TRACK EDIT field STYLE TRAGK EDIT A a a l a LET ERE EAE BEE SRL he on a B E Ha FROM 4 Press a field in the top two rows to select the desired STYLE TRACK EDIT function If after selecting one of these functions and setting parameter values you decide not to execute the transformation do not press the field 5 Select the tracks Modes and Divisions you wish to modify 6 Select the range FROM and TO for the edit operation The FROM and TO parameters allow you to specify the positions measure beat clock of the track excerpt you want to change Example to change measures 1 4 of the selected track enter the following values FROM BAR 0001 TO BAR 0005 BEAT 01 BEAT 01 CPT 000 CPT 000 7 Specify what you want to change and how it Should change press one of the parameter fields to the right of the FROM TO section and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons 8 Confirm the operation by pressing the field 9 Save your Style E 80 Music Workstation Roland Style Track Edit functions QUANTIZE procera Cee ee ee es ee ase Ge eee Use this function if you chose not to quantize your
264. RPEGGIO area essentially provides func tions that allow you to compose your own guitar parts in realtime the STRUMM area contains a series of presets for various strumming techniques Strum ming as you may know means that all guitar strings are played more or less simultaneously using a plec trum or one s fingers All functions discussed below use the chords you spec ify in the CHORD area see above Here are the keys that make up the STRUMM section C5 F6 cm Select strumming patterns here Play chords here The keys to the right of the STRUMM area can be used to play the UP3 part This allows you to alternate between a guitar part and another instrument The LW1 LW2 and MBS parts can always be played via the CHORD area The only thing you need to do is to switch them on Note As stated earlier UP1 and UP2 are not available in Guitar mode because they are used as guitar parts Note The E 80 s Arranger can also be used and controlled while Guitar mode is active so that the chords you play with your left hand are used both by the E 80 s Arranger and its Guitar mode functionality 1 Select the required guitar type ELECTRIC or ACOUSTIC and the desired sound See Selecting guitar sounds 2 Play a chord in the keyboard area called CHORD in the display 3 Press one of the following keys to specify how your virtual guitar should be played The lowest STRUMM key is c
265. Repairs and data Please be aware that all data contained in the instrument s mem ory may be lost when it is sent for repairs In certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Additional precautions Please be aware that the memory contents can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the instrument Use a reasonable amount of care when using the E 80 s buttons other controls and jacks connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions e Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display e When connecting disconnecting cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements e A small amount of heat will radiate from the E 80 during normal operation This is perfectly normal e To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the E 80 s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially late at night e When you need to transport the E 80 package it in the box including padding that it came in Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials or a flightcase e Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 EV 7 sold sepa rately By connecting any other
266. Roland aU MUSIC WORKSTATION Owner s Manual WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this device to rain or moisture CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN A A ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral tri angle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to per sons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and mainte nance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS WARNING When using electric products basic precautions should always be followed including the following ee he ee M Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with a dry cloth Do not block any of the ventilation openings Install in accor dance with the manufactur
267. Roland Appendix Chord Intelligence Chord Intelligence TILA AV Err r E RG r CM7 C M7 DM7 Eb M7 EM7 FM7 PEMEAN ELLE ESET CELLE EI UE LEPTIN CER PITS Testo tt C7 C 7 D7 Eb7 E7 F7 ATAN EATEN Ler Pere LPT Lette ETEEN EAT Cm C m Dm Ebm Em Fm AMELE PRISE CEH CTRL STOTT EERE PH ETEEN Cm7 C m7 Dm7 Eb m7 Em7 Fm7 ATHE EELEE CEE or PET ET ET PR ME EN PEPE CmM7 C mM7 DmM7 Eb mM7 EmM7 FmM7 AEAN EELA LAPP TT LETTEN EE Peet LEAST Cdim C dim Ddim Eb dim Edim Fdim ME TPE RE TPSET PA FR DPE CEE CPE Cm7 b5 C m7 b5 Dm7 b5 Ebm7 b5 Em7 b5 Fm7 b5 AEITITLEN LER MALEH LECISTTEE EEIEIEE LELEH BH CEDEN Caug C aug Daug Eb aug Eaug Faug UPEEIET EELEEH TH LECTED UTE UTEP PERLITE EELEE EE Csus4 C sus4 Dsus4 Eb sus4 Esus4 Fsus4 are EEE LELTPET EET ECU CE CEP PE UT CPI PH UTEP I C7sus4 C 7sus4 D7sus4 Eb 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4 ATEN EME AN Ta eT eee TE TH C7 13 C 7 13 D7 13 Eb 7 13 E7 13 F7 13 AEMT CEST ELT TCT EPP SPAT Set UET EHR 2 1S E 80 Music Workstation Appendix Chord Intelligence F G Ab A Bb B EEN CECE EEE ETN EEA PP F M7 GM7 EI AM7 Bb M7 FER E EE E E EEE F 7 G7 Ab7 A7 Bb7 B7 ETTA EMEEN AEAT LTN Ces ctr TEHAT CEPOL Pi F m Abm E E E E R F m7 Abm7 Bb m7 MEN R E E E E F mM7 GmM7 AbmM7 AmM7 Bb mM7 BmM7 TAN EETA ETELE EEEE A EN F dim Gdim Abdim Adim Bb dim Bdim AT ATEN AEE PSY CPE T F m7 b5 Gm7 b5 Abm7 b5 Am7 b5 Bb m7 b5 Bm7 b5 SPELT ISTTS CECT TREATY CEEL EH EH CER EPS ES CPR EALE F aug G
268. SAVE STYLE page change the name then press again 18 Press the button to return to the main page E 80 Music Workstation Roland Concept Programming Styles Style Composer Concept New Styles can be created in three ways e By converting portions of a Standard MIDI File into an accompaniment to be played by the Arranger page 197 e By creating new accompaniments from scratch page 202 e By editing existing Styles which requires that you copy them and then alter the settings or notes you do not like page 208 Patterns Divisions Styles are short sequences or patterns of four or eight measures you can select in real time If you have ever worked with a drum computer or groove box the pat tern concept may sound familiar Pattern based accompaniments usually consist of the following ele ments e The basic groove i e the rhythm that is the backbone of the song Several alternatives for the basic groove that keep the accompaniment interesting and suggest some kind of evolution or variation Fill Ins to announce the beginning of new parts An introduction and a closing section ending Programming four to eight patterns for a three minute song Is usually enough Just use them in the right order to make them suitable for your song The E 80 allows you to program 54 different patterns per Style some of which can be selected via dedi cated buttons MAIN 1 4 etc Some Patterns are selec
269. SION START STOP O O BO O MI START FILL IN STOP uw o At the end of the VARIATION 1 pattern the VARIA TION 2 button lights steadily and the Arranger plays a different accompaniment VARIATION 1 2 3 4 Now try out Variations 3 and 4 Professional transitions Fill In So far we have only used the main accompaniment patterns i e the phrases that are repeated over and over until you stop the Arranger The various variations can be used for verses 1 second verses 2 choruses 3 amp 4 and other song parts Switching between these patterns is a matter of press ing the VARIATION 1 4 buttons Yet that produces instant changes of the accompaniment while real musicians tend to announce new song parts by means of rollin the drums or slightly different accompaniment notes The E 80 allows you to make such announcements in the following way Start playback of the MAIN 1 pattern see above Play a chord in the left half of the keyboard 3 Press the button it lights STYLE CONTROL W _ INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION TA ET VARIATION AUTO START 1 2 3 4 FILL IN STOP ALT 4 Press a VARIATION 1 lt 4 button to select another MAIN pattern The button and the selected VARIATION 1 4 button flash What happens now depends on when you press this button If you press it on any beat before the last of the cur rent bar the Arranger plays a F
270. See also page 50 Note The and fields allow you to jump to the effects or tone controls 3 Set the desired TRACK value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons This is where you select the track that should supply the note information for the harmonies to be gener ated In most instances Auto is a good choice because that allows the Vocal Harmonist to pick the most useful track This only applies to Standard MIDI Files you play back using the Recorder Press the and or field if you want to use the notes you play on the keyboard The divide between LEFT and RIGHT follows the split point set ting see p 65 If you press the field the display looks as follows PART 1 PART 2 PART 3 PART 4 i pm om Om Qui gm Gm Gma Qa Gz Gz Sj Back Press the field to select this page The note icons next to the PART 1 4 entries indicate the Vocoder parts that are currently playing This may help you to decide which part needs to be corrected E 80 Music Workstation Roland Vocoder settings As a rule the Vocoder works as follows the lowest note played by the selected song part or yourself is assigned to PART 1 while the highest is assigned to PART 4 e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons GENDER Allows you to change the timbre of the part Negative values produce a masculine effect positive values add
271. Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 80 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should Start after the selected beat TO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature In the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data COPY The COPY function allows you to copy one track to another or excerpts of one or all tracks to a different location The latter is useful if you need to repeat the chorus several times at the end of the song but do not feel like recording all those notes IASC SUIT Janne aes bmn iil cme Sento caren Gomer etoc FROM INTO BEAT d bom 01 oo
272. Stop USB disk E80_SSD or Stop USB disk E80_CARD You Should now see a window that says something to the e System updates The supplied CD ROM also contains two files called SystemUpdate_PC html and SystemUpdate_Mac html that explain how to install a new system version you may have down effect of The USB device XX can now be safely removed from the system Click on the OK button THEN e Disconnect the USB cable from your computer and the E 80 14 Press the field in the E 80 s display to return to the CONNECTION MODE page 15 Press the button to return to the main page loaded from www rolandkeyboardclub com Backing up all of the E 80 s data You can make a backup copy of all of the E 80 s inter nal data or the contents of a memory card by pro ceeding as follows e Connect the E 80 to your computer e On your computer create a folder named Backup or any other name e Double click the icon assigned to the E 80 s internal memory or memory card to open its window Select its entire contents Ctrl A Windows or Com mand A Mac Drag the selected files to your Backup folder icon and drop them there Wait until all files have been copied To send the files back to the E 80 or its memory card Open the Backup folder on your computer hard disk Open the window of the E 80 s internal memory or memory card e Arrange the two windows In such a way that you can drag
273. Style files Note One Touch memories usually switch on the SYNC START function If you don t want the Arranger to start as soon as you play a note or chord switch off the button 2 Select a Music Style page 27 and start Arranger playback by pressing the button Start playing to the accompaniment You will notice that the sounds of all Keyboard parts match the mood of the selected Style 3 Select a different Style and again play a solo line The active Keyboard part probably UP1 now uses a different sound even Keyboard parts that are off change sounds 4 Press another ONE TOUCH button to use that reg istration 5 Press the same button again if you no longer need the One Touch setting Mi Choosing sounds manually The E 80 contains 1100 Tones or sounds and 54 Drum Sets 1 Specify the part you wish to assign another sound or Drum Set to e Press the TONE ASSIGN button of the desired part so that it lights KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN F 1 MBS LW2 LW 1 mt PART ON OFF 2S E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start e Qn the main page press the row of the part you wish 2 3 4 to assign a different sound to onc Amazing Grace Strummlin Pop Gospel Love oweR2 Pad With Vintage EP1 In this case the E 80 directly jumps to the TONE page that contains the currently selected sound The red arrow indicates which part is active for Tone selection its TONE ASSIGN butto
274. Sync Threshold 0 127 Volume level at which reset is applied Manual 0 100 Point at which Vowel 1 2 switch 49 or less Vowel 1 will have a longer duration 50 Vowel 1 and 2 will be of equal duration 50 or more Vowel 2 will have a longer duration EO EO Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Level 0 127 Output level 47 Speaker Sim Simulates the speaker type and mic settings used to record the speaker sound Speaker Type Select the type of speaker The specifica tions of each type are as follows The speaker column indi cates the diameter of each speaker unit in inches and the number of units Type Cabinet Speaker Microphone SMALL 1 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic mic SMALL 2 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic mic MIDDLE open back enclosure 12x1 dynamic mic JC 120 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic mic BUILT IN 1 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic mic BUILT IN 2 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 3 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 4 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 5 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BG STACK 1 sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic BG STACK
275. T MICRO EDIT aail d TRACK INITIALIZE ota IMPET DOr 11 ener GT CONVERTER 12 d PIANO 2 j CONVERTER 13 d IMUTED GT J 14 d CLEAN GT ae 15 L PIANO 4 j 16 PIANO 4 j This setting is not saved Press the field again to switch off the function Note The MUTE function is not available while the SOLO func tion is switched on W Solo If you need to listen to a track in isolation press the field and the field of the track you want to solo and start playback This mutes all other tracks while the selected track is flagged with an S You can also select the track to be soloed using the a buttons Press the field again to switch off the func tion of the same name MSong Cover and Song Makeup Tools The 16 track Sequencer does not recognize changes made to a song using the Cover and SONG MAKEUP TOOLS functions It only sees the original song data You can however burn such changes into the song file before you start editing it see p 148 Editing one or several tracks TRACK EDIT The TRACK EDIT environment of the 16 track Sequencer provides 12 functions Quantize Erase Delete Copy Insert Transpose Change Velo Change Gate Time Merge Global Change Shift Clock and Track XChange There is also a MICRO EDIT environment that allows you to add delete or change individual events See page 193 for details Here s some information that may help you decide
276. T button to return to the main page Note The DELETE operation cannot be undone Copy The E 80 allows you to copy one several or all files from one media to another Files on the selected source media FROM cannot be copied onto the same desti nation media TO Consider using the USB functionality see p 234 when you need to copy from a memory card in the E 80 to another memory card connected to the computer for example 1 Press the button 2 If you intend to work with a floppy disk or memory card insert it into the drive or slot 3 Press the field 4 Select the data type you want to copy by pressing its field w MIDISET USER 1 J 2 3 O 5 6 7 8 9 The display changes to EQrf Shits COUNT MEMORY EINT MEMORY FLOPPY DISK CCOFLOPPY DISK EERERT MEMORY mE T MEMORY ZSLROCK2 64 Deae C rows ooo o O mile Pop 166 N i Groovy Rock i101 Da Qe Le Note See page 135 for how to copy individual User Programs Here you can only copy Sets the List file as well as the User Program files it refers to If you selected the wrong file type press and try again Start by specifying the source that contains the files you wish to copy Press the button icon to select the memory area INT MEMORY The E 80 s internal memory area EXT MEMORY The memory card in the E 80 s PCMCIA slot Do not forget to insert it before select ing this option FLOP
277. TERS ON TRACK 16 The internal Song will be deleted Are you sure 3 If you want the E 80 to set most parameters for you press one of the TEMPLATES fields Here is what the options mean ORCHESTR Selects orchestral sounds suitable for classi cal music and film scores BAROQUE Selects instrument sounds suitable for chamber music ROCK Selects sounds suitable for rock music FOLK Selects sounds suitable for folk music COUNTRY Selects sounds suitable for country music ELECTRONIC Selects sounds suitable for dance music POP Selects sounds often used in pop arrange ments JAZZ Selects sounds suitable for jazz combos ETHNIC Selects sounds suitable for world music 4 Press the following three fields and enter the desired values using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Tempo Allows you to specify the initial tempo of the new song J 20 250 Choose a tempo that is comfort able for recording You can set the final tempo by editing the MASTER track see p 189 or by recording it after activating the TEMPO REC SW parameter see p 176 Time Signature BEAT If your new song uses the 4 4 time signature there is no need to change this value Otherwise enter the desired time signature 1 2 32 16 The warning alerts you to the fact that pressing EXECUTE may have disastrous consequences See Saving your song on p 178 if you still need to save your previous song Mi Using two drum tracks The
278. The result may not be what you had in mind Editing the Master Track The E 80 s sequencer uses one track called MASTER for each song It is used for recording the time signa ture the tempo as well as general SysEx messages that apply to all song tracks Note You can only edit the MASTER track of songs that already exist so be sure to record or load a song beforehand 1 If necessary select a different song This is not necessary if you want to edit the song you have just recorded or played back See Working with the Song Finder on p 159 or page 42 for how to load a song 2 Press the button The display changes to meas 0023 2 4 130 4 4 8 dJALTO SAX 5 dUTRUMPET 10 djazz 11 d JAz2 GT 12 d PIANO 2 13 d MUTED GT 14 d CLEAN GT 15 PIANO 4 E 80 Music Workstation Using the 16 track Sequencer 3 Press the field in the right col umn SLRS SAAS C SUT gt J 01 000 Beat Change 4 01 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F7 01 031 Sys Ex FO 41 104212 40 00 7F 00 4 F7 ERASE gt x lt 01 037 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 38 06 01 F7 EVENT 01 043 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 33 5432 F7 0 0 0 0 0 01 050 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 345431 F7 move 0 0 0 0 0 01 056 Sys Ex FO41 10 42124001 00 20 28 LEVEN 01 099 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 00 20 28 04 060 Tempo Change COPY 02 000 Tempo Change 52 EVENT PLACE EVENT amp
279. The selection field on the USER PROGRAM SET LIST page now contains a small MIDI message On the main page User Programs with a link to a MIDI Set are indicated by means of a MIDI socket icon 13 E 80 Music Workstation Working with User Programs TXT BMP Link This function means that by recalling a User Program you also prepare the associated TXT or BMP file and start the PAGE TURNER function if it s not set to Off Such a file must be available when you load the User Program in question for this system to work Your E 80 only memorizes the file name If at the time you recall such a User Program that file is not available the display will respond with Lower 1 St_ Slow Str TIL PER 1 Lower2 Pad With i Vintage EP1 UPPER Remove the memory card because the internal mem ory is always available insert the proper card and select that User Program again then activate the VIEWER function 1 Press the USER PROGRAM button GB ractory USERPRODRAM ESS ii MIDI TEST BMPFP f Ww LINK Ey WRITE LINK 1 Blue Berry Swear Ballad i Fame Rock p Blue Shoes i Know Him Hands Up Party i Misty Jazz P4 P5 TT 2 Press the TXT BMP LINK field Vjavssre Liye i File Name No Text Bmp Link K i ye A MAKENEW DELETE ST testem Link E TEXT EMP LINK g Back If the User Program already contains a link to another song which you no longer need press the field This is not necessar
280. This parameter allows you to set the level of the noise To change the setting press the display icon and rotate the dial or use the DEC buttons PERCUSSION By selecting HARD you strengthen the percussion sound That s because the organ sound specified with the harmonic bars becomes softer Conversely you can select SOFT in which case the volume of the real organ sound Is raised to its normal level Press the switch icon to select your preferred setting ROTARY SOUND This section contains an on off switch for activating or switching off the Rotary effect This effect simulates the typical sound modu lation generated by a cabinet with rotating loud speakers You can also push the BENDER MODULA TION lever towards the rear of the E 80 to change between the SLOW and FAST speeds of the Rotary effect Or press the lever icon to alternate between the SLOW and FAST rotation speeds Note The on off function and alternation between the slow and fast rotation speeds can be assigned to an ASSIGN SW button see p 71 and or to a footswitch see p 75 VIBRATO CHORUS The vibrato effect cyclically mod ulates the pitch of organ sounds which is not the same as the Rotary effect The chorus effect mixes the normal sound of the organ with a sound to which vibrato has been applied adding richness and spa ciousness to the sound Press the field to switch this effect on or off To select another effect press the dis
281. Time msec 0 1300ms Delay time from when sound is input into the reverse delay until the delay sound is heard Rev Delay Time note musical notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo If you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Rev Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of the reverse delay negative values invert the phase Rev Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Frequency at which the high frequency content of the reverse delayed sound will be cut BYPASS no cut Rev Delay Panpot L64 0 63R Panning of the reverse delay sound Rev Delay Level 0 127 Volume of the reverse delay sound Delay 1 Time sync msec Note Delay 2 Time sync msec Note Delay 3 Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay time Should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a time or a note value Delay 1 Time msec 0 1300ms Delay 2 Time msec 0 1300ms Delay 3 Time msec 0 1300ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay 1 Time note musical notes Delay 2 Time note musical notes Delay 3 Time note musical notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify
282. UP parts in WHOLE mode or be assigned to the left half of the keyboard in SPLIT mode MBS In WHOLE mode the MBS part is yet another normal part In SPLIT mode it supplies a semi auto matic bass line to your left hand notes if one of the two LW parts Is active When neither LW button lights it behaves like any other Keyboard part Note All Keyboard parts can be used to play drum sounds Unlike previous Roland arranger instruments the E 80 no longer provides a dedicated Manual Drums part e MELODY INTELL Melody Intelligence This part is triggered by the Arranger and plays automatic har monies that are added to the melody you play using the UP1 part You cannot play that part yourself That explains why its button not part of the KEYBOARD PART section it is one of the two TONE EFFECTS but tons You can choose from among 18 harmony types page 84 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the Keyboard parts Selecting sounds for the Keyboard parts MOne Touch The easiest way to select suitable Tones for the Key board parts while working with the Arranger is by using the ONE TOUCH feature The One Touch memo ries are in fact small User Programs See p 87 for details 1 Press the desired ONE TOUCH button aA Y 80 There are four One Touch memories per Music Style Their settings are included in the Style data them selves and can thus be copied to other E 80 units simply by copying the Music
283. UTPUT jacks The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range 0 High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 61 Band Chorus A chorus effect that lets you apply an effect independently to the low frequency and high frequency ranges Split Frequency 200 8000Hz Frequency at which the low and high ranges will be divided Low Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Delay time from when the Original sound is heard to when the low range chorus sound is heard Low Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the low modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Low Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the low range chorus sound is modulated Low Rate note Musical Notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync param eter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Low Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the low range chorus sound 2 64 Low Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the low range chorus sound H
284. Volume Up This setting allows you to increase the vol ume of the selected part using the Aftertouch Volume Down This setting allows you to decrease the volume of the selected part using the Aftertouch Note The Aftertouch settings apply to the Keyboard part in question so that selecting another sound for such a part does not mean that the values will be reset to O Wif you press ARRANG You can also use the Aftertouch functionality for controlling Arranger playback If you press the field on the SPLIT amp TOUCH AFTER TOUCH page the display looks as follows SPIT Ge TOUGH ESH flou pe edie ie PARTS TYPE Variation Up Intro Fill Up Fill Fill Down Note Selecting ARRANG does not cancel the Aftertouch set tings you may have made for the Keyboard parts Note Even Aftertouch messages generated outside the chord recognition area see below will trigger the selected switching function Off The Arranger does not respond to Aftertouch mes sages Fill Up Triggers the Fill In that takes you to the next Variation i e from MAIN 1 to 2 You can use this function up to three times to jump to the most complex level Variation 4 If you then use the Aftertouch again however nothing happens You cannot cycle back to the lowest level Variation 1 Fill Remain This also starts a Fill In but does not switch to another MAIN pattern Fill Down Triggers the Fill In that takes you t
285. Workstation Roland Recording Styles from scratch e Press the button to return to the STL COMPOSER REC STANDBY page Note The DOUBLING function Guitar Mode Options is not available here because only one track can be recorded at any One time Record mode 17 Press the field in the lower left corner and use the DATA ENTRY DEC INC buttons to select the recording mode Replace Everything you record replaces the data of the selected track This mode is automatically selected when you activate the record function for a track that does not yet contain data If you select a track that already contains data this parameter is set to Mix but could be changed to Replace if you wanted to overwrite the previous version Mix The data you record are added to the existing data of the selected track Specifying the pattern length Every Style pattern must have a set length Setting the MEASURE LENGTH value now will help you avoid a lot of confusion once you start recording The Arranger tends to add blank bars at the end of a track which is usually due to the fact that you stopped recording a little late i e after the last bar you played This means that you often record 5 measures Instead of 4 for example STOP If you press START STOP after bar 4 CI ea your Style looks like this 5 bars eee rere eee Furthermore in STYLE COMPOSER mode all patterns are looped and played back until you press th
286. X 12 presets Auto Pitch Singer programmable Small 30 macros Ensemble 30 macros 24 presets Noise Gate Compressor Reverb 9 types Delay 9 types pro grammable Reverb 9 types Delay 9 types Chorus 9 types programmable Adjustable input gain Level switch 3 5 2HD 2DD Solid State Disk PCMCIA Compact Flash Mem ory Stick Smart Media Micro drive Styles Songs SMF User Pro grams MIDI Sets Play Lists txt files omp files Split 2 split points Whole Dynamic Split Arranger Organ Piano Guitar Mode ACV Adaptive Chord Voicing 18 types customization of the second sound 6 5 semi tones automatic SMF transposition 2 programmable Tap Tempo Sync Start Stop V Link interactive demo in sev eral languages Flash memory Data transfer amp MIDI communi cation 2 Pedal amp footswitch sockets FC 7 programmable Audio connections Vocal Harmonist with MIC LINE switch External Source Outputs Metronome Video output Data exchange HOLD FOOTSWITCH FOOT SWITCH programmable FOOT PEDAL Input XLR amp TRS phone bal anced unbalanced Audio inputs Left amp Right line level with separate effects pro cessor RCA phono L Mono R 1 4 OUTPUT for headphones LEVEL control Composite PAL amp NTSC Independent lyrics chord and VIEWER function also reads DigiScore PCMCIA slot CompactFlash Memory Stick Smart Media Microdrive
287. X section allow you to specify whether ON or not OFF the messages in question should be received Press the field to open the following pop up window PUG Seay f VEVDNnODM me cvere ER f orice i f m cane f f f a PROGRAM CHANGE PANPOT HOLD RPN 7 7 n 7 PITCH lt f f f f MODUL REVERE SOFT SYSEX a f f f VOLUME CHORUS CAF oct a a The RX events are the same as the IX events See page 239 for details Press the field and save your settings to a MIDI Set or Press the button to return to the main page MIDI System parameters The following MIDI parameters usually apply to the E 80 as a whole even though some of them are rather Specific as you will notice Press the field and use PAGE to select the page that contains the parameter you want to edit SYNC parameters The SYNC parameters allow you to specify whether or not the E 80 should send MIDI real time messages when you start the Arranger or Recorder sequencer This allows you to synchronize external instruments or software sequencers with your E 80 HUE Soy a SYNC TX SYNC RX STELE TH STELE RE SYNC ON Auto ile lt ES gt Just as a reminder TX means transmit and RX stands for receive MESYNC TX START STOP If you activate this option the E 80 sends start or stop messages when you start or stop Arranger STYLE or song SONG playback The Recorder sequencer furthermore transmits
288. a No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 NICARAGUA Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Nicaragua Altamira D Este Calle Principal de la Farmacia 5ta Avenida 1 Cuadra al Lago 503 Managua Nicaragua TEL 505 277 2557 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 595 21 492147 PERU Audionet Distribuciones Musicales SAC Juan Fanning 530 Miraflores Lima Peru TEL 511 4461388 TRINIDAD AMR Ltd Ground Floor Maritime Plaza Barataria Trinidad W I TEL 868 638 6385 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Instrumentos Musicales Allegro C A Av las industrias edf Guitar import 7 zona Industrial de Turumo Caracas Venezuela TEL 212 244 1122 AUSTRIA Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Austrian Office Eduard Bodem Gasse 8 A 6020 Innsbruck AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM FRANCE HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Central Europe N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 CZECH REP K AUDIO Kardasovska 626 CZ 198 00 Praha 9 CZECH REP TEL 2 666 10529 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 3916 6200
289. a note number a velocity value and a Gate Time value The range for note numbers is O C 127 G9 Velocity messages can be set anywhere between 1 extremely soft and 127 The value 0 cannot be entered because it would effectively switch off the note After selecting a Gate Time entry pressing the dial calls up the following pop up SHALES pLa p GATE TIME EDIT E m a AA n rm cm es E S ie ata a oe e oe Ses Here you can either set the required length as a CPT value J 120CPT or use the note fields to avoid lengthy calculations Use the numeric pad to enter the desired duration Drum parts usually use the Gate Time value 1 for all notes Increasing it to 20 for example has no audible effect on the sound dura tions The maximum duration a note event can have is 99 999 clocks which corresponds to roughly 208 bars About Alteration Mode messages This message type is only available for melodic Style tracks i e not for ADrums or ABass tracks and needs to be inserted by hand using CREATE EVENT Style tracks you only just recorded do not contain it It allows you to use a revolutionary system for adapt ing the recorded notes to a more natural behavior also known as voicing There are two options Degree This setting refers to the old system for real time conversion of Style track information for Style playback Based on the fundamentals of the chord
290. a simple equalizer for the Voice FX Auto Pitch and Singer parts Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons Press this field to switch the equalizer of the corresponding part on or off The parameter settings of that column are only used if the indicator icon lights The equalizer can be used for two things a empha sizing a specific frequency range to create a special effect or make the part more distinguishable b to reduce the level of frequencies that mask other sounds or produce a boomy sound FREQUENCY Hz Use this parameter to select the fre quency whose level you wish to change with the GAIN parameter The smaller the value the lower the fre quency that will be boosted or cut GAIN This parameter sets the level of the selected fre quency 0 means that the frequency s level does not change no difference between equalizer on and off e Press the field to leave this page E 80 Music Workstation Roland Voice FX settings Voice FX settings When the indicator lights your original voice is no longer output by the Vocal Harmonist Instead it will be changed transformed according to the preset you select here VOICE FX AUTOPITCH VOTCE FX TYPE 1 Press and hold the button 2 Press one of the 12 fields in the middle to select the kind of transformation you want 3 Press the field to add an automatic vi
291. ach event is executed at a given point in time which only contains the End of Data message is why they all have a position indication e Press to close the pop up window 1 01 119 for example The first figure refers to the bar the second to the beat within that bar and To ch nf ti head abl th the third to the clock CPT between the current beat lt ees ae tein rer ea gy lee and the next For a 4 4 time signature each beat selected track proceed as follows comprises 120 clocks The example cited earlier actu 1 Use the ally buttons or the dial to select the list entry you want to edit The name of the selected parameter appears in the upper right hand corner of the display W General procedure ally means that the event is located immediately before the second beat W Graphic representation of your data piano roll To get a better idea of where your data are located uano Soe and how they are distributed press the field The display then changes to C Reverb 11 Expression 7 volume SLE Shy Pitch Bend CC 0 Bank Select MSB Program Change Note Note Note 19 04 010 Note ISIE 22 01 027 CC 64 Hold 1 22 01 030 CC 64 Hold 1 gt 22 03 000 Note After selecting the entire line of a note event you can press and hold the dial to play the note it will be held until you release the dial Except for a perhaps clearer representation of the If you press the dial after sel
292. ack enter the following values f UNEQUA FROM BAR 0001 TO BAR 0005 BEAT 01 BEAT 01 CPT 000 CPT 000 8 Specify what you want to change and how it Should change press one of the parameter fields to the right of the FROM TO section and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons 9 Confirm the operation by pressing the field 10 Press the field to return to the 16 track Sequencer s main page 11 Save your song TSO QUANTIZE Use this function if you chose not to quantize your music during recording page 176 and now realize that the timing is not quite what you expected it to be Quantizing after recording has the advantage that you can first listen to the original and then cor rect only those notes whose timing is definitely off METRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks WE FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature In the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 80 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this sett
293. ack can be started or stopped with MIDI real time messages Start Stop Clock received from an external clock source Remote The Recorder sequencer SONG or Arranger STYLE waits for a start message to start playback at its own tempo When it receives a stop message playback Stops External clock messages are ignored BASIC parameters The Basic channel is used to receive and transmit Program Change and Bank Select messages for selecting User Programs as well as for the reception and transmission of other kinds of messages that are not directly related to a specific MIDI channel such as the PART SWITCH function for example Note that if you select another channel messages intended for the BASIC parameters might also cause other parameters to change when you don t want them to EVA ETA MIDI TX MIDI RX CHANNEL mO ez MASTER VOLUME W MIDI TX CHANNEL Use this parameter to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the Basic channel If you don t want these messages to be transmitted switch off the field PART SWITCH Whenever you mute or un mute a part on the Mixer pages Keyboard parts or on the STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS VOLUME page your E 80 sends an NRPN message that describes your action Not sending these messages may be useful to keep your external sequencer from recording them or the receiving GS module from muting the part assigned to that channel USER PRG PC This parameter is used to enable or d
294. ae moe Sh Sa Sa Sl a Sa Sa a a ca a a a a a a Ga a 52 Highest u nan 52 50 Eee eee eee 87 WI aS Hold oaaao iaaa 222 KEY erect A T cae tance verre ver we AVraNngel 0 cccccceceececeeeees 99 Score Options 000 00 55 EO E 53 ASSIQN 00 c cc cccccccececeeeeee 76 Style Converter 00005 199 RCO srar a ee ee 53 Fade In Out aooaa aana 157 WOW d ENE eee 68 Color eee eee 53 58 FOOLS WICH eseese eari uL 76 Edit eee 169 LOWE cece ccs hg ana 102 M o Seana cee aes hi ee 134 138 One Touch 0 0 ce eee eee 87 me Music Assistant 62 06 a Pedal onanan 39 MAO E a Settings onanan nanaonan 129 Main 0 2 eee eee 25 82 83 209 User Program er 129 VAR gee ca E we weal weal we we wee wl wl wel ale wt wleyell ey 2D oe 87 2 LF E 80 Music Workstation Index MAN page reren innn EEEE 23 Nidal Olteteteeseecamaaannasansnaaes 206 Makeup TOONS c3 cuunww eee es 140 WAG vaccasuacaaness 47 48 52 153 154 Manual can sececn encanto oe 34 Dre tteceeusnannnnannannanea as 29 MARK amp JUMP 00 43 158 Mark A B 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 199 Master Di e EREEREER 174 189 10 6 sae 67 69 Volume 0 cece eee 25 28 241 Mastering Tools 000008 114 Style amp SONG 425 esses eens 118 VL a eee eee eee eee eee eee 69 MBass KBD Arranger 75 MBass Keyboard Arranger 72 MEASURE LENGTH 205 MELINT 00 0 cee eee eee 84 ME
295. ages 5 If necessary press another PART field and change the HOLD ASSIGN setting for the selected part 6 Press the button to return to the main page Foot Switch An optional DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U footswitch con nected to the PEDAL SWITCH socket can be used to per form various functions If you do not change the fac tory setting this footswitch allows you to start and stop Arranger playback The default setting is Start Stop which allows you to Start and stop Arranger playback Note also the Soft and Sostenuto options as well as the possibility to select one of several Hold functions The footswitch can only perform one function at a time though 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the field Foi SO ype are Pete WER ror ASSIGN Pay Sr Cm E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using optional footswitches 3 Press the field that corresponds to the function you wish to assign to the footswitch If necessary use the PAGE 1 PAGE 3 fields to go to another page Start Stop Starts and stops Arranger playback Same function as the button Play Stop Starts and stops the Recorder and 16 track sequencer Same function as the but ton ntro Selects the Intro of the current Variation level 1 4 during Arranger playback Same function as INTRO Ending Selects the Ending of the current Variation level 1 4 during Arranger playback Variat
296. alled C5 the black key next to it C 5 etc Some of the keys mentioned below produce two effects one when you press them another when you release 4 them Entries without those symbols are one way and therefore only trigger an effect when you press them Down fast C5 This key causes all six strings to sound at the same time This is the fast version of the strum ming pattern mentioned earlier The slow version can also be played using the F 5 key 3 3 amp Down fast 4 up fast C 5 Pressing this key trig gers a fast downward strum Down means that the simulated plectrum or thumb finger moves from the lowest to the highest string i e towards the lower part of the guitar Releasing this key will trigger an upward strum in the opposite direction Up fast D5 This key causes all six strings to sound at the same time this time from the highest to the lowest string amp Down fast mute 4 up fast Eb5 Here is another downward strum that is muted almost instantly when you press this key Guitarists achieve this effect by put ting their hand on all strings When you release this key your virtual guitar plays an upward strum which is not muted amp Down fast 4 up fast mute E5 This is the oppo site of the previous pattern the upward strum is muted while the downward is not Down fast mute F5 This key triggers a downward strum that is muted almost instantly Down s
297. alues OCTAVE Only for sounds Use this parameter to trans pose the selected instrument up or down by up to 4 octaves Mm MFX e Press the MFX display and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to assign the instrument to one of the MFX processors AxC Select Off for instruments that don t need to be processed by any MFX When you select Off the dis play changes as follows a e J 98 4 B oe i mp PANFOT a CHORUS VELOCITY OCTA isror 44 4 EavauizerR f EDIT fi eve GA se eel Ki cars e lt a EUP Ti TOOLS o FM EPiano1 cc B Er PANPOT amp REVERE 4ORUS oe zz oc f ts EQUALIZER y OCTA Off a soe Gal Lere iss m E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the Makeup Tools If you select A B or C an additional display and an button icon appear The display shows the name of the effect type currently assigned to the selected MFX processor e Press the long MFX display below the field and select the desired type with the dial or the DEC INC buttons The available types are 1 Thru 31 DST gt Flanger 61 Band Chorus 2 Stereo EQ 32 DST gt Delay 62 Band Flanger 3 Overdrive 33 EH gt Chorus 63 Band Step Flg 4 Distortion 34 EH gt Flanger 64 VS Overdrive 5 Phaser 35 EH gt Delay 65 VS Distortion 6 Spectrum 36 Chorus gt DLY 66 GT Amp Simul 7 Enhancer 37 Flanger gt DLY 67 Gate 8 Auto Wah 38 CHO gt Flanger 68 Long Delay
298. ame 1 Press the button 2 Start song or Style playback and say something into the microphone don t sing Sounds like a very popular effect doesn t it 3 Press and hold the button The display changes to VOCAL FARON E a AUTO PITCH ASSIGN K3 Oca ca Let us begin with the most important parameter the notes that will be used by the AUTO PITCH function That is what you specify via the AUTO PITCH ASSIGN fields 4 Set the TRACK value to select a song part The 4 setting usually corresponds to the melody part of a Standard MIDI File and is thus the most likely candidate but feel free to select 1 3 or 5 16 to use another part as melody If you want to play the melody yourself press the or field or both and play the desired notes while you speak or sing into the microphone Note Selecting LEFT and or RIGHT will set the TRACK parame ter to Uff Use the OCTAVE parameter to shift the pitch of the Auto Pitch notes up to 2 octaves up or down 5 Press the field to add some wobble to the Auto Pitch sound This vibrato effect is not linked to the Voice FX vibrato and can thus be set separately see below 49 E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start 6 For more refined control over the Auto Pitch voice press the field AUTOS airar Soy GENDER PITCH VIBRATO mt Om Gm Om IPITCHEEND Though they are not linked to their namesakes on the Voice FX Edit page most par
299. ameters on this page will look familiar Therefore please see above for the explanations of GENDER VIBRATO RATE DEPTH RISE TIME and DELAY TIME 7 Press the parameter field whose value you want to edit and set the desired value with the DATA ENTRY dial Note Parameter fields can also be selected using the DATA ENTRY gt a buttons 8 Press the field to switch on this effect Portamento means that the pitch doesn t change in clearly defined steps it produces glides from one note to the next Portamento Time 0 Rough pitch changes in semitone steps normal Portamento Time 1 127 Pitch glides from one note to the next Use the PORTAM TIME parameter to specify the speed at which those glides are carried out 0 127 The higher the value the slower the transitions Note To keep your settings you must write them to a User Program 9 Press to leave this page or to modify other AUTO PITCH settings 3 O Using the Vocoder A Vocoder is an effect that combines spoken words with sounds thus creating the impression that the instrument that produces the sounds can talk 1 Press the button it must light This switches off the or button if it was on because the Vocoder cannot be used simultaneously with the Harmonist function proper 2 Switch on the button 3 Stop song playback if it is running The Vocoder can also use a song part but for this demonstration we ll
300. ananana aanne 250 Installing wave expansion boards 250 Accessing the Patches of SRX series expansion DOarGsS Vid WD ais ctdte bhadedacavesauwaue dx 251 MFX and IFX types and parameters 252 22 MIDI Implementation Chart 272 23 Chord Intelligence 0 eee eee 273 AEL cava etea totes eee ne eee eae pau 275 Important notes E 80 Music Workstation Roland In addition to the items listed under Using the unit safely on p 6 please read and observe the following P ower supply Do not use this instrument on the same power circuit with any device that will generate line noise such as an electric motor or variable lighting system Before connecting the E 80 to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER switch is switched off this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power If you need to turn off the power completely first turn off the POWER switch then unplug the power cord from the power outlet For this rea son the outlet into which you choose to connect the power cord s plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily accessible Placement Using the E 80 near power amplifiers or other equipment con taining large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate
301. and hold the button or press the NO field in the display The display changes to VOGAIIHARMOWNISI MED Fee Da GENDER VOICE INPUT Bo LB Press the field if you re a man or the field if you re a woman This is an important clue for the Vocal Harmonist After selecting the correct setting you may find that the harmonies sound better And just in case you wanted to sound like a some what worn out opera singev 3 Press the field indicator icon must light Sing a few notes and note the vibrato If the effect is not strong enough 4 Press the field 5 JSS Ship VIBRATO RATE RISE TIME DEPTH DELAY TIME r VIBRATO Use the DATA ENTRY lt gt a buttons to select the parameter you wish to edit or press its field and set the desired value with the dial The button icon must be blue for the effect to be noticeable Here s what the parameters mean RATE Sets the speed of the vibrato effect DEPTH Allows you to set the vibrato intensity Vibrato is an effect that changes modulates the pitch The higher the DEPTH value the more outspo ken these periodic pitch changes will be RISE TIME Allows you to set a swell for the vibrato effect This parameter specifies how long it takes before the DEPTH value is reached once the Delay Time Is up DELAY TIME Allows you to set a delay between the moment you start singing and the
302. ange The note value can be set using the TO NOTE TO CC field All notes or values except the one you select will change The note value can be set using the TO NOTE TO CC field Only notes or values above the selected one will change The note value can be set using the THAN NOTE THAN CC field T32 LOWER Only notes or values below the selected one will change The note value can be set using the THAN NOTE THAN CC field NSIDE Only the notes or values between FROM NOTE FROM CC and TO NOTE TO CC will change Only the notes or values below FROM NOTE FROM CC and above TO NOTE TO CC will change W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data DELETE c Mill aes josie bn Sotto mre nC Stoner etoc uena 4 FROM a TO Da foa bso Unlike the ERASE function DELETE not only erases the data but also the measures beats and or CPT units so that all data that lie behind the TO position are shifted towards the beginning of the track s For this reason you cannot choose the data type to be erased E ES l cae METRACK AL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar
303. anger RIT Tempo Allows you to start the Arranger s RIT function page 91 Arranger ACC Tempo Allows you to start the Arranger s ACC function page 91 Reset Start This function allows you have the Arranger start on the first beat of the currently selected Style pat tern when you press the ASSIGN SW button Use it when you are accompanying a singer or soloist whose timing is a little shaky and suddenly notice that the Arranger lags one or two beats behind the singer soloist PAL E 80 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Keyboard Exchange UP2 1 Allows you to switch off the UP1 part and activate the UP2 part and vice versa Note If neither UP1 nor UP2 are on when you first press the ASSIGN SW button one of them Is activated Keyboard Exchange LW2 1 Allows you to switch off the LW1 part and activate the LW2 and vice versa Note If neither LW1 nor LW2 are on when you first press the ASSIGN SW button one of them Is activated MBass Keyboard Arranger Allows you to set the Arranger Chord parameter to Off chord recognition as well as ABS recognition off see p 89 and at the same time select the SPLIT Keyboard mode and activate the MBS part and vice versa Note Pressing the ASSIGN SW button you assign this func tion to does not mean that the Arranger stops If you switched on the Arr Hold function page 89 the last recog nized chord will go on sounding so that your MBS part may
304. anger Recorder but continues to send MIDI messages Selecting Internal and muting a part thus has the same effect as selecting Local Off see p 239 Int Mid A muted part can no longer be played via the E 80 s keyboard or Arranger Recorder and no longer sends MIDI messages TRANSPOSE RX On Off Use this parameter to spec ify whether note messages received via MIDI should be transposed MVELOCITY VELO TX VELO RX On 1 127 Your E 80 is equipped with a velocity sensitive keyboard and a tone generator capable of responding to velocity messages Use the fields to switch the reception RX or transmission TX of velocity messages on or off If you don t select On specify which velocity value to use instead of the continuous flux The value you set will be used for all notes received via MIDI IN USB RX or sent to MIDI OUT USB TX EIX SYSEX Use this parameter to specify whether button icon on or not off the E 80 should send SysEx mes sages Such messages are not standardized so that each manufacturer can use them ad lib for temporary or per manent changes to the way a part behaves Effects parameters for instance can only be changed via SysEx messages Such messages may slow down playback on external MIDI instruments or yield no effect at all which is why you have the option to switch off their transmission in the first place DATA CHANGES This parameter allows you to specify how the o
305. anger sound High Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the high range flanger sound High Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the high range flanger sound that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 63 Band Step Flg A step flanger that lets you apply an effect independently to the low frequency and high frequency ranges Split Frequency 200 8000Hz Frequency at which the low and high ranges will be divided Low Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the low range flanger sound is heard Low Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the low modulation rate Should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Low Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the low range flanger sound is modulated Low Rate note Musical Notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync param eter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Low Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the low range flanger sound Low Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the low range flanger sound Low Feedback 98 0 98 Propo
306. anger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Level 0 127 Output level 35 EH gt Delay This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in series Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix Level 0 127 Level of the overtones gen erated by the enhancer Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard 257 E 80 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 36 Chorus gt DLY This effect connects a chorus and a delay in series Chor
307. ansmitted or received W MIDI RX CHANNEL Use this parameter to assign a MIDI receive channel to the Vocal Harmonist part 1 16 If you don t want these messages to be received switch off the field E 80 Music Workstation Roland MIDI Sets MIDI Sets MIDI Sets are memories for MIDI settings The E 80 provides eight MIDI Set memories that you can use to change your MIDI configuration You can link a MIDI Set to a User Program page 131 and specify which MIDI Set should be loaded when you switch on the E 80 see below If you need to reset some or all MIDI parameters to their default values select and or rather than a MIDI Set Writing a MIDI Set 1 If you are still on one of the EDIT MIDI pages press the field If not press the button and the field on the MENU display page EASY SETTING a SELECT OUTPUT MODE ext oes HIDI SET a OOo O a n a a 2 Press the field it lights red 3 Press the field that corresponds to the MIDI Set where you wish to save your MIDI settings 1 lt 8 The display returns to the MIDI page 4 Press the button to return to the main page Using MIDI Sets 1 Press the button The display changes to MENW J GUITAR AZ mef ge UITART BEAM REN spite Pat OCAL _ E TOUCH f HARMONIST Bm ARRANGER gt f STYLE f f s SETTING COMPOSER UTILITY i rr FUNCTION a HAND MIDI n TONE 3 FOOT lt USBDATA EDIT CONTROL
308. any other available Keyboard part s om oNG Amazing Grace Strumn ap This depends on whether you are currently in SPLIT You can also select this page by pressing MENU gt UP2 UP3 or WHOLE mode MBS LW2 LW1 UP2 UP3 field gt field When the UP3 Split function is on this doesn t concern The display changes to the UP3 part which can still be played via its own zone if required 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the field SPIN Tee TOU GH MAIN SPLIT UPPER3 SPLIT gom oo LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 UPPER 3 f p m HOLD E 2 Press the UPPER 3 SPLIT field so that it lights E am The keyboard is split at the G5 with the UP1 and UP2 parts to the left orange and the UP3 part to the right blue of this second split point 99 E 80 Music Workstation Advanced Keyboard part functions 3 Switch on the UP1 and UP2 parts their PART ON OFF button must light 4 Press the or field to switch it on Only one of these can be active at any one time You can however switch them both off Here is what HIGH and LOW mean HIGH If you select this mode and play just one note it is sounded by the UP1 part If you keep holding that key while pressing another lower key to its left the highest note is played by the UP1 part while lower notes are played by the remaining available Keyboard parts in our example that would be UP2 This is perf
309. arameter appears in the upper right hand corner of the display VIF lead get ne se Tempo Change b 10 Beat Change 4 4 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F7 01 031 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 01 037 Sys Ex FO 41 10 4212 40 01 38 06 01 F7 LEVENT AA 0 0 0 0 01 043 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 33 5432 F7 0 0 0 0 01 050 Sys Ex FO 41 10 42 12 40 01 345431 F7 01 056 Sys Ex FO 41 104212 40 01 00 20 28 EVENT 01 099 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 00 20 28 f 04 060 Tempo Change 60 02 000 Tempo Change 52 AA 02 060 Tempo Change 46 03 000 Tempo Change 140 Geax TOSO O 2 Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the first value SILAS STACI C SUT Tempo Change Value 1 000 Beat Change 4 4 01 020 Sys Ex FO 7E 7F 09 01 F 01 031 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F 01 037 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 38 06 01 F7 0 0 0 0 Bart X 01 043 Sys Ex FO H 10 42 12 40 01 33 5432 F7 0 0 0 0 MOVE o EVENT ga COP 01 050 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 34 5431 F7 01 056 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 00 20 28 01 099 Sys Ex FO H 10 4212 40 01 00 20 28 4 060 Tempo Change 60 02 000 Tempo Change 52 02 060 Tempo Change 46 Tempo Change 3 Modify the value Rotate the dial or Set the value using the DEC INC buttons or Press the dial and enter the value using the numeric pad that appears in the display If you choose to work with the numeric
310. arameter page 6 Set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons and upper right cor ner allow you to specify how strongly the multi effect s output signal should be processed by the Reverb and or Chorus processor If that is unneces sary set both parameters to 0 7 Press the button to return to the main page Linking Multi FX type selection to the Upper part Upper 1 M FX Link If you like the E 80 can automatically load the Multi FX type that is suited for the Tone you assign to the UP1 part 1 Press the button The display changes to MENW 1 Thru 31 DST gt Flanger 61 Band Chorus 2 Stereo EQ 32 DST gt Delay 62 Band Flanger 3 Overdrive 33 EH gt Chorus 63 Band Step Flg 4 Distortion 34 EH gt Flanger 64 VS Overdrive 5 Phaser 35 EH gt Delay 65 VS Distortion 6 Spectrum 36 Chorus gt DLY 66 GT Amp Simul 7 Enhancer 37 Flanger gt DLY 67 Gate 8 Auto Wah 38 CHO gt Flanger 68 Long Delay 9 Rotary 39 CHO Delay 69 Serial Delay 10 Compressor 11 Limiter 12 Hexa Chorus 13 Trem Chorus 14 Space D 15 St Chorus 16 St Flanger 17 Step Flanger 18 St Delay 19 Mod Delay 20 3 Tap Delay 21 4 Tap Delay 22 Time Delay 23 2 Pitch Shifter 24 FBK Pitch 25 Reverb 26 Gate Reverb 27 0D Chorus 28 OD gt Flanger 29 OD gt Delay 30 DST gt Chorus 40 Flanger DLY 41 CHO Flanger 42 Isolator 43 Low Boost 44 Super Filter 45 Step F
311. arameter that is currently selected whose dis play field lights CLIP CONTROL TX This parameter allows you to set the MIDI channel CHANNEL to be used for the transmission of these messages Use the field to enable lights or disable dark transmission COLOR CONTROL TX This parameter allows you to set the MIDI channel CHANNEL to be used for the trans mission of these messages Use the field to enable lights or disable dark transmission PARAM This page contains several parameters that are not related to one another the other MIDI pages always concentrate on one aspect MUG Seay KEYEQARD STYLE SONG SYSTEM Ll PARTS E PARTS PARTS Param PARAMETER VELOCITY RE TH DATA CHANGES Lm WE PARAMETER OCTAVE TX The OCTAVE TX parameter can be set to Absolute or Relative You may have noticed that if you assign a bass sound to the UP1 2 3 part in SPLIT mode the notes are transposed to allow you to play meaning ful bass lines using the UP1 2 3 part Relative means that this internal and automatic transposition is trans lated into MIDI note numbers In Absolute mode however the MIDI note numbers sent to other instruments will be the ones of the keys you actually press PART SWITCH This parameter allows you to specify whether or not a muted part should go on sending MIDI messages Internal A muted part can no longer be played via the E 80 s keyboard or Arr
312. art song or Style playback The volume gradu ally increases As soon as the volume has returned to normal ASSIGN SW 1 goes dark Mi Fade Out e Start song or Style playback and press ASSIGN SW it flashes The volume gradually decreases until it reaches zero the button goes dark Song or Style playback stops If you think the Fade In or Fade Out takes too long here s how to change it 1 Press the button E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the Fade In Out function More refined song functions The display changes to amr HARMONIST V LINK oe a Ae 2 Press the FUNCTION then the field oo re AS TIME IN a E cH att sti TIME OUT ug sti Mlin i TIME HOLD FC ttt bt G5 3 Press the field of the parameter you wish to change Press to change the Fade In duration 0 20 seconds Press to change the Fade Out duration 0 20 seconds Press to set how long it takes for the volume to return to the MASTER setting 0 10 seconds after completing the fade out 4 Set the desired value with the dial or the DECI INC buttons Press the button to return to the main page ot 157 E 80 Music Workstation More refined song functions Programming MARK amp JUMP locations The supplied songs in the internal memory come with four locations already memorized that can be selected by pressing MARK amp JUMP 1 o4 page 43 When you select a song that contains such
313. ase the operation applies to all tracks MINIT VALUE Press this field to reset all values on this page to their initial State if you want to start again You will notice that there are two kinds of changes that can be performed on this page FROM TO and INC DEC mi FROM TO Enter the original data value i e the value that is being used right now by the selected track s in the FROM col umn For TO specify the new value that should replace the FROM value These are what we call absolute changes you don t add or subtract values you replace them with other values This system is only available for messages that allow you to select sounds or sound banks namely CC00 0 127 ALL This control change is the so called MSB bank select message It allows you to select the Capital Tone select O of a sound address if you don t want to use variations or to select another varia tion level The TO value CCOO 0 can be useful for ensuring GM compatibility because that standard unlike GM2 or GS does not support tone variations Select if the current setting must not change In the Tone list see the Parameter Reference booklet you will see that most sounds are variations The value 8 for CCOO is probably the most popular one as you would discover if you studied the list of 1596 sounds To change any CCOO value to 8 for example enter CC00 ALL for FROM and CC00 8 for TO To change all occu
314. ass Enhancer 121 Disk WNivscccccerecvnntneaeeanaace 225 User eee eee 92 94 209 Display DeECOSOUNG sicccccumaoeneeenenss 247 Contrast naana anaana aaa 21 Dissolve IME srrrersssrriacda ne iraa 245 DIVISION nanana anaana 200 204 206 DIEG SEPETE eee 72 73 Doubling nananana nnana annaa nnaa 39 Do eee err ee er ee arts doe ed a 127 DrUM teste anaana naana annaa 44 82 ME o A 45 Instrument 0 0 0 00008 145 IM a eE 145 Drum Set 0 0c cece eee eee 32 210 PQUANZccccceccceew ae eee 143 146 Note PINCH lt e6 ec0ceeeecanaas 211 Sound Citic cicccceccneuwyeanwes 145 IWO AO rrr eean naeg 175 DrUMMING 0 eee eee eee 31 E ETETETT TEETE EEEE 83 Dynamic PAO a EE 71 89 Ea EREET TTT T TTT EEEE AE 90 DYNAMICS sssr es 68 E Easy Chord MOUE ec usacces ane can een ee 89 S nill Sd d deed6ebenteeesteae 28 33 Edit WACK s ceccccdagitateeeesaasan 179 GE TITT EEEE 136 163 D EEERRT ETETETT EES 238 SA e EEEE TETE 105 AUdiO Nas sassssseeeceeaeescenes 119 Compressor 008 115 118 Eae era a Gacaramagaeaean eens 114 118 Harmonic Bars 0 00 34 Keyboard parts anaannaaana 108 ATC i eee 111 143 OVEWIEW 6cissciscavecrerertere 106 Song Style csc ccsavecsuaewuacan 116 WIS TETTEI ee eee 123 EHHE as c ecceeecsdsnsatsiass 46 121 FCCC serasa eae ae 36 PECTIC DOUUM aaen ENE 37 EM 2000 oa a anwar tba aed ead es 232 END RW oeeeeeecccececcuaaseaacescss 26 PUICING
315. ate new Styles by assembling tracks from different existing Styles Note You cannot copy an AccDrums track to another track AccBass Acc6 Likewise the bass part can only be copied to an ABass track Accomp tracks however can be copied to whichever Accomp track you like Note If the Style RAM memory already contains new data save It before copying The E 80 has no Undo function Saving a Style before copying allows you to revert to the previous ver sion if something goes wrong See Saving your Style on page 207 Starting with all tracks of an existing Style The easiest way to do this is by selecting a factory Style and edit it 1 Select the Style you want to work with see p 27 2 Press the button The display changes to MEND GUITAR EZ TUNING ge UITAR X D BEAM nee meine ttl Fe E erga e LINK SR ARRANGER T STYLE r SETTING COMPOSER PR rcron 4 CONTROLLERS TONE ra FOOT e lt USB DATA Ca EDIT STORAGE eaf CONTROLLERS 3 Press the STYLE COMPOSER field SIVE GOMPOSER 4 Change the Style data to your liking Copying individual Style tracks The COPY function can be used to copy individual tracks Modes and Divisions to replace existing parts while keeping the remaining parts of the Style already in the Style RAM memory 1 Press the field on the STYLE COM POSER page followed by the field Teeke kaar eke oko Coc fiume M M Co mi fe fa Cc el ree
316. ated by take you to a page where you can select songs SONG Music Styles STYLE or User Programs USER PROG These fields have the same functions as the buttons of the same name in the FINDER pad The OCTAVE button icons allow you to shift the tuning of the currently selected Keyboard part indi cated by a red arrow To select a Keyboard part press its TONE ASSIGN button The remaining fields allow you to select the Key board part you wish to assign another sound to and recalls the TONE SELECT page They duplicate the functions of the KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN buttons E 80 Music Workstation Roland Front panel The SCALE TUNE field takes you to a page where yo can change the tuning of the E 80 s notes so as to be able to use Arabic scales for example The TRANSPOSE field 8 finally calls up the display page where you can transpose one several or all sec tions this depends on the mode you select on that page This field duplicates the function of the TRANSPOSE buttons When the E 80 s Guitar mode Is on the display looks as follows onc New Song Strummlin Pop Free Panel USER PROGR Pad With Obentard 1 UPPER2 Pressing the field takes you to the GUITAR MODE page Note that this field can either contain an elec tric guitar or an acoustic one to indicate the kind of instrument you selected This field duplicates the function of the EASY SET TING buttons As you see t
317. aug Abaug Aaug Bb aug Baug SPPUSTE LT CETL SCE CPPS STS CEREAN CED CEP et F sus4 Gsus4 Absus4 Asus4 Bb sus4 Bsus4 AHTEMYN CEEA LEELEE EY LEELEE IM CEEE LET LEH CETE EMT F 7sus4 G7sus4 Ab7sus4 A7sus4 Bb 7sus4 B7sus4 TIRTA CECE EE TTY CREEL eT AEEA E OPE rr Ett CPP PL F 7 13 G7 13 Ab7 13 A7 13 Bb 7 13 B7 13 CLIPS EY COSTCLT SI LEPPAETTT CAMELT ETT LETT ie EP LET LET Index Numerics 1 Ch Limit 0 00 0008 242 VA EEEE T 55 1 2 Dol EEEE eee 81 NS E aac orien 206 U2 Me eeraa 176 16 track Sequencer 2c ucabee eens 61 173 tst Channel RX iciadidieeddbdddeds 242 PASE i EEEE EEEN 242 LAVE a EE 55 2nd Channel RX ssscsscssesssssssni 242 PANG TONE persiaa 84 PAPE EEEE 206 A ADIS errate ERRERA 83 On Off 00 cee cease 74 PA EE 63 179 ABS ananannnaneananannananecoecs 82 83 ABs amp ADr On Off 20005 74 AsO AEE 242 ACC se iese ie x sence cees ah seh acca aad des 75 91 oO santas EEEE EEEE woes 82 Acc amp ABs On Off 200000 74 Accomp Minus 0ne ee eee wees 2 A5 ONOFF os oe ey eeeeenees 74 Accompaniment 005 25 82 PCOU SUC ate anaenaseuatedueeen eset 36 Acoustic Setup cee eee 37 LO ee oe ee one e ae eee 222 Adapt Chor ernen 2 cee 39 Adaptive Chord Voicing 222 ADR a a ee eA 82 ADrum On Off 0220000 74 Aftertouch ee 70 Peete needa eee eee 44 FLES lo sete wees sta aida 230 Alphabetic Order 40 96 128 160 Alteration 0 0 0
318. ave SOR square wave S N sine wave SAW1 2 sawtooth wave Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Depth to which the effect is applied EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range 0 High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Level 0 127 Output level 54 Auto Pan Cyclically modulates the stereo location of the sound Modulation Wave TRI SOR SIN SAW1 SAW2 Modu lation Wave TRI triangle wave SOR square wave SIN sine wave SAW 1 2 sawtooth wave Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set th
319. ave to point out all settings related to MIDI must be written to a MIDI Set page 243 MIDI settings are not saved to a User Program Note You can link a MIDI Set to each User Program so that the User Program in question automatically loads the required MIDI settings About the User Program memory structure Unlike previous Roland instruments the E 80 no longer has a fixed area where it stores User Program settings so that the number of User Programs is in fact unlim ited User Programs can reside in the internal memory or ona memory card You can even load them individu ally using the User Program Finder To keep this massive amount of information manage able the E 80 works with User Program Set Lists hence the button Such lists are what their name suggests references to User Program files stored in the same memory area as the list file itself User Program list 8 references x 18 pages G G G G g G G G G G G G g G G G G G G G G The referenced User Programs are saved separately a a G G G g G G g PAGE PAGE 1 Internal memory or E ae Same system for pages 2 18 Set Lists are references to User Programs They do not contain those registrations The advantage of User Pro gram Set Lists is that loading a completely different set of registrations takes less than a second loading User Program Sets o
320. ay shows a list of 5 songs in the selected memory area E 80 Music Workstation Roland Working with the Song Finder Wif you press INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY the display changes to SONG LIST Ole Qr ae Qnm be FEVER ee E RSTDAY FIRSTDAY MID FORCA iFORCA MID FRIDAYNI iFRIDAYNI MID E HEREWEGO iHEREWEGO MI FOUND found entries GLOBAL total number of songs in that memory area The SONG NAME ARTIST GENRE and fields allow you to sort songs in alphabetical order This sorting order is determined by the selected cate gory 3 If the name of the song you want to use to is already displayed press its line 4 To display the next 5 songs press the field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a previous group of 5 songs press You can also use the dial and the DECI INC buttons to change pages Locating files with the Song Finder The following is not available for floppy disks a Choose a category Index The highest hierarchical level of the Song Finder database Is called Index All search operations apply to the selected Index and therefore not necessarily to all files in the internal memory or on card e Press the field in the top left corner SONG INDEX ALL D od amp Gold Cd Ballads e Either press the field that corresponds to the desired son
321. ayed on the main page ARKAAISEN Sarre FILL RITARDANDO 93 O 1 2 3 _ PRESET AUTO and LOCK allow you to specify what happens when you select another Style If Arranger playback is stopped when you select another Style If the Arranger is run ning when you select another Style PRESET The Style s preset tempo is loaded AUTO The Arranger loads the preset tempo of The new Style is the new Style played back at the LOCK The preset tempo of tempo of the previous the new Style isnot Style loaded Instead the Style will be played at the current tempo TEMPO CHANGE RITARD and ACCELER The ACCELER RITARD parameter allows you to speed up or slow down the Style tempo by the amount you set here To use these functions you must assign them to the ASSIGN SW buttons or an optional FC 7 There are three Ritardando functions one for all Style patterns one for Ending patterns and one for Fill Ins They all use the TEMPO CHANGE settings on the following page ARRANGER Sti adi TEMPO CHANGE FILL IN TEMPO F ie ae A LOCK ry Press the field of the parameter whose value you wish to change Parameter fields can also be selected using the DATA ENTRY lt gt buttons Set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons ACCELER RITARD Allows you to set the degree ratio by which the tempo changes when the ACCELER or RITARD function is triggered Example if
322. because it only affects the onset of the notes There is thus no periodic modulation of the pitch NOTE WRAP Activate this field if the Vocoder notes Should remain within a natural range If it is off some notes may sound too high or too low PITCH BEND Press this field so that it lights if you want to influence the pitch of the voice effect using the E 80 s Pitch Bend lever OCTAVE This parameter allows you to transpose the Vocoder in octave steps e Press the field to leave this page 15353 E 80 Music Workstation Editing the Vocal Harmonist parts If you press the field the display looks as follows VDE Mere Sey pes PART 1 PART 2 PART 3 PART 4 FREQUENCY HZ Gre Om Gm Ou Gm On Om Om ALL PARTS FREQUENCY HZ GAIN DE ep ial This page contains a simple equalizer for each Vocoder part as well as an EQ band that applies to all four voices simultaneously for added flexibility These are connected in series e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons EQUALIZER Press this field to switch all equalizers on this page on or off The equalizer can be used for two things a emphasizing a specific frequency range to create a special effect or make the part more distin guishable b to reduce the level of frequencies that mask other sounds or produce a boomy sound FREQUENCY
323. being played back the Arranger does not respond The same is true when you try to start song playback while the Arranger is running That s because the SONG ARRANGER START PRIORITY func tion is on and gives priority to the section that is already running You can however switch this system off In that case starting Arranger playback while a song Is running will stop the song and launch Style playback If the Arranger is running while you press PLAY STOP m the song starts and the Arranger stops Note This switch does not apply when you record using Arranger backing see p 60 there both sections can work simultaneously E 80 Music Workstation Roland General settings Note START PRIORITY also applies to situations where you try 3 Press the field to return to the menu or the to start Arranger playback using the SYNC START function EXIT button to return to the main page Touch Screen Beep The E 80 s display generates a beep sound each time you press a field That way you know when you have selected parameter You can switch this beep off if you find it distracting Flashing Exit Whenever you jump to a different page than the main page the starts flashing to signal that you can Initializing the E 80 Factory Reset press it to return to the main page If you don t need After working extensively with your E 80 you may that flashing pattern and want the button to remain want to recall the original fa
324. board in much the same way as on an acoustic piano Though you cannot assign other functions to this footswitch you can decide when a given part should respond to these mes Sages The Hold function is available for the following parts UP1 2 3 LW1 2 and M Bass on condition that you select WHOLE keyboard mode In SPLIT mode the sus tain pedal s Hold function only works for the right most part When UP1 2 3 are layered the Hold effect applies to those Upper parts This applies to the Auto setting You can also specify whether or not the Melody Intelli gence function MELODY INTELL should respond to Hold messages Note Do not forget to connect an optional DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U footswitch to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket 1 Press the button a _ sau ao a bi ET The display changes to MENW CA T ATE Gas ee ee CONTROLLERS Press the field followed by the field Use the PART fields to select the Keyboard part whose HOLD setting you want to change Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to select the function Hold Assign Auto means that the part in question only responds to Hold messages If it is assigned to the right half SPLIT or the entire keyboard WHOLE On means that the part in question always responds to Hold messages even if it is assigned to the left half of the keyboard Off finally means that the part does not respond to Hold mess
325. brato effect to the transformed voice The Vibrato parameters can be set on the EDIT page 4 When you are done either press the button to return to the main page or one of the other fields to set those parameters as well Note The and fields allow you to jump to the effects or tone controls If you press the field the display looks as follows VOIGE FA EDIT GENDER PITCH VIBRATO COARSE RATE _ RISE TIME a Gm Gm pif ee DEPTH DELAY TIME Gm GEG VIBRATO Note Be sure to select the desired preset before pressing the field and modifying the following parameters e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons Here s what the parameters mean GENDER Allows you to change the timbre of the part Negative values produce a masculine effect positive values add feminine qualities This parameter should be set in relation to the COARSE value if you want to achieve a realistic effect Pitch COARSE Allows you to transpose the processed voice signal in semitone steps 12 corresponds to 1 octave 24 to 2 octaves Pitch FINE Allows you to change the tuning of the pro cessed voice in very small cent steps For the following the indicator icon must light for the effect to be noticeable 15n E 80 Music Workstation Editing the Vocal Harmonist parts Vibrato RATE
326. cable to connect the E 80 to your com puter MIDI w USB THRU OUT IN oe p To the a USB port of your computer Note Always connect the E 80 directly to your computer or to a powered USB hub 5 Press the button 2 3 1 The display changes to MENW J r GUITAR i K TUNING ge utani X D BEAM RAN splits tt vocal ae TOUCH f HARMONIST J ARD ARRANGER gt 4 STYLE fe SETTING COMPOSER ASx our FP function Ae HAND zoi CONTROLLERS m FRE Tonej Foor e lt USB DATA EDIT CONTROLLERS STORAGE 6 Press the field USBDATASIORAGE CONNECTION MODE IEPELD _JExternal Memory Internal Memory Ah Back t Now you need to specify which memory area should appear on the computer s desktop 7 Press or mem ory card to activate the connection with your computer Depending on the area you choose the display now looks as follows US DATA STOA Perey INTERNAL MEMORY I 2 qi or like this OS DANA SIORASE PC lt gt EXTERNAL MEMORY ae A Ee aye DISCONNECT Note In this state all of the E 80 s panel functions are blocked You can however keep playing the last Keyboard part s you selected But you cannot select other sounds or parts 8 Open the My Computer window Windows 9 Check whether your computer found a E80_SSD E80_CARD or just Removable Disk drive 10 Open that d
327. can or cannot interrupt Arranger playback and vice versa See page 246 for details 2 3 4 5 6 Using the Song Cover function The COVER function provides masks that change the instrumentation of the selected song or Music Style Simply by selecting another preset you can cause a Viennese waltz to be played back by a heavy metal band etc Even though the arrangement rhythm riffs does not change the songs character can be modified beyond recognition 1 Press the button once or twice to select _ _ the display page shown below EA E BAND aJa PE Fa a Select the parts whose instrumentation you want to change Press the field if all instruments should be replaced Press the field if only the drum and percus sion instruments should change Press the field if you re happy with everything but the bass line s sound Press one of the six fields in the lower half of the display to select another preset After selecting a preset you can press page 1 to return to the original orchestration If none of the displayed presets appeal to you use the PAGE fields at the right to jump to another page with more presets Try out various presets to see how fast this con cept works If you like the new version better than the original one you can press the field to save the song to the internal memory a memory card or floppy disk with this information page 148 Note T
328. ccess the parameters of the Equalizer The display changes to SUAS TSI LOO EQ LEVEL EQ GAIN DE a ie iil G Sp a GF ea Using the Style Song Mastering oom i Tools EE 7 The E 80 contains two effects processors that apply to all Style and Song parts there is a second set for the Keyboard parts The equalizer has the same function as the BASS MID and TREBLE knobs on an amplifier it allows you to color the sound or to apply tonal corrections that These processors are collectively called the Mastering help you avoid saturating the speakers Tools because they allow you to perfect the signal mix 2 Press the or OFF field to switch the equal output by the E 80 so as to adapt It to the sound sys izer on icon lights or off icon goes dark tem you are using Though they are not meant to be You can also do so on the KEYBOARD EFFECTS page changed for every song you intend to play switching see above settings is relatively easy and could therefore be used to 3 Press the field below EQUALIZER that displays the great effect name of the currently selected preset Note The MASTERING TOOLS settings are global parameters that 4 are not saved to individual User Programs You can however archive them by saving the current User Program Set to the internal memory or a memory card Select the desired equalizer preset with the dial or the DEC INC buttons The available presets are 1 Flat 4 Jazz 6
329. characters again Press the field to start your search If the following message appears the E 80 was unable to locate files that match the search criteria E eg A No Match Found OPTIONS gaff Fmoer FOUND Q PAGE 23D GLOBAL 47 In that case all song names are listed the xx of yy entry lists twice the same number of files If the E 80 did find one or several matches the xx number will be smaller than the yy number e Press the field of the song you need and do your thing Editing the Song Finder information The Finder information is based on search criteria that need to be supplied for Standard MIDI Files Normal Standard MIDI Files do not contain them Note Some of the following information cannot be entered for or read from files on floppy disk Song Options After pressing the FINDER button the display looks as follows SOP ley C p B SONG en Ba GENRE B FILE e FEVER iFEVER MID E DF FIRSTDAY MID E L FRDAYN iv rvnt of Ep HEREWEGO reeves J SS at mo RE _ E The field in the lower left corner provides access to a display page where you can add database information This also works for songs that already contain entries First select the song whose database information you wish to edit by pressing its field 2 Press the field eters Coon eas a GD porerne B ARTIST EA Bo EE oc 2 oer 3 Led e e ee e par ror owe a ef 3 Now do one of the f
330. chord requires that you play at least a triad i e the three notes that make up a major or minor chord You can play more than three chord notes but remember that two notes won t cause the Arranger to change the key Note You can also select PIANO STYLE by pressing the EASY SETTING button INTELLIGENT Select INTELLIGENT when you want the Arranger to supply the missing notes of the chords you play See p 273 for a chart of intelligent chords and the way to play them This is probably the mode you will E 80 Music Workstation Roland More refined Arranger settings 1 Select the ARRANGER SETTING page see step 1 of Chord recognition area ZONE on p 88 ARRANGEISETAING ZONE TYPE HODE LEFT mT o f INTRO ENDING WHOLE MITEN JEA 2 Press the button icon to switch the function off dark or on lights 3 Press the button to return to the main page or continue with the next step Intro amp Ending Alteration If the Intro and Ending patterns sound odd when you start a song with a rather unusual chord Csus4 for instance switch off the ALTERATION function In that case the special chord is memorized but the Intro or Ending uses the normal chord progression e g C Am F G If this button icon is on however the chord pro gression of the selected Intro or Ending patterns is adapted to the first chord you play which may lead to odd results select most of the time
331. cify how strongly the currently selected VOICE part should be processed by VOICE Delay HARMONY column Reverb Send Allows you to specify how strongly the currently selected HARMONY part should be processed by the HARMONY Reverb processor which is a separate processor Chorus Send Allows you to specify how strongly the currently selected HARMONY part should be processed by the Chorus processor of the VOCAL HARMONIST sec tion The VOICE section doesn t have a chorus effect Delay Send Allows you to specify how strongly the currently selected HARMONY part should be processed by the HARMONY Delay processor 4 Repeat the above for the remaining combinations To select a different Harmonist part switch on its button The names of the currently selected parts appear below the VOICE and HARMONY mes sages Note All settings for all VOCAL HARMONIST buttons are writ ten to a User Program page 125 5 Set the MIC INPUT parameters as desired As explained under Compressor Gate and effects on p 46 the Compressor and Gate apply to the MIC INPUT signal before it reaches the VOCAL HARMON IST section Press the button to return to the main page or continue with the next section to program the effect processors 6 eomme Reverb Delay and Chorus effects Each Vocal Harmonist part can have its own effect set tings These settings change automatically as you press TALK VOICE FX or SINGER on the o
332. cluding notes that were played a little ahead of the beat and therefore sound on the last beat you con vert See page 180 for details 11 Press the RECORDER button to Start playback The selected passage is repeated over and over until you stop playback 12 If necessary use the and fields to temporarily switch off or isolate certain tracks This is only for checking purposes The on off status does not affect the selection that will be converted Initializing the Style RAM memory The field on this page is usually used only once before converting the first song tracks If you don t use this field the tracks you con vert are added to the Style data already present in the E 80 s Style RAM area If you need to start from scratch however to create an entirely new Style e Press the INITIALIZE STYLE field STYLE GONVERTER SWEETPOT meas 0001 1 4 130 474 The Style RAM area will be erased Are you sure SETTINGS TEMPO AND TIME SIGNATURE nnn hh Th eanl torny e Press the TEMPO and use the DATA ENTRY dial or the DEC INC buttons to enter the desired value E 80 Music Workstation Roland Style Converter e Press the two TIME SIGNATURE fields one after the other and use the dial or the DEC buttons to enter the desired value Note This is your first and last chance to specify the new Style s time signature The only way you can do this is by ini
333. complex delay sounds Delay 1 Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay 1 time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a time msec or a note value Delay 1 Time msec 0 1300ms Delay time from when sound is input to delay 1 until the delay sound is heard Delay 1 Time note musical notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Delay 1 Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of delay 1 negative values invert the phase Delay 1 HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Frequency at which the high frequency content of the delayed sound of delay 1 will be cut BYPASS no cut Delay 2 Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay 2 time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a time msec or a note value Delay 2 Time msec 0 1300ms Delay time from when sound is input to delay 2 until the delay sound is heard Delay 2 Time note musical notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo If you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value o
334. crophone Direct Level 04127 Volume of the direct sound Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Level 0 127 Output level 67 Gate Cuts the reverb s decay according to the volume of the sound sent into the effect Use this when you want to create an arti ficial sounding decrease in the reverb s decay Threshold 0 127 Volume level at which the gate begins to close Mode Gate Duck Type of gate GATE The gate will close when the volume of the original sound decreases cutting the original sound DUCK Ducking The gate will close when the volume of the original sound increases cutting the original sound Attack 0 127 Adjusts the time it takes for the gate to fully open after being triggered Hold 0 127 Adjusts the time it takes for the gate to start closing after the source sound falls beneath the Threshold Release 0 127 Adjusts the time it takes the gate to fully close after the hold time Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 68 Long Delay A delay that provides a long delay time Delay Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay time should be synchronized t
335. cting another COVER preset without saving this version In case 3 the field on the STYLE COVER page temporarily restores the original version with no COVER data To return to version 2 after select ing a different COVER preset press the field Note Saving a Style with a COVER preset affects all User Pro grams that refer to this Style x w Freeze Data Press this field to commit your orchestration changes and change them to MIDI messages the Style Composer page 201 can read Changes you don t commit are ignored by the Style Composer Note that freezing data is only necessary If you intend to edit a Style using the Style Composer or to ensure that the settings can no longer be modified by accident Saving a Style with a COVER alteration As stated above you can decide to change any Style on a more or less permanent basis by saving it with the selected COVER preset or STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS set tings p 140 1 On the STYLE COVER page select the desired COVER preset see above 2 Press the field STYLE ae EA E BAND Poi Poi FAE a Fal CT pe eS Er OE E Fo 3 4 5 The display changes to Dm B nal Ki r3 oda ja coe This page allows you to save the current Style to the internal memory a memory card or a floppy disk It will be saved along with the COVER settings you selected Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY INTERNAL MEMORY fiel
336. ctory settings Before lit switch off the button Icon doing so however it would be a good idea to save your own settings to a memory card see p 226 or to Flashing Metronome archive them via USB see p 234 While the Arranger is stopped the but ton flashes in red to indicate the current tempo If you Here is how to initialize your E 80 don t need that flashing pattern switch off the 1 Press the button button icon 2 Press the field followed by the field Info There may be times when you perform with a rented er E 80 and use a memory card that contains all your set i tings in which case it is important to quickly confirm ALL the original FACTORY DATA will be restored whether the E 80 contains the correct wave expansion ALL Global Parameters will be initialized board and which system version it uses You can also seat git based parca Ararat an check the remaining capacity of the internal memory and connected memory card 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the field UTILITY peste SRX A Expansion Board SRX 05 SupDance SRX B Expansion Board SRX 09 World Cl Free Space Internal Memory 26704 Kb Free Space Memory Card 184448 Kb Version v1 00 b038 2006 April21 16 58 3 Press the field to initialize the E 80 or the field to return to the menu if you have changed your mind You can also press the button to return to the main page The message Operation
337. d Shows the names of the songs that contain the mel ody you played e Press the field of the song you want to play back Note If no songs were found the following message appears and no file names are displayed in which case you need to press the SONG NAME ARTIST GENRE or FILE NAME field to display all songs again a No Match Found Fees OUND oO GLOBA 7 If the E 80 did find one or several matches the FOUND number will be smaller than the GLOBAL number Starting playback 7 To return to the main page press EXIT rn egg 4 J 93 4 a ni a rn ee car SONG onc Amazing Grace Strummlin Pop PROGR P 1 1 Gospel Love mezra ema EI a LoweR2 Pad With EPI PER2 sass XY Ac_Bass The main page is the E 80 s display page that pro vides a maximum of relevant information and allows you to select and change items you may need dur ing normal operation It also displays the name of the selected song the tempo and the current measure You can press the button icon in the upper right hand corner to see the song s tempo This value is automatically dis played when you start song playback Note If the message Too many events is displayed the selected song contains more data than can be handled and is therefore not played back 8 Press the button Playback of the selected song starts Note See Song Arranger Start Priority on p 246 if playback does n
338. d along with the song name Continue with step 3 to select the song you want to listen to W Using the Index function After performing step 2 press the field in the upper left corner The display changes to SORIS jy iss GE Renan amp EDIT E2 EE Top 40 Latin Celebration a Tempo Ballads 5 Press one of the displayed field names to narrow down your search to songs that belong to the selected category Index The display now returns to the page shown under step 1 above This time however only the songs belonging to the selected Index are displayed 6 Continue with step 3 to select the song you want to listen to Note Press the field to display all songs in the selected memory Mi Using Play amp Search If you only know the melody of the desired song press the field under step 1 Bi T o ae see doer 9 ue oe e Press the field SONS FIRE ALP 4 Q GERTS Play the melody on the keyboard ie dde Rel e As indicated in the display play the main theme on the keyboard You can play in any key and the rhythm doesn t have to be perfect either this function just looks for intervals e f you played a wrong note press DELETE LAST NOTE e To enter the entire line again press to erase the previously entered notes then play the phrase again e After entering the melody press the field The display now returns to step 1 on page 41 an
339. d to eh oa you want to save the Style Enter the name for the file See page 52 Note The E 80 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names Choose whichever is more convenient or clearer Press the field to save the data If the selected memory area already contains a Style of that name you are asked whether it is OK to over write It A file afc na already exists Overwrite Press the field to overwrite the file Press the field to return to the SAVE STYLE page change the name then press again The data are saved and a Operation Successful mes sage confirms the end of the operation Note To return to the Style s original version select it press the field on the STYLE COVER page then save it again using the procedure described above Note If you save a factory Style under a different name you can no longer select the new version using the STYLE buttons see p 27 Such customized Styles can be assigned to a CUS TOM memory see p 92 or recalled using the Style Finder see p 95 One Touch You may find yourself using the One Touch function at regular intervals because it automates quite a few tasks The E 80 s One Touch memories are actually miniature User Programs that go way beyond any thing you may know from other arranger instruments 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press a ONE TOUCH button There are four One Touch memories per Music Style Their settin
340. ding on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a time or a note value Delay Left Time msec 0 2600ms Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay Left Time note musical notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo If you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Delay Right Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the right delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a time or a note value Delay Right Time msec 0 2600ms Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard 2 683 Delay Right Time note musical notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo If you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Delay Center Time sync msec Note Use this parame ter to specify whether Note or not msec the center delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a time or a note value Delay Center Time msec 0 2600 ms Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when the center delay sound is heard Delay Center Time note musical note
341. drive e Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or down e To prevent damage to the disk drive s heads always try to hold the floppy disk in a level position not tilted in any direction while inserting it into the drive Push it in firmly but gently Never use excessive force e To avoid the risk of malfunction and or damage insert only floppy disks into the disk drive Never insert any other type of disk Avoid getting paper clips coins or any other foreign objects inside the drive Handling floppy disks e Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin magnetic coating Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface area To preserve their integrity please observe the following when handling floppy disks e Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk e Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas 11 E 80 Music Workstation Important notes e Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle Recommended temperature range 10 50 C 50 122 F e Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields such as those generated by loudspeakers e Floppy disks have a WRITE tab which can protect the disk from accidental erasure It is recommended that the tab be kept in the PROTECT position and moved to the WRITE position only when you wish to write new data onto the disk Rear side of the dis
342. dul Qader Jazairi St Bldg No 21 P O BOX 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY ZUHAL DIS TICARET A S Galip Dede Cad No 37 Beyoglu Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 249 85 10 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Grand Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 604 270 6626 Roland Canada Ltd Toronto Office 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL 905 362 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of April 1 2006 ROLAND For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89 336 EEC and LVD 73 23 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference wi
343. e DEC INC buttons e Press the field to switch this effect on Portamento means that the pitch doesn t change in clearly defined steps it produces glides from one note to the next PORTAM TIME Use this parameter to specify the speed at which the glides are carried out The higher the value the slower the transitions RND TUNING This parameter allows you to introduce subtle or not so subtle pitch inaccuracies usually asso ciated with analog synthesizers Irrespective of the choice you make here Low Mid High the effect will be noticeable but never overly dramatic Select Off if you do not need this effect This is not the same as a vibrato effect because it only affects the onset of the notes There is thus no periodic modulation of the pitch CHORD INT This parameter works like the MELODY INT function of the Style section it even produces harmo nies when the source a song or your playing on the key board only plays one note PITCH BEND Press this field so that it lights if you want to influence the pitch of the voice effect using the E 80 s Pitch Bend lever e Press the field to leave this page If you press the field the display looks as follows SMALE Seu eye pss PART i PART ZA FREQUENCY HZ Qe Ome ou om ALL PARTS FREQUENCY HZ GAIN DE This page contains a simple equalizer for the SMALL parts and an EQ band that applies to both voices simulta
344. e PAGE 1 lt PAGE 5 buttons to jump to the page that contains the desired Drum Set The field allows you to jump to additional pages 4 Play a few notes on the keyboard Every key is assigned to a different drum percussion sound Press the second C key from the left C2 to sound a bass drum Kick and the white key to its right D2 to play a snare sound Then try out the other keys N opSn3 st PopGstS39st PopSn40st PopTomLFl41 PopHat1_42 PopTomL43 IPopTomM47 IPopTomHFI48 IPopCyml2_5 IPopCStk37st PopHat2_44 IPopTomH50 IPopKik36 C2 c3 this is only an example 5 Press the button to return to the main page Entries with an or icon to the right of their name refer to Drum Sets that reside on an SRX series expansion board you installed E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start Selecting sounds from an SRX expansion board The E 80 allows you to expand the number of sounds by installing one or two optional SRX series wave expansion boards See Installing wave expansion boards on p 250 for how to install such a board If your E 80 already con tains such a board because you asked your Roland dealer to install it when you bought the E 80 proceed as follows to select one of the Expansion Tones 1 Specify the part you wish to assign another sound to e Press the TONE ASSIGN button of the desired part so that it lights KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN MBS LW2 LW 1 PART O
345. e Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note 2 6G 2 Depth 0 127 Depth to which the effect is applied EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Level 0 127 Output level 55 Step Pan This uses a 16 step sequence to vary the panning of the sound Step 1 16 L64 0 63R Pan at each step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the rate should be synchro nized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the 16 step sequence will cycle Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Attack 0 127 Speed at which the pan changes between steps Input Sync Sw Off On Specifies whether an input note will cause the sequence to resume from the first step of the sequence ON or not OFF Input Sync Threshold 0 127 Volume at which an input note will be detected Level 0 127 Output level 56 Slicer By applying successive cuts to the sound this effect turns a conventional sound into a sound that appears to be played as a backing phrase This is especially ef
346. e button A wrong number of measures 5 rather than 4 for example is very likely to put you off so do take the time to set the pattern length before you start recording 18 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the desired length The setting range is 1 136 or more depending on the time signature and Off Select Off if you haven t decided how long the pattern should be In that case the length Is set when you stop recording It is perfectly possible to specify a different length value for each track and Division Note Even one shot patterns are looped in STYLE COMPOSER mode 2 0O05 E 80 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer There is one last thing we need to set 19 Specify how long the count in should be before recording starts by pressing the field and using the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select one of the following options Off No count in Recording starts as soon as you press the button while flashes 1 Meas Recording starts after a 1 bar count in 2 Meas Recording starts after a 2 bar count in Wait Note Recording starts as soon as you play a note on the keyboard There will be no count in Recording 20 Press the button Depending on the count in setting the metronome now counts down then recording starts JAAD aoj Aor ADRUMS R V POP1 ABASS 4 BASS SLIDE OMPI alar TITID gt COMP2 S
347. e if you want to achieve a realistic effect PORTAM TIME amp PORTAMENTO See page 49 PITCH BEND Press this field so that it lights if you want to influence the pitch of the voice effect using the E 80 s Pitch Bend lever Vibrato RATE DEPTH RISE TIME DELAY TIME These are the same parameters as for the Voice FX part See therefore page 152 This time however they apply to the Auto Pitch part Note The button icon must light for the Vibrato effect to be noticeable e Press the field to leave this page If you press the field the VOCAL EQUALIZER page appears It contains a simple equalizer for the Voice FX Auto Pitch and Singer parts See p 151 Vocoder settings The Vocoder is related to voices that are added to your singing Voice FX Auto Pitch or Singer When the indicator lights synthetic har monies are added to your singing Unlike the Auto Pitch function the Vocoder can generate up to four harmony VOICES GENDER YVOCODER TYPE vonr ae YOCODER ASSIGN ee LATTER ETAT monen anen LEFT RIGHT kuro 1 Press and hold the button 2 In the GENDER column right press the button icon that corresponds to the kind of synthesizer choir you want to add to your singing Press for a darker character or if the Vocoder signals should be reminiscent of female voices Press to create a mixed choir The field you press here determines what presets are available
348. e wah effect is applied over a wide frequency range BPF the wah effect is applied over a narrow frequency range Auto Wah Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modula tion speed Auto Wah Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Auto Wah Sens 0 127 Adjusts the sensitivity with which the filter is controlled Auto Wah Manual 0 127 Adjusts the center fre quency at which the effect is applied Auto Wah Peak 0 127 Adjusts the amount of the wah effect that will occur in the range of the center frequency Set a higher value to narrow the range to be affected Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 9 Rotary This effect simulates the sound of the rotary speakers often used with the electric organs Since the movement of the high range and low range rotors can be set independently the unique type of modulation characteristic of these speak ers can be simulated quite closely This effect is most suitable for electric organ sounds of the bank the Har monic Bar section has its own Rotary effect Tweeter Slow Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Woofer Slow Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Slow speed SLOW of the high or low frequency rotor Tweeter Fast Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Woofer Fast Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Fast speed FAST of the high or low frequency rotor Rotary Speed Slow Fast Simultaneously switches the rotational speed
349. e 78 or FC 7 page 76 9 Press the VIDEO OUT SOURCE button icon if you want the picture s to be displayed on the external screen Let us now select the first picture to be displayed 10 Press the field The display changes to VIDEO OUT STANDARD VIDEO OUT SOURCE s VIEW EROP ONS oo 11 Select the memory area that contains the first picture file you want to use press INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY If you press FLOPPY or EXTERNAL MEMORY insert the memory card or floppy disk with the desired file into the slot or drive 12 Select the picture file by pressing its field 13 Press the field VIEW EROP ONS Gm Mo S g The current view z IN will be lost Do you want to continue or ro E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the VIEWER function The message means that the memory area reserved for these data already contains something that will be erased Press to continue This takes you back to the VIEWER page where the selected picture is displayed FLOWER1_BMP Page 1 1 A i Z a Ees Press to abort The name of the selected BMP file appears in the upper left corner The Auto value indicates the speed 10 600 at which pictures will be switched or Off no automatic page turning The PAGE TURNER function starts at the picture you imported and proceeds with all pictures that contain the same characters e g Party
350. e D Beam controller Vinyl RPM gt Fade to black playback speed Cutting gt Fade to back Harp Marimba Guitar Fade to white Chimes gt Lumin Seashore gt Sepia LoFi Color Sweep gt Post Scratch Color Blue Explosion Color Red Gunshot Color Violet Tempo Up amp Down Pitch Up amp Down gt Playback speed Note The E 80 does not support the Edirol DV 7PR s dual stream mode Press the INIT SINGLE VALUE field to reset the cur rently selected parameter to its default value Press the INIT ALL VALUES field to reset all parame ters to their default values Press again to switch off this function the button goes dark Note V LINK messages are transmitted on MIDI channels 13 and 14 Note For details on Clips Palettes Dissolve Time and Color Difference signals Cb Cr refer to the Edirol DV 7PR manual D Beam General settings Here are several functions that apply to the E 80 as a whole and haven t been covered elsewhere in this owner s manual 1 Press the button The display changes to ae 2 Press the field followed by the field STARTUP FEEDBACK KEYBOARD UPPER MF LINK PLAYER 3 Press the relevant field in the FEEDBACK column to switch that function on or off 4 Press the field to return to the menu or the button to return to the main page Song Arranger Start Priority Normally when you attempt to start Arranger playback while a song Is
351. e Upper parts Scale Lower Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 79 setting to the Lower parts Keyboard Exchange UP2 1 Allows you to switch off the UP1 part and activate the UP2 part and vice versa Note If neither UP1 nor UP2 are on when you first press the footswitch one of them is activated Keyboard Exchange LW2 1 Allows you to switch off the LW1 part and activate the LW2 and vice versa Note If neither LW1 nor LW2 are on when you first press the footswitch one of them is activated Punch In Out The footswitch can be used to activate and switch off punch in out recording using the E 80 s sequencer page 176 Portamento Switches the Portamento function page 101 on and off Soft Sostenuto Hold The assigned footswitch can be used as a Soft Sostenuto or Sustain Hold pedal Note that Hold can also be controlled using a dedicated but optional DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U footswitch con nected to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket Hold Lower1 The footswitch does the same as the LOWER 1 HOLD function see also p 102 Hold Lower2 The footswitch does the same as the LOWER 2 HOLD function see also p 102 Hold Lower 1 2 The footswitch allows you to switch the LOWER 1 2 HOLD functions on and off Rotary HB Slow Fast Allows you to select the slow or fast speed of the Rotary effect This only works if the Harmonic Bars are being used by UP1 LW1 and or MBS Rotary H
352. e amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 33 EH gt Chorus This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in series Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix Level 0 127 Level of the overtones gen erated by the enhancer Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output level 34 EH gt Flanger This effect connects an enhancer and a flanger in series Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix Level 0 127 Level of the overtones gen erated by the enhancer Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the fl
353. e direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 24 FBK Pitch Pitch Shifter with several echoes Pitch Shift Mode 1 5 Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response but steadier pitch Pitch Coarse 24 0 12 semitones Adjust the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Pitch Fine 100 0 100 cent Make fine adjustments to the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in 2 cent steps one cent is 1 100th of a semi tone Pitch Pre Delay 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the pitch shifted sound is heard Pitch Feedback 98 0 98 Adjust the proportion of the processed sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 25 Reverb A nice Reverb effect Reverb Type Room 1 Room 2 Stage 1 Stage 2 Hall 1 Hall 2 Type of reverb Room 1 Dense reverb with short decay Room2 Sparse reverb with short decay Stage
354. e field of the file you want to rename 1 Press the button The display changes to l l l 2 Ifyou intend to work with a floppy disk or memory card insert it into the drive or slot 3 Press the field 4 Select the data type you want to delete by pressing aza oee srnce ee INTERNAL TERNE AL Y Se Ee MEMORY MEMORY PPY ETE gt i a 2 aer 3 KECA el aza pe pf et a Sots io If you selected the RENAME page by accident press Back This takes you back to the previously selected its field ee o amp The display changes to Hsblsys SONS FRO INT MEMORY Ee FLOPPY DISK EBERT MEMORY A Delays S he INT MEMORY FROM EFLOPPY DISK page 8 If available and necessary press the lt lt STYLE NAME COUNTRY ARTIST GENRE or Pe r aie FILE NAME field and enter the desired characters e See page 227 for how to enter characters For User Program Set and MIDI Set files the display Note The E 80 supports both upper and lower case letters looks as follows for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear Daras UEa HRGS SS Note The E 80 allows you to use long file names but some Ey o windows are relatively short so that only part of the names it a can be displayed We therefore suggest using short file names maximum 18 characters whenever possible 9 Press the EXECUTE field to confirm your settings and rename the file
355. e for Standard MIDI File playback Here s yet another revolutionary function of your E 80 based on information you select or input it can change the key of all songs you play back in realtime thus allowing you or a guest singer to sing all songs in a comfortable range This function is called Singer Key 1 For the sake of clarity first select a song see p 41 and press to start playback Pay attention to the song s key 2 Press again to stop playback and to return to the beginning 3 Press the button The display changes to aS te ce Se ett ES ve Bo a oe Codi Ee CEE CONTROLLERS E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start 4 Press the TUNING then the field SROTN TINGS ane Oes G FACTORY PRESET Ne Song aS eh A tranopestion for your voice range lt gt r wf Back This page contains three presets means that the song is not transposed while and adapt the song s key to the typical range of a male or female voice 5 Press the or field depending on whether you re a man or a woman 6 Press the button to start playback The song may now be playing in a different key If it is not the melody falls within the typical range you have just selected Note This automatic transposition only works if track MIDI channel 4 of the song you play back contains the melody part 7 Press again to stop playback and to return to the beginning That may still have b
356. e is subtracted Select 0 if you prefer to work with the MAGNIFY parameter see below Note Even the highest positive or negative VALUE doesn t allow you to go beyond 1 or 127 There is a reason why 0 is impossible that value is used to indicate the end of a note note off 127 on the other hand is the highest velocity value the MIDI standard can muster Adding a high positive velocity value may thus lead to all notes being played at 127 E MAGNIFY 0 200 This parameter works like a Compander effect a dynam ics processor that simultaneously acts as compressor and expander although it processes MIDI data by selecting a value above 100 you increase the differences between high and low velocity values in the selected range Values below 64 are lowered while values above 64 are increased The result is therefore that the difference between pianissimo and fortissimo becomes far more pro nounced MAGNIFY values below 100 have the opposite effect they push all velocity towards the imaginary center of 64 thus reducing differences in playing dynamics E 80 Music Workstation Roland Style Track Edit functions M FROM NOTE TO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 FROM NOTE refers to the lower limit of the note range you want to change TO NOTE represents the upper limit See also Fine tuning the note range on p 214 WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data CHANGE GATE TIME lt l l
357. e length you wish to change DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 13 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 MLENGIH BAR Press this field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the length of the selected pattern s in steps of one bar You can also make an existing track longer by specifying a BAR value that lies beyond the last notes Note To change the BAR length of all three Modes switch on all three BAR fields then set the desired value BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signature Note To change the BEAT length of all three Modes switch on all three BEAT fields then set the value E 80 Music Workstation Roland Style Track Edit functions CPI This field allows you to fine tune the length In most cases you will probably work with multiples of J notes i e 120CPT because 120CPT represent one beat of an X 4 bar 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 etc Note To change the CPI length of all three Modes switch on all three CPT fields then set the value Mi MODE Use these button icons to choose the Modes to which the new length setting should apply You can also switch on two or all three button icons Note If you set TRACK to ALL all three Modes are selected automatically and that cannot be changed W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm
358. e memory Card all the way in until it is firmly in place e Never touch the terminals of the memory card Also avoid getting the terminals dirty e CompactFlash and SmartMedia 3 3V cards are constructed using precision components Handle the cards carefully paying particu lar note to the following e To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity be sure to discharge any static electricity from your own body before handling the cards e Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with the con tact portion of the cards e Do not bend drop or subject cards to strong shock or vibration e Do not keep cards in direct sunlight in closed vehicles or other such locations storage temperature 25 85 C 12 e Do not allow cards to become wet e Do not disassemble or modify the cards e Never remove the memory card or turn off the power while an operation such as reading or writing data or formatting is being performed on the memory card Doing so can destroy the data on the memory card and or render the memory card itself unusable e If you affix the write protect label to the write protect area of a SmartMedia card you will not be able to format the card or write data to It If you wish to format the card or write data to it do so without the label affixed For details on the write protect sticker refer to the owner s manual for your memory card e If you attempt to format a card or write data to it when
359. e oml Holding 1 or 2 down for more than a second takes you to a display page where you can assign other func tions to these buttons The ASSIGN SW functions can be written to a User Program FAI Sey year sfer jsp EERTE 1 2 E 80 Music Workstation Roland ASSIGN SW buttons The display of the button you pressed and held already lights To assign a function to the other button press its display Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to select one of the following functions Off The ASSIGN SW button in question has no function at all Rotary HB Slow Fast Allows you to select the slow or fast speed of the Rotary effect This only works if the Harmonic Bars are being used by UP1 LW1 and or MBS Rotary HB On Off Allows you to switch the Rotary effect on first time and off second This only works if the Harmonic Bars are being used by UP1 LW1 and or MBS Fade In Fade In is a function you may want to use occasionally While it is being performed the assigned button 1 or 2 flashes Fading in means that the vol ume of both the Arranger Style and Keyboard parts gradually increases giving the impression that you have been playing for a long time before what you play becomes audible The volume is automatically set to zero and then gradually increased to the value specified with the MASTER knob When the Fade In is com pleted the indicator of the ASSIGN SW button go
360. e risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets A WARNING e Before using this instrument be sure to read the instruc tions below and the Owner s Manual e Connect the mains plug of this model to a wall outlet with a protective earthing connection e Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the unit e Do not attempt to repair the E 80 or replace parts within it except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page e Never use or store the E 80 in places that are e Subject to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight WS in an enclosed vehicle near a heating duct on top of heat generating equipment or are e Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are e Humid or are e Exposed to rain or are e Dusty or are e Subject to high levels of vibration e This unit should be used only with a stand that Is rec ommended by Roland such as the KS 12 e Make sure you always have the unit placed in such a way that it is level and sure to remain stable Never place it on stands that could wobble or on Inclined surfaces e The instrument should only be co
361. e sound The E 80 uses Low Pass Filters LPF that allow only frequencies below the Specified frequency to pass The frequency where the filter starts cutting off harmonics or overtones is called the Cutoff Frequency The cutoff frequency can change over time controlled by the envelope RESO 64 63 This is a parameter one invariably associates with a synthesizer When the Resonance value is increased the overtones in the area of the cutoff fre quency will be emphasized creating a sound with a strong character Note For some sounds negative RESO settings may pro duce no noticeable change because the Resonance is already set to the minimum value CUTOFF 64 63 This filter parameter allows you to make the selected sound darker or brighter Positive Cut off settings mean that more overtones will be allowed to pass so that the sound becomes brighter The further this value is set in the negative direction the fewer over tones will be allowed to pass and the sound will become softer darker Characteristics of a low pass filter Setting A Frequency Cutoff frequency Note For some sounds positive Cutoff settings will cause no noticeable change because the preprogrammed Cutoff parameter is already set to its maximum value 8 Press the button to return to the main page E 80 Music Workstation Roland ER Using the mixer functions amp effects The MIXER environment does what its
362. e the PAGE 1 PAGE 5 and fields to select the corre sponding page if available 5 Press the field of the desired Tone Alternatively you can proceed as follows e Use the list that came with the expansion board to locate the number of the Patch you would like to use The name Patch is a concept found on Fantom and other Roland synthesizers or modules The E 80 s equivalent is called Tone This also allows you to use Rhythm Sets which are the equivalent of Drum Sets on the E 80 they are usually located at the end of the list You cannot however select Tones or Performances Note If you are using the leaflet supplied with the board to locate sounds please see the Patch List and Rhythm Set Key Assign lists labeled For RD 700 e Press the dial The display now changes to e Press the field if you want to use the numeric pad for selecting Drum Sets the board s Rhythm Sets Otherwise leave it off e Enter the number of the Patch sound you want to use then press the field If necessary you can use the field to correct erroneous entries before pressing ENTER The display now jumps to the page that contains the sound whose number you entered Press the field to leave the numeric pad without selecting another sound 6 Press the button to return to the main page a eS esiels jij Next time you select this TONE family the E 80 auto matically jumps
363. e your new event should be inserted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new event Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Adding notes If you press the field the display changes to SHALES ILa syiy CREATE E EVENT NOTES o gt To es E JOGA E EJ Ser E Te This pop up window allows you to enter up to 10 notes for each position see the BAR fields The velocity values of the keys you press are also adopted To enter chords press and hold the key of at least one constituent note then press the remaining keys Any key you press after releasing the keys of notes already entered in the table replaces the old notes Press one of the note icons to specify the duration of the note s shown in the table This is possible both before and after playing the required note s on the keyboard Press the field to confirm your settings and add the new note s 223 E 80 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer E ERASE EVENT e Use the dial or the a buttons to select the event you want to delete e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction e Press the button icon to remove the event you Selected M MOVE
364. eca eee ees 117 147 ECO seeaeeeeeeseuseusennesiuate 123 NGET cancun nnnsncnnnnnsasance 121 150 Rey sen eeaeeeeeeeaeeeseeetaaaas 51 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Index Single GINO CE sh cesuag eae aac eee 87 ce ere eee eee 153 TO ee ees 28 35 123 Oiliall assossentiecetaaeees 47 121 154 SMP r 41 63 SIMOO ereraa EEEE EAA 124 DOME ETET EEEEEE E 34 76 78 GOl ee 142 179 207 VORA e 198 SA lt 4 i ee eee ee 107 SOMO e A AE 41 43 Arranger Start Priority 246 o IE E IIRIS E EEEE EEEE EE EEEE TE TE 140 COUS araneae 147 Converting to Style 197 COVE caneeasssueeenesarnnnnsenes 44 Data Changes 144 440s005e 000 243 ECCS jae ga goose 140 RIGCE a44260e0ee 5550505 gt 554 159 Mao EEEE 42 WN OPPERE 131 133 Link to User Program 130 E E EEEE ee 169 Makeup foolS nnana annann 140 MANNE ouceuneteseeasassesegees 42 63 DPMCIS icccanssenssaaasaaaes 160 Parts MIDI 008 238 Position Pointer ccnanmnmaamnameds 240 VON EEEE 147 ec STTTS TTT 63 148 178 227 SCANN sasian ee eee eet 43 SYNC oaan naaana annann naeun annaa 240 M ss anaes 4459555555555 147 E esate eebeeee eee eta aes 179 Tans e e vnecceneannee nese 67 147 WONG anes teceseseaseesetates 147 SOsUe AUCs fee eagrae ew uae wees 76 78 Sound FOU E EEEE EEEE EEEE 144 145 E a AE EN EEEE EEEE flita Set Mode 0000 30 Source DAEMvc crocs comonnrteonnes 183 Space 08 63 123 124 160 179
365. ecify the value of the desired note Shuffle Rate 0 100 Adjusts the ratio as a percent age of the time that elapses before Delay B sounds relative to the time that elapses before the Delay A sounds When set to 100 the delay times are the same Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time over which the Delay Time changes from the current setting to its speci fied new setting Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Panpot A L64 0 63R Panpot B L64 0 63R Stereo location of Delay A B Level A 0 127 Level B 0 127 Volume of delay A B EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 73 3D Delay This applies a 3D effect to the delay sound The delay sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Delay Left Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the left delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depen
366. ect for situa Tuning Upper2 Coarse Tune and Fine Tune The UP2 part can be used as full fledged solo or melody sound or to fatten the sound of UP1 or UP3 To layer the UP1 or UP3 and UP2 parts you need to switch them both on See page 28 for details The following parameters allow you to transpose Coarse or to detune Fine the Upper2 part relative to the Upper1 or Upper3 part tions where you need to play chords and a solo line using different sounds Something like this Played by the UP1 part You could use COARSE to program an interval of a fifth 7 semitones for UP2 which is especially effective for brass sounds and guitar power chords Do not forget to activate both the UP1 or UP3 and UP2 parts when you want to take advantage of the COARSE and FINE parameters If only the UP2 part is active your solos may sound flat Note In WHOLE mode these parameters can also be used for layer effects involving the UP2 which is detuned and the LW1 and or LW2 parts which are not detuned 1 Press the button Played by the UP2 part for example ITI VALET EL TE LOW This is the opposite of HIGH and can be used in situations where the melody or counter melody lies above the notes you wish to hold WO i A it RAIRA TARRI fara fas Played by the UP2 part for example Hil The display changes to Ea ae oe er St eer Proc cats O e CONTROLLERS e 2
367. ect the SPLIT Keyboard mode and activate the MBS part and vice versa Note Pressing the footswitch you assign this function to does not mean that the Arranger stops If you switched on the Arr Hold function page 89 the last recognized chord will go on sounding so that your MBS part may drown in the accompaniment We therefore suggest you assign the Arranger Hold function to an ASSIGN SW button or another FC 7 footswitch and use it to switch off the Arranger Hold function so that the Arranger only plays the drum pattern of the selected Music Style Piano Standard You can alternate between Standard and Piano Style Arranger Chord modes When the former is selected the chord recognition area page 89 is automatically set to LEFT When you switch to Piano Style the chord recognition area Is automatically set to WHOLE Furthermore the KBD MODE button is switched on and the Upper 1 part is activated if it was off Half Bar on Fill In The assigned footswitch allows you to switch the Half Bar function on and off Certain pop songs in 4 4 contain bars that only last two beats The usual place for such a bar is between the first and the second verse Another favorite position for halved bars is at the end of a chorus or the bridge This does not change Style playback right away Only when a Fill In Starts will the Half Bar function be activated and play half the number of beats of the fill you selected Arr Chord
368. ect the data to be edited ALL All parameters listed below Note Only note messages Modulat CCO1 messages usually used for adding vibrato i e use of the BENDER MODULATION lever PanPot CC10 messages that specify the stereo posi tion Express CC11 messages that used for temporary vol ume changes This parameter can also be edited on the MIXER page see p 211 Reverb Reverb Send messages how strongly the part should be processed by the reverb effect This parameter can also be edited on the MIXER page see p 211 Chorus Chorus Send messages how strongly the part should be processed by the chorus effect This parameter can also be edited on the MIXER page see p 211 Prog C Program change messages used to select sounds or Drum Sets Note by deleting pro gram change messages you also dispose of the related CCOO and CC32 bank select mes sages P Bender Pitch Bend data i e use of the BENDER MOD ULATION lever NRPN Dr Changes to the pitch of certain drum instru ments See page 211 MFROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter is only displayed if DATA TYPE see above is set to Note It allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tuning the note range on p 214 WTO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit
369. ecting data on the selected track all other operations are another kind of event control change aftertouch pro gram change etc that value is buffered by the E 80 s tone generator and used for the following note event you play back To change that information select the same as in standard view Press again to see more values again E Monitoring note events another occurrence with a different value and press The 16 track Sequencer can play back note events the dial yet again you select This may help you identify the occurrence 2 Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the you want to edit Press the speaker icon to switch first value this monitor function on and move the cursor to a note event to sound that note nilaro p irr Control Change Number Note See also the remark after step 1 on the next page 1 0 cc 121 lisiti All Ctrl 1 0 cc 10 BVIEW ot po 31 Reverb G 1 02 038 CC 11 Expression 127 Press this button icon if the list has become so long 1o00 ce 7 volume a Ue ite en that finding the events you wish to edit takes too oe T long or to ensure that only the event types you need 18 02115 Note ere 83 18 19 03 030 Note 67 G 4 79 can be selected 13 04 010 Note 69 4 4 65 e JSICa 3 Modify the value e Rotate the dial or e Set the value using the DEC INC buttons or e Press the dial and enter the value using the numeric pad that appears in
370. ed All other Melody Intelligence types use both the UP1 and the MELODY INTELL part however As shown in the table above selecting a different TYPE also means that the sound assigned to the UP1 part changes Most TYPEs add a second sound to it called 2ND TONE Press the blue field and use the E 80 s Standard procedure to select a different sound for the additional harmony notes Note This function is not available for TYPEs that provide no MELODY INTELL sound Note While the button on the front panel is off the 2ND TONE name appears on a gray back ground if available In this state you cannot select a different sound Switch on the MELODY INTELL button and the function of the same name if you need to select another sound for 2ND TONE You can refine Melody Intelligence control by speci fying what velocity value the UP1 notes must have in order to trigger the MELODY INTEL part This allows you to leave the button on at all times while only adding harmonies to your solo play ing during the choruses by hitting the keys a little harder E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the Style Cover function 6 Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to set the desired Threshold Using the Style Cover function You can also press the dial and enter The COVER function provides masks that change the the value using the on screen numeric pad instrumentation of the selected Style Simply by select The Thr
371. ed value 0 127 when the corresponding effect is needed but they also need to be reset to 0 to avoid unpleasant sur prises The E 80 s keyboard does not generate Poly After touch messages but its sound source understands them Poly Aftertouch messages are always related to a given note which is why you first need to tell the sequencer which note the event applies to 0 C 127 G9 Next specify the desired Aftertouch value 0 127 E About the Note messages As stated above note messages comprise a note number a velocity value and a Gate Time value The range for note numbers is O C 127 G9 Velocity messages can be set anywhere between 1 extremely soft and 127 The value O cannot be entered because it would effectively switch off the note After selecting the Gate Time entry pressing the dial calls up the following pop up MER Shy IN GATE TIME EDIT Here you can either set the required length as a CPT value J 120CPT or use the note icons to avoid lengthy calculations The maximum duration a note event can have is 65 535 clocks Drum parts usually use the Gate Time value 1 for all notes Increasing it to 20 for example has no audi ble effect on the sound durations Other edit operations The fields in the right half of the MICRO EDIT page allow you to reduce or expand the number of events of the track you selected SILere Spiyy Note Number CC 121 Reset All C
372. een too high or too low for com fort So here comes the best part 8 Press one of the USER PRESET fields and then EDIT JASE Sf Shiy LOWEST 9 Sing or S22 Play Bae HIGHEST i SZ the LOWEST note G2 43 of your voice i D4 62 User 1 MME TE Note The field only appears after pressing one of the USER PRESET fields The latter are four memories where you can store your own range settings 9 Press the field if it is not already selected 10 Sing the highest note you can muster effortlessly you can sing it several times If you connected a microphone a field appears Press that field to confirm the note you want the E 80 to recognize This field does not appear if you enter the pitch via the keyboard If you have no microphone handy you can also play this note on the keyboard The E 80 recognizes the pitch and displays the name of the corresponding note 11 Press the field and repeat step 10 tak ing care to sing your lowest possible note D 2 12 Press to store these settings if you wish to use them at a later stage The display briefly confirms that your settings have been stored SIGE Mey Shy eal E gt Sing ora Play Too a the LOWEST note i _ Operation complete HIGHEST NA 62 keem 13 Press the field to return to the previous page 14 Press the field to assign a name to your settings JISE AF Harus a E E E ele cu don ee a0 Dee po
373. eere Tre the a reer 45 About SYNC SUI A SOP peanssssnensssseeteneae 83 Selecting other Style divisions 83 Other ways of selecting Arranger patterns 83 Bass OVE NON uc cceminsedeeceseseeeeeseeeeauaes 83 Melody We NO CCS pacece ats ocean eum ene sae 84 Linking MELODY INTELL type selection to the Styles Style Melody Intell Link susevecuseveveveeuveusaweas 85 Using the Style Cover function 85 EAE ie SEER EEEE TEETE 86 Saving a Style with a COVER alteration 86 ORS 1OUCi cn anacecepudeeakertawcnsenemose E 87 Ignoring certain One Touch settings Hold 87 Programming your own One Touch settings WRITE 87 More refined Arranger settings 0 88 Chord recognition area ZONE cose suiswouesedsauses 88 Arranger Type chord mode 0002 000s 89 PAE RUOOTNPVON OF wtih daaa aranana FEFFE 89 Intro amp Ending Alteration 25000040 o5ereecurwerrerre ad 89 Dynamic ANTANGEl i 4 1454444 44 aadaaeacoweiesseesee 89 Tempo related settings Arranger Options 90 Sle TEMPO cies ssh se eaa 90 TEMPO CHANGE RITARD and ACCELER 91 Working with external Styles 0005 92 Using the CUSTOM memories 2200 92 Programming CUSTOM assignments 0 92 DE AE a EE EE EEEN NS 94 Style Finder quickly locating Styles 95 Quick location of the Style YOUN EEO cicccrrerrees ext 95 Editing the
374. eived via the AUDIO IN sockets can be enhanced by means of a separate effects processor E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the audio inputs 1 Press the button to call up the following page KEYBOARDERKEGI S QUALIZER On this page you can switch the AUDIO IN IFX pro cessor on and off by pressing the button icon to the right of its display If you only need another type press the IFX display and use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to select it If you also need to change certain aspects of that effect 2 Press the AUDIO EFFECTS field to access the IFX parameters The display changes to lms REVERB SEND CHORUS SEND Bldg l 10 COMPRESSOR 3 Press the or OFF field to switch the proces sor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above 4 Press the field below IFX that displays the name of the currently selected type 5 Select the desired type with the dial or the DEC INC buttons 1193 E 80 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions amp effects The available types are Using the Speaker Modeling settings The E 80 provides a function that can change the over all sound in such a way that you get the same impres sion as when listening through the speakers whose 6 7 8 1 Thru 31 DST Flanger 61 Band Chorus 2 Stereo EQ 32 DST gt Delay 62 Band Flanger 3 Overdrive 33 EH gt Choru
375. el drops or hikes eee INSTR EQ This parameter duplicates the little display in the INSTR EQUALIZER section of the DRUM INSTR EDIT page It allows you to make comparisons and to specify p i A 72 eji TEED i i ry i e L SE I AS RDR TIO AET EEG FUT TOOLS ASAR Oe ei i ere rare SONG MAKEUP TOOLS Se en re be ov wet es note mr Led 22 LAR PALETTE SOUND DRUM COMMON B Fa a FREEZE In this state you cannot edit the drum instrument s which equalizer if any should be applied to the selected equalizer because you chose to bypass it Careful drum instrument The various parameter fields HI FREQ though this setting is saved along with the other HZ etc always show the Instr settings They are not song or Style data when you press the field updated when you select Glbl and thus don t show the here Global equalizer settings nor do they disappear when Note If you hear no difference between Glbl and Off the you select Off l l Drum Set s equalizer on the PALETTE page is set to OFF INSTR VOLUME This parameter duplicates the VOLUME parameter on the PALETTE page The reason why it s also available here is that some equalizer settings may lead to rather noticeable level drops or hikes HI FREQ HZ 1500 2000 3000 4000 6000 8000 12000 This parameter allows you to set the cutoff fre quency of the high band this is a shelving filter HI GAIN DB 15
376. elative changes that are added to or subtracted from the settings stored in the song or Style The parameters you can set on this page are Instrument on off MUTE Press the instrument icon at the top of the channel strip to switch the corresponding instrument on no MUTE message or off a MUTE message appears W REVERB and CHORUS effect balance The CHORUS and REVERB parameters allow you to Specify how strongly the instruments should be pro cessed by the Reverb and or Chorus processors The effects parameters kind of reverb and chorus etc can be set on the COMMON see p 147 and STYLE SONG REVERB amp CHORUS pages see p 116 Mi PANPOT stereo placement Allows you to change the stereo placement of the instrument assigned to the slider you are using MVOLUME Allows you to set the volume of the instrument assigned to the slider you are using 4 Use the assignable sliders to change the settings of the instruments that are currently displayed Note Please bear in mind that these changes apply to the instruments Tones Drum Set in question not to the entire track they belong to 5 Press the button to return to the main page a Using the Makeup Tools In addition to the Cover functions for songs and Styles see pages 44 and 85 that allow you to change song or Style playback by selecting presets the E 80 also boasts a mode where you can customize playback of the currently selected song or Style Changes you
377. eld All notes except the one you select will change The note can be set using the TO NOTE field Only notes above the selected one will change The note can be set using the THAN NOTE field Only notes below the selected one will change The note can be set using the THAN NOTE field NSIDE Only the notes between FROM NOTE and TO NOTE will change OUTSID Only the notes below FROM NOTE and above TO NOTE will change TO NOTE 69 A4 E Origina phrase l i FFF To NOTE 69 0 FROM NOTE 72 C5 SDE Por oi TO NOTE 76 E5 THAN NOTE R c5 HIGHER FROM NOTE 72 C5 DUTT CELE ERE TO NOTE 76 5 THAN NOTE R COE pz rs gu 5 tGx gt W RESOLUTION 1 4 1 8 1 8T 1 16 1 16T 1 32 1 32T 1 64 This parameter sets the resolution of the Quantize func tion Be sure to always select the value of the shortest note you recorded Otherwise your part no longer sounds the way you played it because shorter notes are shifted to the wrong positions MESTRENGTH 0 100 Use this parameter to specify how precise the timing cor rection should be 0 means that the selected RESOLU TION value is not applied 0 correction while 100 means that all notes are shifted to the mathematically cor rect positions Maybe first try values between 50 and 85
378. elds in the right half of the STYLE MICRO EDIT page allow you to reduce or expand the number of events of the track you selected SHALES pilare p b 1 01 000 Alteration Mlode Nearest CC O Bank Select MSB CC 32 Bank Select LSB Program Change 26 01 000 CC 10 Pan 64 01 000 CC 11 Expression 80 01 000 CC 91 Reverb 0 01 000 CC 93 Chorus 0 02 000 Note 67 G4 02 000 Note 55 G 3 02 000 Note 60 C 4 123 02 000 Note 620 4 04 000 Note 55 G 3 PLACE EVENT amp ad a as ad WE CREATE EVENT Press this button icon to add a new event to the selected track The following pop up appears 0001 If the position for which you create a new event already contains other events the new event is added at the end of that group e Press the button icon that corresponds to the kind of event you want to add The meaning of the available message types should be clear by now Here are the default values of the events you create Note Note Number 60 C4 On Velocity 100 Gate Time 60 Program Change CCOO Bank Select MSB value O CC32 Bank Select LSB value 4 Program Change Number 1 The bank select messages are added automatically you don t have to worry about that Pitch Bend 0 Alteration Mode Nearest Limit Low Std Limit High Std E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing individual Style events Style Micro Edit Specify the position wher
379. elect the fre quency whose level you wish to change with the GAIN parameter The smaller the value the lower the fre quency that will be boosted or cut GAIN This parameter sets the level of the selected fre quency 0 means that the frequency s level does not change no difference between equalizer on and off for that particular part or the overall EQ band e Press the field to leave this page 5 C Q Q ia _ Let us have a look at additional and more refined func tions you can use for song playback See page 179 for recording and editing sequencer songs Using the Fade In Out function If you don t change their assignments the ASSIGN SW and 2 buttons allow you to start fade ins and fade outs This function is also available for Style playback FADE FADE Note If you changed the assignments of these buttons see page 71 for how to select the Fade In and Fade Out functions Note Fade In and Fade Out can also be assigned to an optional footswitch etc MFade In Fading in means that the volume of both the song and Keyboard parts but neither the Vocal Harmonist signal nor your voice gradually increases giving the impression that you have been playing for a long time before the music becomes audible The volume is automatically set to zero and then gradually increased to the value specified with the MASTER knob e Stop song or Style playback and press ASSIGN SW it flashes e Now st
380. election is ignored if the MIDI SET button icon is on 5 Press the button to return to the main page 4 _ 19 Miscellaneous Using V LINK WE About V LINK 1 V LINK MV is a function that provides for the integration of music and visual material By using V LINK compatible video devices i e an Edirol DV 7PR visual effects can be easily linked to and made part of the expressive elements of a perfor mance By using the E 80 with an Edirol DV 7PR you can Use the E 80 s keyboard the highest F C to switch images clips Press and hold a key for longer transi tions fades Briefly press a key for fast transitions Use the BENDER axis of the BENDER MODULATION lever to change the playback speed of the picture material or to select a different color Use the D Beam controller to control several effects this depends on the function you assign to the D Beam see below V Link signals are transmitted via MIDI OUT Connect the E 80 s MIDI OUT socket to the USB port of the video processor via an optional UM 1 interface Projector Monitor E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using V LINK 2 Press the button it lights 3 The keys in the highest octave now act as controllers and no longer play notes If you prefer to work with the following display page press and hold the button VASK zey You can also select this page by pressing the button gt field
381. elete the selected User Program from the internal memory area or memory card You should use this as sparsely as possible e Press the field Deleting a User Program can not be undone which is why the following question is now displayed y a Music Bssist t This File will be DELETED from INT Memory Style Link 3_4 Boston a a Genre Ballroom Song Link No Link User Prg 3_4 Boston ARE YOU SURE deletes the User Program file leaves the file intact and takes you back to the initial User Program Finder page with the list leaves the file intact and takes you back to the USER PROGRAM LIST page Note If a User Program you delete here is assigned to a Set List the memory in question no longer works Note Deleting a User Program that doubles as Music Assistant registration also discards the Music Assistant entry For safety reasons an error message is displayed in that case W Music Assistant Mark Note This function is not available for User Programs that reside on floppy disk or on a memory card This option allows you to add an MA label to the selected User Program which means that its registra tion settings appear in the Music Assistant list see p 40 e f necessary copy the User Program to the internal memory e Press the MUSIC ASSIST MARK field Ofte Qr Qr Qr 3_4 Boston iBallroon 60 s Rock N FOUND 704 GLOBAL T04 Use the familiar Finder functions to locate the User
382. elves 1 Press and hold a ONE TOUCH 1 4 button The display changes to ARRA NGENSETIING ONE TOUCH HOLD 2 Press the field it lights in red 3 Press the 1 lt 4 field that should contain your new One Touch settings o7 E 80 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions The display now shows the following message WRITE Fas ew ORs OL Q OneTouch settings opii saved The target One Touch memory you chose for writing is automatically selected 4 Press the button to return to the main page More refined Arranger settings Chord recognition area ZONE Telling the E 80 that you want to use the Arranger is a matter of pressing the EASY SETTING button In that case the key of the Style patterns is controlled by the chords you play in the left half of the keyboard You can also tell the Arranger to scan another part of the keyboard for usable chords Though LEFT is proba bly the most popular setting you can also select RIGHT to have the Arranger scan the right half of the key board Select WHOLE if the Arranger should scan the entire keyboard If you don t want the Arranger to lis ten to the chords you play choose OFF In that case you will only hear the drum parts of the Music Styles you select The range of the LEFT or RIGHT keyboard area depends on the main split point see Setting the split point on page 65 1 On the main page press the field
383. empo 20 250 here or leave that for later gt Continue with step 6 below M Preparing your own settings If none of the templates matches the settings you need press the field 8 possibilities if j MY SETUP EDIT TRACK INSTRUMENT g ii TEMPO AND TIME SIGNATURE CONTROLS cLose a Here you can prepare the STYLE COMPOSER for the work at hand by selecting the desired sounds and setting additional parameters Please proceed in the order given here until you have a firm grasp of the flexibility a Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track whose settings you want to change With the exception of the tempo all parameters shown here only apply to the selected track There are 8 tracks ADrum the drums ABass the bass and Acc1 6 melodic accompaniment parts b Press the field to jump to the TONE SELECT page You can also press a TONE button to assign the desired sound to the track The sounds are not available for Style tracks The AccDrums track can only use Drum Sets so that only the button of the TONE pad is available c Play a few notes on the keyboard to audition the sound d If necessary change the CONTROLS settings by pressing their fields and using the dial or the DEC buttons The four fields refer to the following aspects l Can be set for all 8 tracks EXPRESS Temporary volume changes CC11 REVERB Reverb Send
384. en PLAYER FEEDBACK KEYBOARD you press PLAY STOP m again UPPER1 MF LINK HARMONIST SWOOP WDA IATA UPDATE METRONOME UMP FLASHING Fikh iN ON USER UGRAP M CHNG STYLE MELODY INT LINK 1 Press the USER PROGRAM button Se Factory USER PROGRAM gas m iNTERNAL TEXTAEMP HOLD SONG f MIDI n SETTINGS LINK lu LINK LINK amp S WRITE Blue Berry Swear Ballad Celebrating 3 Blue Shoes Fame Rock i 1 Know Him Hands Up Party Misty Jazz P 4 P5 E 2 Press the field BUR GIUINK Song Name FIRSTDAY Auhor a FileName FIRSTDAY AT MAKE NEW DELETE i Pi SONGLINK SONGLINK If the User Program already contains a link to another song which you no longer need press the field This is not necessary to establish a new link it is meant to cancel an existing link 3 Press MAKE NEW SONG LINK 4 5 The display changes to SONG LIST One On Os Oi DONTTELL iDONTTELL MI FEVER iFEVER MID Ew A FIRSTDAY iFIRSTDAY MID Eu FORCA IFORCA MID FRIDAYNI iFRIDAYNI MID 3 Pr A FOUND 48 Note Songs that also contain lyrics information are flagged by means of an E icon The note 4 means that the file in question also contains Play amp Search information See Locating files with the Song Finder on p 159 Press the field of the song you want to link to the currently selected User Program Press the field t
385. en ress ae Ben em Jeres at This function allows you to modify the duration of the notes in the selected time FROM TO and note FROM TO NOTE ranges See page 186 for details MITRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks EMODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th W DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 MIBIAS CPT 1920 1920 This parameter sets the amount by which the duration or gate time of the selected notes is to change The shortest possible GATE TIME value is 1 used for all drum notes so that selecting 1000 for notes with a GATE TIME value of 1 in the specified time range still leaves you with the same value You cannot use CHANGE GATE TIME to erase notes E MAGNIFY 0 200 Use this parameter rather than BIAS to produce propor tional changes to the affected GATE TIME values Values below 100 decrease the duration while anything above 100 increases it Select 100 if you prefer to work with the BIAS CPT parameter see above WEFROM NOTE TO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 FROM NOTE refers to the lower limit of the note range you want to change TO NOTE represents the upper limit See also Fine tuning the note range on p 214 WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm
386. epending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate of modulation Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Attack 0 127 Speed at which the cutoff frequency will change This is effective if Modulation Wave is SOR SAW1 or SAW2 Level 0 127 Output level 45 Step Filter This is a filter whose cutoff frequency can be modulated in steps You can specify the pattern by which the cutoff fre quency will change Step 1 16 0 127 Cutoff frequency at each step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the rate should be synchro nized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate of modulation Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Attack 0 127 Speed at which the cutoff frequency changes between steps Filter Type LPF BPF HPF NOTCH Filter type Fre quency range that will pass through each filter LPF fre quencies below the cutoff BP
387. equencer Your E 80 contains a powerful sequencer with a host of edit functions Even so you will quickly notice that the 16 track Sequencer is as simple to operate as it is powerful When you press the RECORDER button the display changes to SWEETPOT I meas 0023 2 130 4 4 SOLO MUTE 1 PIANO 1 2 d FINGERED Bs 3 d OVERDRIVE GT F J r MASTER 6 JJ EARITONE SAX TRACK yAN 7 O LEEA E3 0 E INITIALIZE 3 dU TRUMPET SONG amp 10 djuAzz 11 d urz2 GT 42 d PinNo 2 CONVERTER 13 J d MUTED GT 14 d CLEAN GT 15 PIANO 4 16 PIANO 4 Important notes e f you use the 16 track Sequencer to edit a song that already contains Cover modifications the Cover set tings are ignored and erased when you save the edited version of your song We therefore recom mend freezing the Cover settings before continuing see p 148 e While in this mode the knob does not allow you to set the balance between the Song and Keyboard parts it only affects the volume of the Song parts e While the E 80 s 16 track Sequencer is selected the notes played on the keyboard are not transmitted via MIDI About the sequencer s main page Let us first look at the information shown on this page The button icon allows you to listen to the selected track in isolation it mutes all other tracks The selected track is displayed in yellow To select another track simply press its row in
388. er The values assigned to CCOO and CC32 define the Style whereas the program change number defines the Division Intro Ending etc See also the Parameter Reference booklet sup plied with your E 80 Sending only a program change number selects another Division of the currently active Style Be aware however that only sending CCOO and CC32 messages without a program change has no effect Note When you select another Style on your E 80 it trans mits a CCOO CC32 PC cluster on the Style channel which you could record using an external sequencer M MIDI TX CHANNEL Use this parameter to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the STYLE function If you don t want these messages to be transmitted switch off the field MIDI RX CHANNEL Use this parameter to assign a MIDI receive channel to the STYLE function If you don t want these messages to be received switch off the field STYLE PC Program change and bank select messages for Style selection Switch this button icon off if the E 80 must not select other Styles and or Divisions STYLE VOLUME Volume messages relating to the Music Styles Switch this button icon off if the E 80 must not receive them 2 11 E 80 Music Workstation NTA Note to Arranger NTA notes are only received from an external MIDI instrument What you play in the chord recognition area of the keyboard to feed the Arranger is auto matically converted to the correspo
389. er3 for example and a clarinet or flute for Upper1 The possibilities are as follows If you don t agree with this split point G5 you can change it to any note between the D2 and C7 Possible range for UPPER 3 SPLIT tY LW1 LW2 MBS Upper 1 and or Upper3 Arranger control Upper 2 3 Use the UPPER 3 SPLIT POINT fields to set the desired split point The default split point is located at the G5 lowest note Note If you are satisfied with your split point you should save of the UP3 part it to a User Program see p 125 Note This function is also available in WHOLE Keyboard Mode 4 Press the button to return to the main page In effect the E 80 allows you to play at least three sounds assigned to three separate keyboard areas On The UPPER 3 SPLIT function can be cancelled in sev top of that you can select the Arranger s chord recog eral ways nition area i e the notes that feed the Arranger Press the field so that it goes dark a ah Here is how to activate the UPPER 3 SPLIT Switch off UP1 and or UP2 unction e Switch off the UP3 part 1 On the main page press the field E Dynamic Split While the UP3 Split function provides a static split between UP3 to the right and UP1 and or the UP2 parts to the left there is a second way of playing two distinct melody parts whereby the highest or lowest note is 2i penen T ve sounded by the UP1 part while the other notes are To a iz sounded by
390. era tions apply to the selected Index and therefore not necessarily to all files in the internal memory or on a memory card e After performing step 2 press the field in the upper left corner Usa peor RIDD f TF JAME 3 ET z Old amp Gold Top 40 e Either press the field that corresponds to the desired User Program category or if you re not sure which category the User Program belongs to press ALL e Now return to the previous page by pressing Back The display returns to the page shown under step 1 above This time however only the User Programs belonging to the selected Index are displayed Continue with step 3 to select the User Program you want to use Milo directly locate the desired User Program 4 Press the field De a 6 ee TON anc oer 9 el rons ruv a wre soe re 5 Decide what you want to look for by pressing the USER PRG STYLE LINK or button icon 6 Decide how the Finder should look for files e Press the field to search for all entries that start with the characters you entered BEA for example Names that match the specified criteria will be displayed at the top of the list Press the field to have the E 80 search for names that contain the supplied informa tion This would allow you to also locate a file called Raggabeat if you entered BEA 7 Enter only as many characters as you think are necessary to find the User
391. ered steps step 2 step 4 step 6 The higher the value the later the beat progresses Level 0 127 Output level 57 VK Rotary This type provides modified response for the rotary speaker with the low end boosted further This effect features the same specifications as the VK 7 s built in rotary speaker Speed Slow Fast Rotational speed of the rotating Speaker Brake Off On Switches the rotation of the rotary speaker When this is turned on the rotation will gradually stop When it is turned off the rotation will gradually resume Woofer Slow Speed 0 05 10 0Hz Low speed rotation speed of the woofer Woofer Fast Speed 0 05 10 0Hz High speed rotation Speed of the woofer Woofer Trans Up 0 127 Adjusts the rate at which the woofer rotation speeds up when the rotation is switched from Slow to Fast Woofer Trans Down 0 127 Adjusts the rate at which the woofer rotation slows down when the rotation Is switched from Fast to Slow Woofer Level 0 127 Volume of the woofer Tweeter Slow Speed 0 05 10 0Hz Low speed rotation Speed of the tweeter Tweeter Fast Speed 0 05 10 0Hz High speed rotation Speed of the tweeter Tweeter Trans Up 0 127 Adjusts the rate at which the tweeter rotation speeds up when the rotation is switched from Slow to Fast Tweeter Trans Down 0 127 Adjusts the rate at which the tweeter rotation slows down when the rotation is switched from
392. ers instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat reg isters stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that pro duce heat Do not defeat safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED 10 11 12 13 14 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched partic ularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufactur er Use only with a cart stand tripod bracket or ta ble specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over ara Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is re quired when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normal
393. es of the same name Groovy Rock C r ee a 12 Press the field if it is OK to overwrite files with the same names on the destination media Press the field if files on the source FROM media that have the same name as existing files on the destination TO media should not be copied only files with original names will be copied in that case The data are copied and a message confirms the end of the operation Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual 13 Press the button to return to the main page Note If the remaining storage capacity is smaller than the size of the files you wish to copy the E 80 automatically stops the operation without displaying a message as soon as the media is full Always check the contents of the destination media immediately after the copy operation to make sure that all required files have been copied Format This function allows you to format the inserted floppy disk or memory card For safety reasons you cannot format the internal memory because it also contains the E 80 s operating system It would be a good Idea to also format floppy disks for matted for MS DOS because that speeds up data access Memory cards must always be formatted on the E 80 during formatting the E 80 indeed also cre ates a number of folders where your various files
394. es between FROM NOTE and TO NOTE will change Only the notes below FROM NOTE and above TO NOTE will change See Fine tuning the note range on p 181 for an illustra tion WE RESOLUTION 1 4 1 8 1 8T 1 16 1 16T 1 32 1 32T 1 64 This parameter sets the resolution of the Quantize func tion Be sure to always select the value of the shortest note you recorded Otherwise your part no longer sounds the way you played it because shorter notes are shifted to the wrong positions E STRENGTH 0 100 Use this parameter to specify how precise the timing cor rection should be 0 means that the selected RESOLU TION value is not applied 0 correction while 100 means that all notes are shifted to the mathematically cor rect positions WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data 2 14 ERASE ERASE allows you to selectively delete data either within a specified range of measures beats or clocks or from the entire track s When DATA TYPE is set to ALL ERASE substitutes the required number of rests for the data you delete so that you end up with the equivalent number of blank measures If you also want to eliminate the measures themselves use DELETE see below MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks EMODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Ma
395. es dark Fade Out Fade Outs are extremely popular in pop music and the E 80 allows you to end a song just like the original To do so press the assigned ASSIGN SW button it flashes The volume then gradually decreases until it reaches zero indicator lights steadily Scale Upper Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 79 setting to the three Upper parts Scale Lower Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune see p 79 setting to the Lower parts Half Bar on Fill In Main The ASSIGN SW button allows you to switch the Half Bar function on and off Certain pop songs in 4 4 contain bars that only last two beats The usual place for such a bar is between the first and the second verse Another favorite position for halved bars is at the end of a chorus or the bridge Your E 80 allows you to faithfully reproduce these anomalies using this function This does not change Style playback right away Only when a Fill In starts will the Half Bar function be activated and play half the number of beats of the fill you selected Arranger Hold Allows you to switch the Arranger Hold function on and off See p 89 Dynamic Arranger Allows you to switch the Dynamic Arranger function on and off See page 89 for details Arr Chord Off Allows you to switch the Arranger s chord recognition off in which case only the drum per cussion of the selected Style keeps playing or can be used See page 88 Arr
396. es of musical instrument sounds can change depending on how the Instrument is played For example if a trumpet is played sharply and strongly the attack will be quick and the sound will be sharp But if a trumpet is played lightly and softly the attack will be softer In order to adjust the attack of a sound you can modify the ATTACK parameter of the envelope 1Os E 80 Music Workstation Advanced Keyboard part functions The envelope parameters affect both the volume TVA and the filter TVF The cutoff frequency will rise as the envelope rises and fall as the envelope falls ATTACK 64 63 This parameter adjusts the onset of the sound Negative values speed up the attack so that the sound becomes more aggressive DECAY 64 63 This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound s volume and Cutoff frequency fall from the highest point of the attack down to the sustain level Note Percussive sounds usually have a sustain level of 0 Piano and guitar sounds are in this category Holding the keys for a long time will thus have little effect on the dura tion of the notes you are playing even if you select a high value here RELEASE 64 63 This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound will decay after the note is released until it is no longer heard The cutoff frequency will also fall according to this setting MITVF filter By modifying the filter settings you can control the timbre tone of th
397. es you are playing Turn it to the right to raise the pitch of your notes The Pitch Bend interval Range is preset to 2 semi tones Note Pitch Bend is not available for the Harmonic Bars 3 Release the lever if you no longer need the effect Using the performance functions Transposition If you are used to playing a song ina particular key the Transpose function will help you go on playing in that key while sounding in another one That way you can accompany a singer or instrument without changing your fingering 1 Press the TRANSPOSE button to transpose the E 80 down by up to 6 semitones 2 Press the TRANSPOSE button to transpose the E 80 up by up to 5 semitones Transposition never applies to a part that uses a Drum Set or the drum part of a song To transpose from the key of C to E press four times To transpose from C to G press five times To return to the original setting no transposition simultaneously press and gt As long as the interval is different from 0 one of these buttons lights to signal that the Transpose function is active The transposition interval is indicated on the main page ONG Amazing Grace Strummlin Pop Gospel Love Pad With Vintage EP1 UPPER 2 The 1 refers to a semitone decrease of the pitch so that you hear a B every time you play a C It also means that rather than the A you press you will hear G sharp or A flat The above setti
398. eshold value represents the lowest velocity ing another preset you can cause a Viennese waltz to value between 1 and 127 of the UP1 part that be played back by a heavy metal band etc Even though triggers the MELODY INTELL part If you don t need the arrangement rhythm riffs does not change the this switching function select Off Style s character can be modified beyond recognition 7 Press the button to return to the main page 1 Press the bu ttonconce aor iwice to lt eleet 8 Press the button once again to the display page shown below switch off this function Note All MELODY INTELL settings can be written to a User Program and recalled at a later stage See p 125 Linking MELODY INTELL type selection to the Styles Style Melody Intell Link By default the E 80 automatically loads the MELODY INTELL type that is suited for the Styles you select If you don t need this automatic selection here is how to switch it off a JG rer 1 Press the MENU button 2u rey Ns EA Fry Blais a 2 Select the parts whose instrumentation you want The display changes to to change e Press the field if all instruments should be replaced ca TUNING A vmma go saree DE osean Press the field if only the drum and percus RT eal aren sion instruments should change Press the field if you re happy with everything ne a one 3 Press one of the six fields in the lower half of the TONE Comes disp
399. ess You can also select the dial and the DECI INC buttons to switch pages Quick location of the Style you need There are several ways of quickly locating the Style you are after Sorting files Press the COUNTRY or field to sort the Music Style files according to country kind of music Genre or tempo value The right column now contains the selected entry only one of them can be displayed along with the Style name Continue with step 3 to select the Style you want to use E 80 Music Workstation Roland Style Finder quickly locating Styles If you pressed the field these options are not available and the display looks as follows STYLE LIST Ss EQ empo IDANCEIO GENRE i p IBLUES2 i IBLUES3 i i IR amp B2 i a zE FOUND 16 The information in these columns are supplied by a special file in the internal memory or on a memory card called Database You can also supply the above information for your own Styles Note Music Styles you load from floppy disk and then save to a card or the internal memory are not automatically modified to include this Database information You need to program it yourself See Rename on page 97 Mi Using the Index function The highest hierarchical level of the Style Finder database is called Index All search operations apply to the selected Index and therefore not necessarily to all files in the internal memory or on a memory
400. ess the button The display changes to 1G GUITAR K TUNING ar MODE y D BEAM jase Pa ae e EA vue 7 eA gt mE STYLE eA lt RE es ZS vr Proctor Ae CE inal A not tht owes DATA CEN E owes 2 Press the field followed by the field iile CURVE VALUE 3 Press a field in the PARTS column to select the Keyboard part whose velocity sensitivity you wish to change 4 Press a field in the CURVE column to set the desired velocity sensitivity LOW Select this setting if you are used to playing on an electronic organ or if you do not want velocity changes to bring about major volume changes MID Medium velocity sensitivity The keyboard responds to velocity changes but the maximum vol ume can be obtained more easily than with HIGH This is the default setting HIGH Select this setting for maximum expressive ness Even small variations of the force with which you strike a key produce audible changes The trade off is however that you have to strike the keys forcefully to achieve the maximum volume FIXED Select this setting if all notes you play on the keyboard should have the same velocity value When you press this icon a display field appears next to it E 80 Music Workstation Roland Master Tune where you can set the velocity value to be used a instead of the continuous flux Press that field and Master Tune use the dial or the DECI IINC buttons This is not really a performance func
401. eturn to the display page with the modules Zor Press the button to return to the main page Chorus for Style Song instruments CHORUS LEVEL CHOREY SEND SIVLE SONG Grieg ress CHORUS TYPE rex _ reaneenl etm ote rae Chorus broadens the spatial image of the sound and creates a stereo impression There are also other effect types you can choose here Press the field of the effect type you wish to use CHORUS1 CHORUS4 These are conventional Chorus effects that add spaciousness and depth to the sound FEEDBACK This is a chorus with a flanger like effect and a soft sound FLANGER This is an effect that sounds somewhat like a jet airplane taking off and landing SHORT DELAY This is a delay echo effect with a short delay time SHORT DLY FBK This is a short delay with many repeats Press the field and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons This parameter specifies the output level of the Cho rus processor Setting this parameter to 0 means that your no longer hear the effect in question By contrast setting a CHORUS parameter on the mixer page for Music Styles to 0 means that only the selected instrument is no longer processed by the effect while the remaining instruments are Note See Mixing Song or Style parts on p 140 for details Press the field and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons This parameter sets
402. evel 0 127 Amount of noise due to scratches on the record Dust Noise Level 0 127 Volume of noise due to dust on the record Hiss Noise Level 0 127 Volume of continuous hiss Total Noise Level 0 127 Volume of overall noise Wow 0 127 Depth of long cycle rotational irregularity Flutter 0 127 Depth of short cycle rotational irregular ity Random 0 127 Depth of indefinite cycle rotational irregularity Total Wow Flutter 0 127 Depth of overall rotational irregularity Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 81 Step Pitch A pitch shifter in which the amount of pitch shift is varied by a 16 step sequence Step 1 16 24 0 12 semitones Amount of pitch shift at each step semitone units Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the rate should be synchro nized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the 16 step sequence will cycle Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Attack 0 127 Speed at which the amount of pitch shift changes between steps
403. even more tracks 63 E 80 Music Workstation About the Keyboard modes gs About the Keyboard modes The KBD MODE setting is the singlemost important parameter of your E 80 because it determines which parts or Tones and sections are available Though the EASY SETTING buttons set these parameters automatically you should familiarize yourself with the KBD MODE concept Arranger Organ Guitar and Piano modes The E 80 has four major keyboard modes ARRANGER ORGAN GUITAR and PIANO They can be selected using the EASY SETTING buttons The second mode ORGAN configures the E 80 like a virtual organ page 33 The GUITAR mode transforms the E 80 into a virtual guitar see p 36 In many instances pressing ARR ORGAN GUITAR or provides a nice starting point for further fine tuning Select ARR or ORG when you need the automatic accompaniment function and wish to activate its chord recognition in the left half see page 89 for details Select PIANO to acti vate PIANO CHORD recognition Tu EASY SETIN ARR ORGAN GUITAR PIANO Note Pressing one of these buttons not only selects the desired Keyboard Mode but also sets a series of other parame ters In some cases the parts you may have been using up to that point are suddenly muted Another important aspect is that the split point see below will be set to C4 when you press ARR or ORGAN In ARRANGER mode the keyboard is split into two halves The
404. even though you are not singing These two effects are located immediately behind the MIC INPUT socket and thus applied to the micro phone signal before it is processed by the Vocal Har monist section Press and hold the button to jump to the following page 8 _ TYPE VOICE FX AUTOPITCH GENDER VOICE INPUT AS MALE o rema i 9 Press the field HIC INPUT VOICE HARHONY voice Fx SMALE SUSTAIN LEY THRESHOLD REVERB SEND T Cpl Cpe pro OUTPUT LEY _ CHORUS SEND gt DELAY SEND om gm 10 If you need the compressor press the field so that it lights in blue 11 If you also want to use the gate press the field it must light in blue 12 Press the parameter field whose value you want to edit and set the desired value with the DATA ENTRY dial Note Parameter fields can also be selected using the DATA ENTRY gt a buttons It is very important that you keep singing while set ting the following parameters SUSTAIN LEV Use this parameter to specify how fast the compressor stops working once the microphone level drops below the compressor s threshold This Should be set in such a way as to avoid unpleasant level jumps between notes Set it in combination with the following parameters to obtain the best possible result OUTPUT LEV The compressor reduces the dynamics level differences of your singing This parameter serves two purp
405. f beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signature CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat MIFROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range This parameter is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER 2 1353 E 80 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer WTO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range Mi Fine tuning the note range Before setting FROM NOTE and possibly TO NOTE you can decide how you want to use the note indications Depending on the option you choose FROM NOTE may not even be available so that setting it beforehand would be a waste of time EQUAL Only the selected note note name note num ber will change The note can be set using the TO NOTE field All notes except the one you select will change The note can be set using the TO NOTE field Only notes above the selected one will change The note can be set using the THAN NOTE field Only notes below the selected one will change The note can be set using the THAN NOTE field Only the not
406. f effect that should be applied So here we go 5 Press the button again to assign the PANPOT function to the assignable slid ers The display page still looks as shown in 2 except that the PANPOT row is now emphasized Bea E KE PA Se RA M 6 Use the 9 sliders below the display to change the stereo placement of the available parts E 80 Music Workstation Roland Volume and status of the Style parts L63 corresponds to hard left O to dead center and R63 to hard right Note The left most slider EFFECT does nothing while PANPOT is selected Note The assignable slider functions can also be selected by pressing any control in the desired display row VOLUME PANPOT REVERB or CHORUS You can then use the dial and the DEC INC buttons to directly edit the parameter of the assigned part You can even press the dial and enter the desired value via the on screen numeric pad 7 Press the button once or twice to assign the REVERB function to the sliders Specify how much reverb should be applied to the Keyboard parts The effects parameters themselves can be edited on an Effect page see below Note At this stage the EFFECT slider far left can be used to set the output level of the Reverb processor Setting this parameter to 0 means that you no longer hear the effect in question By contrast setting the REVERB parameter of a Key board part to 0 means that only the part in question is
407. f the desired note Delay 2 Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input of delay 2 negative values invert the phase Delay 2 HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Frequency at which the high frequency content of the delayed sound of delay 2 will be cut BYPASS no cut Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 70 MLT Tap DLY This effect provides four delays Each of the Delay Time parameters can be set to a note length based on the selected tempo You can also set the panning and level of each delay sound Delay Time 1 4 sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a time or a note value Delay 1 4 Time msec 0 2600ms Adjusts the time until Delay 1 4 are heard Delay 1 4 Time note musical notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo
408. fective when applied to sustain type sounds Step 1 16 0 127 Level at each step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the rate should be synchro nized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the 16 step sequence will cycle Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Attack 0 127 Speed at which the level changes between steps Input Sync Sw Off On Specifies whether an input note will cause the sequence to resume from the first step of the sequence ON or not OFF Input Sync Threshold 0 127 Volume at which an input note will be detected Mode Legato Slash Sets the manner in which the vol ume changes as one step progresses to the next LEGATO The change in volume from one step s level to the next remains unaltered If the level of a following step is the same as the one preceding it there is no change in vol ume SLASH The level is momentarily set to O before progressing to the level of the next step This change in volume occurs even If the level of the following step is the same as the preceding step Shuffle 0 127 Timing of volume changes in levels for even numb
409. feminine qualities This parameter should be set in relation to the COARSE value if you want to achieve a realistic effect PANPOT Allows you to set the placement of the corre Sponding part in the stereo sound image This is only meaningful if you connect the E 80 to a stereo amplifier L64 corresponds to hard left 0 to dead center and R63 to hard right VOLUME Allows you to set the level of the correspond ing part Be aware that even the maximum value pro duces no audible effect if the knob is set all the way to OFF W Press the field to jump to the follow ing page YOEOUSTe Shi i PITCH PORTAM TIME RHD TUNING f PORTAM 0 e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to switch this effect on Portamento means that the pitch doesn t change in clearly defined steps it produces glides from one note to the next PORTAM TIME Use this parameter to specify the speed at which the glides are carried out The higher the value the slower the transitions RND TUNING This parameter allows you to introduce subtle or not so subtle pitch inaccuracies usually asso ciated with analog synthesizers Irrespective of the choice you make here Low Mid High the effect will be noticeable but never overly dramatic Select Off if you do not need this effect This is not the same as a vibrato effect
410. file See page 227 Note The E 80 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear Press the field to save the data _ 223 Rename functions Use the Rename functions to change the name of the selected User Program Set Style Song or MIDI Set Styles and Songs can also be renamed via their respec tive Finder User Program Sets and MIDI Set sets however can only be renamed here WARNING Changing the name of a song or Style is usually dangerous Song files can be referenced by Play Lists and User Programs Link function If you change their names here such songs are no longer loaded when they should Similarly Music Styles can be assigned to CUSTOM memories By changing their name you also estrange them from the CUSTOM memories that refer to them The procedure is the same for all file types you can rename so we will describe the steps only once 1 Press the button The display changes to DES Mee e A jMioiset Kt IMPORT PR USER PROGRAM e r jT a FORMAT 2 Ifyou intend to work with a floppy disk or memory card insert it into the drive or slot 3 Press the field 4 Select the data type you want to rename by press ing its field USER PROGRAM JSTE SET f The display changes to 7 Con amp BosSnee Parusa JAn E ga ras oan 2SLROCK2 i 64 ige OR
411. for an art ist s name then enter the name or part of it e Press the field to locate a specific genre Rock n Roll 16 Beat etc then enter the desired characters e Press the field if you happen to know the usually cryptic name of the song file then enter the desired characters Entering characters Enter only as many characters as you think are nec essary to find the song you are after The character string you enter can be used in two ways see below e Use the and fields to select the position for which you wish to enter a new character e Use the alohanumeric keypad to enter the desired characters This keypad works exactly like the keypad of a cellphone you may have to press an alphanu meric field several times to select the desired charac ter or number Note There is no field here because the Finder makes no distinction between upper and lower case letters e The field allows you to delete the character indicated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters e Press to insert a blank or the number 0 T GO 1 e f you forgot to insert a character use or gt to select the position where the missing character should be inserted Then press Insert followed by the character you wish to insert To enter numbers without cycling through the char acters press the field so that its indica tor icon lights After entering the numbers switch it off if you need to enter
412. from start to finish The combined version can be found on the destination track DST Be aware that all data will use the same MIDI channel The SRC track could therefore be used for recording a new part TRAGCKEDIT C Lam bares canes memes fc Svtto carene Chance crock xenmor ESRC TRACK 1 16 Allows you to select the track whose data should be added to those of the DST track MIDST TRACK 1 16 except the track selected as SRC Use this parameter to specify the track that should contain a combination of its original data and those of the selected source track WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs GLOBAL CHANGE Sette Jemrerme ero tance eroek uenanee JOLUME This function allows you to make quick changes to certain settings The changes always apply to entire tracks you cannot use GLOBAL CHANGE for just a few measures Designed to help you enhance Stan dard MIDI Files it is a wonderful tool for the follow ing applications e Upgrading older Standard MIDI Files to take advan tage of the E 80 s new sounds e Global changes to the Reverb and or Chorus Send values which is very convenient when you suddenly notice that the effect is too prominent or not strong enough METRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which c
413. g category or if you re not sure which category the song belongs to ALL Note The remaining options on this page RENAME EDIT and COPY are only available for specific categories e Press Back The display returns to the page shown under step 1 above This time however only songs belonging to the selected Index are displayed 153 E 80 Music Workstation More refined song functions b Select the Finder The powerful part starts as soon as you press the FINDER field gA s Gall E prere J cies ae l anata PE 21 5 tac 2 oer 3 KA ES orma PLAY SEARCH c Search the database The next step is to decide how the Song Finder should look for the files e Press the field to search for all entries that start with the characters you entered BEA for example Files that match the specified criteria will be displayed at the top of the list The order depends on the button icon you activated SONG NAME ARTIST GENRE or FILE NAME e Press the field to have the E 80 search the selected column for files that contain the sup plied information This would allow you to also locate a file called Raggabeat if you entered BEA Note See p 42 for how to use the Play amp Search function d Decide what you want to look for e Press the field if you want the E 80 to look for song names then enter the name or part of it e Press the field if you want to look
414. g of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of DO 100W the effect sound will be output Level 0 127 Output level 261 E 80 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters 52 Step Ring This is a ring modulator that uses a 16 step sequence to vary the frequency at which modulation is applied Step 1 16 0 127 Frequency of ring modulation at each step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the rate should be synchro nized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the 16 step sequence will cycle Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Attack 0 127 Speed at which the modulation fre quency changes between steps 0 Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 53 Tremolo Cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo effect to the sound Modulation Wave TRI SOR SIN SAW1 SAW2 Modu lation Wave TRI triangle w
415. g of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 80 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should Start after the selected beat TO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited T383 BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature In the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat MDATA TYPE Allows you to select the data to be shifted ALL All parameters listed below Note Only note messages P Bender Pitch Bend data Control Control change messages Change Prog C Program change messages NRPN Non registered parameter number messages These are parameter control functions of the GS GM2 format that are easier to use than SysEx messages but basically have
416. g the setting range on p 182 for details about the six button icons WTO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs CHANGE VELO TRACK EDIT jase etemon hamaran met forma i The CHANGE VELO function allows you to modify the dynamics called velocity of a track or excerpt Increasing the velocity values means that the notes in question will be louder and brighter than before while reducing the velocity values means the oppo site Use this function when you are happy with the timing of the notes but would like the sound to be brighter louder or rounder softer You can decide to add subtract a fixed velocity value BIAS or to change them proportionally MAGNIFY METRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks WE FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature In the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT i
417. ge Number of stages in the phaser Phaser Manual 0 127 Adjusts the basic frequency from which the sound will be modulated Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation E 80 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Mix Level 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Level 0 127 Output level 50 Inf Phaser A phaser that continues raising lowering the frequency at which the sound is modulated Mode 1 2 3 4 Higher values will produce a deeper phaser effect Speed 100 100 Speed at which t
418. ge KEYBOARDERREG ys IF SP MODELING On this page you can switch the KEYBOARD MAS TERING TOOLS processors on and off by pressing the button icons to the right of the EQUALIZER and COMPRESSOR displays If you only need another effect type press the EQUALIZER or COMPRESSOR display and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select it If you also need to change certain aspects of that effect Equalizer 1 Press the EQUALIZER field to access the parameters of the Equalizer The display changes to SAS ERIS LOO EQ LEVEL EQ GAIN DE Znie so TE a Om GA The equalizer has the same function as the BASS MID and TREBLE knobs on an amplifier it allows you to color the sound or to apply tonal corrections that help you avoid saturating the speakers 2 Press the or OFF field to switch the equal izer on icon lights or off icon goes dark 14 3 4 5 6 7 You can also do so on the KEYBOARD EFFECTS page see above Press the field below EQUALIZER that displays the name of the currently selected preset Select the desired equalizer preset with the dial or the DEC INC buttons The available presets are 1 Flat 4 Jazz 6 Standard 2 Rock 5 Classic 7 User 3 Pop The settings you make on this page can be saved to a User memory and recalled as and when necessary Here s how to edit the parameters Press the field of the parameter you wish to
419. ge are different while there is also one more parameter you can set see above for the others DLY CHO SND Sets the amount of delay sound that is sent to the Chorus processor Higher values mean that the delay portion will be more prominent in the chorus signal Chorus HARMONY EFFECT VOICE EFFECT HARMONY EFFECT REVERB DELAY REVERB CHORUS DELAY LOW PASS FILTER anne a a faas CHORUS SEND CHO REY SND om e Press the field of the chorus type you wish to use Note The preset you choose affects the settings of the param eters below Always start by selecting the type and then set the programmable parameters The names of these types SMOOTH CELESTE are probably self explanatory You may notice that the Chorus character changes as you select different types e Press the field of the parameter you wish to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons The three knob icons allow you to alter the selected Chorus type T24 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Saving your settings to a User Program ES Working with User Programs The E 80 provides User Program memories that allow you to store almost all settings or registrations you make on the front panel and the various display pages Additional registrations can be loaded directly from the internal memory or a memory card Before taking a closer look at the User Programs there is one thing we h
420. ght Index categories in all You cannot cre ate additional categories e After performing step 4 above press the field USE PHOG A EDS e n the left column SOURCE press the field whose assignments you wish to copy to another Index cate gory You can also use the a fields e In the right column DESTINATION press the field of the index category you wish to copy the assignments to You can also use the a fields e Now specify how the User Program assignments should be copied Press the field if the assignments of the DESTINATION Index should be erased and replaced by the entries of the selected SOURCE field Press if the User Program assignments of the SOURCE category should be added to the assign ments of the DESTINATION Index the DESTINATION category will contain more assignments than before Your command is briefly confirmed by the display Note No User Program files are copied during this operation 6 Press the field to return to the USER PRO GRAM LIST page Note Press the button to return to the main page and cancel your changes E 80 Music Workstation Roland Music Assistant functions Music Assistant functions The Music Assistant environment provides several functions for editing existing and creating new regis trations Creating new Music Assistant registrations Music Assistant registrations are always based on a User Program They are only references to data that reside el
421. grams that reside on the Same media as the List itself The name of the selected Set is displayed next to a folder icon on the USER PROGRAM page that appears when you press the button All User Programs as well as the songs they refer to need to be on line That explains why the field is not available here Press the button Press the field followed by the field EQOA USE PROS AN SST Live 2004 My User Program 3 Select the source media INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY memory card 4 Press the field of the User Program Set file you wish to load If the desired name is not displayed use the scroll bar to the right of the list if available to scroll further down Note A User Program Set also contains all GLOBAL parameters see the list in the Parameter Reference booklet So be sure to save the current settings before loading a User Program Set see Save User Program Set 5 Press the field to load the data Mi Load MIDI Set This is where you can load MIDI Set Sets i e groups of 8 MIDI Sets that overwrite the contents of the internal MIDI Set memories 1 Press the button 2 Press the field followed by the field 3 Select the source media INTERNAL MEMORY EXTERNAL MEMORY memory card or FLOPPY disk 4 Press the field of the MIDI Set whose data you wish to load If the desired name is not displayed use the scroll bar to the right of the list
422. gs are included in the Style data them selves and can thus be copied to other E 80 units simply by copying the Music Style files Select a Style page 27 and start Arranger play back see p 82 Play a melody to the accompaniment You will notice that the sound of the UP1 or any other Keyboard part matches the style and mood of the selected Style Select a different Style and again play a solo line the active Keyboard parts now use different sounds Press another ONE TOUCH button Press the same button again if you no longer need the One Touch setting As you see the One Touch memories apply to all Key board parts Note If a One Touch memory is active while you recall a User Program the One Touch function is switched off Wif you select a One Touch memory while another one Is already active In that case the E 80 immediately selects of the set tings of that memory and thus changes the registra tion Ignoring certain One Touch settings Hold The E 80 provides several HOLD options that allow you to filter certain One Touch settings 1 Press and hold a ONE TOUCH 1 4 button The display changes to See Cem Cac Ga ONE TOUCH HOLD wire Jooo amnas fa d E 80 Music Workstation Roland One Touch 2 Press the fields corresponding to the settings that should not be loaded when you select another One Touch memory or Music Style When you change a setting the field of the
423. h out replacing them Only the E 80 can read these data Other SMF players and the 16 track Sequencer ignore these newly added SysEx data There is cur rently no other instrument capable of reading the MSE Style format the E 80 uses so compatibility is no issue Use the fields in the lower right corner to select the instrument you want to edit If you select a Drum Set the display changes to Oh TOO REDI o Sa pau ror uM C common oe T Fane oa B ry MUTE MUTE PANPOT JUMP TO EQUALIZER t ON eot i FREEZE KIEJ See page 145 for an explanation of the and fields The field disappears because transposing the drum part in octave steps doesn t make sense Press the field to jump to the location where the instrument you are about to change is used Playback starts automatically from that point Ezt i TA PALETTE Cuggmo SIT If you can barely hear the Tone Drum Set press the field indicator icon must light then use to jump to the first note of that instrument Press again to switch this func tion off Use the field to switch the selected instru ment off The corresponding part is no longer played back Just as a reminder this setting only applies to the selected Instrument and thus not necessarily to the entire track Note In the case of the drums you can mute two Instrument groups separately 142 _ 5 Press the long sou
424. h an R for Record You can only record one track at any one time The button icons in the right most column are TRACK EDIT see page 179 MICRO EDIT see page 193 MASTER TRACK see page 189 INITIALIZE SONG see page 175 STYLE CONVERTER see page 197 General considerations The 16 track sequencer can be used to record sequen tially onto 16 tracks one track after the other Since the 16 track sequencer and the Recorder share the same RAM memory they are in fact different incarna tions of the same concept you can lay down your first tracks using the Recorder with or without Arranger and then select the 16 track sequencer to add new tracks or change existing ones The Recorder allows for simultaneous multitrack recording which is not possi ble with the 16 track Sequencer While you are working with the 16 track Sequencer the Arranger is not avail able Tracks and MIDI channels Tracks are assigned to MIDI channels on a 1 1 basis i e Track 1 MIDI channel 1 Track 12 MIDI channel 12 etc Since the Keyboard parts have been assigned to the MIDI channels in such a way as to allow for easy Minus One playback using the Recorder page 41 you should take a minute to study the table below 17S E 80 Music Workstation Using the 16 track Sequencer Obviously if you record a song with Arranger backing the respective Style parts ADR ABS etc are recorded onto the tracks that are assigned to their MIDI chan nels
425. hange wR Fo e Set the desired value with the dial or Ka the DEC INC buttons Ae INSTR VOLUME This parameter duplicates the VOLUME parameter on the PALETTE page The reason why it s also available here is that some equalizer settings may lead to Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and rather noticeable level drops or hikes use the dial or the DEC INC buttons HI FREO HZ 1500 2000 3000 4000 6000 8000 to set the desired value You can also press the 12000 This parameter allows you to set the cutoff fre dial and use the numeric pad quency of the high band this is a shelving filter Note The following parameters are also available for SRX HI GAIN DB 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the sounds you may have assigned level of the selected HI frequency Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency negative values cut attenuate it MID FREQ HZ 200 8000Hz This parameter allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the middle band this is a peaking filter MID Q 0 5 1 2 4 8 Use this parameter to specify the width of the MID FREQ band that you want to boost or cut Smaller values mean that neighboring frequen cies above below that value are also affected MID GAIN DB 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected MID frequency Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency negative values cut attenuate it LO FREO HZ
426. hat is sent to the Reverb processor Higher the VOCAL EFFECT page It was provided so that you do values mean that the delay portion will be more promi not need to switch pages while editing the Chorus pro nent in the reverb signal Be careful not to overdo this cessor effect because It tends to blur the sound image CHOP REV SND This parameter sets the amount of DLY FBACK This parameter specifies the number of Chorus sound that will be sent to the Reverb Higher val times the Delay will repeat With a value of 0 the Delay ues result in more Chorus sound being sent The value will not repeat while higher values increase the number 90 effectively allows you to connect the Chorus and of repeats With negative values the Delay will be fed Reverb effects in series Chorus before Reverb If you do back with inverted phase They are mainly effective with not wish the Chorus signal to be processed by the Reverb Short delay times effect set this value to 0 E Delay for HARMONY EFFECT 5 Press the button to return to the main page Note The first thing to do now is probably to write your set tings to a User Program page 125 Note For certain parts there is also an equalizer See pages 151 and 154 for how to set them VOICE EFFECT HARMONY EFFECT REVERB DELAY REVERB DELAY WALL TYPE E placa eas es Coes DELAY SEND DELAY TIME pa Ou Om _ BLY REYSND DLY CHOSND DLY FBACK gt i i gt The presets on this pa
427. hat this division sounds somewhat simpler The next step would then be to select the MAIN pattern and delete both the bells and whistles and the distorted guitar 207 E 80 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer Metronome In Style Composer mode the metronome sounds during recording unless you switch it off using the TEMPO button If you also need the metronome when listening to what you have just recorded select another metronome mode See Metronome settings on p 81 Playback in Arranger mode Note Save your Style before trying it out with the Arranger If the Style stops unexpectedly during playback in Arranger mode try different chords Chances are that you only programmed the major pattern so that the Arranger selects an empty pattern when you play a minor or seventh chord Remember to set the Mode parameter to M m 7 until you have come to grips with the possibilities of the E 80 s Arranger That way those three patterns will sound alike but at least you are Sure that the Arranger does not stop when you play a minor or seventh chord 2083 Using existing Styles Another way of programming Styles is to use parts from other Styles The E 80 allows you to e Select the desired Style to copy it to the Style RAM memory and edit it e Copy one or all tracks of the selected Division e Copy just a few notes of an existing part e Copy tracks or notes between Divisions This allows you to cre
428. he COVER information is part of the data only the E 80 understands You can still play back the newly saved version of this song on another sequencer or SMF player but the COVER information will be ignored Note You can also modify the COVER settings yourself see p 141 Minus One Minus One means that at least one part of a song is not played back There are at least two applications for this function 1 2 3 4 it allows you to play the muted parts yourself on the keyboard it allows you to sing without doubling by the song which may sound odd Press the button The button s indicator lights and the melody part track 4 is muted If you want to mute other parts or use another preset proceed as follows Press and hold the button Press one of the three preset fields to mute the corresponding song parts Press to mute the melody you will notice that the 4 field also lights Press the field to mute everything except the bass and drums Press the field to mute the bass and drum parts 2 and 10 Note Even the preset fields can be used simultaneously And the part fields 1 16 can be added too To mute other parts ad lib i e without taking advantage of the presets Press the field This mutes only 4 the mel ody Switch off all parts you don t want to hear by press ing the 1 3 and 5 16 fields Indicator icons of parts you need must lig
429. he on screen NUMERIC PAD Enter the value you want to use then press the ENTER field If necessary you can use the field to correct erroneous entries before pressing ENTERI and refer to the volume that is used when the expression pedal is depressed UP highest volume or in the upright position DOWN lowest volume UP DOWN 0 127 You do not need to specify 0 for the DOWN position Selecting any other value will reduce the volume of the selected parts up to the DOWN value Likewise you do not need to specify 127 as maximum value for UP Note If you select Expression the DOWN and UP values represent MIDI Expression CC11 values It is perfectly possible to set the DOWN value to 127 and the UP value to 0 so that the selected part only sounds when the Expression pedal is in the upright position This can be used for some clever effects instead of alternating between UP1 and UP2 by vary ing your velocity page 69 which requires a consid erable amount of striking precision you could invert UP2 s response to the expression pedal so that UP1 does not sound when UP2 does and vice versa 6 Press the button to return to the main page E 80 Music Workstation Roland Scale Tuning E Scale Tuning Another useful function is called Scale Tuning It allows you to use oriental Asian and other scales in much the same way as on an oriental keyboard The E 80 contains three memories
430. he volume then gradually decreases until it reaches zero Auto Fill Allows you to switch the but ton and function on and off Fill Up Triggers the Fill In that takes you to the next Variation i e from MAIN 1 to 2 You can use this function up to three times to jump to the most complex level Variation 4 If you then use the D Beam again however nothing happens You thus cannot cycle back to the lowest level Variation 1 Fill Down Triggers the Fill In that takes you to the pre vious Variation i e from MAIN 2 to 1 You can use this function up to three times to jump to the simplest level Variation 1 If you then use the D Beam again however nothing happens You thus cannot cycle back to the highest level Variation 4 ADrum On Off This setting allows you to switch the Arranger s ADrums part on and off using the D Beam Controller There are also combined on off options see below ABass On Off This setting allows you to switch the ABass part on and off using the D Beam Controller Accomp On Off This setting allows you to switch the Accompaniment parts ACC1 6 on and off using the D Beam Controller ABs ADr On Off This setting allows you to use the D Beam for switching on and off the ABass and ADrums parts ABs Acc On Off This setting allows you to use the D Beam for switching on and off the ABass and ACC1 6 parts ADr Acc On Off This setting allows you to use the D
431. hem to record the events available on this page or to change some i e not all of them at a later stage For the first approach start playback of your Style then select the STYLE MIXER page then change the settings They are not recorded and reset when the loop returns to the beginning 211 E 80 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer For the second approach stop Style playback select the STYLE MIXER page then proceed with step 3 above For the third approach a kind of punch in select the STYLE MIXER page press RECORDER REC e then press to start recording When you reach the place where you want to change an already recorded setting press the associated field and modify the value Recording will be deactivated at the end of the pattern even though playback goes on Changing the preset tempo Here is how to change the preset tempo of your Style 1 While on the STYLE COMPOSER page press the RECORDER button SRO MEOSE Mee SPA Ibe REC DIVISION MODE REC DIVISION RECTRACK Accomp 1 TRACK INSTRUMENT Ha Fh EPianol FE OCTAVE GUITAR MODE SETTING x TEMPO INPUT QUANTIZE There is no need to select a Mode Division or track because the tempo value is shared by all tracks and patterns 2 Press the field and set the value 20 250 using the dial or the DEC IINC but tons 3 Press the button to record one or two beats then press it again to st
432. hen the direct sound begins until the flanger sound Is heard Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the step rate should be syn chronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the following parame ter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Step Rate Hz 0 10 20 00Hz Rate period of pitch change Step Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync param eter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Output Mode Speaker Phones Adjusts the method that will be used to hear the sound that is output to the O
433. her division or press to stop Arranger playback The E 80 provides four programmable looped divisions MAIN Lia Looped divisions do not select other divisions when they are finished because they never end they keep playing until you select another division by hand or by foot WOne shot divisions One shot patterns or Divisions are only played once and then select a looped division or stop the Arranger The E 80 uses the following one shot divi sions INTRO 1 4 FILL UP I FILL DOWN 1 lt 3 and ENDING 1 4 The division type also determines how the respective tracks are played back Any track of a looped pattern that is shorter than another track is repeated until the longest track is finished Then a new cycle begins Here s how you can take advantage of that if the drums play the same notes during four measures while the rhythm guitar or piano needs four mea sures to complete a cycle recording only one drum measure is enough because it is automatically repeated until the longest track Is finished 2O01 E 80 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer Recording Styles from scratch Important remarks Style recording and editing is carried out in the E 80 s Style RAM memory When you leave Style Composer mode after recording or editing a Style by pressing EXIT the display warns you that you need to save your Style If you haven t yet done so you Should take advantage of this secur
434. her memory area Be sure to select a song before pressing the field on the SONG LIST page Also bear in mind that the COPY page only lists songs that match the last search criteria you used for the SONG FINDER On the other hand if you only need to copy certain songs on memory card or in the internal memory using the FINDER would be a good idea it helps you to avoid too many presses of the PAGE or field IG E 80 Music Workstation More refined song functions e On the SONG OPTIONS page press the field SONG OE OTS EE Rename FROM CIINT MEMORY Fe ee GFLOFPY DISK CEET MEMORATE e Start by specifying the source that contains the 5 6 song s you wish to copy Press the button icon several times to select the memory area INT MEMORY The E 80 s internal memory FLOPPY DISK The floppy disk in the E 80 s drive EXT MEMORY The memory card in the E 80 s PCMCIA Slot Now specify the target you wish to copy the selected song s to Press the button icon once or twice to select the memory area If the name of the song you want to copy is already displayed press its line You can also select several SONGS To display the next 5 files press the field in the lower right corner You also use the dial and the DECJ INC buttons You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a pre vious group of 5 songs press If you need to copy
435. her possibilities such as using ing MIN 80 MAX 127 for the MELODY INTELL part The default value is 440 0 You can return to this page 84 so that the automatic harmonies are only value by pressing the field added when you really want to hear them 4 Press the button to return to the main page 5 Press the button to return to the main page See page 67 for the Global Transpose parameter G9 E 80 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Aftertouch The E 80 is equipped with an Aftertouch sensitive key board Like most instruments supporting Aftertouch it generates channel Aftertouch messages which means that one Aftertouch value will be transmitted by each MIDI channel or part Aftertouch is generated when you press a key even fur ther down after playing a note The effect obtained is usually similar to the one you can achieve with the BENDER MODULATION lever you can change the pitch modify the volume intensify the modulation etc In the E 80 s case however you can also control the Arranger and even the Vocal Harmonist Aftertouch data are only received by the following parts Upper 1 2 3 Lower 1 2 and the Arranger 1 Press the button i GUITAR K TUNING e UITART D BEAM SPLIT amp vocaj Fs y TOUCH a then igs a r ARRANGER ETTING i FF FUNCTION ig lt E oe x 3 x 5 me 22 Dz me ao Dm O z 5 2 Press the field followed by the f
436. here is a lot you can control without having to wade through endless menus Note If the main page does not appear automatically you can return to it by pressing the button once or several times 2 E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start Quick Start In this chapter we will scratch the surface and walk you through the major functions The general idea Your E 80 is several instruments in one There are three main sections you can use for playing live 1 Keyboard parts This section consists of parts you need to play via the keyboard hence the name Keyboard The E 80 pro vides seven Keyboard parts six of which can be used simultaneously UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 and MBS UP stands for Upper and refers to the right half if there is a split LW refers to Lower and thus to the left half MBS is short for Manual Bass i e a monophonic bass part whose notes depend on the chords you play There is no Manual Drum part because any of the parts just mentioned can be used to play a Drum Set The seventh part MELODY INT is what computer buffs would calla cross platform part it belongs to the Keyboard section but it is in part controlled by the Arranger See Melody Intelligence on page 84 2 Arranger Style section Left hand Right hand melody Arranger control Keyboard parts The Arranger is your backing band It plays an accom paniment called Music Style In a way the Arranger wor
437. here they are saved 3 Press the field in the upper right cor ner You have just created a new Play List which is still empty and therefore looks like this PLAY LIST EDIT TE PERIA Play Lists consist of steps up to 99 to which you can assign one song each 4 Press the field or the dial to jump to the SONG LIST page The display looks more or less as follows a EXTERNAL peg 5 Locate the song you wish to assign to step 01 e f it is already displayed continue with step 6 below e f it is not yet displayed use the PAGE fields in the lower right of the display to change pages You can also use the dial or the DEC INC buttons e You can also use the following fields for narrowing down your search if you are overwhelmed by the number of songs and pages you need to scroll and FINDER See page 159 6 Select the song you wish to assign by pressing its field so that it is displayed in orange 7 Press the field This takes you to the following page The song is assigned to step 01 and step 02 becomes the last one of your list End Prloef LIST EDIT EXTERNAL INTERNAL MEMORY MEMORY 01 FIRSTDAY can sana a song to it right away Repeat steps 4 7 above to assign a song to this step After compiling your play list press the field 8 _ 9 _ PLAY Listy SAVE 10 Enter a name up to 18 characters See p 52 for how
438. his is a multiple chorus that applies two phase modulation in stereo It gives no impression of modulation but produces a transparent chorus effect Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Phase 0 180deg Spatial spread of the sound EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 15 St Chorus This is a stereo chorus A filter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the chorus sound Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no filter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Cutoff Frequency 200 8000Hz Basic frequency of the filter Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Phase 0 180 deg Spatial spread of the sound EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range 0 High Gain 15dB 0
439. how to use a text file with the lyrics of a song 56 E ce Dil TENT you want to sing without synchronizing the text This JE cp al COLOUR function can also be used to display messages and Gp 258 Bere Ae announcements on an external screen You can use the a E PAGE TURNER function to turn pages at set intervals PAGE TURNER VIDEO OUT SOURCE see below Here the function only applies to the 2 Pion selected text file however it doesn t open subsequent text files 8 Proceed as follows e You may first want to try one of the COLOR PRESET peal Parantel fields 1 6 If none of the factory settings is to 1 Use a word processing program to prepare the text your liking or if you want to make minor correc file you want to use tions Line wrapping Is taken care of by the E 80 a your e press one of the knobs red green or blue in the lines and paragraphs can be as long as you like Be T eoumnnianduse the Asay Sure to insert returns wherever you want to start a new paragraph increase or decrease the value The changes are reflected in the small display next to 2 Save it as a txt file the COLOR PRESET button icons If you prepare your text file on a Mac computer The system used here corresponds to the RGB color save It as Text Only MS DOS or MS DOS Text mixing system whereby the value 255 for all three from Microsoft Word etc Otherwise accents knobs yields the color white while O for all
440. hsaaabeeshaanenetes 131 Pal ait cisptnmenneeneweaneeiis2i4 242 Part OnJoff 0008 28 39 65 Switch 4 25444444444408085 241 242 NOVUING eae ce et 113 Paste Values 113 144 147 Pate ihiste ee seseesgacsescsenees cae 201 PRONG 46422 eee eee rcennes 182 183 189 PG he 188 218 Pedal onunu see eenseerseeraeeccenans 78 PERC 0 caeegeange ee ea gee ee we rer 145 PERCUSSION oc2sccseesecenees 31 33 34 Performance Memory see User Program ae ss tee o54 44545444550454seernnnes 72 POWWeeedeeeee2ee2gesgeeguen 194 220 Style oo cece eee eee 72 75 77 89 PE EEEE EEEE EAA 56 PICH afscccucerennneunnneunen dade 151 ACCDIUMS s oviiaeeseeesvonssacess 211 Auto 00 00 anaana 49 152 BENO eea A 66 153 BENDE ocacesaseseseseneata 152 155 DOWN aoaaaaaaaaaaa aaa 70 Down D Beam 20008 74 Drum Instrument 146 211 Cc eee ee eee 70 Up D Beam 0000 74 Place Event 193 197 224 Plate cicabee ene ene ene ene ee ens 116 147 Play amp Search 0 0 cece eee eee 42 161 EAO o PETE 76 77 Lisl E EEE 164 Metronome oauan naaa 81 PAV O isansauuueueniseneeeeeeees 74 Oli eer 102 Portam annsenennsesvaveexael 153 155 Portamento ununun 78 D S a 2 E EE 101 PESEE woe ees ES 91 A POEPPEE TOPO E TOP TEETE 246 Punch In Out naana 176 FOOTSWITC Nico 4i4dddyswcerwaer s 76 77 Q Quantize DCCUENICE eee TREIER ERE 180 Style COMPOSE eecisesssssrs 205 213
441. ht the others must be dark By pressing one of these fields you switch off the active preset E 80 Music Workstation Roland Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files e To save this customized Minus setting in the E 80 s 5 6 internal memory press CUSTO MIZE The field lights to indicate that your settings are now being used Press the button to return to the main page Your last preset selection MELODY USER will be used until you select another preset or until you switch off your E 80 Press again to switch off this func tion Note You can also switch the Minus One function on off using an optional footswitch page 76 45 E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start Vocal Harmonist function The Vocal Harmonist is another highlight of your E 80 In fact it doesnt just produce harmonies it can also transform your voice in various ways More impor tantly its sound quality surpasses by far anything you may already have tried Setting up Here s what you need to do to take advantage of the Vocal Harmonist function 1 Connect a dynamic microphone to the INPUT jack on the E 80 s rear panel VOCAL HARMONIST OUTPUT input MAIN L MONO ined MIC Set to MIC Examples Roland DR 10 or DR 20 2 Set the switch to MIC You can also connect the mono output of other instruments In that case you need to set the switch to LINE VOCAL HARMONIST OUTPUT input IN L MON
442. hter sound This parameter applies to the JC 120 Clean Twin and BG Lead Pre Amp Types Speaker Sw Off On Determines whether the signal passes through the speaker ON or not OFF Speaker Type Select the type of speaker The specifica tions of each type are as follows The speaker column indi cates the diameter of each speaker unit in inches and the number of units Type Cabinet Speaker Microphone SMALL 1 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic mic SMALL 2 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic mic MIDDLE open back enclosure 12x 1 dynamic mic JC 120 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic mic BUILT IN 1 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic mic BUILT IN 2 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 3 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 4 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 5 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BG STACK 1 sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic BG STACK2 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic MS STACK 1 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic MS STACK 2 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic METAL STACK large double stack 12x4 condenser mic 2 STACK large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic 3 STACK large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic Mic Setting 1 2 3 Adjusts the location of the mic that s capturing the sound of the speaker This can be adjusted in three steps from 1 3 with the mic becoming more distant as the value increases Mic Level 0 127 Volume of the mi
443. ial or the DEC INC buttons to select it If you also need to change certain aspects of that effect Press the KEYBOARD CHORUS field to access the Chorus parameters The display changes to MEFUOAME arlon OUTPUT le CHORUS LEVEL CHORUS T VPE TEH PARAMETER Press the or OFF field to switch the proces sor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above Press the field of the effect type you wish to use The options are Chorus1 Chorus3 These are conventional chorus effects that add spaciousness and depth to the sound Flanger This is an effect that sounds somewhat like a jet airplane taking off and landing GM2 Chorus This Chorus effect is Roland s standard type for GM2 compatible tone generators Delay This is a full fledged delay effect that can be used instead of a chorus or flanger As you will see there are a lot of parameters you can program If you don t want to edit the effects parameters con tinue with the next step otherwise jump to step 6 Press to return to the display page with the modules _or Press the button to return to the main page T1 O 6 After selecting a chorus type you may want to fine tune some of its parameters If so proceed as follows Press the field of the parameter you wish to change the number of fields and their functions depend on the selected type Parameter values can
444. ic Assistant registration Again this is a virtual process because the underlying User Program does not disappear In fact this operation only strips the MA icon from the related User Program e Select the Music Assistant entry you want to discard e Press the field This operation cannot be undone which is why the following question is now displayed MOS LE ASSIST OPP hents A This File will be DELETED from Memory Card Name MuAss Another Paradise Artist None Genre Pop ARE YOU SURE deletes the Music Assistant entry leaves the entry intact and takes you back to the l list page 2 sana os a eat ony lia ae leaves the file intact and takes you back to the 3 Continue with Renaming Music Assistant registra MUSIC ASSISTANT LIST page tions or Deleting Music Assistant entries M Renaming Music Assistant registrations e Press the field followed by the field if it does not yet light U Q nother Paradiso ET AYIE PIE _e ind ome This function allows you to change or supply the NAME ARTIST and GENRE information for the selected Music Assistant registration ARTIST refers to the person that made the song famous while GENRE describes the kind of music Press the NAME or field and enter the desired characters See Entering names on p 52 The field allows you to switch between uppercase and lowercase characters The NAME you enter here on
445. ield SAOI olap ESH flou I EN DE PARTS TYPE 3 Press the field of the part whose Aftertouch response you want to change it lights 4 Press the field that corresponds to the function or parameter that should be influenced by the After touch Note Aftertouch only works in one direction i e it generates either positive or negative values Off The part in question does not respond to After touch messages 7 O Filter Up The cutoff frequency of the Tone assigned to the selected part can be raised so that the sound becomes brighter Note Depending on the value you set for IVF Cutoff page 144 this parameter may have no audible effect That is also the case of Tones whose cutoff frequency is already preset to the maximum value Filter Down The cutoff frequency of the Tone assigned to the selected part can be lowered so that the sound becomes mellower Note Depending on the value you set for IVF Cutoff page 144 this parameter may have no audible effect That is also the case of Tones whose cutoff frequency is already preset to the minimum value Modulation Select this function if you want the After touch to duplicate the modulation function of the BENDER MODULATION lever Pitch Up By pressing a key even further down you can bend the notes up to two semi tones up Pitch Down By pressing a key even further down you can bend the notes up to two semi tones down
446. igh Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the high range chorus sound is heard High Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to spec ify whether Note or not Hz the high modulation rate Should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value High Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the high range chorus sound is modulated High Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note High Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the high range chorus sound High Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the high range chorus sound Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output level 62 Band Flanger A flanger that lets you apply an effect independently to the low frequency and high frequency ranges Split Frequency 200 8000Hz Frequency at which the low and high ranges will be divided Low Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the low range flanger sound is heard Low Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the low modulation rate should be synchronized t
447. ilable beats depends on the time signature In the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat MVALUE 127 0 127 This is where you can set the transposition interval in semi tone steps If you wish to transpose a C part to D enter 2 AS you see you can transpose the highest possible MIDI note all the way down to the lowest and vice versa Warning 0 represents the lowest note the MIDI standard and the 16 track sequencer can handle while 127 is the highest note If you select 127 for note number 74 D5 for example the resulting note number would be 201 which is impossible Therefore the sequencer will subtract 12 from 201 until the result is less than or equal to 127 and therefore use the value 117 in our example This happens to all notes that would otherwise lie below O or above 127 Note Be careful when applying TRANSPOSE to a drum track track 10 or any other track that uses a Drum Set This results in a dramatic change of your rhythm section with a triangle playing the kick notes for example Mi FROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tunin
448. ilable for Standard MIDI File playback Your E 80 also allows you to view the lyrics if avail able and even the notes of the songs in the display The Lyrics function was provided to allow you to read the words of the songs being played back in a karaoke fashion the words to sing are highlighted at the right time Note that this function is only available for Stan dard MIDI Files that contain Lyrics data Ask your dealer for details Apart from the Lyrics the E 80 also displays the chords which may come in handy for a guitarist or bassist with whom you are playing The chord information is usually not contained in a song as such but that s no problem the E 80 can cal culate it in realtime and even display it a little ahead of the changes This also applies to the notes proper that can be displayed in realtime 1 Select a song page 41 2 Press the button E 80 Music Workstation Roland Displaying Lyrics and chord information The display changes to Song New Song M 001_ 1 4 120 47 4 I can tell by the look in your eyes That you conquer to kill You need blood for your thrills You use your charms Never notice the harm That you do do you EE c 3 Start song playback The chord information appears at the bottom of the screen Note The chord information is calculated in real time and may not always be accurate Also with chords where the third has been omitted no information will be disp
449. ill In pattern that lasts until the end of the current bar It then changes to the newly selected pattern at which point MAIN and the selected numeric VARIATION button light steadily If you press it on the last beat of the current bar the Fill In will start on the next downbeat and last an entire bar after which the Arranger automatically selects the new pattern If you press the same numeric button 1 4 again the Fill In is played according to the above rules But when it finishes the Arranger returns to the pattern you had been using up to that point 5 Switch off the button if you do not want the next pattern change to be preceded by a Fill In Note The length of a Fill In can be halved See Half Bar on Fill In Main on p 71 75 and 77 Intro amp Ending Now that we ve got the transitions covered you may start wondering how to create more professional intros for your songs and how to end them in style That is what the and buttons are for While the MAIN patterns keep repeating the same accompaniment until you select another one or until you stop Arranger playback Fill Ins see above Intros and Endings are played only once Once the INTRO pattern is finished the Arranger auto matically proceeds with the MAIN 1 lt 4 pattern depending on which button flashes At the end of the Ending pattern however the Arranger stops 1 Stop Arranger playback by pressing the button it goes dark 2
450. ilter 46 Humanizer 47 Speaker Sim 48 Step Phaser 49 MLT Phaser 50 Inf Phaser 51 Ring Modul 52 Step Ring 53 Tremolo 54 Auto Pan 55 Step Pan 56 Slicer 57 VK Rotary 58 3D Chorus 59 3D Flanger 60 3D Step Figr 70 MLT Tap DLY 71 Reverse DLY 72 Shuffle DLY 73 3D Delay 74 Long Time DLY 75 Tape Echo 76 LoFi Noise 77 LoFi Comp 78 LoFi Radio 79 Telephone 80 Phonograph 81 Step Pitch 82 Sympa Reso 83 VIB OD Rotary 84 Center Canc 3 vie cm PF Fonts OO CONTROLLERS 2 Press the UTILITY then the field UTILITY PLAYER FEEDBACK KEYBOARD OUCH SCREEN UPPER1 EEF MF LINK F ASHING Han L MONIST EXIT 4K Lik FLASHING FILL IN ON USER METRONOME PROGRAM CHNG STYLE MELODY INT LINK Press the field to switch it on or off If it is on the E 80 selects a suitable MFX type for each sound you assign to the UP1 part To avoid confusion we decided to explain the avail able parameters elsewhere See page 252 Here s how to edit the parameters Press the field of the parameter you wish to change the number of fields and their functions depend on the selected type T1 2 4 Press the button to return to the main page Equalizers for the Keyboard parts The E 80 provides a set of 3 band equalizers that can be set each Keyboard part individually The Mastering Tools section see p 114 contains an additional equal izer that affects all Keyboard parts
451. in internal memory you could use to try out the following Once you start working with your E 80 you will probably copy external Music Styles to the internal memory and establish CUSTOM links to those Note Use the Copy function see p 97 to copy all Styles to the same card or the internal memory 1 Press a button of the STYLE pad to select a Music Style family _ _ STYLE _ LIVE DISCO 8 BEAT 16 BEAT BAND ROCK DANCE CONTEMP BALL JAZZ BOSSA ROOM BLUES 50 s amp 60 s SAMBA LATIN WORLD Its indicator lights and the display looks as follows SE World STYLE ema tun a Western Movie French Java Epic Movie Irish Holiday 1 Southern Twang Holiday 2 SteamtrainCountr Holiday 3 Posaunenpolka PAGES PAGES 3 Press the field of the memory you wish to assign a Style to SITLE bess EDIT CUSTOM Pc 7 empty empty Sapty 4 Press the field Country1 Country2 i 3 or FOUND 553 4 GLOBAL 553 e e 5 Press the or field This is necessary to specify whether you want to link a Style in the internal memory or on a card in the PCMCIA slot E 80 Music Workstation Roland Working with external Styles 6 Press the field that contains the name of the Style 7 you want to assign to the selected CUSTOM mem ory If necessary use the PAGE fields or the dial the DEC INC buttons to select another group of 5 Styles Note If you can t seem to find the Style you w
452. in the chord recognition area of the keyboard If the EASY SETTING button lights this area Is the left half of the keyboard See p 88 for details The E 80 also provides a SYNC STOP button That func tion causes the Arranger to stop playback as soon as you release all keys in the chord recognition area This is great for songs where you need breaks i e one or sev eral beats of silence Selecting other Style divisions You can professionalize your performance with the Arranger by selecting different accompaniment pat terns Here s a quick overview of how the E 80 s Music Styles are structured MAIN VARIATION The simplest of the four basic accom paniment patterns This pattern is ideal for the first verse of a Song MAIN VARIATION A slightly more complex pattern Con Sider using it for the second and third verses MAIN VARIATION This pattern could be used for the first chorus es MAIN VARIATION This is the most complex accompani ment that could be used for the final choruses and or the bridge The numeric button you press flashes until the new pattern is used after which the button lights steadily E 80 Music Workstation Roland Selecting other Style divisions You can use fill ins transitions to go from one MAIN VARIATION pattern to the next by switching on the button before pressing another or the lighting MAIN VARIATION 1 4 button STYLE CONTROL INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START ST
453. ing on the number of lists already present in the selected memory area you may have to use the scroll bar or dial or the DEC INC buttons roe CSI SORRYSEE HEYMAMA SWEETPOT MISREAD ISITCOSI LADY LOVEISON 4 Proceed as follows to edit your Play List Mi Inserting steps To add a step and assign a song to it select the step that should follow it then press the field Example to insert a step before step 04 press the field This takes you to the following display page SONG LIST FEYER iFEVER MID i FORCA IFORCA MID 5 Locate the song you wish to assign to the inserted step e f it is already displayed continue with step 6 below e f it is not yet displayed use the PAGE fields in the lower right of the display to change pages e You can also use the following fields for narrowing down your search if you are overwhelmed by the number of songs and pages you need to scroll and FINDER See page 159 6 Select the song you wish to assign by pressing its field so that it is displayed in orange 7 Press the field T GG W Editing a step You can also decide to assign another song to any step that contains an erroneous reference To do so press the field of the step that needs correcting press and continue with step 5 above W Deleting steps On the PLAY LIST EDIT page see left select the step you wish to delete and press the field All subsequent steps now move
454. ing only if your edit operation should Start after the selected beat TO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 lt last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature In the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat MFROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range This parameter is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER WETO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range Mi Fine tuning the note range Before setting FROM NOTE and possibly TO NOTE it might be a good idea to decide how you want to use the note indications Depending on the option you choose FROM NOTE may not even be available so that setting It beforehand would be a waste of time Only the selected note note name note num ber will change The note can be set using the TO NOTE fi
455. ion intensity Chorus Pre Delay Deviation 0 20 Adjusts the differ ences in Pre Delay between each chorus line there are six of them Chorus Depth Deviation 20 0 20 Adjusts the differ ence in modulation depth between each chorus sound Chorus Pan Deviation 0 20 Adjusts the distribution of the various chorus lines in the stereo image 0 All chorus sounds are in the center 20 Each chorus sound will be spaced at 60 degree intervals relative to the center Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 13 Trem Chorus This is a chorus effect with added Tremolo cyclic modulation of volume Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Tremolo Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Modulation frequency of the tremolo effect Tremolo Separation 0 127 Allows you to set the level of the tremolo effect with respect to the chorus modula tion Tremolo Phase 0 180 deg Spread of the tremolo effect 2 D5 E 80 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 14 Space D T
456. ird party is prohibited by law e Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copy right held by a third party Roland assumes no responsibility what soever with regard to any infringements of third party copyrights arising through your use of this unit e SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corp e Compact Flash and are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation and licensed by CompactFlash association Roland Corporation is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash and CF logo trade marks e All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners ER Panel descriptions Front panel Note You can press and hold most buttons to jump to an associated display page MASTER VOLUME BALANCE EXT SOURCE POWER ON 9 4 POWER ON button Press this button to switch the E 80 on and off If you need to turn off the power completely first turn off the power switch then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Refer to Switching the E 80 on off on p 21 2 MASTER VOLUME knob Use this knob to set the E 80 s global output volume all sections The setting of this knob also determines the volume in the headphones you may have con nected 3 BALANCE knob This knob allows you to set the balance between the Arranger or song parts ACCOMP and the solo sounds KEYBOARD 4 EXT SOURCE knob Use this knob to set the volume of an audio source a s
457. is able the transmission of program change and bank select messages related to User Program selection MIDI RX CHANNEL Use this parameter to assign a MIDI receive channel to the Basic channel If you don t want these messages to be received switch off the field PART SWITCH Whenever you mute or un mute a part on the Mixer pages Keyboard parts or on the STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS VOLUME page your E 80 sends an NRPN message that describes your action You can keep the E 80 from responding to such messages to avoid that external instruments mute its parts USER PRG PC This parameter is used to enable the reception of program change and bank select messages relative to User Program selection E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing MIDI parameters MASTER VOLUME This parameter allows you to enable or disable the reception of Master Volume messages that would change the E 80 s overall volume This is an exclu sive message common to all newer MIDI devices STYLE parameters The STYLE channel is used for receiving program change and bank select messages that select Styles and volume messages that change the Style s vol ume These two message types can only be filtered in the RX column i e you can specify whether or not to receive them sameno Cemi J CERNS Style MIDI TX MIDI RX CHANNEL pm Ea The MIDI address of a Music Style consists of three elements a CCOO number a CC32 number and a pro gram change numb
458. iser not to include the melody in your con version Try to isolate the passages and parts that are really typical of the song Transitions rolls etc should be converted to Fill lns The intro should be converted to an Intro pattern For a really professional result you will also have to take advantage of the E 80 s Style Composer to ensure that your new Style also works for minor and seventh chords See Programming Styles Style Composer on p 201 Though pattern length and memory capacity is no issue try to work in small but meaningful units Here s an example most songs rely on a structure based on 4 measure blocks Converting 6 measures is thus a bit odd though perfectly possible Prepare a simple pattern for MAIN 1 and increas ingly complex accompaniments for the remaining patterns Always set the correct KEY page 199 Only then will the Style really work as expected when used with the E 80 s Arranger Your new Style resides in the E 80 Style RAM mem ory Do not forget to save it before selecting another Style in Arranger mode or switching off the E 80 197 E 80 Music Workstation Using the 16 track Sequencer Commercially available Standard MIDI Files are pro tected by a copyright Please note that the Style Converter should only be used to create Music Styles for private use Roland assumes no responsibility for copyright infringements that may result from the use of the Style Converter Using the Style C
459. ish to assign and if you know it exists in the selected memory area check the FOUND value It should indicate the same figure as the GLOBAL entry You can also use the Finder for locating the desired Style See p 95 for details Note It is perfectly possible to use older Styles with the E 80 They are automatically converted to the new VARIATION 1 4 system Press the field The E 80 returns to the STYLE page The name of the selected Style appears in the field you selected before pressing the button You could now program other assignments if you wanted to Note CUSTOM assignments are stored internally but they are not part of the User Programs Thus you can only program 120 links in all rather than 120 per User Program Note CUSTOM settings reside in a global memory whose con tents are saved together with all User Program Set data Use Save User Program Set on p 227 for saving the settings Selecting CUSTOM Style memories 1 The Style names are important for locating the Styles If you change the name of a Music Style that is refer enced by one of the CUSTOM memories the E 80 no longer finds it Conversely if you have two memory cards that both contain a Style called Reggae even inserting the wrong card would recall a Reggae Style but it might be the wrong one and quite a few other CUSTOM memories might not recall any Style at all because the other names only exist on the othe
460. isplay depending on which MFX processor you wish to edit MSelecting another MFX type and editing it 3 4 5 6 7 The E 80 provides 84 different Multi FX types some of which are combinations of two effects for added flexibility Here is how to select another Multi FX type Press the or OFF field to switch the proces sor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so on the EFFECTS page see above Press the field below MFX AxC where the name of the currently selected type is displayed Select the desired type with the dial or the DECI INC buttons The available types are 1 Thru 2 Stereo EQ 3 Overdrive 4 Distortion 5 Phaser 6 Spectrum 7 Enhancer 8 Auto Wah 9 Rotary 10 Compressor 11 Limiter 12 Hexa Chorus 13 Trem Chorus 14 Space D 15 St Chorus 16 St Flanger 17 Step Flanger 18 St Delay 19 Mod Delay 20 3 Tap Delay 21 4 Tap Delay 22 Time Delay 23 2 Pitch Shifter 24 FBK Pitch 25 Reverb 26 Gate Reverb 27 0D gt Chorus 28 OD gt Flanger 29 OD gt Delay 30 DST Chorus 31 DST gt Flanger 32 DST gt Delay 33 EH gt Chorus 34 EH gt Flanger 35 EH gt Delay 36 Chorus gt DLY 37 Flanger gt DLY 38 CHO gt Flanger 39 CHO Delay 40 Flanger DLY 41 CHO Flanger 42 Isolator 43 Low Boost 44 Super Filter 45 Step Filter 46 Humanizer 47 Speaker Sim 48 Step Phaser 49 MLT Phaser 50 Inf Phaser 51 Ring Mod
461. isplay or rotate the dial to scroll through the list Pressing the dial will select the regis tration in the top line This only works if no registra tion has been selected yet If you select a registration and then change any of its settings like selecting another sound for example pressing the dial recalls the original Music Assis tant settings You can also use the DATA ENTRY a buttons to select a registration among the ones that are cur rently visible in the display the buttons don t allow you to change pages To save time There are other ways of locating the registration you are after As you see there are three button icons NAME ARTIST and GENRE e Press the field to sort the Music Assistant entries alphabetically by musical genre This reshuf fles the list A O 1 2 3 4 e Press the field to sort the Music Assistant entries alphabetically by artist name This reshuffles the list The genre names right column disappear and are replaced by the artists names which are displayed in alphabetical order e Press the field of the registration you want to use e Press the button to start playback of the automatically selected Music Style Using the Finder Yet another way of locating the desired registration goes like this On the Music Assistant page press the field Tae oe el ou on ono 9 Fe Deme P er Press registration name artist name or musical
462. it save it if you re not happy with your part go back to Adding more parts on p 61 In step 3 however press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select Replace Note See p 179 if you want to change just single notes or other aspects of your song which is called editing Saving your song A song you save to becomes a Standard MIDI File that can be played back with the E 80 but also with any other SMF compatible sequencer There are two ways of saving new or edited songs e Via the button and the related menu see p 226 e By pressing the field on the 16 track Sequencer page Note Whenever you leave the 16 track Sequencer page by pressing the button the display shows a Song has been changed message that asks you whether you want to save your changes Press the field and proceed Here we will show you how to save your song using the field 1 On the 16 track Sequencer page press the field The display now responds with o 8 ee Lel 2 ma Dese se 0 eo 2 Specify where you want to save your song e Press the field to select the E 80 s internal memory as target this is a 50MB stor age area similar to a hard disk Insert a floppy disk into the drive and press the field Press the field This option is only available if you insert a memory card into the E 80 s PCMCIA slot If your floppy disk or memory card does not seem to work try formatting i
463. it operation should Start after the selected beat TO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat MIBIAS CPT 4800 4800 This parameter sets the amount by which the duration or gate time of the selected notes is to change The shortest possible GATE TIME value is 1 used for all drum notes so that selecting 1000 for notes with a GATE TIME value of 1 in the specified time range still leaves you with the same value E MAGNIFY 0 200 Use this parameter rather than BIAS to produce propor tional changes to the affected GATE TIME values Values below 100 decrease the duration while any thing above 100 increases it Select 100 if you pre fer to work with the BIAS CPT parameter see above WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data MERGE Use this parameter to combine the data of two tracks i e of all data the two tracks contain
464. it type amp 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp 0 Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range 0 High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 4 Distortion Produces a more intense distortion than the above The parameters are the same as for 3 Overdrive 5 Phaser Adds phase shifted copy to the original sound and modulates it Phaser Manual 100 8000Hz Adjusts the basic fre quency that is modulated by the effect Phaser Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Phaser Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Phaser Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Higher values create a rather more synthetic character Phaser Mix Level 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound with respect to the original signal Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 6 Spectrum Spectrum is a type of filter that modifies the timbre by boost ing or cutting the level at specific frequencies Spectrum 250Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB S
465. ity system SHALES EO lrej5srs Cool Live Band d 92 4 4 Press the field to save your Style see page 207 for details or if you think that is not necessary The MFX settings are not recorded because there is no way of specifying the assignments to the instru ments beforehand This is something you need to do using the Style Makeup Tools See page 141 Starting the Style Composer 1 Press the button The display changes to SPLIT amp TOUCH ATN SETTING FUNCTION MEHU qo GUITAR MODE PE griis pS eo tA STYLE s s COMPOSER CON AL Po FOOT CONTROLLERS LINK K UTILITY O mo e use DATA STORAGE l 2 O 2 2 Press the field 3 SHES GOME O SER Clearing the RAM memory Initialize Style The first thing we need to do is clear the E 80 s Style RAM memory because it is not empty when you select the STYLE COMPOSER Press the field in the right col umn INIAC P SRAN EPL ss ES SETTINGS TEMPO AND TIME SIGNATURE CTRONIC MY yf A The TA Style will be deleted Are you sure Qexecute The warning alerts you to the fact that pressing EXECUTE see below may have disastrous conse quences See Saving your Style on p 207 if you still need to save your previous Style eux If you want the E 80 to select suitable sounds for you press one of the TEMPLATES fields Here is what the options mean
466. ive Memory cards that are not PCMCIA cards can only be Inserted if you use an appropriate adapter available at your computer store See also the precautions on p 12 Internal memory protect switch This switch allows you to lock protect and unlock the internal memory See page 21 VIDEO OUTPUT socket Connect this socket to the appropriate Input of your TV or monitor In that case the lyrics of songs that contain such information and the note information extracted in realtime page 53 will be displayed on screen even if the button does not light in which case the lyrics chords and notes no longer appear in the E 80 s display The VIEWER information see p 56 can also be transmitted to the external screen Note The signal format PAL or NTSC can be set via a MENU function need adapter plugs 1 4 gt RCA Cinch or Roland PJ 1M cables These inputs are only suitable for line level signals Note that they are stereo with a left and right chan nel If you only connect one cable to L or R the signal is only audible on the left or right channel The volume of the signal received via these inputs can be set with the EXT SOURCE knob VOCAL HARMONIST section switch If you connect a microphone to the INPUT socket set this switch to MIC To try out the Vocal Harmonist function for other signals guitar external synthesizers amp modules CDs MDs etc set this switch to LINE Note
467. ive VALUE doesn t allow you to go beyond 1 or 127 There is a reason why 0 is impossible that value is used to indicate the end of a note note off 127 on the other hand is the highest velocity value the MIDI standard can muster Adding a high positive velocity value may thus lead to all notes being played at 127 E MAGNIFY 0 200 This parameter works like a Compander effect a dynam ics processor that simultaneously acts as compressor and expander although it processes MIDI data by selecting a value above 100 you increase the differences between high and low velocity values in the selected range Values below 64 are lowered while values above 64 are increased The result is therefore that the difference between pianissimo and fortissimo becomes far more pro nounced MAGNIFY values below 100 have the opposite effect they push all velocity towards the imaginary center of 64 thus reducing differences in playing dynamics MFROM NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the note or lower limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range It is not displayed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tuning the setting range on p 182 for details about the six button icons WTO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range W EXECUTE Press this
468. jor minor or 7th E DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 E FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signature CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 80 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should start after the selected beat TO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern This is where you specify the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 lt number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signature CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat Note If you only need to edit one event or message we recommend using the STYLE MICRO EDIT page page 220 MEDATA TYPE Allows you to sel
469. k WRITE you can save data to the disk Protect tab PROTECT you cannot save data e Disks containing important performance data for this instru ment should always be locked have their write protect tab slid to the PROTECT position before you insert them into the drive of another device e The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk If the label comes loose while the disk is in the drive it may be difficult to remove the disk e Put the disk back into its case for storage Memory Backup e f the power to this unit is not switched on for an extended period of time the contents of memory will be lost and the unit will revert to its factory defaults To avoid the loss of important data that has been placed in memory a backup of your data should be periodically created see p 234 Before using memory cards e Some data cards are equipped with a PROTECT switch which when turned on protects your data from accidental erasure The E 80 also has such a switch It is recommended that the switch be kept at the ON position and switched to OFF only at the times you wish to write new data onto the card ES ees SSO I On gt Off e This unit s memory card slot accepts CompactFlash and Smart Media 3 3V memory cards Microdrive storage media are com patible You need a commercially available adapter plug for SmartMedia cards e Carefully insert th
470. ks like a drum machine because It uses accompa niment patterns Unlike a drum machine however you can easily select the desired pattern while playing So you do not need to program the order in which you intend to use the patterns Furthermore the Arranger not only provides a rhythm section but also chords gui tar and synthesizer riffs and so on The accompani ment can be transposed in realtime All you have to do is play a different chord usually with your left hand You can add vocals and harmonies to your music using the Vocal Harmonist function page 46 3 Recorder section That s how it s called on the front panel so we ll stick to it This section actually encompasses a 16 track sequencer a Straightforward MIDI recording function and a very sophisticated Standard MIDI File player with a host of all realtime control functions Ee Playing to an automatic accompa niment Let us begin with the automatic accompaniment func tion which is called Arranger and often referred to as Style in the display and on the front panel The Arranger is an interactive playback sequencer that provides the accompaniments These accompaniments are called Music Styles because the musical phrases patterns they play concentrate on a given musical genre Rock Pop Dance Waltz etc The Arranger allows you to transpose the melodic accompaniment parts bass piano guitar etc simply by playing chords In m
471. kstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters High Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the high range flanger sound High Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the high range flanger sound that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase High Step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the high step rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value High Step Rate Hz 0 10 20 00Hz Rate at which the Steps will cycle for the high range flanger sound High Step Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 64 VS Overdrive This is an overdrive that provides heavy distortion Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the vol ume Tone 0 127 Sound quality of the Overdrive effect Amplifier Sw Off On Turns the Amp Simulator on off Amplifier Type Small Built In 2 Stack 3 Stack Type of guitar amp SMALL small amp BUILT IN single unit type amp 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp EQ Low Gain
472. l SRX series expansion board you installed this parameter may affect other aspects We therefore suggest you experiment with the parameter to find out how it affects the sound W Modulation Vibrato Vibrato is an effect created by modulating the pitch Pitch modulation adds a pleasant wobble to the notes you play Use the following three parameters If you think the part in question has too much or could use a little more vibrato Note Some sounds already contain natural sampled vibrato whose depth or speed cannot be changed DELAY 64 63 This parameter adjusts the time required for the vibrato effect to begin Positive set tings increase the time before vibrato will begin and negative settings shorten the time DEPTH 64 63 This parameter adjusts the intensity of the pitch modulation Positive settings mean that the wobble becomes more prominent while negative settings make it shallower RATE 64 63 This parameter adjusts the speed of the pitch modulation Positive settings make the preset pitch modulation faster and negative settings make it Slower WETVF TVA ENV elope The volume of an instrument changes over time from the moment the note begins to sound to when it disappears This change can be indicated on a graph as shown in the display The envelope shape Is unique to each instrument and Is an important ele ment in how we distinguish the sounds we hear The envelop
473. l User Programs Selecting another User Program is therefore not enough to reconfigure the FC 7 The assignments can however be saved along with all User Programs using Save User Program Set on p 227 1 Press the button z DON X e eero e sesmese The display changes to MEWN 1 GUITAR K TUNING e UITART D BEAM REN spiite Pai OCAL r X TOUCH f HARMONIST AB ARRANGER gt STYLE is mae SETTING COMPOSER STEE W irunction Ae HAND MIDI a CONTROLLERS AVA TONE am FOOT e lt USB DATA AN EDIT CONTROLLERS STORAGE 2 Press the field followed by the field EVO NOLES Note The assigned functions apply to the E 80 as a whole and are not written to individual User Programs 3 Press the pedal field of the footswitch you wish to assign another function to Example to change the assignment of the second pedal from the right press the last but one pedal field E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using optional footswitches 4 Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to select the desired function Start Stop Intro Variat 1 Variat 2 Variat 3 Variat 4 Ending These are the default functions of the FC 7 s footswitches 1 7 They duplicate the functions of the STYLE CONTROL buttons MBass KBD Arranger Allows you to set the Arranger Chord parameter to Off chord recognition as well as ABS recognition off see p 89 and at the same time sel
474. land AG Landstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4452 Itingen SWITZERLAND TEL 061 927 8383 UKRAINE TIC TAC Mira Str 19 108 P O Box 180 295400 Munkachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 702701 BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 16 Bab Al Bahrain Avenue P O Box 247 Manama 304 State of BAHRAIN TEL 17 211 005 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha aliya Hashnya St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN MUSIC HOUSE CO LTD FREDDY FOR MUSIC P O Box 922846 Amman 11192 JORDAN TEL 06 5692696 KUWAIT EASA HUSAIN AL YOUSIFI amp SONS CO Abdullah Salem Street Safat KUWAIT TEL 243 6399 LEBANON Chahine S A L Gerge Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 1441 OMAN TALENTZ CENTRE L L C Malatan House No 1 Al Noor Street Ruwi SULTANATE OF OMAN TEL 2478 3443 QATAR Al Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road Aldossary Bldg 1st Floor Alkhobar SAUDI ARABIA P O Box 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Rawda Ab
475. last One Touch memory you selected is indicated by means of an asterisk Button icons in the HOLD column whose indicator lights refer to settings that are not updated TEMPO The preset tempo of the selected Music Style KBD PART The current status of the Keyboard parts UP1 2 3 LW1 2 and MBS The on off status of the Key board parts can be saved to a One Touch memory Fur thermore the Split and Upper 3 Split settings no longer change INTRO ENDING The INTRO or ENDING pattern is no longer activated when you select Styles even if its on status has been saved to a One Touch registration MAIN VAR When you select another Style the E 80 no longer loads the memorized MAIN VARIATION 1 lt 4 pattern but goes on using the last pattern you selected Press the field to switch on all HOLD options Press to switch all options off Note The One Touch function Is switched off whenever you select a User Program Note The SYNC page 83 and buttons are not automatically switched on when you select a One Touch mem ory or Music Style while Arranger playback is stopped 3 Press the button to return to the main page Programming your own One Touch settings WRITE The E 80 allows you to save your own ONE TOUCH set tings for the selected Style This may come in handy for CUSTOM Styles see page 92 for which there are no presets These customized One Touch settings are stored within the Styles thems
476. lay to select another preset Press page 1 to return to the original 2 Press the UTILITY then the field orchestration 4 If none of the displayed presets appeal to you use the PAGE fields at the right to jump to PLAYER FEEDBACK KEYBOARD another page with different presets 5 If you like the new version better than the original STE TREE one press the field to save the Style to the eG internal memory a memory card or floppy disk see p 86 Note The COVER information is part of the data only the E 80 understands Note You can also modify the COVER settings yourself see p 140 3 Press the field to switch it off If it is on the E 80 assigns a suitable MELODY INTELLIGENCE type to each Style you select 4 Press the button to return to the main page SoS E 80 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions Mi Saved Version The STYLE COVER page contains a field that works as follows There can be three different versions of each Style 1 Led The original Style without COVER settings This version can be selected by pressing the field on page 1 The same Style that uses one of the COVER presets This version can be saved using the field If you save this version the Style will use the COVER settings whenever you select it using the standard procedure see p 27 or the Style Finder see p 95 A Style saved with the field which you recall and then alter by sele
477. layed because it is impossible to tell whether those are minor or major chords Note You can also add Lyrics data to songs that do not yet contain them See page 169 for details 4 Press the button if the lyrics are difficult to read Press ZOOM to select the normal size again Mi Changing the color of the lyrics Apart from enlarging the lyrics see above the E 80 also allows you to set the background color and the color of the lyrics themselves if you don t feel com fortable with the black on white system that is used by default 1 Press the field on the page shown above LYRICS BACKGROUND Ge Gu ap as cp il COLOUR ga gu 2 Proceed as follows You may first want to try one of the COLOR PRESET fields 1 6 If none of the factory settings is to your liking or if you want to make minor correc tions press one of the knobs red green or blue in the LYRICS column and use the dial to increase or decrease the value The changes are reflected in the small display next to the COLOR PRESET button icons The system used here corresponds to the RGB color mixing system whereby the value 255 for all three knobs yields the color white while 0 for all three corresponds to black If you have ever worked with a graphic program this concept may be familiar to you Press one of the knobs red green or blue in the BACKGROUND column and use the dial to increase or decrease the value COLOUR
478. layed when you select EQUAL UNEQUAL HIGHER or LOWER See also Fine tuning the note range on p 214 WTO NOTE 0 C 127 G9 This parameter allows you to set the upper limit of the note range to be modified within the specified FROM TO time range W EXECUTE Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data QUAL HIGHER ow CHANGE VELO a eee ree eee ered ween cere Ga eae The CHANGE VELO function allows you to modify the dynamics called velocity of a track or excerpt See p 185 for details Only note events can be changed MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks EMODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th W DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 1 3 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 EFROM TO FROM refers to the position where the edit operation is to begin That position is specified as a Bar Beat CPT cluster TO designates the position where the edit operation is to end Bar Beat CPT See page 213 for details IBIAS 99 99 The BIAS parameter allows you to specify by how much the velocity values should change Select a positive value to increase the velocity the value is added to the velocity value of the affected notes or a negative value to decrease the velocity values that valu
479. ld FROM 7 Start by specifying the position of the first event or note to be copied Press the BAR and fields in the FROM row and use the dial or the DEC buttons to set the position of the starting point By default the FROM parameters are set to Bar 1 Beat 1 CPT 0 ETO 8 The TO position indicates the end of the excerpt to be copied By default the TO values are set to Include the entire track Press the BAR and fields and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired position To copy an entire bar select the beginning of the fol lowing bar Example to copy bars 1 4 specify FROM 1 1 0 TO 5 1 0 9 Press to listen to the selected excerpt 10 Press the field STYLE TRACK EDIT acme bmn kes Mill cs best SSRIS etter Simnar crocx enera sanar INTO Style Cool Live Band CE WECOPY MODE Copying can be carried out in one of two modes Replace The data in the selected range of the source track overwrite the destination track Mix The data in the selected range of the source track are added to the data on the destination track In either case the length of the destination track may change to include all data of the source track Note If the Style RAM memory already contains new data save it before copying The E 80 has no Undo function Saving a Style before copying allows you to revert to the previous ver sion if something goes wrong
480. ld is only displayed if there are more than five pages Other Tone families have fewer than five pages This depends entirely on the Tone family you select Press the field of the desired sound Press the button to return to the main page Next time you select this TONE family the E 80 auto matically jumps to the page that contains the last sound you selected and activates it About the E 80 s sounds Try playing the Tones you select at different velocities strengths to discover the rich nuances that can be obtained See page 68 for details about how to set the velocity sensitivity There is a JazzScat sound VOCAL family for exam ple with three dynamic levels that allow you to sound Doo Bub or Daow simply by hitting the keys softer or harder Various guitar Tones provide hammering on bending sounds when you strike the keys as hard as you can Transposing the keyboard to the lowest octave using the OCTAVE parameter sometimes allows you to play some typical noises scraping over the strings hitting the body of an acoustic guitar etc W Choosing the sound selection system Sound Set 1 Mode The Roland engineers figured that you might feel overwhelmed by the number of Tones available in each TONE family That is why the E 80 does not dis play all the sounds it contains when you switch it on for the first time This restricted display mode is called BEST SELECTION In this mode onl
481. le Composer 0005 211 SIE SONG ner reeeceeaentsierss 116 TIME ou ennai ad 123 Vocal Harmonist 122 123 Revolving BASS 2222240202208 77 83 ROWING coccnat erann 43 PI eean arrar 88 Rise TIME nnn unnan aaaea 48 VOCE PA c escssrritediraaiai 151 152 FOIE EEE 75 91 Fill value anaana anaana 91 TEMPO errereen ee naaes 91 I AEE LEE EEEE LEET 91 Ritardando 0 0 e eee 91 RND Tuning 00 eee 153 155 ROOM nananana 109 116 123 147 KE EELEE REE E E EE 74 SP EEEE SE EEEE EEEE EEEE 77 COW esl ee 71 76 Sound nonon nunnana 35 Ea r teeneceenaceenecene 239 240 EVENT lt seeeeeseueeuseereeceeds 240 o e is doeenacaaccnsansaanessees 240 Velocity 0 0 ccc cece eee 242 S Save WDE SG lec ache aieane anaes ees 227 Music Assistant 000 138 Play a E EIEEE 165 SONG cece s cece eee eeeee 178 227 GEO EEEE EET 228 Style Song xcccecanneenanersasate 148 User Program Set occiiriccrissa 227 Saved Version 0 00 eee 86 Saving MDS Ob sunnan 243 OMG TOUC esda a a 87 ae EEEF EEE EEEEEREEEEE ETE OEN 71 ee eee TETEE 79 SCO 6 sas e4555051555155aden0eeness 54 E sak ceaeenaeeae aes enna 73 Search ONY nics uaaaacate s 41 96 128 160 SELEC MIDI ern 238 De CN Cra sac1ekeecaennacnar es 62 173 Setup Electric Acoustic 37 Merasim erene N 240 l6 MaKe 188 et EEEE 218 E EET TTT EEEE 239 Short Delay 0 cece eee 147 DUF VB s
482. le negative settings make it shallower VB DELAY This parameter adjusts the time required for the vibrato effect to begin Positive settings increase the time before vibrato will begin and negative settings Shorten the time If necessary press the field to save your set tings page 148 SOUND EDIT for Drum Sets If the instrument icon to the left of the sound name depicts a drum kit the page selected with looks as follows Here you can edit the Drum Set as a whole via PRIZE Rae o a ie oy 63 Eha E KAAWELIP TOI E OE oes e 2 iad NIG Mee Ur aiia yago BE Hi pau ror FERC ROR CUTOFF Bae ponas JUMP TO 0 i sstnote 44 0 4 v KIT Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC IINC buttons to set the desired value You can also press the dial and use the numeric pad Note The following parameters are not available for SRX Drum Sets you may have assigned CUTOFF Allows you to make the Drum Set all instru ments brighter positive values or darker negative val ues The further this value is set in the negative direc tion the fewer overtones will be allowed to pass and the sound will become softer darker RESO This parameter allows you to add a synthetic character to your Drum Sets choose a positive value or to make it sound more natural E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the Makeup Tools e Use the
483. lear to you So we won t explain them Just one note entered also includes the bank select messages CCO0 and CC32 that are used for selecting sounds See page 222 for the message e Press to switch on all button icons or to switch them all off in which case the STYLE MICRO EDIT list only contains the End of Data message e Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes i P40 NUMERIC PAD W General procedure To change information already available on the e Press the A field to increase or selected track proceed as follows decrease the current value by 10 1 Set TRACK MODE and DIVISION by pressing the a OEIC rE Vat corresponding fields and using the a l l Press to close the numeric pad window with dial or the DEC IINC buttons HIN out changing the value 6 Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the next pl value and change it 7 When you re done press the field to return to the STYLE COMPOSER page then save your Style 0 CC 0 Bank Select MSB 0 CC 32 Bank Select LSB 01 000 Program Change 01 000 CC 10 Pan 0 0 0 CC 11 Expression CC 31 Reverb 93 Chorus 1 pe 000 Note 70 Bb4 37 i 01 060 Mote 59 B 3 48 1 Bisa Note Sa T k i The parameters you can change are Note and velocity messages These messages always come in pairs The first value Note Number 127 G9 refers to the note itself and the second On Velocity 127
484. lines The size of your pictures must be 320 x 240 pixels Though you can use multiples of these values e g 640 x 480 that usually produces files that are too big for the E 80 Only pictures with a size up to 500KB can be used On the other hand all pictures you import are scaled to the 320 x 240 pixel format which may lead to funny ugly distortions when your pictures are say 240 x 240 pixels You can solve possible distortion problems by providing a 320 x 240 background and put the picture on top of it Feel free to add text to your pictures but be sure to do so in your graphic software for serious or funny remarks etc 2 Convert your picture to RGB colors and save it as omp file jpg eps etc are not accepted The omp files may use 1 bit but that s black and white or 4 24 bits see the manual of your graphic software for details If you plan to use the PAGE TURNER function for automated slideshows name your files in such a way that they can be selected in the correct sequence 3G ter and end with at least one number before the mp extension The characters specify the group and the figures the sequential order for the PAGE TURNER function To have three party pictures displayed sequentially for instance name them Party01 omp PartyO2 omp and PartyO3 omp Be careful to avoid spelling mistakes a file called Praty04 does not belong to the same group and therefore ends the Party
485. ll be based on those notes In all other cases the harmonies are generated in realtime If you stop song playback and play chords on the keyboard the note information thus generated is used for the harmony pitches Use the dial to select another setting The possibilities are Auto The E 80 uses one of the following systems depending on what note information is avail able Keyboard Only notes played on the keyboard will be All used for specifying harmony pitches Keyboard Only notes played to the left of the split point Left page 65 will be used for specifying harmony pitches Keyboard Only notes played to the right of the split Right point page 65 will be used for specifying harmony pitches Song The note information contained in the song you are playing back is used Not convinced so far Just in case you are a little bit disappointed by the Vocal Harmonist function here are some tips and a bonus Use it with song backing The Harmonist sounds most convincing when used during song playback Please bear in mind that trans forming your voice in realtime requires quite a few calculations and that the human voice Is one of the most difficult signal sources to recreate with vary Fo ing pitches The Vocal Harmonist was fine tuned to blend in with Standard MIDI File playback and that s when it sounds most real Try it out it works Check the following Gender Voice Input 1 Press
486. ll not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada
487. ll up the following page SPLE SONS Seraor MASTERING TOOLS STYLE SONG Equalizer COMPRESSOR OFF EDIT OFF EDIT On this page you can switch the REVERB CHORUS and or three effects processors off by pressing the button icon to the right of their displays If you only need to select another effect type press the REVERB CHORUS or an MFX AC display and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the algorithm If you also need to change cer tain aspects of that effect Press the button icon next to the STYLE SONG REVERB CHORUS or MFX display Important remark The effects settings discussed below are primarily intended for real time changes of the selected Style or song They are not saved not even to a User Pro gram These effects are linked to the MAKEUP TOOLS envi ronment see p 140 which explains why we are no longer talking about parts but rather about instru ments Consider them your control room like in a recording studio where you can prepare all settings that allow the musicians to feel comfortable and sound truly awesome When you select a different Music Style or song the changes made here are lost You can however save them thus burning them into the Style or song by pressing the button and the field on the page that appears then see p 148 The parameters shown here refer to the last section song or Style you used A song s effec
488. lody second and third voice to your solos or melodies see p 84 V LINK button Press this button to take advantage of the E 80 s V LINK functionality for controlling video material via certain performance functions and the right most keys on the E 80 s keyboard By using V LINK com patible video equipment visual effects can be easily linked to and made part of the expressive elements of a performance By connecting the E 80 to an optional Edirol DV 7PR or V 4 you can switch images in synchronization with music or use the E 80 s per formance functions or right most keys to switch clips control playback speed etc Gi Roland E 80 Music Workstation Roland Front panel a HATTA BENDER MODULATION lever When pushed towards the back of the E 80 this lever will add modulation to the notes of the Keyboard parts you are playing at that time Move it to the left or right to temporarily lower or increase the pitch of the Keyboard part notes you are playing For the HARMONIC BAR sounds and the sounds of the TONE family you can use the Modulation axis to alternate between the fast and slow Rotary speeds Floppy disk drive This is where you can insert 2DD or 2HD floppy disks for external storage of your Music Styles Recorder songs and MIDI Sets Press the eject button to remove the disk from the drive Note Do not remove the floppy disk while the E 80 accesses the disk to load save data etc Doing so may damage both the f
489. loed track will be audible when you recall the User Pro gram Use the assignable sliders below the display to set the volume of the Style parts See Arranger parts on p 82 for a description of the Style parts Use the fields to mute Style parts you do not need These settings can saved to a User Program see p 125 Note You can also use the MAKEUP TOOLS parameter for more detailed Style mixing functions see p 140 TOS Editing the Keyboard effects processors After setting the above parameters you may find that even sensible Reverb Chorus settings for the Keyboard parts do not yield the expected result In that case you should edit the Reverb and Chorus parameters by pressing the button once or twice to call up the following page EFFECTS MFX PART EDIT ASSIGN J k ROAA ic REVERE CHORUS LOE E Lone S L COMPRESSOR OFF EDIT Gem On this page you can switch the REVERB CHORUS and MFX processors on and off by pressing their button icons to the right of their display If you only need another reverb type press the REVERB display and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select it If you also need to change certain aspects of that effect Reverb for Keyboard parts 1 Press the KEYBOARD REVERB field to access the Reverb parameters The display changes to KEV BOAnD KEV EKG REVERE LEVER PARAMETER EA Ora a 2 Press the or OFF field
490. loppy disk and the drive s head 69 PHONES 1 amp 2 sockets This is where you can connect two pairs of optional headphones Roland RH 25 RH 50 RH 200 or RH 300 SPEAKER OFF switch This switch allows you to switch off the internal Speakers in which case the indicator lights That may prove handy when the E 80 is connected to an exter nal sound system and should not use its internal amplification system Note that connecting a pair of headphones has the same effect as activating SPEAKER OFF 17 E 80 Music Workstation Panel descriptions Rear panel left side FC7 PEDAL PEDAL MIDI HOLD SWITCH EXPRESSION THRU OUT e e 1 FC7 PEDAL socket This is where you connect an optional FC 7 foot switch unit that allows you to start stop and select Style divisions by foot The functions of this foot switch unit are programmable and apply to the entire E 80 PEDAL HOLD socket An optional DP 2 DP 6 or BOSS FS 5U footswitch connected to this socket can be used for holding the Keyboard part notes The Melody Intell part can also be sustained in this way This function is also referred to as Sustain or Damper PEDAL SWITCH socket Connecting an optional DP 2 DP 6 or FS 5U to this socket allows you to control an assignable function by foot PEDAL EXPRESSION socket Connect an optional EV 5 EV 7 or BOSS FV 300L expression pedal to this socket to control the volume of one or several parts or a
491. low F 5 This key yields the same effect as the C 4 in the ARPEGGIO area Down fast mute knock G5 Here is a more elabo rate technique especially suited for acoustic guitars a downward strum that is muted almost instantly and accompanied by a knocking sound Up slow Ab5 This is a slow upward strum Down slow mute A5 Here s a slightly slower down ward strum that is muted amp Down fast 4 4 up fast mute 4 Bb5 Here again is a two way technique This one however only uses the highest 4 strings Power chords 3 B5 This pattern is intended for elec tric guitar sounds usually also with some distortion Only the lowest 3 strings are played Down fast 4 C6 Here s another downward strum that only uses the highest 4 strings amp Down fast 4 4 up fast 4 C 6 Again a combined strumming pattern Here too only the highest 4 strings are used Up fast 4 D6 An upward strum based on 4 strings amp Down fast mute 4 4 up fast 4 Eb6 Again 4 sim ulated strings that are strummed in two directions The downward strum is muted amp Down fast 4 4 up fast mute 4 E6 This is the opposite of the previous pattern here the fast upward strum is muted Down fast mute F6 And finally a one way pattern that produces a fast downward strum which is muted Playing question and answer phrases It is also possible to temporarily remove the Guitar function from the keyboa
492. ly refers to the Music Assistant entry and has no effect on the underlying User Program whose name does not change e Press the EXECUTE field to confirm the new name T3383 Saving a Music Assistant entry The SAVE function on the MUSIC ASSISTANT LIST page does two things at once e t gathers the settings of all parameters that make up the E 80 s current registration and saves them e t creates a new User Program and gives it the same name or modifies the existing User Program to which the Music Assistant entry is referring This depends on the name you enter Even though the display page Is very similar to the RENAME page see above it thus serves an altogether different purpose This is useful for the following suppose you started out with a Music Assistant registration and then switched on the UP2 part changed the mixer settings and selected a different Music Style If you like the new ver sion better you probably want to update the old ver sion Hence the SAVE function 1 On the MUSIC ASSISTANT LIST page press the field MUSIiG ASSISTANT SAVE iy ek Go ARTIST j a GENRE nmmn 2 Press the NAME ARTIST or GENRE field and enter the desired characters 3 4 5 See Entering names on p 52 The field allows you to switch between uppercase and lowercase characters Enter names for the remaining entries if you like Press the field to save the settings If you are sa
493. ly similar in nature however e On the above display page select the AccDrums track e Select the Division whose settings you wish to change and possibly also all clones page 204 e Press the field and use the DEC INC buttons to select Mix Let us assume that your track already contains data e Press the field and select the drum sound whose pitch you want to change with the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field and use the dial to set the desired pitch 64 63 You can play on the keyboard to listen to the result e Press the button to start recording e Press again after the first or second beat but wait until the count in if any finished Expression Panpot Reverb Chorus Setting or modifying the Expression Panpot Reverb Send and Chorus Send parameters is similar to assigning sounds to existing tracks 1 Stop playback of your Style if it is running 2 Press the field on the STYLE COMPOSER page Cool Live Band MUTE ues d Y POP1 LIDE O Music Workstation Roland Editing Styles on the fly via additional recordings The display changes to SIPALS Wiese Cool Live Band feens 0007 1 meas 0001 1 J 92 4 4 EXPRESSION REVERB SEND PANPOT a CHORUS SEND 3 Select the track by pressing its line in the table The name of that track appears on a yellow back ground Select the MODE and DIVISION whose settings you want to change Press the field of the parameters
494. m while the Cutoff frequency can be controlled between O no change and 63 maximum increase This allows you to create some nifty filter effects that are particularly useful for Dance Techno music When you move your hand outside the D Beam s range both Reso nance and IVF Cutoff return to their original values O no change Note If TVF Cutoff is already set to 63 you cannot increase it using the D Beam Controller In that case the fol lowing option is probably more useful Also note that some Tones already use the highest possible TVF Cutoff value by default in which case you cannot add more overtones by opening the filter even further Cut amp Reso Downe Only for Upper1 2 and or 3 By moving your hand over the D Beam you can vary the current TVF Cutoff value see also p 144 of the Upper1 2 3 part The Resonance parameter will be set to 63 maximum while the Cutoff frequency can be con trolled between 0 no change and 64 lowest possi ble TVF Cutoff setting When you move your hand out side the D Beam s range both Resonance and IVF Cutoff return to their original values O no change Note The TVF Cutoff frequency cannot be lowered if TVF Cutoff is already set to 64 Arpeggio Oct 1 2 3 By moving your hand over the D Beam you cause the D Beam part to play arpeggios bro ken chords based on the notes extracted from the cur rent song Depending on the setting you select here
495. mable parameters The names of these types STUDIO CHURCH are probably self explanatory You may notice that the reverb character changes as you Select different types e Press the field of the parameter you wish to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons E 80 Music Workstation Roland Mixing Vocal Harmonist signals The three knob icons allow you to alter the selected reverb type WALL TYPE Allows you to specify the surface of the walls in the simulated location This parameter deter mines the brightness and liveness of the effect Car pet Wood Brick Concrete Marble REVERB SEND This parameter reflects the setting on the VOCAL EFFECT page It was provided so that you do not need to switch pages while editing the Reverb pro cessor REVERB TIME Allows you to set the length duration of the reverb effect if you do not agree with the pre setting W Reverb for HARMONY EFFECT MOEN pleo OICE F EFFECT ONY EFFECT VOIC HARBN WALL TYPE gt p haamau lasann i REVERB SEND REVERB TIME Tam gam om Except for the presets this processor works exactly like its VOICE namesake Delay W Delay for VOICE EFFECT VO GAIIHARMONISI VOICE EFFECT HARMONY EFFECT WALL TYPE Ter cr pina femal bbs DELAY SEND DELAYTIME fovea ser Ga QE G m e Press the field of the delay type you wish to use Note The preset you choose affects the setti
496. markers the indica tors of the MARK amp JUMP buttons light For songs that do not contain these indications the indicators remain dark Editing and programming MARK JUMP locations can be carried out as follows 1 Press and hold a MARK JUMP button 1 4 MARK MP amp JU 1 2 3 4 Press whichever button you like The display changes to rN Geld fo FADE METRO IN OUT E NOME 2 Press the field that corresponds to the MARK JUMP button for which you wish to program a different location 1 4 The following can be done both during playback and while it is stopped 3 Do one of the following e Start song playback and press the field This inserts the number of the current measure in the field that lights _or e Stop playback Press the dial and use the on screen numeric keypad to enter the desired bar number Press the field of the numeric pad to dispose of the last number you entered Example if you wanted to enter 14 and then notice that you pressed the 4 field twice 144 press to get rid of the second 4 You can also use the dial or the DEC buttons As soon as you enter a new value an message appears next to the memory number e Press the field to return to the previous page e Press the field to confirm your set ting The message disappears Repeat steps 2 3 to program new locations for the remaining MARK JUMP buttons 4 Press the field to clear the measure
497. mation is based on search criteria that need to be added to Style files By default Style files do not contain them Options After pressing the FINDER button the display looks as follows LI Paa The field in the lower left corner provides access to a display page where you can add database information This also works for Styles that already contain entries you wish to modify r i e First select the Style whose database information you wish to change or edit by pressing its field 2 Press the field mE meene SO E Now do one of the following M Rename This function allows you to change or supply the STYLE NAME COUNTRY and or GENRE information of the selected Style the TEMPO value is fixed but could be changed using a STYLE COMPOSER function p 212 e Press the STYLE NAME COUNTRY or GENRE field and enter the desired characters see p 52 Note If you select a Style on floppy disk only the STYLE NAME and FILE NAME can be edited e Press the field Delete This function allows you to delete the selected Style from the internal memory a memory card or floppy disk You should use this as sparsely as possible and probably never for the internal memory Once a Style is gone there is indeed no way to restore it e Press the field The following question is dis played SIVLE OPTIONS 4 This File will be DELETED from Memory Card COPY Style
498. me from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Step Rate 0 10 20 0Hz note Rate period of pitch change Flanger Phase 0 180deg Spatial spread of the sound 0 Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 18 St Delay Delay is an effect that allows you repeat the input signal thus creating echoes repetition Delay FBK Mode Normal Cross Select the way in which delay sound is fed back into the effect NORMAL The left delay sound will be fed back into the left delay and the right delay sound into the right delay CROSS The left delay sound will be fed back into the right delay and the right delay sound into the left delay Delay Left 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay Right 0 0 500 0ms Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard FBK Phase Left Normal Invert Select the phase of the left delay sound NORM
499. mean record the major pattern and copy it to all MAIN Divisions Thus with one recording you will obtain 3 Major minor 7th x 4 MAIN 1 2 3 4 12 identical drum patterns l ccompi REC DIVISION MODE 204 Tone selection Another important aspect is sound selection because the addresses of the sounds and Drum Set you select are recorded at the beginning of each division 12 Press the field and select a Drum Set SE Piano Keyboard E sees soes lIPPERI Fl EPiano2 Vintage EP1 Pro Stagel Wurly 1 Phase EP Yintage EP2 Clav 1 Stage Harpsichord1 PAGE4 PAGES Press a TONE button on the front panel and press the field of the desired sound If you don t like it press another field If you are still not happy with the Tone use the PAGE 1 PAGE 5 and gt fields to select the corre sponding page if available Note The sounds are not available for Style tracks The AccDrums track can only use Drum Sets so that only the button of the TONE pad is available Play a few notes on the keyboard to check whether the sounds of the selected Drum Set are suitable for the accompaniment you are going to record Try other Drum Sets until you find the one that sounds right Note See Drum Instrument amp Pitch on p 211 for details abut the NRPN DRUM and PITCH parameters These are only available for ADrum tracks Note You can select sounds of an SRX series expansion board for any
500. mount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Modulation Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modula tion speed Modulation Depth 0 127 Adjust the depth of the modulation Modulation Phase 0 180 deg Adjust the spatial spread of the sound EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 20 3 Tap Delay The Triple Tap Delay produces three delay sounds center left and right Delay Left 200 1000ms note Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay Right 200 1000ms note Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard Delay Center 200 1000ms note Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when the center delay sound Is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect i
501. mp drop them over the Put New User Programs Here folder To copy User Programs from your computer to the E 80 and immediately create associated Music Assis tant entries drag amp drop them over the Put New Music Assistants Here folder That folder is not available on memory cards because Music Assistant entries must always reside in the E 80 s internal memory Copy the desired text and BMP files from the Text folder to your computer s hard disk and vice versa using drag amp drop Note Never ever remove or rename files via USB use only the E 80 s functions to this effect E 80 Music Workstation Roland Import User Program function While data are being transferred the E 80 s display looks as follows and all buttons are locked USs DAA STOHAG PC lt gt INTERNAL MEMORY WRITING JLL 2 i CONNECTED ef oisconnect Note Never switch off the E 80 while this message is dis played because doing so would damage all data in the selected memory area Note Never sever the USB connection while the red WRITING message is displayed the message shown on the computer screen may disappear earlier but should not be trusted in this case Doing so would damage all data in the selected memory area Cautions regarding folders and files e Only the following types of files may be transferred between the E 80 and your computer Standard MIDI Files MID Song files wi
502. mposer INSERT SVE TRACK EDIT be eaaa etl f ar emam ar uee al INSERT allows you to insert space and shift data that lie behind the FROM position further towards the end of the track this is the exact opposite of DELETE The empty measures you create can be filled using the COPY function or by recording new phrases in that area Note This function provides no TO pointer Instead you have to specify the length of the insert using the FOR values MTRACK ADrums Acc6 ALL Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks EMODE Allows you to select the Mode to be edited Major minor or 7th WE DIVISION Use this parameter to select the Division you want to edit Intro 1 4 Main 1 4 Fill Dwn 13 Fill Up 1 3 End 1 4 FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or pattern Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of selectable beats depends on the selected time signature CPT 1 119 Refers to the starting CPT position CPT is short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 80 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should Start after the selected beat EFOR Specifies how many bars beats
503. n icon once or twice to select the memory area INT MEMORY The E 80 s internal memory area FLOPPY DISK The floppy disk in the E 80 s drive Do not forget to insert it before selecting this option EXT MEMORY The memory card in the E 80 s PCMCIA Slot Do not forget to insert it into the Slot before selecting this option Now specify the target you wish to copy the selected Style s to Press the button icon once or twice to select the memory area If the name of the Style you want to copy to Is already displayed press its line You can also select several Styles In our example Shuffle and Slow Rock 2 have been selected To display the next 5 files press the field in the lower right corner or use the dial You can press the field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a pre vious group of 5 Styles press or use the dial To copy all Styles that are currently displayed on all available pages from the FROM to the TO area press the field Note If the target media memory card or floppy disk is not formatted a message will be displayed that allows you to for mat it before the Styles are copied If you chose EXT MEMORY or FLOPPY DISK disk for TO disable the card s disk s write protection and insert it into the PCMCIA slot or disk drive To disable the write protection of a floppy disk close the little window see p 11 See the owner s man ual of
504. n start playback This mutes all other tracks while the selected track is flagged with an S Press the field again to switch off the func tion of the same name Press the field to jump to the following page SEGON VERTER 4 E PIANO 1 4 ORGAN 2 7 J ORCHESTRAHIT 4 CLEAN GT 3 i To Ea Ea Cool Live Band 4 4 F INITIALIZE J a STYLE H 7 8 9 Here you can listen to the selected tracks specify which excerpt should be extracted and set the pat terns that should contain the selected data The most logical order for proceeding Is as follows Press the RECORDER button followed by to start song playback and are also available for rewinding and fast forwarding While listening to the song press the field at the beginning of first measure to be con verted and when the E 80 reaches the last measure you need Alternatively you can stop playback press the FROM or B display field and enter the measure num ber with the dial or the DEC INC buttons Stop playback by pressing PLAY STOP gt m 10 Switch on the button icon This function allows you to listen to the selected excerpt between A and B repeatedly That way you can check whether the last notes of your pattern to be allow for a smooth transition to other Music Style patterns or sound natural when the pattern is repeated Sometimes quantizing the last few notes of an excerpt may be helpful to avoid in
505. n also lights Note It is also possible to select sounds for Keyboard parts that are currently switched off This allows you to prepare the next sound s while still playing another Keyboard part Press a TONE button to select a family and its best sound the sound already changes at this stage SRX EXP TONE i E G PIANO KEYBOARD CHR PERC ORGAN ACCORDION A GUITAR BASS STRINGS CED HARMONIC BAR See page 33 for the sounds and page 32 for the button The display shows a list of Tones available in that family SAX PAD VOCAL BRASS TRUMPET WIND SYNTH ETHNIC RUMS Si Strings TONE 638 A ass UPPER St Slow Stri Orchestra 1 x Violin JP8 Strings1 Harp St_Pizzicato Warm Strings S Str Choir OrchestraHit PAGES PAGES Entries with an or icon to the right of their name are sounds that reside on an SRX series expansion board you installed Those sounds are automatically assigned to the correct families and displayed on the last page of the selected family Press the field of the desired sound If you don t like it press another field The last sound you select in each family is memorized temporarily and will be recalled every time you press the corresponding TONE button That selection can then be changed by pressing another field If you are still not happy with the Tone use the PAGE 1 PAGE 5 and fields to select the corre sponding page if available 3 O 5 6 The gt fie
506. n an older Roland arranger instrument took much longer This allows you to prepare one set of User Programs for weddings another for corporate events a third for anniversaries etc that may access the same User Pro gram data here and there If you change a User Pro gram e g by selecting another sound for the LW2 part that change is automatically adopted by all Set Lists that refer to that User Program Saving your settings to a User Program It is a good idea to memorize your settings frequently even if you still need to do some touching up after wards Those intermediary saves allow you to return to the previous stage whenever you do not like your last mod ifications 1 Change all settings the way you want to save them 2 Press the USER PROGRAM button The display changes to S Factory USERFROGHAM ge s215 E NES SONG f MIDI TEXT EMP LINK 4 KBE WR LINK LINK WRITE HOLD SETTINGS 1 i Blue Berry Swear Ballad Fame Rock Know Him i Hands Up Party i Misty Jazz P4 ET ne CC 00 127 FROM i USER PROGRAM cose a n SONG f MIDI TEXTPEMP ans LINE LINK E a Factory z i Swear B Blue Berry Celebrating Fame Rock P Know Him i Hands Up Party Misty Jazz P4 PSs 1 4 Use the P fields and to select the page 1 18 where you want to save your registration 5 Press a big field 1 8 to select the destination memory 125 E 80 Music
507. n of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 27 OD gt Chorus This effect connects an Overdrive and a Chorus in series Series means that the output signal of the first effect is also processed by the second Overdrive Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Overdrive Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Level 0 127 Output level 28 OD gt Flanger This effect connects an Overdrive and a Flanger in series Overdrive Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the volume Overdrive Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the overdrive sound Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into
508. nally planned Markers also allow you to change the song structure in realtime by starting with the bridge for example Note If you press a MARK amp JUMP button almost immediately after starting song playback the Recorder may suddenly stop and the message Song Scanning may appear This can be solved by reducing the playback tempo so that the E 80 has enough time to process all MIDI data contained in the song W Reset rewind fast forward You can also use the following buttons to jump to different song locations TOP BWD FWD I lt lt lt gt gt I lt TOP allows you to return to the beginning of the current song BWD allows you to rewind one measure at a time You can also press and hold this button to rewind more rapidly gt FWD allows you to fast forward one measure at a time You can also press and hold this button to advance more rapidly These buttons are available both during playback and while playback Is stopped Mi Next Song While the current song is still running you can already select the next one to be played back If you want it to start automatically proceed as follows e Press the button e Select the desired song using the Song Finder page 41 e As soon as the current song finishes the next one Starts automatically There is thus no need to press again You could now already select another song e Press the button again to switch off this function Note
509. name suggests it allows you to balance the various Keyboard parts of your E 80 See page 140 and following for how to mix the Song and Style parts Your singing and the generated Vocal Harmonist parts can be mixed using the and knobs Effects processors for the Keyboard parts and Song amp Style instruments Gray lines MIDI data Black amp dotted lines Audio data Dotted lines indicate options 1 Not used when the instrument or part is assigned to MFX or MFX A C Drums You can specify for each drum instrument of the SONG and STYLE sections whether it should use its own equalizer or the equalizer of the Drum Set it belongs to Drum instruments cannot be assigned to the MFX processors individually only the Drum Set as a whole can be assigned to MFX A C MFX A MFX B MFX C Each SONG or STYLE instrument can be assigned to one MFX A B or C but not two or three FZ od Mastering Tools Tools Pt Fo f ot Bi j S S ELTE eh OUTPUT MAIN L R PHONES 1 2 MAMA Mastering Tools l E 80 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions amp effects About the E 80 s effects The E 80 contains the following effects processors not all of which are available for all sections Please care fully study the following table and the diagram on page 105 Section Effects processors Remarks Keyboard Effects Reverb Chorus Separate editable processors MFX One proce
510. ncy range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Level 0 127 Output level 44 Super Filter This is a filter with an extremely sharp slope The cutoff fre quency can be varied cyclically Filter Type LPF BPF HPF NOTCH Filter type Fre quency range that will pass through each filter LPF fre quencies below the cutoff BPF frequencies in the region of the cutoff HPF frequencies above the cutoff NOTCH frequencies other than the region of the cutoff Filter Slope 12 24 36 dB Amount of attenuation per octave 36dB extremely steep 24dB steep 12dB gentle Filter Cutoff 0 127 Cutoff frequency of the filter Increasing this value will raise the cutoff frequency Filter Resonance 0 127 Filter resonance level Increas ing this value will emphasize the region near the cutoff frequency 2 59 E 80 Music Workstation Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters Filter Gain 0 12 dB Amount of boost for the filter output Modulation Sw Off On On off switch for cyclic change Modulation Wave TRI SOR SIN SAW1 SAW2 How the cutoff frequency will be modulated TRI triangle wave SOR square wave S N sine wave SAW7 sawtooth wave upward SWA2 sawtooth wave downward Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo D
511. nd name field next to the instrument icon and use the TONE buttons and the display to select another sound or Drum Set E Piano Keyboard 1E bees UPPER Pro Stagel FM EPiano2 Vintage EP1 Phase EP Wurly 1 Vintage EP2 Clay 1 Stage Harpsichord PAGES PAGES 6 Press the button to return to the SONG MAKEUP TOOLS or STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS PALETTE page Press the field of another parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC buttons to set the desired value You can also press the dial and enter the value via the on screen numeric pad SON G MAKEUP GGS i NUHERIC PAD i E EE e Jra Ls jis Ea _ Em EE E ic ewren Most parameter values can be positive or negative so remember to also use the field Press to reset all parameters on this page to their saved settings To save your changes at this stage press the field and see page 148 You can also press another field in the top row to change yet other parameters before saving your modified song or Style PALETTE Pressing the field on any of the MAKEUP TOOLS pages takes you to the following page where you can set the most fundamental parameters of the instruments used by the selected song or Style TOOLS p d q p Tc TOG C eommon he mo ir COREY con NETE TR EDIT ti faces SIN ie i Fid Sie Ou PANFOT Fre OCTA OCTAV EDIT EavaLizeR if ON eor c oe i FREEZE K e
512. nding MIDI note numbers so that all Style parts transmit their notes to external instruments There is thus no need to transmit the note messages of what you play in the chord recognition area NTA separately HUG Soy ao fr NOTE TO ARRANGER RX NTA 1ST CHANNEL RE 2ND CHANNEL RE eT i 4 15 1ST CH LIMIT 2ND CH LIMIT Low Low _ eis WE 1ST CHANNEL RX 2ND CHANNEL RX CHANNEL NTA notes can be received on two MIDI channels so that you could control the E 80 s Arranger using a MIDIfied accordion FR series or any other instrument that sends note data on two channels Either channel can be switched off using its field Note You cannot assign the same MIDI channel to 1 amp 2 Channel Rx W 1ST CH LIMIT 2ND CH LIMIT C G9 These parameters allow you to set the note range to be received If not all note messages of the selected MIDI channel should be received by the NIA part set the range to the desired values Note The LOW LIMIT value cannot be higher value than HIGH LIMIT and vice versa If you select the V Link part When you select V LINK on the page the display changes to MUG Shy oe Cm V LINK VLINK TX CLIP CONTROL TH COLOR CONTROL TH ITG Here you can only set TX parameters because the E 80 only sends V LINK messages it does not receive them See page 245 for details about the V LINK functionality Note Press the field to recall the default setting for the p
513. ne hand and VOCODER or on the other can therefore use a short Reverb Room for example while can be processed with the Church algorithm and so on Thus by pressing VOICE FX you not only select that part and its voice transformations but also the reverb and delay settings In fact the Roland engineers already programmed the effect parameters for you so that you only need to read on if you want to edit those presets yourself Extremely important remark Before you even consider spending some time with the Vocal Harmonist effects you need to change the fol lowing parameter If you don t your changes will be lost as soon as you press another VOCAL HARMONIST button T 2 2 Do not change this setting if you are happy with the way the effects sound and therefore have no intention to delve into this matter The following setting is remembered even after you switch off your E 80 1 Press the button The display changes to a te Bo ea ao Caia nants OEE CONTROLLERS 2 Press the UTILITY then the field UTILITY PLAYER FEEDBACK KEYBOARD UPPER MF LINK Bw VDR W IDAJUMFP f FLASHING DATA UPDATE METRONOME STYLE MELODY INT LINK 3 Press the button icon Switch it on to use the most suitable effect settings for each Vocal Harmonist part Switch it off to leave the current effect settings intact And now the Vocal Harmonist effects 1 Press and hold a button to the
514. ne of the following if necessary e For operations press the field that contains the name of the file you wish to load Use the fields if the desired file is not currently displayed e For operations enter a name for the file you are about to save e For operations select the file you wish to dispose of e For operations select the file you wish to copy e For other operations see page 231 7 If available press the field 8 Press the button to return to the main page In the following we will use the word media to refer to the three memory areas available to the E 80 inter nal memory area floppy disk memory card 2 2D E 80 Music Workstation Disk Media functions 1 2 Loading data The LOAD functions allow you to load Songs Music Styles User Program Sets and MIDI Sets Songs and Styles can also be loaded via dedicated functions which are explained elsewhere page 159 95 The behavior of those pages is identical to that of the LOAD function so we won t explain those operations again Note Never remove the floppy disk or memory card while the operation is in progress Wait for the confirmation to appear before returning to business as usual Mi Load User Program Set This is where you can load User Program Sets As stated on page 125 such Sets or Lists do not con tain the registration data but only references to them Please bear in mind that a User Program Set can only refer to User Pro
515. ned VOLUME Use this parameter to set the volume of the selected drum instrument PANPOT Use this parameter to set the stereo place ment of the selected drum instrument 0 means no change negative values shift the instrument towards the left and positive values shift it towards the right REVERB amp CHORUS Use these parameters to set the reverb or chorus send level of the selected drum instru ment The effects themselves can be changed on the COMMON page see below 145 E 80 Music Workstation Song and Style Makeup Tools VELOCITY This parameter allows you to modify the e Press the display and use the velocity range of the drum instrument in question O dial or the DEC INC buttons to select means that the recorded values are left untouched a negative setting reduces all velocity values by the same amount leaving variations intact while a positive set ting shifts all velocity values in a positive direction PITCH Use this parameter to tune the selected drum instrument higher or lower O means that the pitch is left unchanged Gu W Equalizer Fa et Ge Fe The equalizer on the DRUM INSTR EDIT page applies ves to the selected drum Instrument only The little INSTR es Ea EQUALIZER display allows you to select one of the following options l l l e Press the field to change the equalizer settings The display changes to Instr 60 a a JUMP TO 1STNOTE dud I
516. neously e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons E 80 Music Workstation Roland Ensemble settings EQUALIZER Press this field to switch all equalizers on this page on or off The equalizer can be used for two things a emphasizing a specific frequency range to create a special effect or make the part more distin guishable b to reduce the level of frequencies that mask other sounds or produce a boomy sound FREQUENCY Hz Use this parameter to select the fre quency whose level you wish to change with the GAIN parameter The smaller the value the lower the fre quency that will be boosted or cut The ALL PARTS FRE QUENCY HZ parameter affects the sound of both parts GAIN This parameter sets the level of the selected fre quency 0 means that the frequency s level does not change no difference between equalizer on and off The ALL PARTS GAIN dB parameter affects the sound of both parts e Press the field to leave this page Ensemble settings When the indicator lights four part har monies are added to your singing The associated page allows you to specify what kinds of voices will be used for these harmonies rae FE e eee ENSENBLE ae LUIS N GIRLS Press and hold the button With the exception of the fact that up to four voices are generated the parameters and fields on this page work exactly like the
517. nfirm that it is recognized correctly 1 Turn on the power as described in Switching the E 80 on off on p 21 2 Press the button and the field 3 Press the field to select the following page Da L y SRX A Expansion Board SRX 05 SupDance SRX B Expansion Board SRX 03 World CI Free Space h Internal Memory 26704 Kb Free Space Memory Card 184448 Kb I FACTORY RESET Version v1 00 b038 2006 April 21 16 58 Check whether the name of the installed wave expansion board Is displayed If No SRX Card is displayed next to SRX Expansion Board the wave expansion board Is not recognized Re install the wave expansion board correctly 4 Press to return to the main page E 80 Music Workstation Roland Accessing the Patches of SRX series expansion boards via MIDI Accessing the Patches of SRX series expansion boards via MIDI As you will notice the CCOO value is always 93 The CC32 value on the other hand depends on a the board you installed and b the number of sounds it contains Note Drum Sets of the SRX series expansion board use the CCOO value 92 The CC32 value to use can be found in the documen tation that came with the expansion board you installed The MIDI standard can only handle 128 program change numbers which is why boards with more than 128 Patches use several consecutive CC32 values CC32 SRX 1 SRX 2 SRX 3 SRX 4 SRX 5 SRX
518. ng names on p 52 Note The field allows you to switch between uppercase and lowercase characters e Press the EXECUTE field to confirm the new name T3 G E Edit This function allows you to assign the desired User Programs to the selected Index or to remove existing User Program assignments e After performing step 4 above press the field Usa peer IRIS Q ao Oa Ore room H a e Use the FINDER USER PRG STYLE LINK and fields to locate the desired file See page 127 e Press the fields of all User Programs you wish to assign to the selected Index category Selected User Programs are displayed on an orange background To remove a User Program from the selected cate gory press its orange field so that it turns gray e f necessary use the PAGE fields to go to previ ous or subsequent list pages e Press to confirm your changes and return to the USER PROGRAM LIST page Press to return to the main page and to cancel your changes which means that the assignments you have just changed will be lost Note After 50 modifications established defeated assign ments the E 80 performs an automatic confirmation like when you press the field Windex Copy This function allows you to copy one Index category along with all its User Program assignments to a another category You could take advantage of this for merging two categories to free up one category for new assignments Note There are ei
519. ng corre sponds to pressing once Note Any interval you set here automatically resets and thus overrides the SINGER KEY transposition see p 51 In fact the latter Is first reset to ORIGINAL after which the new transposi tion value is used Setting the transposition interval via the display If you prefer to set the transposition interval via the touch screen with a nice graphic here is how to E 80 Music Workstation Roland Octave Global Transpose There is also a master transpose control that alters the pitch of all sections of the E 80 Its value is added to the current transposition interval and the Singer Key as well as User Program transposition until you reset it to 0 or until you switch off your E 80 1 Press the button 1 Press and hold the TRANSPOSE or button or press the field on the main page TROTTING MASTER t TRANS SINGER SCALE TUNE Pose KEY TUNE You can also select this page by pressing the button field gt field 2 In the display press the key that corresponds to a ae the note you would like to hear every time you a oe S t The display changes to Note Selecting 0 means that the transposition is off Your setting can however be written to a User Program page 125 3 Press the and or field to switch it on These fields allow you to specify which parts should be affected by the Transpose setting 2 Press the field followed by the
520. ngs of the param eters below Always start by selecting the type and then set the programmable parameters The names of these types SLO W lt SPACE are prob ably self explanatory You may notice that the Delay character changes as you select different types Also note that some delays are stereo and are special effects you probably only need every so often e Press the field of the parameter you wish to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons The four knob icons allow you to alter the selected Delay type WALL TYPE This parameter determines the brightness and liveness of the effect Carpet Wood Brick Con crete Marble DELAY SEND This parameter reflects the setting on the VOCAL EFFECT page It was provided so that you do not need to switch pages while editing the Delay processor 12353 E 80 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions amp effects DELAY TIME Allows you to set the time lag between LOW PASS FILTER A low pass filter can be applied to the original and the effect signal Combined with the the sound sent to the Chorus processor to cut the high DELAY FBACK parameter it sets the speed of the repe frequency range Higher values will cut more of the high titions echoes frequencies resulting in a mellower chorus sound DLY REV SND This parameter sets the amount of CHORUS SEND This parameter reflects the setting on delay sound t
521. nnected to a power supply of the type described in the operating instruc tions or as marked on the E 80 About the Symbols The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the unit must never be disassembled The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING e Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards This instrument either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers may be capable of S producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level o
522. no longer processed by the effect while the remaining Keyboard parts are 8 Press the button once or twice to assign the CHORUS function to the sliders Specify how much chorus should be applied to the Keyboard parts The effect parameters themselves can be edited on an Effect page see below Note At this stage the EFFECT slider far left can be used to set the output level of the Chorus processor Setting this parameter to 0 means that you no longer hear the effect in question By contrast setting the CHORUS control of a Key board part to 0 means that only the part in question is no longer processed by the effect SS Volume and status of the Style parts When you press the button below the display the following page appears USER PROGRAM STYLE VOLUME FLT TL ALT e Start Arranger playback don t forget to select the desired pattern then press the field of the Style part you want to listen to in isolation Only one Style part can be soloed Pressing another field causes the corresponding part to be played back in isolation This setting cannot be saved it is merely meant to help you find the part whose volume you want to change or that you want to switch off see below Ca Tl TOT E 80 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions amp effects Note If the Solo function is on while you save a User Program all tracks except the soloed one will be set to off so that only the so
523. nopqrs laut 8 lt vA D en s Os 3 pe tuvwxyz e 6 7 Iuneg__ 1 YA i EXTERNAL MEMORY Importing a text file for Lyrics synchronization or editing Lyrics data is only possible while song play back is stopped If you forget to stop playback by pressing RECORDER PLAY STOP m a Can t exe cute Song is running error message is displayed Now we re going to import the text file you created earlier Select the memory area that contains the text file you wish to associate with the Standard MIDI File in the E 80 s RAM memory press INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY If you press or EXTERNAL MEMORY insert the memory card or floppy disk with the desired song into the slot or drive Press the line that contains the name of the text file you want to use If you don t see the desired file name use the scroll bar the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select another group of 8 files If you still can t find the file it may not end in TXT or not be a text ASCII file 1os E 80 Music Workstation Editing Lyrics 8 Press the field to load the text file you 9 selected BANIS HAE EJE Dawe Rak The current Lyrics Text will be lost Do you want to continue The message means that the lyrics of the previously selected song will be erased If that s OK with you press the field If not press the field to return to the TXT I
524. nother parameter by foot MIDI THRU OUT IN sockets These sockets allow you to connect the E 80 to exter nal MIDI devices for a variety of applications receiv ing song data in realtime from an external sequencer transmitting your playing and the data of the song you are playing back to an external sequencer using the E 80 as master keyboard in your MIDI setup etc right side METRONOME EXTERNAL SOURCE VOCAL HARMONIST OUTPUT LEVEL OUT AUDIOIN neur MAIN R L L MONO 00 00O m ooe Ed METRONOME LEVEL knob and OUT socket The E 80 s metronome signals can be transmitted to the METRONOME OUT socket You can connect head phones Roland RH 300 RH 200 RH 50 or RH 25 to this socket This is useful for a drummer for exam ple as Click Track Use the METRONOME knob to set the metronome volume in the head phones EXTERNAL SOURCE AUDIO IN L R sockets This is where you can connect the audio outputs of an external signal source CD MP3 player synthe sizer etc If the source has 1 4 outputs you either 713 6 pad nn yes T fa lI IS Note The MIDI functions can be accessed via the E 80 s Menu page 237 Frequently used MIDI settings can be written and recalled as MIDI Sets USB port The USB port can be used for archiving purposes and MIDI data transfer from to a computer PCMCIA slot This is where you can insert a memory card PCMCIA CompactFlash SmartMedia or Microdr
525. nts MIDI OUT MIDI OUT akan LOCAL OFF ro When you press one of these fields the number of the currently selected MIDI Set is indicated with an asterisk to signal that the current settings no longer corre spond to the written settings See p 243 for details about the MIDI Sets Editing procedure 7 Press the field on the first MIDI page EASY SETTING SELECT OUTPUT MODE Keyboard amp w eS USB HIDI SET 8 On the page that appears now select the section whose parameters you wish to edit MIDIEDIH Synchronization general settings Refers to the Recorder sequencer parts Refers to the Style parts Keyboard parts including MELODY INTELL 9 Use the PAGE buttons to select the part you want to edit 10 Press the field of the parameter you wish to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC IINC buttons 11 Press the field and save your MIDI settings to a Set or Press the button to return to the main page Editing MIDI parameters Let us briefly explain where to look for the part you want to edit use PAGE to select it KEYBOARD STYLE SONG SYSTEM UP1 2 3 ADrums Part1 16 Syne LW1 2 ABass Basic Channel MBS Accomp Style Channel MELODY INT Accomp2 NTA Accomp3 V LINK Accomp4 Param Accomp5 V Harm Accomp6 Note Always select the part you want to edit before changing the available parameters Keyboard Style Song parts HUE Shy U
526. nts displayed on this page 1 Select and load a different song This is not necessary if you want to edit the song you have just recorded or played back See Working with the Song Finder on p 159 or page 42 for how to load a song 2 Press the button 12 d PIANO 2 13 d MUTED GT 15 PIANO 4 16 PIANO 4 cc a it All Ctrl cc 02 036 CC 5 ae rus CC 31 Reverb CC 11 Expression 02 040 CC 7 Volume 02 041 Pitch Bend 0 02 042 CC 0 Bank Select MSB 0 1 02 043 Program Change 74 19 02 077 Mote 65 F 4 100 11 19 02 115 Note 65 F 4 83 18 19 03 030 Note 67 G4 a 79 19 04 010 Note 69 4 4 65 PLACE EVENT amp 4 Press the field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to select the track you want to edit 5 Press the white field the event list to be able to select events using the dial and al v buttons 193 E 80 Music Workstation Using the 16 track Sequencer General notes about MICRO EDIT also includes the bank select W Position indications messages CC00 and CC32 that are used for selecting The E 80 s sequencer translates all known musical sounds along with the program change numbers techniques and physical effects into MIDI messages that can be filtered separately to precisely reproduce the natural behavior of the e Press to switch on all button icons or to instrument that is being simulated switch them all off in which case the MICRO EDIT list E
527. o booi 01 ooo TO De 7G ESRC TRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track whose data you wish to copy WE FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginning of the selected track s BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 This is where you specify the CPT position of the beginning of the track excerpt to be copied Unless you do not need all notes of the first bar you Should keep the default setting BIO By default the TO position is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 lt last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing 16 track songs MICOPY MODE Replace Mix Allows you to specify how the data should be copied REPLACE The selected FROM TO range overwrites the data
528. o attenuate the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Density 0 127 Density number of the reflections E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing the Keyboard effects processors Diffusion 0 127 Adjusts the change in the density of the reverb over time The higher the value the more the density increases with time The effect of this parameter is most pronounced with long reverb times LF Damp Freq 50 4000Hz Adjusts the frequency below which the low frequency content of the reverb sound will be reduced LF Damp Gain 36 0dB Adjusts the amount of damping applied to the frequency range selected with LF Damp With a setting of 0 there will be no reduction of the reverb s low frequency content HF Damp Freg 4000 12500Hz Adjusts the fre quency above which the high frequency content of the reverb sound will be reduced or damped HF Damp Gain 36 0dB Adjusts the amount of damping applied to the frequency range selected with HF Damp With a setting of 0 there will be no reduc tion of the reverb s high frequency content GM2 Reverb parameters Character Room1 Room 2 Room3 Hall1 Hall2 Plate Delay Pan Delay Type of reverb Pre LPF 0 7 Cuts the high frequency range of the sound coming into the reverb Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies Level 0 127 Output level of the reverb signal Time 0 127 Time length of reverberation Feedback 0
529. o establish the link to the song whose name appears on an orange back ground E 80 Music Workstation Roland Automatic functions for User Programs This takes you back to the User Program page The selection field now contains a small SONG message On the main page User Programs with a link to a song are Indicated by means of a paper clip icon Linking a MIDI Set to a User Program MIDI Sets are User Programs for MIDI parameters There are eight such memories page 243 If you use the E 80 in different MIDI environments studio live band preparing three MIDI Sets and link ing them to the User Programs you usually use in the Studio on stage etc can be a time saver In other situ ations such a link could be dangerous because it would reconfigure the E 80 s MIDI parameters without you actually knowing It 1 Press the USER PROGRAM button The display changes to Factory APRN tha HOLD NG MIDI TEXT EMP INF O GT HR SETTINGS LINH lu LIN LINK ES WRITE i Swear Ballad Celebrating 7 i Blue Shoes Blue Berr y i Fame Rock i Know Him Hands Up Party Misty Jazz P4 PS TT 2 Press the field I MIDI SET 3 Press a MIDI Set 1 lt 8 field to select the desired MIDI Set To break the link to this MIDI Set press Its field again all indicator icons must be dark 4 Press to return to the User Program selection page or the button to return to the main page
530. o move one or several events Note If the position to which you move the selected event already contains other events the moved event is added at the end of that group Select the event you want to move Note For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting event types that should remain where they are See VIEW on p 194 Note Events located at 1 01 00 cannot be moved further to the left To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a blue back ground Press the button icon The following pop up appears EDIT Note Number 1 02 033 CC 121 Reset All Ctr 0 CREATE J f MOVE EVENT JJ To BEAT CPT 0019 EXECUTE onal 1 9 03 030 Note 19 04 010 Note 69 A 4 lear o G EOC Specify the position to which the first event in chro nological order of the selected group should be shifted by pressing the BAR and fields and entering the desired value for each unit using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to confirm your settings and move the event Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes Mi COPY EVENT This function allows you to copy one or several events Use PLACE EVENT to insert a copy of those events at the desired position Laro Sd CC 121
531. o raise or lower the frequency at which the sound is modulated upward downward Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Mix Level 0 127 Level of the phase shifted sound Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Level 0 127 Output level 51 Ring Modul Ring Modulator is an effect which applies amplitude modula tion AM to the input signal producing bell like sounds You can also change the modulation frequency according to the volume of the sound input to the effects device Frequency 0 127 Sets the frequency at which modula tion will be applied Sens 0 127 Sets the amount of frequency modulation applied Polarity Determines whether the frequency modulation moves towards higher frequencies UP or lower frequen cies DOWN EQ Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range EQ High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct and the effect sound With a settin
532. o the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Low Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the low range flanger sound is modulated Low Rate note Musical Notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync param eter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Low Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the low range flanger sound Low Phase 0 180 deg Spaciousness of the low range flanger sound Low Feedback 98 0 98 Proportion of the low range flanger sound that is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase High Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Delay time from when the original sound is heard to when the high range flanger sound is heard High Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to spec ify whether Note or not Hz the high modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value High Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the high range flanger sound is modulated High Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note High Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the high range fl
533. o the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a time or a note value Delay Time msec 0 2600ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Phase Normal Inverse Phase of the delay VORMAL normal phase INVERT inverted Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 69 Serial Delay This delay connects two delay units in series Feedback can be applied independently to each delay unit allowing you to produce
534. o the pre vious Variation i e from MAIN 2 to 1 You can use this function up to three times to jump to the simplest level Variation 1 If you then use the Aftertouch again however nothing happens You thus cannot cycle back to the highest level Variation 4 Variation Up You can cause the Arranger to select the next Style Variation i e to go from MAIN 1 to 2 You can use this function up to three times to jump to the most complex level Variation 4 Variation Down You can cause the Arranger to select the preceding Style Variation i e to go from MAIN 4 to 3 This time however no Fill In is played before the next Variation starts You can use this function up to three times to jump to the simplest level Variation 1 Intro The Aftertouch can be used to select the INTRO pattern of the active Style This selects the Intro of the currently active Variation level 1 4 Ending The Aftertouch can be used to select the END ING pattern of the active Style This selects the Ending phrase of the currently active Variation level 1 4 5 Press the button to return to the main page ASSIGN SW buttons The ASSIGN SW buttons 1 and 2 allow you to quickly access a function you would normally have to select via the display which may involve several steps At first ASSIGN SW 1 is used to start a Fade In while ASSIGN SW 2 starts a Fade Out See page 157 for details TE pAn i
535. of the destination track in the area to which the selected data are copied Copy From 2 1 0 To 3 1 0 Into 4 1 0 SRC TRACK 1 DST TRACK 1 pig a REPLACE MIX ee SES ee Sad MlX The data in the selected range of the source track are added to the data on the destination track In most instances REPLACE is probably a good choice when you set DATA TYPE to ALL or when you wish to substitute a given message cluster modulation data for example for other messages of the same type thus creating a perfect reproduction of a given control effect MIX on the other hand may be useful for adding data to a number of beats or bars that were not there before while keeping the original notes in those places You can choose the kind of data to be copied using DATA TYPE Note The E 80 has no Undo function Saving your song before copying will allow you to load the previous version if something goes wrong E COPY TIMES 1 999 Sets the number of copies you wish to make The value 3 means that you will end up with 3 contiguous copies MEDATA TYPE Allows you to select the data to be copied ALL All parameters listed below Note Only note messages P Bender Pitch Bend data Control Control change messages Change Prog C Program change messages NRPN Non registered parameter number messages These are parameter control functions of the GS GM2 format that are easier to
536. of the low frequency and high frequency rotors SLOW Slows down the rotation to the Slow Rate FAST Speeds up the rotation to the Fast Rate Tweeter Acceleration 0 15 Woofer Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time it takes the rotor in question to reach the newly selected speed Fast or Slow Lower values correspond to slower transitions Tweeter Level 0 127 Woofer Level 0 127 Volume of the rotor in question Separation 0 127 Spatial dispersion of the sound Level 0 127 Output level 10 Compressor Reduces high levels peaks and boosts low levels smoothing out fluctuations in volume Compressor Sustain 0 127 Allows you to specify how strongly incoming signals should be compressed which results in a longer sustain Compressor Attack 0 127 Sets the speed at which compression starts Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Compressor Post Gain 0 6 12 18dB Adjusts the output gain Use this parameter to make up for a signifi cant volume loss due to extreme settings EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output level E 80 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters 11 Limiter C
537. ogram Chng 130 KU EERTE SE EEEE sone daa 70 Rit VALS ee as oan n anne nna 4444 40 91 Ritardi Os seuceuseueeedaswaaaens 91 Up onnaa aaan 70 74 83 Filter WIDicessussaeeeaeeuuacer ca 239 240 S66 ae eee ee 55 IVF CUO cccecvearccnxxcessueeas 104 Up DOWN s cirrrarsiaasiadisiiisss 70 FINGED EEE EEEE ETET 96 Music Assistant 008 40 SONG eaaa 42 159 DOG EIEEE g5 Yser Progra Mi assassinas 127 Fine TUNE cece ee e a 101 UPPE ne ee 100 Vocal Harmonist 151 Fixed 2 eee eee 68 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Index PAGT cunegeecwenecewess 110 117 147 Keyboard Flashing IX 106 119 252 00a er 238 Bl oo eee ap en ce eemnaene nents 247 TYPES oaaae acana 120 Exchange MCtIONOMGan45enchaceususeseds 247 Import i PEE 72 78 Foot A 56 Joi 72 78 Pedal nouanoua reenen 78 TXT L 58 FUNCTIONS viveee renee ee ween 99 Switch EPEE EE E E E a E EEEE EEE ac 71 User Programs E 232 Modes tt ee ee ee eee A a 64 FOF oaaae rarae VOR DAC Vl Geccecinceccvruitieecaeee see is 188 218 OPUCKS a s ccerrecerseereeerer 100 Format 00 cece eee e cece eee eee 231 Index o 42 95 159 Sree Meee Dalciananenaneneeeerece as 86 148 COPY nonan anaana 136 163 es a rorsssss sss i Sound selection 2422224242224a0de 29 Megu CY TAZ cece 151 154 155 156 Edit cee eee 135 136 162 TOUGH 25466 40505 560 nene0e0eRe5 68 FR Ok oe Gee 8 34844 oe eee eel 209 RENAME 255505445h542052beeR0056 136 Tran POSE peas 67 FIRST
538. ollowing M Rename This function allows you to change or supply infor mation for the selected song e Press the SONG NAME ARTIST or field and enter the desired characters You can also rename all four of them e The field allows you to switch between upper case and lowercase characters Note If you select a song on floppy disk only the SONG NAME and FILE NAME can be edited e Press the field The Operation Successful message appears to confirm this operation M Delete This function allows you to delete the selected song from the internal memory area memory card or floppy disk You should use this as sparsely as possi ble Once a song Is gone there is indeed no way to restore it e Press the field Deleting a song cannot be undone which is why the following question is now displayed 4 This File will be DELETED from Memory Card r Song Name FIRSTDAY Artist Manek R a Genre Rock File Name FIRST DAY MI D ARE YOU SURE deletes the song file leaves the file intact and takes you back to the initial Song Finder page with the song list leaves the file intact and takes you back to the SONG LIST page Note If a song you delete here is assigned to a Play List an error message File not found is displayed during playback of that Play List and playback stops at that step So be careful E 80 Music Workstation Roland Working with the Song Finder EPRS Input 1
539. ompresses signals that exceed the specified level preventing distortion from occurring Unlike a compressor it does not boost the level of weaker signals Limiter Threshold 0 127 Adjusts the volume at which compression begins Limiter Release 0 127 Allows you to specify how long signal compression should remain in effect after the signal volume falls below the Threshold value Limiter Ratio 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 100 1 Allows you to spec ify how strongly volume peaks should be compressed Choose 100 1 if the Threshold level must never be exceeded which is a true Limiter function Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Limiter Post Gain 0 6 12 18dB Adjusts the out put gain Use this parameter to make up for a significant volume loss due to extreme settings EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output level 12 Hexa Chorus Uses a six phase chorus six layers of chorused sound to cre ate a dense and spatial effect Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulat
540. on Manages up to 99 999 songs Play amp Search function 16 track sequencer with microscope and macro editing functions Style Converter WE Display type amp controls Color 1 4 VGA Contrast potentiometer W Panel controls 9 assignable sliders DATA ENTRY dial with switching function Cursor Touch screen with 3D SG 3D simulated graphics Harmonic bars mixer Data entry 6 switches data entry INC DEC Up Down Right Left PITCH BEND MODULATION lever D Beam controller with macro settings MASTER VOLUME knob KEYBOARD ACCOMP BALANCE EXTERNAL SOURCE volume knob Keyboard Part switches Tone Assign WE User Programs UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 MBS UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 MBS 144 Set List references for access via front panel Unlimited access Additional functions Internal memory memory card floppy disk via FINDER Parameter Hold Song Link MIDI Set Link TXT BMP Link W Music Assistant registrations More than 650 factory registrations Unlimited number of programmable entries E Vocal Harmonist 4 presets 2 Harmony modes Vocoder Effects processors Voice Harmony Others W Data storage Floppy disk drive Internal memory Memory card Type of files managed E Other functions Keyboard Modes Easy Setting Chord voicing Melody Intelligence Singer Key Adapter Assignable switches Miscellaneous System updates USB E Connectors Headphone sockets Talk Voice F
541. onverter 1 Select and load a different song This is not necessary if you want to use the song you have just recorded or played back Otherwise see Working with the Song Finder on p 159 or page 42 for how to load a song In any case you should listen to it and try to Isolate the eight tracks whose parts should be included in your new Music Style 2 Press the RECORDER button esu 6 d BARITONE SA 11 d Jazz GT 12 d PiANO 2 J 43 d muteocr f 14 d CLEAN GT J 15 Piano 4 16 PIANO 4 j FRETLESS BS OVERDRIVE GT ACCE frit PIANO gt E PIANO 1 Accs AcCd a HALO PAD 4 You may also have to press the button icon to select the page shown above if CONVERT is currently active This page allows you to select the song tracks that should become Style tracks Remember that a song may contain up to 16 tracks while a Music Style only provides eight The default assignments of song tracks to the Style tracks see the illustration above last column in the list are made automatically Though based on com TO 83 5 mon sense they may not yield the desired accompa niment pattern As a rule you should always listen carefully To correct one or several of the default assign ments proceed as follows Press one of the green fields to select the Style track Those are the tracks that make up your Music style to be Next use the dial or the DEC INC button
542. oo loud with respect to the Arranger or song Note See page 106 for how to set the balance between the Keyboard parts 5 Press the PART ON OFF buttons of other Keyboard Parts you want to add by layering them Alternating between sounds The E 80 allows you to play several sounds simulta neously using the Keyboard parts Other parts are played by the Arranger Styles and are called Style parts And finally there are the Song parts that are controlled by the Recorder function The Keyboard parts can be used together or to quickly alternate between sounds Use the PART ON OFF buttons to select the part s you want to play You can play several sounds simultaneously which is called a layer or via separate keyboard zones split There is even a dynamic split function see p 99 Below please find an explanation of the Keyboard parts See p 82 for the Style parts e UP1 Upper1 Upper1 is normally the main solo part and switched on automatically in Piano mode e UP2 The Upper2 part can be used as additional solo part to be layered with the Upper1 part or as an alternative melody sound It provides two tuning parameters Coarse and Fine Upper1 does not have UP3 The Upper3 part is yet another solo part that can be added to UP1 and UP2 It can also be used in an additional split combination see p 99 e LW1 and LW2 The Lower and Lower2 parts can either be used in the same way as the
543. op recording Do not play on the keyboard or use any controllers connected to the E 80 though Note The last tempo value you record becomes the Style s preset tempo 2 1 2 Style Track Edit functions All display pages of the Style Track Edit mode have a field that allows you to jump to the STYLE COM POSER page The STYLE TRACK EDIT functions are very similar to those of the 16 track sequencer If you know how to use those you will have little trouble understanding how the STYLE TRACK EDIT functions work Here are a few guidelines for editing your Style a Save your Style before continuing That way you can always return to the original if your changes do not work out as expected See Saving your Style on p 207 for details b Select the track s and pattern s you wish to mod ify c Select the range FROM and TO for the edit opera tion d Enter what should be changed and how it should be changed Press the desired field and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Confirm the operation by pressing the field f Save your Style again The STYLE TRACK EDIT level of the STYLE COMPOSER provides 12 functions Quantize Erase Delete Copy Insert Transpose Change Velo Change Gate Time Glo bal Change Shift Clock Track Length and Time Signat There is also a MICRO EDIT environment that allows you to add delete or change individual events See page 220 for details To select one of the STYLE T
544. opped Press this field if you want to hear the metronome at all times which is probably only useful when practising a new sono PLAY Press this field if the metronome should only sound while the Arranger or Recorder is playing REC Press this field if the metronome should only sound during song or Style recording see pages 173 and 201 E METRONOME INTERNAL The metronome signal is transmitted to the OUTPUT MAIN PHONES sockets and the internal speakers The metronome signal is always sent to the E 80 s METRONOME OUT socket rear panel You can con nect headphones to this socket and set the metro nome s volume using the LEVEL knob This option may be useful as click track for a drummer 3 Press the button to return to the main page ae Z 55 a5 9 S S mmn mn cae oj oo faa oo Get EET E E 80 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions 6 Additional Arranger Style functions Before telling you even more about the Music Styles allow us to explain the difference between Music Styles and the Arranger The Arranger is a kind of sequencer that plays back the accompaniments you select Those accompaniments are always related to a given musical genre or style and are therefore called Styles The E 80 s accompaniments are a lot more than just one pattern that goes on playing until you stop it they comprise several patterns or divisions Arranger parts Each accompaniment or Mu
545. or BOSS FS 5U footswitch connected to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket Hold Lower1 The footswitch does the same as the LOWER 1 HOLD function see also p 102 1 Press the button Hold Lower2 The footswitch does the same as the LOWER 2 HOLD function see also p 102 Hold Lower 1 2 The footswitch allows you to switch the LOWER 1 2 HOLD functions on and off Talk The footswitch performs the same function as the button in the VOCAL HARMONIST section Harmony On Off The footswitch allows you to switch the currently selected HARMONY function VO CODER reverse the expression pedal s effect and specify that certain parts are not to be controlled by the expression pedal a _ ai sa a or ENSEMBLE on and off Select this function The display changes to if you want to switch the harmonies on for the choruses and off for the verses for example while playing on the Minus One The footswitch allows you to switch the REN spite fea Minus One function on and off See page 45 for how to select the option that will be used when the Minus One a Keyboard Exchange UP2 1 Allows you to switch off BFrevcron Ae iO f the UP1 part and activate the UP2 part and vice versa g Note If neither UP1 nor UP2 are on when you first press the footswitch one of them is activated Keyboard Exchange LW2 1 Allows you to switch off 2 Press the FOOT CONTROLLER field followed by the LW1 part
546. ord rec ognition area keys harder while negative values A FOOT e lt gt USB DATA CONTROLLERS STORAGE i mean that the volume of the selected Arranger part 2 H IE ARRANGER 7 field followed by increases as your velocity becomes softer ne A AA E Owens e You could use extreme positive negative ACCOMP pairs i e 127 and 127 to alternate between those two lines simply by varying your velocity One TEMPO CHANGE FILL IN TEMPO part would then only be audible when you strike the e keys softly while the other would only be triggered eo by high velocity values VED Ce Choose 0 for parts whose volume should not be Ss affected by your velocity values nek 6 Press the field to return to the ARRANGER CHORD page 7 Press the button to return to the main page Style Tempo Let us briefly summarize everything that has already been said about the tempo e Each Music Style has a preset tempo that is recalled whenever you select that Style or when you take advantage of the One Touch function page 87 The One Touch function however allows you to filter the tempo setting by activating TEMPO which means that the preset tempo is no longer loaded automati cally On the other hand you are free to change a Music Style s tempo any time See Changing the tempo on p 28 That value can be written to a User Program and will then be set every time you select that User Program e The Style and also song tempo is displ
547. ort counter the first two digits is reset to 01 1 Insert the floppy disk with the User Program Per formance Memory set you wish to convert into the drive The E 80 can import User Programs of the following instruments VA 76 VA 7 G 1000 Performance Memories and EM 2000 2 Press the button 3 Press the field pics ENA SONG STYLE al Ee E Penama wo iian 80 tbe IMPORT DES FORMAT USER PR H RAM fr y The display changes to IME ORI User ERO GRKAMTSE Sg A USER PROGRAMI My UPrg VA 72 A 76 pm USER PROGRAM i G 1000 pea 4 In the right column press the field that corre sponds to the instrument whose User Programs you want to import refers to the VA series while represents the G 1000 and EM 2000 This selection specifies the algorithm the E 80 will use for the con version User Program set files contain no clue about the instrument that generated them Note The User Programs you want to import must reside on a floppy disk and be bundled as a set 5 Select the target media for the imported User Pro grams using the field INT MEMORY or EXT MEMORY memory card 6 7 8 Press the field of the file whose User Programs you want to import Check again whether you really selected the file you want to import then press the field to start the import operation This may take a while because the conversion requires qui
548. oses it allows you to specify how Strongly your voice should be compressed and as you increase the value it raises the compressor s output volume to make up for the resulting lower level Note The value 0 means that the compressor is not working THRESHOLD This parameter allows you to set the level the microphone signal must have in order to be audible Softer signals will be muted suppressed by the gate 13 Press the field to jump to a page where you can select different presets etc see below 14 Press the button to return to the main page E 80 Music Workstation Roland Vocal Harmonist function Adding harmonies to your singing Now that your microphone is up and running let s look at the Harmonist effect proper The E 80 provides two harmony types Small 1 or 2 additional voices and Ensemble 3 or 4 additional voices 1 Connect your microphone press the but ton set the desired level and 2 press the button its indicator must light 3 Sing a few notes and listen to the harmonies pro duced 4 If the harmonies are too soft turn the knob towards the right towards MAX 5 To try out different harmonizations press and hold the button 6 Press the MALE or field to change the GENDER voice type of the harmonies pro duced adds both a male and a female voice This also changes the available preset options in the center of the display If on the above
549. ost instances you will probably do so with your left hand Each Music Style comprises several patterns so that you can vary the accompani ment by starting with an introduction using a simple accompaniment for the verses a more elaborate one for the choruses and by ending your songs with an Ending pattern Let us first look at the most important aspects for oper ating the Arranger 1 Connect and switch on the E 80 see pages 20 and 21 2 Press the EASY SETTING button The button s indicator lights and the keyboard is split into two halves The left half can be used to play chords while you can play melodies in the right half 3 If the SYNC button lights which is proba bly the case press it to switch it off 4 Set the knob to a reasonable level e g about 1 4 e For seventh chords playing the root and the second E 80 Music Workstation Roland Playing to an automatic accompaniment 5 Press the button it lights STYLE CONTROL INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START STOP O O I AUTO START FILL IN STOP 6 Play a chord in the left half of the keyboard to the left of the C key below the USER PROGRAM and 1 buttons then press the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button The button lights and the Arranger Starts playing the accompaniment of the currently selected Music Style called Strummlin Pop The accompaniment pattern is sounded in the key that corresponds to the
550. ot start 9 If necessary use and to change the tempo You can also press the button several times in the rhythm of the desired tempo To quickly return to the default tempo simulta neously press and FAST gt 10 Use the MASTER knob to set the E 80 s output volume You can also play to the music using the Keyboard parts If necessary use the knob to set the desired balance Other practical playback functions MARK JUMP The factory loaded songs in the E 80 s internal mem ory contain four locations markers you can jump to right away For songs that do not yet contain them you can program these markers yourself You can also edit the locations of existing markers page 158 Use the MARK amp JUMP 1 lt 4 buttons to select the position you want to jump to without stopping or delaying playback the indicator of the button you pressed flashes Such changes occur at the end of the current measure the indicator stops flashing and lights which makes more musical sense than jump ing when you re halfway into a measure MARK MP amp JU 1 2 3 4 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Playing back songs Standard MIDI Files There are four MARK memories For the factory loaded songs they correspond to 1 verse 2 chorus 3 bridge 4 ending The advantage of these markers is that you can return to the chorus for example if you notice that the audience wants the song to last a little longer than origi
551. ou want to add refers to tempo events to time sig nature changes and to SysEx strings e Specify where your new event should be inserted by pressing the field and entering the desired value using the dial or the DEC INC buttons e Press the field to confirm your settings Press to close the pop up window without applying your changes W ERASE EVENT e Use the dial to select the event you want to delete e Press the field to erase the selected event Note Tempo and time signature events located at 1 01 00 cannot be erased M MOVE EVENT This function allows you to move one or several events e Select the event you want to move To move several events it would be a good idea to select the first or last event of the series Note For this function you could take advantage of the VIEW filter to avoid selecting event types that should remain where they are See VIEW on p 191 Note Tempo and time signature events located at 1 01 00 cannot be moved e To select several consecutive events press the dial while turning it towards the left upward direction or the right downward direction All events selected in this way appear on a blue back ground T92 e Press the button icon The following pop up appears SAAS EMT AGIC SBT 1 01 000 Beat CHANIE MOVE EVENT 1 02 017 Sys Ex FO41 10 00 000812100002 lt 1 02 021 Sys Ex FO 41 10 00 00 08 12 10 00 33 EE EVENT Qj
552. ounds far more nat ural The Vibrato parameters can be set on the EDIT page 3 When you are done either press the button to return to the main page or one of the other fields to set those parameters as well Note The and fields allow you to jump to the effect or tone controls If you press the field the display looks as follows JASE Shy VIBRATO RATE RISE TIME DELAY TIME e Press the field of the parameter you wish to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons For the following the button icon must light for the effect to be noticeable Vibrato RATE Sets the speed of the vibrato effect Vibrato DEPTH Allows you to set the vibrato intensity Vibrato is an effect that changes modulates the pitch The higher the DEPTH value the more outspoken these periodic pitch changes will be Vibrato RISE TIME Allows you to set a swell for the vibrato effect This parameter specifies how long it takes before the DEPTH value is reached once the Delay Time IS Up Vibrato DELAY TIME Allows you to set a delay between the moment you start singing and the moment the vibrato effect kicks in e Press the field to leave this page If you press the field the display looks as follows VOEAL Seu press SINGER VOTICE FX AUTO PITCH FREQUENCY HZ aati Q ea Gm om Om goaa ER fcounucer ER fee QUALIZER This page contains
553. ove below that value are also affected MID GAIN DB 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected MID frequency Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency negative values cut attenuate it LO FREQ HZ 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 400 This parameter allows you to set the cutoff frequency of the low band this is a shelving filter LO GAIN DB 15 15dB Use this parameter to set the level of the selected LO frequency Positive values boost increase the volume of that frequency negative values cut attenuate it To save the settings you have just made press the field There is only one USER memory By saving new set tings you therefore overwrite the previous ones 8 Press the field if you want to set the com pressor or the button to return to the main page Compressor This is a multi band compressor limiter that allows you to process three frequency ranges separately A com pressor reduces high levels peaks and boosts low lev els smoothing out fluctuations in volume 1 2 3 4 5 6 On the EFFECTS page see above press the COM PRESSOR field The display changes to HIAST ERIS Toots BC LEVEL BC GAIN DE REL oO 10 20 RELEASE W ELEASE RELEASE UTI CTTT z e i e i S i 4k k THRSHLO THRSHLO THRSHLO IT aB Press the or OFF field to switch the com pressor on icon lights or off icon goes dark You can also do so
554. ow ing parameter refers to a time or a note value Delay Time msec 0 2600ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Time note Musical Notes Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Delay Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time over which the Delay Time changes from the current setting to a spec ified new setting The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 75 Tape Echo A virtual tape echo that produces a realistic tape delay sound This simulates the tape echo
555. p Gospel Love ROGF Pad With Vintage EPI UPPER ASS oa The button flashes red to indicate the downbeat while Arranger playback is stopped See Flashing Metronome on p 247 for how to switch that indication off If Arranger playback is running the button flashes red on the first and green on the other beats of a bar 3 To quickly return to the default tempo hold down and simultaneously press FAST gt Using the Keyboard parts Your E 80 provides six parts that allow you to play different sounds on the keyboard These parts are called Keyboard parts Let s add a live melody to the accompaniment Playing with an Upper and or Lower part At power on the UP1 part Is automatically switched on and assigned to the entire keyboard That is because the E 80 starts up in EASY SETTING PIANO mode The KBD MODE button also lights 1 Press the PART ON OFF button if it does not light KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN LTT CET MBS LW2 LW 1 UP 3 UP2 UP 1 PART ON OFF 2 Play a few notes on the keyboard The UP1 part s sound is assigned to the entire key board To assign it to the right half press the KBD MODE button 3 Use the MASTER knob to set the E 80 s output volume 4 Use the knob to set the balance between the accompaniment and your live playing Turn it towards KEYBOARD if the notes you play yourself are too soft Turn it towards ACCOMP if your playing is t
556. p MEDIA button Press this button if you wish to save load data from the internal memory a floppy disk or PCMCIA card You will also find data management functions here like deleting files formatting floppies or cards etc page 225 EFFECTS button This button provides access to the display pages where you can set the effects parameters of the E 80 s parts Press it once to select the KEYBOARD effects and twice for the STYLE amp SONG effects LYRICS amp SCORE button Press this button if you want the lyrics contained in the songs to appear in the display At the same time the chords of the notes played by the song parts will also be displayed This however is information that is extracted derived in realtime by the E 80 This function can even display the notes of the selected part as a score This button also provides access to the VIEWER function see p 56 MUSIC ASSISTANT button Press this button to access the MUSIC ASSISTANT environment where you can select Music Style regis trations for a given song you want to play You can also program your own Music Assistant registrations D Beam controller This controller allows you to influence the timbre of the notes you play to control song playback and to create some unique effects All you need to do Is move your hand up down or left right above the two eyes 14 E 2 1 PE 2 4 3 2 1 REGISTRATION Pe TF imiia 6 2 5 1 4 3 2 ai
557. page you press GENDER for example the display changes to mene eee Ter beac Ae MALE SHALL TYPE 7 Press one of the preset fields BAHIA GIRLS for example to select a different harmony type 8 Now press and hold the button or press the field in the display and sing again This sounds more like a choir don t you agree ME cree Gzip EEY oe MALE ENSEMBLE TYPE an me Pe E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start You already know what the MALE and fields are for The 10 preset fields in the middle allow you to select different voicings and voice characters for your choir 9 To sing again without automatic harmonies press the or button again so that neither of them lights Note Obviously you do not have to use a song as backing you can also play the accompaniment yourself or use the Arranger See page 28 and below Who specifies the harmonies Now that you know what the Vocal Harmonist does let us briefly look at how it does that You may have noticed the field in the lower left corner of the above display pages Its current default setting is AUTO This means that during song or Arranger playback the note information contained in the song data or played in the chord recognition area of the keyboard will be used for specifying the pitches of the harmony notes Auto Harmony Note If the song you are playing back contains a Harmony track the harmonies wi
558. pectrum 500Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 1000Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 1250Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 2000Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 3150Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 4000Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Spectrum 8000Hz Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of each frequency band Spectrum Band Width Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Simulta neously adjusts the width of the adjusted ranges for all the frequency bands Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 7 Enhancer This effect controls the overtone structure of the high fre quencies adding sparkle and tightness to the sound Enhancer Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Mix Level 0 127 Level of the overtones generated by the enhancer 0 Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 8 Auto Wah This effect controls a filter to create cyclic change in timbre an automatic wah effect Auto Wah Filter Type LPF BPF Type of filter LPF th
559. per form here must be saved if you want them to be per manent Important remark The MAKEUP TOOLS settings are ignored by the E 80 s 16 track Sequencer or Style Composer unless you burn those settings into your song or Style see Before saving your settings on page 148 Before you begin There are two sets of MAKEUP functions one for songs Standard MIDI Files and another for Styles Because of the striking similarities we will discuss each item only once and only point out aspects that behave differ ently Both environments can be selected via the same button on the front panel which is why we recommend you always look at the information in the top line of the display SONG MAKEUP TOOLS or STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS before making any change whatsoever Here is how to tell those two environments apart STYLE MAKEUP Light blue bar at the top of the page SONG MAKEUP Orange bar at the top of the page Mi Before changing the MAKEUP TOOLS settings of a song e Press the FINDER button You can also press the field on the main page to select songs The display changes to 4 Rane ARME 3 FORCA FORCA MID i fi FRIDAYNI iFRIDAYNI MID Ey HERE WEGO HEREWEGO MI 2 S GLOBAL 47 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the Makeup Tools e Select the memory area that contains the song you want to change press INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY If you press FLOPPY or EXTERNAL ME
560. play icon and rotate the dial or use the DEC buttons The possibilities are V 1 V 2 V 3 This applies vibrato pitch modulation Increasing the value will produce a deeper effect C 1 C 2 C 3 This applies chorus to add depth and Spaciousness to the sound Increasing the value will pro duce a deeper effect 2 Press the field to return to HAR MONIC BARS page M Using a beat box with the organ The only thing that may be missing now is a drum accompaniment Whenever you press the EASY SETTING button the E 80 s chord recognition is auto matically switched on so that the Arranger plays entire accompaniments including melodic parts If you only need a drum accompaniment here is how to proceed 1 Return to the main page by pressing the but ton E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the Harmonic Bars 2 Press the chord field Strummlin Pop Gospel Love ower2 Pad With Vintage EP1 UPPER KY Ac_Bass Jazz Scat The display now changes to ALMANSEY SAnS Sinise ZONE TYPE MODE LEFT MRES JE INTRO ENDING o W Cf erranen g y ARRANGER CHORD If your E 80 displays a different page press the field 3 Press the field in the left column it turns blue 4 Switch off the button icon This means that the Arranger no longer listens to the chords you play All melodic parts of the accom paniment are muted The drums however are still available 5 Press the
561. point is located at the C key below the brown EFFECT slider This key is called the C4 0 Arranger control UP1 UP2 UP3 This split point applies both to the chord recognition area of the Arranger and the SPLIT keyboard mode There may be situations where the automatically assigned range is not what you need In that case you can change the split point 1 Press and hold the KBD MODE button or the SPLIT field in the display E 80 Music Workstation Roland Split and Whole modes The display now looks more or less as follows HAIN SPLIT UPPERS SPLIT 2 Use the MAIN SPLIT lt gt fields to select the new split point The setting range is C 2 B6 The orange keys in the display refer to the right half As you can see the SPLIT POINT is the lowest note of the right half Note Your settings can be written to a User Program and recalled at a later stage See p 125 Using WHOLE mode Whole means that all keys trigger the same part s There is thus no split You can assign up to six parts to the entire keyboard MBS LW1 LW2 UP3 UP2 and UP 1 Press the KBD MODE button Switching parts on and off 2 Press the PART ON OFF buttons of the parts MBS LW2 LW1 etc you want to play via the keyboard and switch off the parts you do not need KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN AF Lit MBS LW2 LW 1 UP3 UP2 UP 1 PART ON OFF If a part is on its button lights Note
562. ppert MIDI TX MIDI RX om Leni mes PL The Keyboard Style and Song parts have the same TX transmission and RX reception parameters so we will discuss them only once except where there are sig nificant differences Note Press the field to recall the default setting for the parameter that is currently selected whose display field lights TX ON RX ON These two button icons allow you to specify whether lights or not dark the part whose name appears in the upper left corner should transmit TX or receive RX MIDI data MIDI TX Mi CHANNEL 1 16 Allows you to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the selected part Unless you have a very good reason to do otherwise we suggest using the same IX and RX channel numbers for a part Note Assigning the same channel to two or more parts is usu ally not a very good idea MLOCAL This is where you can disconnect the part from the internal sound source OFF or re establish that connection ON You can also change the LOCAL setting of all parts simultaneously using MODE Local On Local Off on the first MIDI page E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing MIDI parameters MISHIFT 48 48 This parameter allows you to transpose the note messages before they are transmitted to an external MIDI instrument or computer The maximum possible transposition is four octaves up 48 or down 48 Each step represents a semi tone TX EVENT The 1X
563. press one of the two D keys NOTE OFF means that the strum sounds when you release one of the D keys This selection does not apply to the remain ing STRUMMING keys Press the field to return to the GUITAR MODE page or the button to return to the main page Note All GUITAR MODE settings can be written to a User Pro gram and recalled at a later stage See p 125 gt i E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start Working with the Music Assistant The E 80 s Music Assistant is also related to the Arranger Style section It is a collection of registrations for given songs that select the most appropriate Music Style and sounds for the Keyboard parts along with a whole bunch of other settings The E 80 ships with more than 650 pre programmed Music Assistant registrations and also allows you to program new ones 1 Press the button MUSIC ASSISTANT The display now looks as follows MOS Te ESSA Epsiy Air On G Alex Ragtime Alfie Song All at One Time All But Myself All My Love All OF Myself All Shaken Up Almost Like Love Aloha Hawaii Alone Once Again Als Sterrenhemel T KI r3 2 If the name of the registration you want to use is already displayed press its field The E 80 now recalls the settings for this registration 3 Press the button to start playback of the automatically selected Style If the desired registration is not displayed e Press the lt gt fields in the d
564. r card Press a button of the STYLE pad to select a Music Style family STYLE LIVE DISCO 8 BEAT 16 BEAT BAND ROCK DANCE CONTEMP BALL JAZZ BOSS SSA ROOM BLUES 50 s amp 60 s SAMBA LATIN WORLD Its indicator lights and the display looks as follows S World SIYLE cose scm let Western Movie French Java Epic Movie Irish Holiday 1 Southern Twang Holiday 2 SteamtrainCountr Holiday 3 Posaunenpolka PAGES PAGES 9353 E 80 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions 2 Press the field STYLE re EDIT CUSTOM Pc 7 empty empty empty empty empty PAGE4 In some cases an error message File not found displayed at this point means that the card does not contain the referenced file Note If you do not want to use the Style after all press EXIT In that case the E 80 keeps on using the last Style it did find Disk User You can also load one Music Style directly into the E 80 s Disk User memory and use it You could take advantage of this function whenever none of the CUS TOM memories refer to the Music Style you need for playing a given piece As its name implies you can also use this function for working with Styles on floppy disk Note The Music Style in this memory is only available until you switch off the E 80 or load another Style Be aware that selecting a CUSTOM memory also overwrites the last Disk User Style you selected 1 If necessary
565. r at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist Do not allow any objects e g flammable material coins pins or liquids of any kind water soft drinks ete to penetrate the unit In households with small children an adult should pro vide supervision until the child is capable of following all rules essential for the safe operation of the E 80 Protect the unit from strong impact Do not drop it Do not force the E 80 s power cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be espe S cially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rat ing watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the unit safely WARNING e Before using the E 80 in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Informa tion page A CAUTION e The E 80 should be located so that its location or posi tion does not interfere with its proper ventilation e This unit for use only with Roland keyboard stand KS 12 Use with other stands may result in instability and cause po
566. r down by up to 2 octaves 3 Set the desired TRACK value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons This is where you select the track that should supply the note information for the melody to be generated In most instances 4 is a good choice because that track usually contains the melody This only applies to Standard MIDI Files you play back using the Recorder Note Use the Minus One function to mute the selected track if it should not be played alongside the generated vocal part See page 45 for details Press the and or field if you want to use the melody you play on the keyboard The divide between LEFT and RIGHT follows the split point setting see p 65 152 4 When you are done either press the button to return to the main page or one of the other fields to set those parameters as well Note The and fields allow you to jump to the effects or tone controls If you press the field the display looks as follows AULT airar SUIT GENDER PITCH VIBRATO on rontan time nere RETINE ee eE f r PITCHBEND VIBRATO e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons Here s what the parameters mean GENDER Allows you to change the timbre of the part Negative values produce a masculine effect positive values add feminine qualities This parameter should be set in relation to the COARSE valu
567. r is not displayed press the PAGE fields to jump to another page Some effects have only one parameter page Set the desired value with the dial or the DECI INC buttons and allow you to Specify how strongly the multi effect s output signal should be processed by the Reverb and or Chorus processor If that is unnecessary set both parameters to 0 Press the button to return to the main page T 2 O sound is being emulated This special coloration is applied just before the E 80 s Speakers the OUTPUT MAIN sockets and the PHONES sockets Before looking at these parameters we would like to point out that the E 80 has a SPEAKER OFF switch front right This switch allows you to switch off the internal speakers in which case the indicator lights That may prove handy when the E 80 Is connected to an external sound system and should not use its internal amplification system If the E 80 s speakers don t seem to work check the status of the SPEAKER OFF indicator and deactivate the switch if necessary There are two aspects you can set for the speakers the sound coloration and the intensity of the Digital Bass Enhancer function 1 2 3 4 Press the button to call up the following page MESO AMD SERSAN a OFF ASSIGN eae R M OFF EDIT oO MAS RING DOLS KEYBOARD gt Equalizer COMPRESSOR Se OFF EDIT OFF EDIT TUSER e AUDIC IFx E io 7 S r c e i R MOD
568. r to record using a sound of an optional SRX series expansion board You can select sounds of an SRX series expansion board for any track you like Some boards contain loops or grooves whose tempo is automatically syn chronized to the song tempo Assign the desired sound to the track selected for recording See Selecting sounds for the Keyboard parts on p 29 You can play on the keyboard to check whether the sound matches the mood of the part you wish to record Specify what should be recorded by activating the corresponding RECORDING SELECT button icons For this example switch on NOTE CONTROL CHANGE PROGRAM CHANGE and PITCH BEND See page 177 for an explanation G2 8 Press the RECORDER button 9 The sequencer returns to the beginning of the song measure 1 Press the button The sequencer now counts in one measure after which recording starts Note See page 81 for setting the Count In function 10 Play the new part 11 Press the RECORDER button to stop recording The display changes to SWEETPOT meas 0023 2 J 130 4 4 SOLO MUTE a 2 J FINGERED ES uae OVERDRIVE GT MASTER TRACK dion aera acs ae SRR peepee CONVERTER Hieni The track that contains your new part is highlighted left column for easy identification That row also contains a horizontal bar to signal that the track now contains data 12 Listen to your song page 60 If you like
569. rd and to play the UP3 in the entire right half i e to temporarily deactivate the ARPEGGIO and STRUMM areas After some practice this should allow you to alternate between a guitar and another melodic instrument part 1 Use the PART ON OFF buttons to switch on the part you want to play instead of the Guitar section UP3 would be an obvious choice 2 While the Guitar mode is active switch off the PART ON OFF button KEYBOARD PART TONE ASSIGN MBS LW2 LW 1 UP 3 UP2 UP 1 PART ON OFF The EASY SETTING indicator flashes to signal that the Guitar mode Is being bypassed 3 Play on the keyboard Now the UP3 part sounds UP1 and UP2 are not available 4 Switch on the PART ON OFF button to restore the E 80 s Guitar mode and play the next guitar bit To leave the Guitar mode press an EASY SETTING ARR or PIANO or KBD MODE button SPLIT or WHOLE or the switch icon on the GUITAR MODE page to select Off Alternatively you can select a User Program that doesn t use the Guitar mode see p 126 Guitar Mode Options There are additional functions you can set to fine tune your virtual guitar s behavior Using the DOUBLING sec tion you can even add a second guitar sound 1 On the GUITAR MODE page press the field SOUPE Movs The display changes to SUPT sms Ory ej 2 Press the switch icon of the parameter you want to switch on or off Use the dial or DEC
570. rds the floor Strum down slow 4 strings Eb4 This is similar to the above except that only four notes are played Fifth of the chord Ab4 This key plays the fifth of the last chord you specified the G of a C chord for exam ple Consider combining it with the next function for popular guitar licks based on the alternation between the root and the fifth You can also play them together of course Root of the chord Bb4 Unlike the B3 or the F 4 this key always sounds the root note of the last chord you specified i e a C for a C chord an E for an E chord etc Leaving the E 80 s Guitar mode To leave the Guitar mode press an EASY SETTING ARR or PIANO or KBD MODE button SPLIT or WHOLE or the switch icon on the GUITAR MODE page to select Off E 80 Music Workstation Roland Playing realistic guitar parts Guitar mode Alternatively you can select a User Program that doesn t use the Guitar mode see p 126 Selecting guitar sounds Now that you know how to use some of the Guitar functions let s try these techniques with different sounds Additional playing techniques are discussed under Using the available STRUMM techniques on p 38 1 2 3 Press the EASY SETTING button Note You can also select this page by pressing button gt GUITAR MODE In that case you may need to switch the Guitar mode on using the switch icon see below The indicators of these t
571. ressor Reverb 9 types Delay 9 types Reverb 9 types Delay 9 types Chorus 9 types Reverb 8 types Chorus 8 types MFX A B C 84 types Mastering Tools parametric EO multi band compressor Adjustable via assignable sliders Upper1 Lower1 MBass Percussion Effects Memories 9 harmonic bars 16 5 1 3 8 A 2 2132 13 5 1 13 19 2 harmonic bars 16 8 On Off 2 2 3 4 Slow Fast Leakage Level Overdrive Vibrato Chorus On Off V1 C1 V2 C2 V3 C3 Rotary Speaker Simulation Slow Fast Motor on off via MODULATION lever 8x3 Upper1 Lower1 MBass programmable registrations W Styles More than 350 Styles in 12 families 120 programmable links to additional Styles CUSTOM Unlimited access Style Cover Style Makeup Tools User Style Composer One Touch E Songs Real time SMF player Song Cover Song Makeup Tools Internal memory memory card floppy disk via FINDER 30 ALL Covers 18 Drum Covers 24 Bass Covers Instrument oriented editing 8 tracks with microscope and macro editing 4 programmable registrations per Style 4 programmable MARK amp JUMP locations 30 ALL Covers 18 Drum Covers 24 Bass Covers Instrument oriented editing Lyrics amp chord display score display VIEWER display TXT and BMP DigiScore Other functions Song Finder WE Sequencer PLAY LIST function 99 steps NEXT SONG function Text Import Export amp lyrics syn chronizati
572. riginal program changes of the songs you play back are transmitted via MIDI The E 80 may change sound addresses usually CCOO and CC32 values so as to play back all songs with the best possible quality If you switch this parameter on such real time transforma tions are also transmitted via MIDI in which case the receiving tone generator may drop certain parts if it does not support the requested sound bank If you switch this parameter off the original sound addresses are transmitted to the receiving device But the E 80 s tone generator continues to enhance the songs you play back this parameter only affects MIDI transmission to external instruments WRX SYSEX Use this parameter to specify whether button icon on or not off the E 80 should receive SysEx mes sages from other devices See also the explanation above V Harm parameters The V HARM parameters allow you to specify whether or not the Vocal Harmonist should send and or receive MIDI messages If you need this be sure to also set the correct MIDI channel HUG Soy ame Gem VHarm ZEEE Ef ad ee ore W MIDI TX CHANNEL Use this parameter to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the Vocal Harmonist part 1 16 If you don t want these messages to be transmitted switch off the field The Vocal Harmonist sends and receives only setting changes and note messages that serve as harmony indications The note data of your singing are not tr
573. rive by double clicking on its icon 11 Open the folder you need This depends on whether you want to copy add songs Music Styles User Programs or text files chain Only to computer and only copy JDR X gt Please ignore _ Demno x gt Please ignore Midiset X Please ignore Put New MusicAssistants Here To and from computer L Put New Songs Here To and from computer Put New Styles Here To and from computer A Put Wew UserPrograms Here To and from computer C JROMStyle X p Please ignore E Song X Only to computer and only copy a Style X gt Only to computer and only copy Text _ To and from computer Update x Please ignore A Userprg X Only to computer and only copy 12 Do one of the following e Copy the desired Music Styles from the Styles folder to your computer s hard disk using drag amp drop To copy Styles from your computer to the E 80 drag amp drop them over the Put New Styles Here folder Copy the desired songs from the Song folder to your computer s hard disk using drag amp drop To copy songs from your computer to the E 80 drag amp drop them over the Put New Songs Here folder Copy the desired User Programs from the Userprg folder to your computer s hard disk using drag amp drop To copy User Programs from your computer to the E 80 drag a
574. rived from our successful VK series with a superb internal sound source based on the acclaimed Fantom X series and the possibility to expand your sound arsenal using one or two wave expansion boards of Roland s SRX series New interface concept The E 80 was designed from the ground up to put its massive array of functions at your fingertips The full color touch sensitive screen and the large number of front panel buttons usually provide direct access to the available functions thus doing away with the need to wade through countless menus Parameters that belong together from a musician s point of view are usually located on the same or adja cent display pages while setting them has been greatly simplified with respect to earlier arranger instruments Cover functions and Makeup Tools for Standard MIDI Files and Music Styles Reorchestrating existing Standard MIDI Files and Music Styles has become a breeze thanks to high quality Song and Style Cover presets and an intuitive instrument based set of MAKEUP TOOLS parameters that allow you to revoice your songs and Styles without spending hours editing single events The structure of Standard MIDI Files can be changed in real time thanks to four programmable MARK amp JUMP memories which allows you to play extended versions of prerecorded songs Adaptive Chord Voicing technology The E 80 s Arranger not only boasts a new structure with 4 accompaniment levels 4 Intros and 4
575. rrences of CCOO value 8 to another value e g 16 enter 8 for FROM and 16 for TO Note To use a sound on the optional SRX series wave expansion board you installed set CCOO to 93 and see page 251 137 E 80 Music Workstation Using the 16 track Sequencer CC32 06127 ALL This control change is the so called LSB bank select message Select if the cur rent setting must not change Note References to the sounds of an SRX wave expansion board can be changed by setting CCOO to 93 and CC32 to the value that lets you access the desired group of sounds See page 251 for details PC 1 128 ALL Use this parameter to change the address a k a program change number of a sound e g from 1 to 2 Select if the current setting must not change MINC DEC These are so called relative changes the positive or nega tive value you set here will be added to or subtracted from the original values of the selected track s Use these fields SHIFT CLOCK SHIFT CLOCK allows you to shift the notes within the selected FROM TO range It can be used for two things to increase or decrease existing values for the entire selected track s Volume Expression Panpot Reverb Chorus 127 127 These parameters allow you to add or subtract a given value to from the current Volume Expression Pan Reverb Send or Chorus Send values This may come in handy if the real time changes yo
576. rtion of the low range flanger sound that Is to be returned to the input negative values invert the phase Low Step Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not Hz the low step rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value Low Step Rate Hz 0 10 20 00Hz Rate at which the Steps will cycle for the low range flanger sound Low Step Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note High Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Delay from when the original sound is heard to when the high range flanger sound is heard High Rate sync Hz Note Use this parameter to spec ify whether Note or not Hz the high modulation rate should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the follow ing parameter refers to a speed Hz or a note value High Rate Hz 0 05 10 00Hz Rate at which the high range flanger sound is modulated High Rate note musical notes Rate parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note High Depth 0 127 Modulation depth for the high range flanger sound E 80 Music Wor
577. rts 1 Press the PART button you can also press CHORUS REVERB or PANPOT VOLUME LEVEL RA M ii TAT ait The MUTE message means that the part in question is currently not available You can mute a part by pressing its instrument icon To switch a muted part on press its instrument icon flagged with a MUTE message again 2 Press the button once or twice to assign the VOLUME parameter to the sliders The row of the on screen faders is displayed in light gray Note The assignable slider functions can also be selected by pressing any control in the desired display row VOLUME PANPOT REVERB or CHORUS 3 Move the sliders below the display to set the desired volume for the various Keyboard parts B 16 5 1 3 8 ee FY 2 2 3 2 1 3 5 1 1 3 1 On ouRWN AO EFFECT DBEAM M INT MBS LW 2 LW 1 UP 3 UP 2 UP 1 _ See the names below the sliders inside the grey box in the illustration When the position of the assigned slider does not match the value set for the parameter that is con trolled you first have to move the slider to the posi tion that corresponds to the green dots that sur round the knob icon or that are located next to the fader icon before being able to actually change the value The D BEAM part refers to the sounds that are gener ated when you use the D Beam controller after selecting the DJ GEAR SOUND EFX or INSTRUMENT mode scratches
578. s 1 Press the button The display changes to A meo ja ej ae oee ES set int ES ve ete Ermer Font 1 eee CONTROLLERS 2 Press the field EASY SETTING SELECT OUTPUT MODE Sen ee Local Off 3 Press the OUTPUT or field to specify which socket s to use for MIDI applications The MIDI and USB options are mutually exclusive If you select USB the MIDI sockets are not used while MIDI communication via USB is impossible when you select MIDI 237 E 80 Music Workstation MIDI e The E 80 is supplied with a CD ROM that contains the driver files you may need to install on your com puter for USB MIDI applications Before pressing the field you must install the required drivers on your computer See the operating instructions on the CD ROM 4 Do one of the following Press a MIDI SET 1 8 field to select a MIDI Set Press the SELECT field that corresponds to the section whose default settings you want to load These two fields can be used instead of a MIDI Set If you press Keyboard amp Style Parts the Song parts no longer receive transmit MIDI messages If you press Song Parts the Keyboard and Style parts no longer transmit MIDI messages Press the field to gain access to the MIDI parameters Next use the PAGE fields to select the part or section whose settings you want to change 5 After changing MIDI parameter settings press the field to write them to a MIDI Set page 243 6 Pre
579. s Delay times can be set as a note value of a tempo if you set the Sync parameter above to Note Specify the value of the desired note Center Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Left Level 0 127 Right Level 0 127 Center Level 0 127 Output level of the delay sound Output Mode Speaker Phones Adjusts the method that will be used to hear the sound that is output to the OUTPUT jacks The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 74 Long Time DLY A delay in which the delay time can be varied smoothly and allowing an extended delay to be produced Delay Time sync msec Note Use this parameter to specify whether Note or not msec the delay time should be synchronized to the Arranger or Recorder tempo Depending on your choice the setting range of the foll
580. s 4 and 5 for the other notes whose pitch you want to change Note This pitch is only used when the corresponding button icon lights Do not forget to switch it on 7 Press the and or field to specify which Keyboard parts are affected by the Scale Tune settings Upper 1 2 3 and or Lower 1 2 It is perfectly possible to switch on both fields If neither of them lights all of the E 80 s parts will adopt the Scale Tune setting 8 Press the field if the parts played by the Arranger should be affected by your Scale Tune settings WStoring your new scale If you think you ll need that scale in the future you should memorize or WRITE it 9 Program the scale you wish to save by switching the desired notes on or off see above 10 Press the field in the upper left corner of the display The display now looks as follows 11 Press a MEMORY 1 MEMORY 3 field to save your settings in the corresponding Scale Tune memory 12 Press the button to return to the main page Metronome The E 80 is equipped with a metronome that can be used in various situations To use the metronome here is what you need to do 1 Press the button so that it lights as oBlesiels Seo i oo 2 Start Arranger or song playback and you will hear the metronome 3 Press the button again to switch off the metronome Metronome settings The E 80 also allows you to specify when and how the metronome should sound
581. s pressed controls the resonant sound Pre LPF 16 15000Hz Bypass Frequency of the filter that cuts the high frequency content of the input sound BYPASS no cut Pre HPF 16 15000Hz Bypass Frequency of the filter that cuts the low frequency content of the input sound BYPASS no cut Peaking Freq 200 8000Hz Bypass Frequency of the filter that boosts cuts a specific frequency region of the input sound Peaking Gain 15dB 0 15dB Amount of boost cut produced by the filter at the specified frequency region of the input sound Peaking O 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Width of the fre quency region boosted cut by the Peaking Gain parameter larger values make the region narrower HF Damp 16 15000Hz Bypass Frequency at which the high frequency content of the resonant sound will be cut BYPASS no cut LF Damp 16 15000Hz Bypass Frequency at which the low frequency content of the resonant sound will be cut BYPASS no cut Lid 6 5 4 3 2 1 This simulates the actual changes in sound that occur when the lid of a grand piano is set at different heights EQ Low Frequency 200Hz 400Hz Frequency of the low range EQ EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Amount of low range boost cut EQ Mid Frequency 200 8000Hz Frequency of the midrange EQ 0 Mid Gain 15dB 0 15dB Amount of midrange boost cut 0 Mid Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Width of midrange larger values
582. s 63 Band Step Flg 4 Distortion 34 EH gt Flanger 64 VS Overdrive 5 Phaser 35 EH gt Delay 65 VS Distortion 6 Spectrum 36 Chorus gt DLY 66 GT Amp Simul 7 Enhancer 37 Flanger gt DLY 67 Gate 8 Auto Wah 38 CHO gt Flanger 68 Long Delay 9 Rotary 39 CHO Delay 69 Serial Delay 10 Compressor 40 Flanger DLY 70 MLT Tap DLY 1 Limiter 41 CHO Flanger 71 Reverse DLY 2 Hexa Chorus 42 Isolator 72 Shuffle DLY 3 Trem Chorus 43 Low Boost 73 3D Delay 1 1 1 14 Space D 44 Super Filter 74 Long Time DLY 15 St Chorus 45 Step Filter 75 Tape Echo 16 St Flanger 46 Humanizer 76 LoFi Noise 17 Step Flanger 47 Speaker Sim 77 LoFi Comp 18 St Delay 48 Step Phaser 78 LoFi Radio 19 Mod Delay 49 MLT Phaser 79 Telephone 20 3 Tap Delay 50 Inf Phaser 80 Phonograph 21 4 Tap Delay 51 Ring Modul 81 Step Pitch 22 Time Delay 52 Step Ring 82 Sympa Reso 23 2 Pitch Shifter 53 Tremolo 83 VIB OD Rotary 24 FBK Pitch 54 Auto Pan 84 Center Canc 25 Reverb 55 Step Pan 26 Gate Reverb 56 Slicer 27 0D Chorus 28 OD gt Flanger 29 OD gt Delay 30 DST gt Chorus 57 VK Rotary 58 3D Chorus 59 3D Flanger 60 3D Step Figr To avoid confusion we decided to explain the avail able parameters elsewhere See page 252 Here s how to edit the parameters Press the field of the parameter you wish to change the number of fields and their functions depend on the selected type If the required paramete
583. s filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Level Left 0 127 Adjust the volume of the left delay sound Delay Level Right 0 127 Adjust the volume of the right delay sound Delay Level Center 0 127 Adjust the volume of the center delay sound EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level E 80 Music Workstation Roland Appendix MFX and IFX types and parameters 21 4 Tap Delay Delay with four repetition lines Delay 1 4 200 1000ms note Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Level 1 4 0 127 Output level of the delay sound Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 22 Time Delay This effect controls the delay time and pitch in realtime Lengthening the delay time will lower the pitch and
584. s own programmed reverb settings CHORUS TYPE Chorus broadens the spatial image of the sound and creates a stereo impression You can choose from 8 types of Chorus Chorus These are conventional chorus effects that 1 4 add spaciousness and depth to the sound Feedback This is a chorus with a flanger like effect and a soft sound Fanger This is an effect that sounds somewhat like a jet airplane taking off and landing Short This is a full fledged delay effect that can Delay be used instead of a chorus or flanger As you will see there are a lot of parameters you can program Short DLY This is a short delay with many repeats FBK Original means that the song or Music Style uses its own programmed chorus settings REVERB LEVEL amp CHORUS LEVEL These parameters allow you to modify the output level of the Reverb or Chorus processor SONG VOLUME or STYLE VOLUME This parameter allows you to set the overall volume of the selected song or Style if you think it is too loud soft compared with other songs or Styles TEMPO Allows you to change the song s or Style s tempo J 20 250 TRANSPOSE only for songs This parameter allows you to transpose all song parts except the drums up to 12 semitones 1 octave up or down This value is written to the song data and used every time you play back this song 147 E 80 Music Workstation Song and Style Makeup Tools Before saving your settings
585. s parameter allows you to transpose the harmony voices one octave up or down Use it if you think the arrangement becomes a bit cluttered or to achieve a special effect If you press the field i pm an Om Gm Qm Press the field to select this page The lowest note played by the selected song part or yourself is assigned to Part 1 while the second is assigned to Part 2 e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons GENDER Allows you to change the timbre of the part Negative values produce a masculine effect positive values add feminine qualities This parameter should be set in relation to the COARSE value if you want to achieve a realistic effect PANPOT Allows you to set the placement of the corre Sponding part in the stereo sound image This is only meaningful if you connect the E 80 to a stereo amplifier L64 corresponds to hard left O to dead center and R63 to hard right VOLUME Allows you to set the level of the correspond ing part Be aware that even the highest value produces no audible effect if the knob is set all the way to OFF Press the field to jump to the fol lowing page SMIACE Shy SINGLE COMMON EEN PITCH E PORTAM TIME RND TUNING Eero ferroneeno e Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and set the desired value with the dial or th
586. s short for Clock Pulse Time the smallest unit used by the E 80 There are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4 4 bar Change this setting only if your edit operation should Start after the selected beat TO By default the TO position Is set to the last event of the selected track or the last event of the longest track when you select ALL BAR 1 last measure of the track or song This is where you specify the bar position of the last measure to be edited BEAT 1 number of beats per bar Specifies the beat position The number of available beats depends on the time signature in the selected area CPT 1 119 Refers to the last clock that should be affected by the edit operation Change this setting only if your edit operation should not end exactly on the selected beat IBIAS 99 99 The BIAS parameter allows you to specify by how much the velocity values should change Select a positive value to increase the velocity the value is added to the velocity value of the affected notes or a negative value to decrease the velocity values that value is subtracted Select 0 if you prefer to work with the MAGNIFY parameter see below 135 E 80 Music Workstation Using the 16 track Sequencer This parameter can be particularly useful for velocity switched sounds slightly reducing or increasing the overall velocity allows you to shift all notes to the other sound Note Even the highest positive or negat
587. s to close the pop up window without applying your changes Note Events inserted with PLACE EVENT are added to any events that may already exist in that area Existing events are thus not pushed towards the end of the song E 80 Music Workstation Roland Style Converter Style Converter The E 80 s Style Converter is an easy and intuitive tool for creating your own Music Styles based on one of your own songs or a Standard MIDI File created by someone else In either case it is enough to play back the Standard MIDI File once to transfer its data into the F 80 s song RAM memory where you can use the Style Converter You may want to edit the song before con verting parts of it into a Music Style See Editing one or several tracks TRACK EDIT on p 179 and GLOBAL CHANGE on p 187 for details General considerations Here are a few guidelines for converting song parts to a Music Style e See Concept on p 201 and Looped vs one shot patterns on p 201 for the different pattern types e The Music Style created using the Style Converter can be used in Arranger mode not in 16 track Sequencer mode Music Styles are accompaniment patterns If the new Style should be generally usable i e for any song of a given genre try avoid chord changes in the basic patterns MAIN 1 4 Remember that you can transpose your Styles in real time by playing differ ent chords in the chord recognition area Also it is usually w
588. s to select a song track in the list to the left Note See Arranger parts on p 82 if you re not sure what the abbreviations in the Trk fields stand for Note If you assign several song tracks to the same Style track a bullet appears next to the Style track name in the table to indicate that the Style track in question is already assigned to another song track Though this is perfectly possible the result is usually not convincing If necessary press the field to return to the default assignments if that produces the best result after all Auditioning the tracks Press the field to jump to the first note of the selected song track the one that appears on a blue background Playback starts automatically from that point and you will hear all song tracks Press the RECORDER button to stop playback or to start it again Note If the selected track contains no data at all playback is Started from the very first song measure W Muting tracks Sometimes it may be necessary to mute certain parts so as to concentrate on what the other tracks do and to decide which tracks should be converted Into a Music Style To do so press the field and then the lines of the song tracks you don t want to hear Such tracks are flagged with an M Press the field again to switch off the func tion of the same name W Solo 6 To listen to one track in isolation press the field and the field of the track you want to solo the
589. s well save the song under its original name Besides you can also save the song to a different memory area card or disk See page 52 for how to change the name Press the field If you selected the memory area that contains the original version the following message Is displayed SAS SOS A file of this name already exists Overwrite e Press the field to overwrite the old version Press the field if you do not want to overwrite this song and return to the main page Then enter a different name or select a different media If the song doesn t exist in the selected memory area the data are saved 9 Press the button to return to the main page Working with the Song Finder The Song Finder allows you to quickly locate the songs you want to play back You will see in a minute that it is far more powerful when you work with the internal memory or memory cards than with floppy disks 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to SONG LIST Bi Bin Ene Qaa revere a NAY j FIRSTDAY MID FORCA iFORCA MID ff FRIDAYNI FRIDAYNI MID En HEREWEGO iHEREWEGO MI OPTIONS A FOUND 4 3 I GLOBA Songs that also contain lyrics information are flagged by means of a Ew icon The note means that the file in question also contains Play amp Search information 2 Specify the memory area that contains the song you need EXTERNAL MEMORY FLOPPY or INTERNAL MEMORY The displ
590. s you play during Arranger playback it often leads to odd jumps of certain parts Nearest Refers to a new more musical system for real time shifts of the recorded Style notes during Arranger playback Let us first look at an illustration Recorded strings track Result with Degree Oy g Chords played in the recognition area This new system is called Adaptive Chord Voicing The notes of the melodic Style tracks are compared against the chords played in the recognition area If the next chord you play contains the note the selected part is already sounding based on the previous chord that note is maintained If the new chord does not contain that note the Style part in question uses the closest Nearest note In the exam ple above the G is closer to the A sounded by the strings part than the C This produces a more musical behavior than any other system on the market Both Degree and Nearest allow you to specify the note range Limit Low and Limit High the selected part may play Notes that would fall outside that range during Arranger playback are automatically transposed to values inside the selected range Rather than specifying two note values you can also choose Std which means that the E 80 decides automatically when extremely high or low notes need to be shifted down or up by one or several octaves Other edit operations The fi
591. se the PAGE 1 PAGE 3 fields to go to another page ca e Instrum In this case the D Beam will play musical notes The pitch and chords of those patterns depend on the notes you play on the keyboard Please try out the options on offer It s the quickest way to find out how they sound and work DIBEAM E ED aa Dea If necessary use the PAGE 1 and PAGE 2 fields to switch pages Controls The options on this page allow you to control one of the E 80 s functions BY Be AUN D Modulation Chord 1 Octy Chord 2 Octy Be GD EI If necessary use the PAGE 1 PAGE 4 fields to go to another page Note If you plan to use the D Beam Controller while control ling the Arranger it is probably a good idea to activate its Hold function page 89 4S E 80 Music Workstation Using the performance functions Start Stop Depending on the current condition of the Arranger running or stopped one move inside the D Beam s range stops or starts it A second movement will start or stop it again Play Stop Depending on the current condition of the Recorder running or stopped one move inside the D Beam s range stops or starts it A second movement will start or stop it again Fade OUT Fade Outs are extremely popular in pop music and the E 80 allows you to end a song just like the original To do so move your hand inside the D Beam s range T
592. section of a Roland RE 201 Space Echo Mode S M L S M S L M L S M L Combination of playback heads to use Select from three different heads with different delay times S short M middle L long Repeat Rate 0 127 Tape speed Increasing this value will shorten the spacing of the delayed sounds Intensity 0 127 Amount of delay repeats Bass 15dB 0 15dB Boost cut for the lower range of the echo sound Treble 15dB 0 15dB Boost cut for the upper range of the echo sound Head S Pan L64 0 63R Head M Pan L64 0 63R Head L Pan L64 0 63R Independent panning for the Short middle and long playback heads Tape Distortion 0 5 Amount of tape dependent distor tion to be added This simulates the slight tonal changes that can be detected by signal analysis equipment Increas ing this value will increase the distortion Wow Flutter Rate 0 127 Speed of wow flutter com plex variation in pitch caused by tape wear and rotational irregularity Wow Flutter Depth 0 127 Depth of wow flutter Echo Level 0 127 Volume of the echo sound Direct Level 0 127 Volume of the original sound Level 0 127 Output level 76 LoFi Noise In addition to a lo fi effect this adds various types of noise such as white noise and disc noise LoFi Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Degrades the sound quality The sound quality grows poorer as this value is increased Post
593. section provides a number of filters that allow you to specify whether the messages in question should be transmitted ON or not OFF Press the field to open the following pop up window MUG Seay f YEevEnaon i f ore i m cane f w cverem i G r f 5 PROGRAM a A CHANGE PANPOT RPH f l f f MaL EXPRESS NRPN G g F G MODUL REVERE SOFT SYSER G f f f VOLUME CHORUS CAF cco pams We Press the field to switch all button icons on the corresponding messages are then transmitted Press to switch all button icons off Press to return to the page where you came from You can also switch the following button icons on off individ ually PROGRAM CHANGE Program change and bank select CC00 CC32 messages These messages are used to select sounds and Drum Sets as well as User Programs see below Bank Select messages are control change mes sages which were added when it became clear that the number of sounds that can be selected using program change messages 128 was no longer sufficient to access all sounds of a given instrument The E 80 boasts over 1100 sounds and 54 Drum Sets PITCH BENDER Pitch Bend messages MODUL Modulation messages CCO1 VOLUME Volume messages CC07 PANPOT Pan pot messages CC10 EXPRESSION Expression messages CC11 HOLD Hold Sustain Damper messages CC64 SOSTENUTO Sostenuto messages CC66 SOFT Soft messages CC67 REVERB
594. series wave expansion boards the same boards that can be Installed in the synthesizers of Roland s Fantom X series Some boards contain audio loops grooves that are automatically synchronized to the song or Style tempo allowing you to add audio to your sequencer or style data Amplification The E 80 is fitted with the finest amplification system Roland has ever developed for its arranger keyboards On top of that the Keyboard and Song Style sections have their own set of Mastering Tools effects while there are also a Speaker Simulation and an adjustable Digital Bass Enhancer function for minute fine tuning of the E 80 s overall sound A convenient switch allows you to switch off the inter nal speakers when you don t need them Professional Vocal Harmonist Another highlight of the E 80 Is its Vocal Harmonist that adds automatic harmonies to your singing com plete with several modes for transforming your or someone else s voice This implies of course that you can connect an optional Roland DR 10 or DR 20 microphone to the E 80 Other signal sources synthesizers etc can also be connected Note that a separate EXTERNAL AUDIO IN part with its own effect section is also provided allow ing you to add external line level signals of a sound module CD player etc to your playing The signals generated by your singing and or the Vocal Harmonist can either be added to the signals of the MAIN OUTPUT sockets or transmit
595. sewhere 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to USE pearly CIS 2 Select the internal memory by pressing INTERNAL MEMORY Music Assistant registrations must reside in the E 80 s internal memory If necessary first copy User Programs from a memory card to the E 80 s internal memory see p 135 3 Press the field followed by MUSIC ASSISTANT MARK USE PRUSH Orley ks 4 Use the Finder functions to locate the desired User Program see p 127 5 Press the field of a User Program that should appear in the MUSIC ASSISTANT window It is flagged with an MA symbol If you pressed the wrong field just press it again to remove the MA symbol 6 If necessary select additional User Programs 7 Press the button to return to the main page 137 E 80 Music Workstation Working with User Programs Editing Music Assistant registrations The E 80 also allows you to edit certain aspects of existing Music Assistant registrations 1 Press the button MUSIC ASSISTANT The display now looks as follows MESIE ASSP Te CIs amam Air On G Alex Ragtime Alfie Song All at One Time All But Myself All My Love All OF Myself All Shaken Up Almost Like Love Aloha Hawaii Alone Once Again ap e N O O O O T E T T of loo folio jo jo 5 5 Als Sterrenhemel Mi Deleting Music Assistant entries The DELETE function allows you to dispose of the selected Mus
596. shorten ing it will raise the pitch Delay Time 200 1000ms note Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time over which the Delay Time changes from the current setting to a spec ified new setting The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels 0 Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 23 2 Pitch Shifter A Pitch Shifter changes the pitch of the original sound This 2 voice effect contains two pitch shifters and adds two trans posed copies to the original sound Pitch Shift Mode 1 5 Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response but steadier pitch Pitch A Coarse 2
597. sic Style consists of up to eight parts ADR Accompaniment drums This part takes care of the rhythm section It triggers the drum and percussion sounds of the Drum Set assigned to the ADR part ABS Accompaniment bass This part plays the bass line of the Music Style you select ACC1 ACCE These are the melodic accompaniment parts Depending on the Music Style you selected only some of them actually play something which can be anything from a piano line a guitar line an organ line etc to synthesizer chords Not all ACC parts play chords though The ABS and ACC1 6 parts rely on the chord or note information you play in the chord recognition area page 88 i e the keyboard zone you assign to the Arranger Playback functions Style Control Starting a Music Style Music Styles can be started in several ways 1 Press the EASY SETTING button its indicator lights e Press the button it flashes to start the Arranger right away Note See Song Arranger Start Priority on p 246 if Arranger playback does not start If you start the Arranger without playing a chord in the chord recognition area beforehand you will only hear the drums of the selected Style In most cases however the E 80 has already memorized a chord so that you will hear the full accompaniment _or Stop playback of the current Style see below press the button so that it lights one of the VARIATION 1 lt 4 buttons to select the
598. sional effects a Vocal Harmonist the Cover functions first introduced on Roland s unique DisCover 5 keyboard a Guitar mode There s simply too much to mention in this introduction Much care has been taken to facilitate access to all those countless functions which is why the E 80 comes with a full color touch screen and a user interface that walks you through anything you may want to do with your E 80 To get the most out of the E 80 and to ensure many years of trouble free service we urge you to read through this Owner s Manual thoroughly To avoid confusion let s agree to use the word button for all keys on the front panel and use key only when refer ring to the E 80 s keyboard To save space and time let us agree to use the word song when referring to Standard MIDI Files Before using this instrument carefully read the Important notes on p 11 They provide information concerning the proper operation of the E 80 Be sure to keep this manual in a safe place for future reference Copyright 2006 ROLAND EUROPE All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of Roland Europe S p a E 80 Music Workstation Features Features A comprehensive arranger instrument The E 80 is quite simply a superlative instrument with the most advanced and best sound generation technol ogy Roland has to offer It combines Roland s Virtual ToneWheel technology de
599. sound effects other noises See page 73 for details Volume of the HARMONIC BAR parts As you know see p 33 the UP1 LW1 and MBS parts can be used as virtual organ parts in which case they control a separate sound engine that Is based on Roland s Virtual ToneWheel modeling technology To simulate the behavior of a real organ the level of the HARMONIC BAR parts cannot be set individually You need to use the sliders below the display for that to set the volume of each individual footage If at least one of the eligible Keyboard parts controls the HARMONIC BAR sound engine the mixer looks as follows Fe PUIA Be PETAR P DARD PARTS ya IAS AAA EFFECT k ERS dak aq la ee RA a y 4 The fader and pan knob icons of the Keyboard part s assigned to the HARMONIC BAR sound engine disap pear while a new fader icon appears in the leftmost module In this example all three parts UP1 LW1 and MBS are used as HARMONIC BAR parts Use the slider below the display to change the volume of the HARMONIC BAR section i e all three eligible parts Note The stereo position PANPOT of the HARMONIC BAR parts cannot be changed 4 After setting the levels you can use the knob to establish the correct balance between the Keyboard parts and the Recorder Arranger Mixing as you may know entails a lot more than just getting the balances right It also involves speci fying the stereo placement of sounds and the amount o
600. ss the button to return to the main page Working with presets The opening MIDI page contains two big fields with preset settings All you need to do Is press them to restore the default settings for the sections or aspects in question Keyboard amp Style Parts This field recalls the factory MIDI settings for the Keyboard parts UP1 2 3 LW1 2 MBS MELODY INT and the Style parts ADrum ABass Acc1 6 The most important and practical use for this field is resetting the MIDI transmit receive channels of the Keyboard and Style parts and to switch off MIDI transmission reception of the Song parts Note This field applies to both reception RX and transmission TX The E 80 indeed allows you to set separate TX and RX chan nels for each part Song Parts This field restores the factory settings for the E 80 s Song parts and switches off the MIDI trans mission and reception of the Keyboard and Style parts MODE Local On Local Off These settings allow you to establish or remove the connection between the E 80 s keyboard Arranger Recorder and the internal tone gen erator If you select default playing on the E 80 s keyboard or playing back a song Style causes the corre sponding notes to sound If you select Local Off the corresponding MIDI messages are no longer sent to the 233 internal tone generator but they are still transmitted to the MIDI OUT socket or USB port and hence to external MIDI instrume
601. ss the field followed by the field SAYS USE PRSH SS KI r3 a ast 3 Select the target media INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY memory card Note User Program Sets cannot be saved to floppy disk 4 Enter the name for the file e Use the and fields to select the position for which you wish to enter a new character e Use the alohanumeric keypad to enter the desired characters This keypad works exactly like the keypad of a cellphone you may have to press an alphanu meric field several times to select the desired charac ter or number e The field allows you to switch between upper case and lowercase characters e The field allows you to delete the character indicated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters e Press to insert a blank or the number 0 e f you forgot to insert a character use or to select the position where the missing character should be inserted Then press Insert followed by the character you wish to insert Note The E 80 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names So choose whichever is more convenient or clear Note The E 80 allows you to use long file names but some windows are relatively short so that only part of the names can be displayed We therefore suggest using short file names maximum 18 characters whenever possible 5 Press the field to save the data Note Saving User Program Sets may take in excess of
602. ssible injury gt e Always grasp only the plug on the power supply cord when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this unit 8 e Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entan gled Also all cords and cables should be placed out of the reach of children gt e Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on the unit e Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this unit B e fyou need to move the instrument take note of the pre cautions listed below Make sure to have a firm grip to protect yourself from injury and the instrument from damage e Disconnect the power cord e Disconnect all cords coming from external devices e Remove the music stand e Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet e Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area disconnect the power cord from the outlet e Should you remove screws make sure to put them ina safe place out of children s reach so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally E 80 Music Workstation Contents i Contents PCAUNGS enni ra bed Eaa 4 Vocal Harmonist TUNCHONG ccaser dione cheewares 46 Se ea anes aoee cece sos 46 a EAE NORS a T eon es i Adding ene tO your SINGING cee eee 47 Panel descriptions 000e0e eee eee 13 Who specifies the harmonies 0 000
603. ssor for all Keyboard parts EQ Separate for each Keyboard part Equalizer and compressor com mon to all Keyboard parts Mastering Tools Shared by these two sections but separate from Keyboard effects Style Song Effects Reverb Chorus 3x MFX A B C Three processors for all Style and Song parts EQ Separate for each Style Song instrument and each drum instrument Equalizer and compressor com mon to all Style Song parts Mastering Tools Audio Effects IFX Affects the signals received via the AUDIO IN sockets Harmonic Bars Overdrive Vibrato Rotary Exclusive to this section Speaker VOICE Reverb Delay Compres Talk Singer Auto Pitch Voice sor Gate FX HARMONY Reverb Delay Chorus Vocoder Small Ensemble Speaker Modeling Common to all parts and sections The reason why we are talking about processors is that most of them can be used in various ways by selecting a Type The MFX and IFX are the most versa tile processors because they can use one of 84 types while other processors provide 8 or 9 possibilities Only the Compressor and Gate processors are dedicated effects they only function as compressor or gate Note See page 151 for how to set the VOCAL HARMONIST equalizers Note The effects of the Harmonic Bars sections are covered In the section Using effects on p 34 TOG Mixing Keyboard parts Here s how to set the balance and other mix related parameters of the Keyboard pa
604. ssscssst iei 182 183 189 Di esrrrrrerr r rrr re 222 WU eersssssse sa aja aaeeea 211 WAY S 242 Num MOCK cvscervesencaaan 96 129 160 O OCTAVE si naa ees a wes 23 67 74 143 152 FUG PUG cre rr ccenecmenaneeanse 49 Harmony s 0 lt 4402n0n lt wecen eee ene 154 SCQUENICE Ssanssacecocecaceseces 176 Ween EREE EE 242 User oE nescrise retedeseeeeus 205 VOCOG ED ear vate ctrinnoineie et 153 CO Ir asta ee eter ase ov eer be argc geen oseaanciears 44 One Touch 0ee eee eee 29 87 Options Arrange eee 90 Guitar MOdES sa22s00ecencdiddiews 39 DOMGrs t5c04 fe45 esse esses eee ae 160 Style ANGER nn ncnonnneeedeeaaaeds 96 User Proga cc seeeuesscauesescs 134 VICWEL oc ee eee 57 58 Orgase eenaa naaa EEE 33 Oriental SCOCSs ucevcscevesiaeercnnoes 79 Clit on eee renee 52 147 COVE oudcnedevetadeesearauveeace 44 OUUTE 237 LEV cecnddeneceeyeredesers sawwen 47 Ue e EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE 237 OUTSIDE eia 181 182 214 OVERDRIVE 225544445444405eese00e0n 34 P wea T APPETITE E EEEE EE 161 A E E E ae ee 71 BeA EREEREER AEE 27 Page LUME sssssssssssssaiaidadi 57 58 Palette 0 cece eee eee 142 245 Makeup 6 6 ae 142 Pan Delay 0000 116 123 147 OUI Gaerne ce em ar 39 a EEE 107 Panel descriptions n nanna pee eeaes 13 PanlOlamessasensasaeees 107 140 143 Drum Instrument 145 Harmin 2 ui canedeeeeganreauwss 154 Style Composer 00 211 VOCOUEl o oe iid tid 153 Paperclip Ga aannh
605. sting files on the destination TO media should not be copied only files with original names will be copied in that case The data are copied and a Function Complete mes sage confirms the end of the operation 7 Press the button to return to the main page Editing an Index All User Programs in the E 80 s internal memory are already assigned to one of eight categories You can change those assignments and even edit the Index names Furthermore you can copy an Index entry along with all its User Program assignments to a dif ferent entry 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to USE pearly CPS E 80 Music Workstation Working with User Programs 2 Specify the memory area or INTERNAL MEMORY 3 Press the field in the top left corner If the field is currently selected the display looks as follows SaR peer RIDUS Celebration Old amp Gold Can Cen arc Top 40 The Index Edit functions are only available for real Index categories So 4 Press the field of the Index category you wish to edit User anojan DS Top 40 My Favorites 5 Select the edit function you need by pressing its field W Rename This function allows you to change the name of the selected Index e Press the field g e Cee ox as inne ta otc er J e Enter the new name 16 characters See Enteri
606. switch it on You can also switch both HOLD fields on 5 Play a short note in the left half of the keyboard and release the key This note goes on sounding until you press another note or chord in the left half of the keyboard Note These parameters can also be switched on and off using an optional FC 7 pedal see p 76 or footswitch see p 78 6 Press the button to return to the main page _ Tone Edit editing Keyboard parts Your E 80 allows you to edit certain parameters that affect the way a Keyboard part sounds by adjusting their brilliance their modulation speed Vibrato Rate and so on The parameters discussed here only apply to the fol lowing Keyboard parts Upper1 Upper2 Uppers Lower1 Lower2 M Bass Be sure to select the part you wish to change before actually editing it The Harmonic Bar section cannot be edited here see page 33 for how to do that Assigning another Tone to a Keyboard part resets the TONE EDIT parameters Note All TONE EDIT parameters are relative parameters whose values are added to or subtracted from the preset sound parame ter values That is why you can specify both positive more and negative less values Note The TONE EDIT settings can be saved to a User Program 1 Press the button The display changes to GUITAR K TUNING Caii UITART Beam REN sprite Pari vocal p eas TOUCH HARMONIST kai r ARRANGER STYLE 4x N SETTING
607. t INTRO MAIN 6 For Fill Ritardando The FILL RIT function is suitable for ballads It causes the next Fill In to slow down ritardando e Switch on the button STYLE CONTROL BASS SYNC ___ INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START STOP VARIATION AUTO START FILL IN STOP E 80 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions e Press the ARRANGER SETTING field followed by the ARRANGER OPTIONS field AiAIGS SIME TEMPO CHANGE FILL IN TEMPO F HALF BAR ET LOCK FILL RITARDANDO FILL RIT e Start Arranger playback and press the but ton icon to switch it on e Press the and a VARIATION 1 4 button The E 80 plays a Fill In The tempo slows down while the fill is being played At the end of the fill the Style returns to the previously set tempo this is called a tempo Press the button icon to switch on the Half Bar function Certain pop songs in 4 4 contain bars that only last two beats The usual place for such a bar is between the first and the second verse Another favorite position for halved bars is at the end of a chorus or the bridge Pressing this button icon does not change Style playback right away Only when a Fill In or another MAIN division starts will the Half Bar function be activated and play half the number of beats of the accompaniment pattern you selected 7 Press the button to return to the main page Working with external Styles Using
608. t then try again See Format on p 231 Note If you want to save the song under its current name or the name assigned by default New Song you can skip steps 4 5 You need to give your song two names a SONG NAME and a FILE NAME The FILE NAME is the name the E 80 uses for locating the song The SONG NAME on the other hand is displayed in the Song Finder Dee 8 r aa a EE E E el ra Ses eec ee 3 Press the button icon E 80 Music Workstation Roland Recording your music 4 Enter the name e Move the cursor to the desired position using and gt e Enter the character for that position using the alpha numeric keypad In many instances you will have to press a field several times to select the desired char acter e Use the field to alternate between capitals and small letters e Press the field to delete the character indi cated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters e Press to insert a space e Press to insert a character at the current posi tion All characters behind this position move one position further to the right 5 Press the field and enter the file name Here you can enter 18 characters All characters will be capitals 6 Press the field to save your song The display tells you that the data are being saved after which it returns to the SAVE SONG page 7 Press the button to return to the main page or the RECORDER button to add
609. t MIC INPUT socket See page 46 2 TEMPO section button Press this button to switch the internal metronome on or off The remaining buttons allow you to set the tempo of the metronome the Arranger or the recorder sequencer T G VOICE AUTO PITCH SINGER G OFF MAX TALK FX G VOCAL HARMONIST VOICE HARMONY OFF MAX VOCODER SMALL ENSEMBLE TONE EFFECTS MULTI MELODY FX INTELL EFFECTS INPUT GAIN V LINK GENERAL LYRICS e 1 FUNCTION amp E TOUCH 3 4 ele KEYBOARD PART section The TONE ASSIGN buttons are used to specify the Keyboard part you wish to assign a different sound to page 29 Keyboard parts are the parts you can play yourself The E 80 contains many other parts that are played automatically by the Arranger or Recorder The PART ON OFF buttons allow you to switch the desired Keyboard parts on and off ONE TOUCH section These buttons allow you to select the desired One Touch memory There are four memories per Music Style They work a lot like the User Programs because they assign different sounds and effects settings to the Keyboards parts and carry out some other changes See page 87 TONE EFFECTS section Press the button to add a different effect to the Keyboard parts page 111 This processor is also available for the D Beam and the MELODY INTELL parts Press the button so that it lights to add an automatic counter me
610. t settings are only displayed after you have played it back at least once The same applies to Styles IG Reverb for Style Song instruments mee REVERE LEVEL SIVLE ONGREVERB REVERB TYPE Press the field of the effect type you wish to use The options are ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 These types simulate the reverb characteristics of a room The higher the number 1 2 or 3 the bigger the room becomes HALL1 HALL2 These types simulate the reverb of a small 1 or large 2 concert hall and thus sound much bigger than the Room types above PLATE Digital simulation of a metal plate that is some times used for creating reverb effects Works well for percussive sounds DELAY A delay effect no reverb Works a lot like an echo effect and thus repeats the sounds PAN DELAY This is a stereo version of the above Delay effect It creates repetitions that alternate between the left and right channels Press the field and set the desired value with the dial or the DEC INC buttons This parameter specifies the output level of the Reverb processor Setting this parameter to 0 means that your no longer hear the effect in ques tion By contrast setting a REVERB parameter on the mixer page for Styles to 0 means that only the selected instrument is no longer processed by the effect while the remaining instruments are Note See Mixing Song or Style parts on p 140 for details Press to r
611. t the Index names Furthermore you can copy an Index entry along with all its song assign ments to a different entry 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to m On A RAME E pg ARTIST he GENRE ae FPE Ee e FEYER FEVER MID J FORCA FORCA MID Fes FRIDAYNI iFRIDAYNIMID fE HERE WEGO iHEREWEGO MI 2 Specify the memory area EXTERNAL MEMORY or INTERNAL MEMORY 3 Press the field in the top left corner If the field is currently selected the display looks as follows The Index Edit functions are only available for real Index categories So 4 Press the field of the Index category you wish to edit SOvis ives 5 Select the edit function you need by pressing its field M Rename This function allows you to change the name of the selected Index e Press the field SOI jy lyse Sees e Enter the new name 12 characters See Entering characters on p 160 Note The field allows you to switch between uppercase and lowercase characters e Press the EXECUTE field to confirm the new name E 80 Music Workstation Roland Working with the Song Finder W Edit This function allows you to assign the desired songs to the selected Index or to remove existing song assignments e After performing step 4 above press the field INWEA Dra Ct T rz e Use the FINDER SONG NAME ARTIST and fields to locate the desired file
612. t the phase Flanger Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume balance between the direct sound D and the flanger sound W Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS 253 Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W D0O 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 38 CHO gt Flanger This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in series Chorus Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Modulation frequency of the chorus effect Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity of the cho rus effect Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Modulation frequency of the flanger effect
613. t tteseeee22222245 162 Play List TUNCUON e acct auta Se btn tenet eee 164 Programming Play SiS sesia sssr 164 Editing Play Lists 2 0 ccc cece eee eee eee 165 UPS WAGE Nel ISS oe ae ee sec es aceasta 167 Managing Play LISS cs 44 eeeeeeessses en 167 s PAUNO EVICSs a26 e246 eeo k eae eee eeeeemeee 169 Adding Lyrics to aSONG 0 eee eee eee 169 Exporting Lyrics data as text file 171 Using the 16 track Sequencer 173 About the sequencer s main page 173 General considerations 000000e 173 Example 1 Recording a song from scratch 174 PreparatiOnS eee ee aakee ee ayeancsarnareaaane 175 E 80 Music Workstation Contents Example 2 Adding tracks aideeeens nidacdcen aad 177 SVOU SONG esere LEESE 178 Editing 16 track SONgS 0 cece eee eee 179 Easy editing and useful functions covevvcdeanedly ss 179 Editing one or several tracks TRACK EDIT 179 Editing song data using Microscope Edit 193 General notes about MICRO EDIT ccicccore tetra cacacararere a axe 194 SOL Rac E NETE oe oa en eee eee 195 Other edit operationS rT 195 Sle CONVENE occccacdaovt hear diwadew ean thems 197 General considerans wcccacucdsadagdaadadeudsse 197 Using the Style Converter unannnannnaanannn 198 Auditioning the ttak scssssissssrssssssssaisaain 198 15 Programming Styles Style Composer 201 COE ee ere a I E 201 Recording Styles from
614. tch Bend These messages are used for temporary changes to the pitch of the notes being played at that time Pitch Bend messages can be positive higher or negative lower Setting range 128 128 Alteration Mode This is a new event that allows you to specify how the notes recorded for a Style track will be used during Arranger playback See below for details Note This parameter is not available for ADrums tracks NRPN Dr This NRPN command is only available for ADrums tracks It inserts CC99 with the value 24 CC98 37 as well as CCO6 64 While the CC99 value cannot be changed the CC98 value can be set to 37 38 40 41 52 56 57 or 65 these are note numbers of the drum sounds whose pitch can be changed The CC06 value which changes the pitch can be set to 0 127 whereby 64 means that the pitch remains unchanged Editing events Mi Editing Pitch Bend messages Pitch Bend messages can be positive or negative the range is 128 128 The value 0 means that the pitch of notes being played in that area is not altered If a Pitch Bend occurrence is not reset to 0 at some Stage all notes will keep sounding flat when you no longer want them to Mi Editing control changes These messages CC can be set to the desired value 0 127 when the corresponding effect is needed but they also need to be reset to 0 to avoid unpleasant surprises E About the Note messages As stated above note messages comprise
615. te changes you don t add or subtract values you replace them with other values This system is only available for messages that allow you to select sounds or sound banks namely CC00 04127 ALL This control change is the so called MSB bank select message It allows you to select the Capital Tone select O of a sound address if you don t want to use variations or to select another varia tion level Select if the current setting must not change CC32 06127 ALL This control change is the so called LSB bank select message Select if the cur rent setting must not change PC 1 128 Use this parameter to change the address a k a program change number of a sound e g from 1 to 2 2 1 3 W INC DEC These are so called relative changes the positive or nega tive value you set here will be added to or subtracted from the original values of the selected track s Use these fields to increase or decrease the existing values for the entire selected track s Expression Panpot Reverb Chorus 127 127 These parameters allow you to add or subtract a given value to from the current Expression Pan Reverb Send or Chorus Send values This may come in handy if the real time changes you recorded turn out to be too high or too low Alteration Mode Nearest Degree This message type is only available for melodic Style tracks i e not for ADrums or ABass tracks
616. te a few calculations Furthermore the User Program Finder database needs to be updated Be sure to wait until the Operation Successful mes Sage appears Note The E 80 creates no List file The newly acquired User Programs can be selected via the Finder though or assigned to one of the 144 memory slots of the currently active List Press the button to return to the main page E 80 Music Workstation Archiving data using a computer USB Archiving data using a computer USB The E 80 s USB port can be used for exchanging files with a computer or for MIDI communication Here we will look at the archiving functions which are often called Data Storage See page 237 for the MIDI functions You can transfer the following file types from the inter nal memory or a memory card to your computer and vice versa Styles User Programs Songs SMF files txt files These files reside in dedicated folders and should only be put there See step 12 below The following computers and operating systems are Supported IBM PC compatible Windows 98SE Me 2000 XP or later Apple MacOS 9 04 or later Note The E 80 does not handle or generate audio files Note The USB cable needed for this connection is optional 1 Disconnect the E 80 s USB port from your com puter if it is connected 2 For Windows XP If a message asks you to restart your computer do as directed 3 Switch on the E 80 4 Use a USB
617. ted directly to one or two mixer channels or additional amplifiers via the dedicated VOCAL HARMONIST OUTPUT sockets Superfast Recorder and comprehensive 16 track sequencer The E 80 provides two approaches for recording new song material a Recorder function with a straightfor ward REC START STOP approach and a fully featured 16 track sequencer with track based and detailed microscope editing functions Like many other functions on the E 80 the Recorder interacts with other sections you can link a song to each User Program you can cause any Standard MIDI File to be transposed automatically to a range that allows you to sing with ease the chords of the songs you play back are recognized automatically and dis played etc Finder functions for songs Music Styles and User Programs Another highlight of the E 80 Is the fact that you can work with an almost unlimited number of songs Music Styles and User Programs in the internal memory on memory card or floppy disk Though there are still fac tory Music Styles you can also work with CUSTOM links to accompaniments in the internal memory or on memory card and even select such external Styles on the fly The same high speed access system is available for Standard MIDI Files songs and User Programs Thanks to the clever Finder databases the difference between what s Internal and what resides in an exter nal memory has become almost imperceptible Play List func
618. ted on the basis of the chords you play in the chord recognition area of the keyboard major minor seventh Tracks Unlike a drum machine a Style not only contains the rhythm part drums amp percussion but also a melodic accompaniment such as piano guitar bass and strings lines That is why the Styles work with tracks eight to be precise See also Arranger parts on p 82 The part to track assignment Is fixed You cannot assign the AccDrums part to track 6 for example The reason why the AccDrums part is assigned to the first track and the ABass part to the second is that most programmers and recording artists start by laying down the rhythm section of a song There are exceptions to this rule however so feel free to start with any other part if that is easier for the Style you are programming Note Though there are six melodic ACC tracks most Styles only contain two or three melodic accompaniment lines In most cases less means more i e do not program six melodic accompa niments just because the E 80 provides that facility If you listen very carefully to a CD you will discover that it is not the number of instruments you use that makes a song sound big but rather the right notes at the right time Looped vs one shot patterns The E 80 uses two kinds of patterns looped divisions and one shot divisions Mi Looped divisions Looped divisions are accompaniments that are repeated until you select anot
619. tempo If you want to start Style playback at a later stage select a Style see p 27 Also select a sound for your solo playing see p 29 Note Rather than performing the above steps you could recall a User Program with the desired settings page 126 Press the button to start record ing The Recorder now counts in one measure after which recording starts Note See page 81 for setting the Count In function Start playing To start Arranger playback press the button If you want to stop Style playback before the end of the song press either the or the button This will stop the Arranger while recording goes on This allows you to improvise without accompani ment E 80 Music Workstation Roland Recording your music 9 Press the button to stop record ing 10 See Listening to your song Adding more parts Here is how to redo part of your recording one part you do not like or to add additional parts to what has already been recorded Let us first have a look at what has been recorded so far and where We started out with the Arranger which means that the following tracks may now contain data not all Styles use all 8 tracks the Arranger can play back simul taneously Arranger part Recorder track ADR 10 ABS 2 ACC1 1 ACC2 3 ACC3 5 ACC4 7 ACC5 8 ACC6 J If you also recorded one or several Keyboard parts their data reside on the following tracks Keyboard part Recorder track
620. th the KAR extension User Program Files UPG Music Styles STL Text files TXT for Lyrics synchronization see p 169 and bitmap files BMP e Do not move rename or delete folders of the con nected memory area using your computer mouse or other commands e Never add files to folders flagged with an X in the illustration above e Never copy files to the root directory of the E 80 s internal memory or card and never rename or delete files you see there e Never format optimize or scan the E 80 s memory area using your computer s tools e The E 80 can only handle file names consisting of single byte alohanumeric characters i e no Russian Chinese Japanese Korean etc names e Be sure to only use files whose names do not exceed 32 characters e n some cases the new songs Styles or User Pro grams you copied to the corresponding Put New Here folder may not be visible to the corresponding Finder right away If that occurs briefly select the other memory area memory card or internal mem ory then return to the originally selected memory area 13 To disconnect the E 80 from your computer e Macintosh Drag the E80_SSD E80_CARD or Removable Disk icon to the trash 235 E 80 Music Workstation Archiving data using a computer USB e Windows Click on the removal icon on the task bar Wait until a drop down menu appears and select the entry that says something to the effect of
621. the USER PRG entry Press the USER PRG or GENRE field and enter the desired characters The field allows you to switch between upper case and lowercase characters What happens when you execute Before performing the next step we d like to inform you about the possible consequences of renaming a User Program USER PRG From the illustration on page 125 you may remember that each User Pro gram Is in fact a separate file You can bundle 144 such files into a User Program Set List whose members can be recalled using the USER PROGRAM buttons on the front panel When you select a memory 1 8 on pages P1 18 the E 80 therefore loads the settings of the file in ques tion So here s what may happen e f you rename a User Program that is referenced by the currently active Set List the Set List is updated and therefore finds the User Program despite its new name e f you rename a User Program that is referenced by other Set Lists which you didn t load those lists no longer find the User Program you renamed Conse quently when you select the memory in question after loading the Set List nothing happens because that ref erence no longer works 1341 e Renaming a User Program that doubles as Music Assis tant entry and therefore has a MA label see below also affects the Music Assistant registration s name which changes accordingly e Press the field W Delete This function allows you to d
622. the DEC INC buttons to spec ify the number of steps per measure i e the resolu tion Here is an example 1 2 3 4 1 This is how you played it 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 4 1 The setting range is Off 1 4 1 8 1 8T 1 16 1 16T 1 32 1 32T and 1 64 As this Quantize function changes the way in which your notes are recorded you may want to select Off here The 16 track sequencer has a second Quantize function that you can use more selectively i e for notes that are defi nitely late early See p 180 17 Specify what should be recorded by activating the corresponding RECORDING SELECT button icons RECORDING SELECT Meaning NOTE Only note messages are recorded Pitch Bend modulation etc data are ignored AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch messages are recorded This option should only be activated if you really wish to record After touch messages CONTROL CHANGE Control change messages such as modulation CC01 expression CC11 ete CCOO and CC32 bank select messages also belong to this group PROGRAM CHANGE Program change messages Only necessary if the track should use different sounds PITCH BEND Left right movements of the BENDER MODULATION lever SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE SysEx messages for the MASTER track 18 Select the desired sound for your new track 19 Select the bar where playback and or recording should start e Press the RECORDER button to return to the beginning of the song measure
623. the CUSTOM memories The E 80 provides 10 memories per family i e 120 in all that refer to Styles in the internal memory INTER NAL MEMORY or on a memory card EXTERNAL MEMORY These memories behave exactly like the fac tory memories In the case of a memory card however they only work if the card in question has been inserted into the PCMCIA slot Thanks to the E 80 s powerful software loading a CUSTOM Style is as swift as working with the factory Styles The Style referenced by the CUSTOM memory you select is automatically loaded and copied to the Disk User memory see also p 94 This is a RAM memory whose contents are erased when you switch off the E 80 and overwritten when you select another CUSTOM memory or use the Disk User function Here s in a nutshell what happens when you select a CUSTOM memory Even though the drawing may sug gest that this takes quite some time the E 80 performs these steps in a split second LIVE BAND You select a CUSTOM memory Mysic Style The E 80 looks up the name of the referenced Style The data are loaded from card or the internal memory DISK sC 9 USER This memory contains the Music Style data The Style can be played back When you unpack the E 80 the CUSTOM memories are empty So you first need to program your own references to Styles Programming CUSTOM assignments The E 80 comes with several Style examples
624. the amount of chorus sound that is sent to the Reverb processor The value 127 effectively allows you to connect the Chorus and Reverb effects in series Chorus before Reverb If you do not want the chorus signal to be processed by the reverb effect set this value to O Press to return to the display page with the modules _or Press the button to return to the main page Using the multi effects processors of the Style and Song instruments Your E 80 contains 3 multi effects processors A C that can be used for processing at least three Style or Song instruments you can assign as many instruments to each MFX as you like These effects are linked to the MAKEUP TOOLS environ ment see p 140 which explains why we are no longer talking about parts but rather about instruments 1 Press the button once or twice to call up the following page SAS SONS ERREGI S J STY sc G 1 Revere Cuorus E a ee i 7 D k SONG Mex A f 6s LONG DELAY ON EDIT CET 1 THRU L i WW Mex C g _ amp oO fo_Fj io MASTERING TOOLS STYLE SONG e Fi EaVALIZER e COMPRESSOR Sr a OFF EDIT OFF EDIT l Ai a io On this page you can switch the REVERB CHORUS and or three effects processors off by pressing the button icon to the right of their displays 2 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Effects for Songs and Styles Press the button icon next to the MFX A MEX B or MFX C d
625. the chords you play If this function is off the A BASS part ABS plays the root of the chords that feed the Arranger while the chords of the ACCOMP 146 parts are voiced in such a way as to avoid semitone intervals for complex chords that wouldn t sound very nice Bass Inversion gives you more artistic license because you specify the notes played by the ABS part Switch on Bass Inversion for songs that rely on bass rather than on chord patterns for example C C B C Bb etc os E 80 Music Workstation Additional Arranger Style functions 1 Press the button so that it lights to switch this function on STYLE CONTROL BASS SYNC m INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START STOP 2 Press it again to switch this function off again Note You can also assign this function to an optional foot switch page 77 or FC 7 See page 75 Melody Intelligence The Arranger can add a counter melody to the notes you play Those automatic harmonies are based on the chords you play in the chord recognition area This counter melody is played by the MELODY INTELL part There are 18 harmony types to choose from 1 Press the button so that it 2 3 lights MELODY INTELL This adds a harmony to the notes you play Do not forget to switch on the UP1 part page 65 To select another harmony type press and hold the button until the following page appears ARRAS Sarre e C128
626. the display The following pop up appears a we coals If you choose to work with the numeric pad proceed as follows e Switch on the button icons of events you want to see in the list the icons in question must light in green T94 e Press the numeric button icons to enter the desired value Use to delete the last figure you entered a e cos 3 e Press the or field to increase or decrease the current value by 10 e Press to confirm the value _or Press to close the numeric pad window with out changing the value 4 Press the DATA ENTRY gt button to select the next value and change it 5 When you re done press the field to return to the main Sequencer page and save your song The parameters you can change are Note and velocity messages These messages always come in pairs see the illustration of step 2 above The first value Note Number 127 G9 refers to the note itself and the second On Velocity 127 to the velocity playing dynamics The MICRO EDIT page adds a third message to that pair 65535 It describes the duration of the note in ques tion You may remember this value from the TRACK EDIT environment where it is called Gate Time Control Change These messages usually add some thing to the notes being played like modulation a dif ferent volume a new stereo position The E 80 recog nizes all available control change numbers C
627. the left column of the dis play You can also use the a buttons to select a track The button icon allows you to temporarily switch off the selected track which may be useful when you want to record or edit additional parts with out being distracted by already existing parts SOLO and MUTE need to be set as follows First press the or field then press the fields of the tracks you want to solo or mute you can mute several tracks Note The MUTE function is not available while the SOLO func tion is on You can however select another track at that time which is then played back in isolation The SOLO function on the other hand can be activated while the MUTE function is on Soloed tracks are flagged with an S while muted tracks use the letter M The remaining indications in the second column from the left are J note symbol The track is currently playing If you look at the example above you will notice a vertical line on top of several horizontal bars The vertical line refers to the current position within the song which is also indicated in the MEAS field The horizontal bars indi cate that a track contains musical data in that position Now look again at the illustration only the tracks that contain note data at the current position and that are not muted have the J symbol If while the page above is displayed you press the RECORDER button track 1 which is currently selected will be flagged wit
628. the problem change the orientation of this instrument or move it further away from the source of interference This instrument may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use it in the vicinity of such receivers Observe the following when using the unit s floppy disk drive For further details refer to Before using floppy disks handling the floppy disk drive e Do not place the unit near devices that produce a strong mag netic field e g loudspeakers e Install the E 80 on a solid level surface e Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while the drive is operating Do not expose the E 80 to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the E 80 To avoid possible breakdown do not use the E 80 in a wet area such as an area exposed to rain or other moisture Do not allow objects to remain on the keyboard This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produce sound Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the E 80 with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the instrument thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzene thinner alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation
629. the write protect label is affixed an error message will appear In that case either insert another card or remove the write protect label e At power on do not remove insert a card while the E 80 is updat ing its internal data wait until the messages Song database checking and User Program database checking have disap peared e Never turn on the power when a memory card is inserted partway into the slot Doing so will damage the data in internal memory Memory cards usable with the E 80 e The E 80 can use commercially available CompactFlash and Smart Media memory cards You can purchase such cards at a computer shop or digital camera dealer e Memory cards you purchase must meet the following conditions e Power supply voltage 3 3V e Capacity 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512MB 1GB 2GB 4GB 2GB and 4GB only with Microdrive e The E 80 cannot use cards of types other than the above Electromagnetic radiations e Electromagnetic radiations may cause a deterioration of audio performances Such possible deterioration consists in an audio sig nal being emitted On ceasing the electromagnetic noise the emis sion of the audio signal will simultaneously stop Liability and copyright e Unauthorized recording distribution sale lending public perfor mance broadcasting or the like in whole or in part of a work musical composition video broadcast public performance or the like whose copyright is held by a th
630. there are 15 Press the display to hide the the upper and lower menu bars and select full screen view E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the VIEWER function The display then looks as follows Silent night holy night All is calm all is bright round yon virgin mother and child holy infant so tender and mild sleep in heavenly peace Sleep in heavenly peace 16 Press the button to return to the main page ry 7 i This switches off the VIEWER function D59 E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start Recording your music You can record your music as Songs that can be saved internally toa memory card or a floppy disk Your singing using the Vocal Harmonist page 46 is not recorded There are two approaches for recording G Recording everything at once This is the easy approach you press the but ton you set the E 80 the way you want it to sound with or without Arranger for example and you start playing 2 Recording each track separately This approach means that you first record a drum part for example then a bass line followed by a plano part etc For this approach you need to select the 16 track Sequencer mode see p 173 It is also possible to combine these two approaches by first recording most of the parts using approach O and then adding other or replacing existing parts using approach Let us begin with the easier approach Recording with Style backing
631. these parameters are sometimes called the cross over frequency i e the frequency where two bands are separated As the compressor has three bands there are two cross over frequencies you can set 1 between the low and mid ranges and 2 between the mid and high ranges o Mid Hi Because the remaining parameters are the same for each band we will only discuss them once As you see each of the three frequency ranges has its own set of parameters that allow you to specify their behav lor ATTACK 0 100ms Use this parameter to specify how fast the compressor of the band in question should start processing the signal once the level of that band exceeds the THRSHLD level Choose a smaller value if you prefer a compression similar to that of FM radio stations Higher values may yield a snappier or funkier sound RELEASE 50 5000ms This parameter allows you to specify how fast the compressor of the corresponding band should stop working when the signal level drops below the THRSHLD value The right setting for this parameter depends on the RATIO value you select If the level jumps between notes are too abrupt a phenome non known as pumping increase the value until the transitions seem a little smoother THRSHLD 36 0dB This parameter allows you to set the level the frequency band in question must have in order to trigger its compressor The lower the value the more noticeable the compression will be
632. tializing the Style RAM area So be sure to set this value before your very first conversion The Style s time signature can also be changed using the Style Composer however but that forces you to change modes e After setting everything to your liking press the field to initialize the Style RAM area Press to leave this page without initializing the data in RAM This takes you back to the CONVERT page SIVLE Ee areas SWEETPOT meas 0001 1 J 130 474 Q STANDARD 1 10 soro ABASS 4 FRETLESSES 2 AcCI OVERDRIVEGT 1 j A FROM B ACC 4 OVERDRIVEGT 3 ACCS 4 E PIANO4 5 Be ACCd 4 ORGANZ 7 r ACCS 4 ORCHESTRAHIT ACC 4 CLEAN GT E B MARK v E d To Ea pa Cool Live Band 474 sL Back EXECUTE 13 Now select the destination pattern i e specify whether the selected excerpt should become a MAIN pattern an Intro etc 14 Press the available display fields and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to enter the desired value The parameters discussed below can be set for each track and pattern individually Though flexible this system also means that you need to be careful so as to achieve usable results Key C C D Eb F F G Ab A Bb B Use this parame ter to tell your E 80 what key the track or tracks is or are in Specifying the right key before converting the data is crucial for real time use of a pattern The chord recognition s
633. tion Thanks to the E 80 s Play List function you can pro gram set lists for your performances The advantage of such song chains is that you won t have to look for the desired songs on stage Furthermore you can already prepare the next song while the current one is still running NEXT SONG func tion D Beam controller The E 80 has the acclaimed D Beam Controller for intuitive song and Style playback control and additional DJ like effects via movements over an invisible beam of infrared light And of course the BENDER MODULA TION lever is also there as are sockets for optional foot Switches and an expression pedal D Beam technology licensed from Interactive Light Inc E 80 Music Workstation Roland Features and so much more Listing all of the E 80 s advantages and functions would take another ten pages while you must be dying to put it through its paces That is why we would like to ask you to read this manual from cover to cover You ll find that the E 80 Is quite unlike any other instrument you know Have fun A CAUTION E 80 Music Workstation Using the unit safely USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About Z WARNING and Z CAUTION Notices Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe A WARNING injury should the unit be used improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to th
634. tion but it allows to select the desired velocity value 1 127 you to tune your E 80 to acoustic instruments that cannot be tuned 1 Press the MENU button PARTS CURVE VALUE cows for Ce SG ial i i a The display changes to Velocity switching Min and Max You can also specify the smallest MIN and highest MAX velocity values with which you can trigger the 2 a ovea A A D BEAM selected part This is probably only useful when applied to two Keyboard parts Do not change these values if bakri Paes sees you have no intention of using a complementary part Be ae An because otherwise you may start wondering why the LW1 part for instance only sounds at high or low BP PRrencrion Ae ia O ros MIN and MAX can be used effectively for switching between two Tones simply by striking the keys harder or softer Doing so allows you to alternate between two 2 Press the field followed by the sounds Consider the following example MASTER TUNE field Part Sound TONING UP1 Bandoneon 2 ACCORDION P1 on 440 0 UP2 Folk Violin STRINGS P2 z Both parts must be on These settings allow you to AAD 0 hz trigger the Bandoneon sound with velocity values AA AS PE a e between 1 and 105 low to relatively high velocity while velocity values above 106 only trigger the vio lin Try it it sounds spectacular 3 Use the dial to set the desired tun There are countless ot
635. to call up the INSTRUMENT EQUALIZER page Press the field to assign the equal izer settings to the newly selected drum instrument Press the field to return to the previously selected page If necessary press the field to save your set tings page 148 COMMON After pressing the field the display looks as follows The parameters on this page apply to the entire song or Music Style and do therefore not depend on the kind of sound or Drum Set you selected Press the field of the parameter you want to edit and use the dial or the DEC INC buttons to set the desired value E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the Makeup Tools REVERB TYPE This parameter allows you to specify what kind of reverb effect you need The available reverb types are Room1 These types simulate the reverb characteris Room2 tics of a room The higher the number 1 or Room3 2 the bigger the room becomes Hall1 These types simulate the reverb of a small Hall2 1 or large 2 concert hall and thus sound much bigger than the Room types above Plate This is another SRV algorithm that simulates the acoustics of a concert hall Delay A Delay effect no reverb Works a lot like an echo effect and thus repeats the sounds Pan Delay This is a stereo version of the above Delay effect It creates repetitions that alternate between the left and right channels The Original setting means that the song or Style uses it
636. to the page that contains the Tone you selected last Using the Harmonic Bars The E 80 contains a virtual organ that is based on Roland s Virtual ToneWheel technology found in organs like the VK 8 VK 88 VK 7 VK 8M etc This sec tion can be assigned to three Keyboard parts UP1 LW1 and MBS The remaining Keyboard parts cannot be used as virtual organ but they can trigger organ sounds that are part of the normal Tones 1 Press the EASY SETTING button The button s indicator lights and the following parts are assigned to the keyboard LOWER 1 LW1 to the left and UPPER 1 UP1 to the right half Left hand LOWER 1 Right hand UPPER 1 Both parts are assigned a HARMONIC BAR sound This is important to remember because there are also sampled organ sounds that do not provide timbre control via the sliders 2 3 4 5 6 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the Harmonic Bars By pressing the EASY SETTING button you also activate the MODE button which means that the 9 sliders now act as harmonic bars B 16 5 1 3 8 ee 4 2 2 3 2 1 3 5 1 1 3 1 ON OURWNH SC EFFECT DBEAM M INT MBS LW 2 LW 1 UP 3 UP 2 UP 1 J Press the MODE button This is optional if you want to confirm your settings in the display and save your changes mes HARMONIG BARS ssa UPPER E EE KS ES ER Z 5 5 is 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 7 6
637. ton its indicator lights Press to go to another measure without caus ing the text to follow 11 Press the button Playback and Lyric synchronization recording starts and the button lights 12 On the beat where the first text line should be dis played press the button a Txt SETTINGS Ee lexPoRt p gt OE SOO SAT ON ere se cere a Aw baby gt Yeah ooh Yeak huh listen to this Spy on me baby use Sef Back PRESS PLAY TO START THE INTERNAL SONG oo PRESS TAP TO SYNCHRONIZE EACH LYRICS LINE 13 Repeat this at the quarter note where the second line should be displayed M Lyrics Synchronization Yeah ooh Yeak M0016 b huh listen to this 4 Spy on me baby use satellite E Back PRESS PLAY TO START THE INTERNAL SONG tins PRESS TAF TO SYNCHRONIZE EACH LYRICS LINE 14 Press on all beats where the subsequent text lines should appear In places where there are no lyrics to synchronize e g the bridge or the solo you can press to quickly jump to the next measures to which you wish to link a line of text 15 Press the button when all Lyrics data have been synchronized 16 If you made a mistake somewhere you can return to that measure using and start anew from that position In that case you will need to synchronize all remain ing text even text you already synchronized until the end of the song 17 Press the button
638. ton to jump to the following page SEGS MEO SERRES ANDE N ma INSTRUMENT ii GUITA MODE SETTING z pne REC MODE MEASURE LENGTH 5 Select the Mode and Division you want to redo 6 Press the field and select Replace To replace the previous recording with new data Mix To add notes you forgot to record the first time 7 Continue with step 16 on page 205 Saving your Style Make it a habit to save your Styles as frequently as pos sible After all if someone decided to switch off your E 80 now you would lose everything you have pro grammed so far 1 Press the field on the STYLE COMPOSER page The display changes to SAVE STYLE EXTERNAL INTERNAL MEMORY MEMORY Y arve NAME f COUNTRY B GENRE Cool Live Band ETS KJ rw ma Doe see se This page allows you to save the current Style to the internal memory a memory card or a floppy disk e Press the EXTERNAL MEMORY or field to select the area where you want to save the Style e Enter the name for the file See page 52 If necessary you can also supply the required COUNTRY and GENRE information for use with the STYLE FINDER function only available if you select the internal memory or a memory card Note The E 80 supports both upper and lower case letters for file names Choose whichever is more convenient or clearer 2 Press the field to save the data The E 80 returns to the STYLE COMPOSER page
639. track you like Some boards contain loops or grooves whose tempo is automatically synchronized to the Arranger tempo Specifying the key for melodic parts If you want to use the accompaniment in a musically meaningful way you need to tell the E 80 what key you are recording in This is to ensure that the chords you play during everyday use of your Style with the E 80 s Arranger lead to the correct real time trans positions of the selected Division The E 80 allows you to record Styles in any key But do set the KEY parameter to the right value before recording Note The key of AccDrums parts cannot be set because that doesn t make sense 13 Press the field and use the dial or the DECI INC buttons to set the key If you want to record in F set this parameter to FR to record in A you must set this value to A etc W Octave The field next to allows you to transpose the keyboard in octave steps which may be convenient for extremely high or low notes or for using the Special noises of certain sounds 14 Press the field and use the dial to transpose the keyboard up or down 4 4 octaves Tempo 15 The current tempo value may be a bit fast for recording so change it by pressing the tempo field and using the dial or the DEC INC buttons The tempo value you set here is recorded and regarded as preset tempo You can change it at any Stage in STYLE COMPOSER mode so start by selecting a tempo
640. trl ae 7 7 EVENT 93 Chorus 91 Reverb 11 Expression EVENT 7 volume Pitch Bend 0 cC 0 Bank Select MSB EVENT 74 7 Program Change Note 65 F 4 COPY Note EVENT Note 67 G 4 19 04 010 Note 69 4 4 PLACE 3 EVENT Era 195 E 80 Music Workstation Using the 16 track Sequencer E CREATE EVENT Press this button icon to add a new event to the selected track The following pop up appears CREATE EVENT CONTROL J CHANNEL 3 CHANGE AFTERTOUCH PROGRAM W CHANGE j 6 PITCH BEND ia u is E cose rh en If the position for which you create a new event already contains other events the new event is added at the end of that group e Press the button icon that corresponds to the kind of event you want to add Here are the default values of the events you create Note Note Number 60 C4 On Velocity 100 Gate Time 60 Control Change CCO1 Modulation value 0 Program Change Program Change Number 1 Pitch Bend 0 Poly Aftertouch Note Number 60 C4 Poly Aftertouch Value O Channel After 0 touch Control Change also allows you to insert Bank Select mes sages CC00 and CC32 Such messages must be located BEFORE the program change to which they apply The correct order is CC00 gt CC32 gt PC Also it is usually wiser to assign these three values to consecutive CPT positions Specify the position where your new event should be inserted
641. tton icon to select the memory area If the name of the User Program you want to copy Is already displayed press its line You can also select several User Programs To display the next 5 files press the field in the lower right corner You also use the dial and the DEC IINC buttons To return to a previous group of 5 User Programs press e If you need to copy all User Programs that are cur rently displayed on all available pages press the ALL FILES field Note If the memory card or floppy disk is not formatted a message will be displayed that allows you to format it before the User Programs are copied E 80 Music Workstation Roland Editing User Program Finder information 4 If you chose EXT MEMORY or FLOPPY DISK for TO disable the card s disk s write protection and insert it into the PCMCIA slot or disk drive See the owner s manual of the memory card for how to disable its write protection Note Not all cards have a write protection function 5 Press the field Press if you do not want to proceed or to select other files You are asked whether it is OK to overwrite all files on the destination media TO that have the same file names as the files you are about to copy Replace files T the same name 6 Press the field if it is OK to overwrite files with the same names on the destination media Press the field if files on the source FROM media that have the same name as exi
642. tyle Copy 00 008 209 KC IERE 105 211 Mode cc ce eee eee 204 Co ETETETT ee eee meee res 183 Portamento 0 000 cee eee 102 Style oo cece eee eeeeeeeeeeees 206 Style CONVENE iranere cnnees 200 Modulation a oa anaana 66 70 103 Monitor coc cece ee ee veins 54 WONG ereer nEn NE 102 Move Event osscsrcsssessa 192 196 224 Multi band compressor 115 118 MUTE teat bette staan eee cons 111 143 Music Assist Mark 0 134 Music Assistant 0000 ee eee 40 Create NCW lt scceceseekeds ade 137 235 Da E Baba ations 138 0 6 ee ee 138 FUNCTIONS eee 137 PONG errara AANE AAAA 138 GIVE 66 sddeedeeddddsdenaasannan 138 MUSIC MULE occc2tceccnasarecaooede 51 Music Style see Style MUNG citoneurceetrapeuagesecabagad 140 kei a eee na naa ener Serene ere arene 198 DrUM 2 ee 145 Makeup TOG Seuraeaearar aan tease a erererere 142 MIXE ananuna 106 PErCUSSION ssssasasirirssasssandd 145 SCQUCMCED an 24444462100 nancceeas 179 SIVIG e EEEE 207 Wy STUD E E AAA 203 N Name 00 0s 40 52 63 228 Filevs eae sssssesssueceseeceeeess 63 SONG 2 cece eee ee 63 User PFOOIAIM saccanchee eee ee nn wns 126 Nearest c c eee eee aes 218 222 NE SONU ersrrar rrara anne nanan ess 43 Notation 2 0 ccc cee eee eee 54 NOWE e4a4ee san nnnaeseenae 182 183 189 To Arranger 221225000228 0865 880 242 Vlas 3555555445 550ucoueneeaces 153 NRPN essssssss
643. tyle and Song LEO E S A e coo ond eae one teen eee nese RIES 117 Using the Style Song Mastering Tools 118 POUCNZG 4 444 so saddoeedaateaceocameneren enya 118 COMMONESSO 2 cceenas pubecsssussauadarsereeeedsees 118 Using the audio iInputs 0000 ee eee 119 Using the Speaker Modeling settings 120 Mixing Vocal Harmonist signals 121 Reverb Delay and Chorus effects 05 122 Working with User Programs 125 Saving your settings to a User Program 125 E 80 Music Workstation Roland Contents Selecting User PIOOlAMS 2s 252 aencsndas tet cuan 126 DC TAM Uae scene ae a es A E a 126 Choosing User Programs manually 127 Selecting User Programs with DOWNI UP 127 Working with the User Program Finder 127 Quick location of the User Program you need 128 Selectively loading User Program settings User Program Hold 6 ttuwe vera e saw scew amammmmars 129 Bypassing the AUTO FILL function Fill In On User Program Change 000 cece eee 130 Automatic functions for User Programs 130 DONG INK serrana E Seeeennnnnssss 130 Linking a MIDI Set to a User Program 131 TA DIV P INK 325204650208 58hen00eneeseneesenned 132 User Program Recall 25 5525 5G4e suas eee ee eee 133 Editing User Program Finder information 133 Editing the User Program Finder information 134 Editing AMG CX
644. u recall such a User Program the E 80 will therefore use the referenced Style If the Style in question cannot be found an error message appears and the E 80 goes on using the pre viously selected Style Press the button to return the main page The name of the selected Style appears in the field Style Finder quickly locating Styles The E 80 allows you to have a great many Music Styles handy in its internal memory on a memory card and on floppy disks For the internal memory and the mem ory card in the PCMCIA slot there is a powerful Finder function for quickly locating the Style you need Here is how to use this function 1 Press the FINDER button The display changes to OPTIONS A I Dp 8S FOUND found entries GLOBAL total number of Styles in that memory area 2 Specify the memory area that contains the Style you need EXTERNAL MEMORY or INTERNAL MEMORY The E 80 is shipped with several Styles that reside in its internal memory The display shows a list of 5 Styles in the selected memory area internal memory card or floppy disk 3 If the name of the Style you want to use to is already displayed press its line In our example Shuffle has been selected 4 To display the next 5 Styles press the PAGE field in the lower right corner You can press this field as many times as necessary or until it is no longer displayed To return to a previous group of 5 Styles pr
645. u recorded turn out to be too high or too low e To correct slow notes due to a slow er attack You may want to use SHIFT CLOCK after assigning a sound to a track that has a considerably slower attack than the sound you used for recording the part in question This technique is frequently used in pop music to time 1 16 note string arpeggios played with a slow pad sound Rather than have the notes begin at the mathematically correct time e g 2 1 0 you could shift them to the left E EXECUTE e g to 1 4 115 so that the peak volume of the attack is Press this field to confirm your settings and edit the data reached on the next beat Original positions slow attack tim Shift 5 ing seems off timing sounds OK eS SS e To correct the timing of notes recorded via MIDI without quantizing them You can use external sequences as raw material for your songs Recording such excerpts via MIDI may cause a slight delay e g 5 CPT If that is not acceptable use SHIFT CLOCK to push the recorded data to the left select 5 That allows you preserve any irregularities the original may con tain because it was not quantized METRACK ALL 1 16 Allows you to select the track you wish to edit You can also select ALL here in which case the operation applies to all tracks FROM BAR 1 last measure of the track or song Refers to the first measure to be edited By default the FROM value is set to the beginnin
646. u to advance or go 6 Press the field if it doesn t light 3 The display changes to VIEWER Something Stupid We are the world 12 Select the memory area that contains the text file you want to use press INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY If you press FLOPPY or EXTERNAL MEMORY insert the memory card or floppy disk with the desired file into the slot or drive 13 Select the text file by pressing its field 14 Press the field The following message appears VIEW EROP ONS Em e Li SETTINGS The current view will be lost Do you want to continue It means that the memory area reserved for these data already contains something that will be erased Press to continue This takes you back to the VIEWER page where the selected text is displayed Silent night_txt Page 1 9 Silent night holy night A11 is calm all is bright round yon virgin mother and child holy infant so tender and mild sleep in heavenly peace Sleep in heavenly peace Press to abort The name of the selected text file appears in the upper left corner The Auto value indicates the speed 10 600 at which pages will be switched or Off no automatic page turning The PAGE TURNER function starts on the first page and leafs through the available pages the number of pages depends on the length of your text The Page xx yy field tells you which page is cur rently selected and how many
647. ueaeendeans 228 Les a ee ee ee or ee ee ee ee Tee 229 Bej AOE E E E ee recuse eases 230 PONV EEEE E EEA 231 Import User Program function lt lt cec weeee dave 232 17 Archiving data using a computer USB 234 Backing up all of the E 80 s data 008 236 JUST If CaSCi onnanaanannneasencnaceeeesnncenenny es 236 10 Ol orn tare ou ead oeaeeeeuseede pate eu ae ees 237 VG WOWAIO Sve coucues oe ahodtecsuctu ee re sees 237 Accessing the MIDI functions 237 Working with presets osisssa anes 238 Editing procedure 2 ccse ss ceegcknne emaciated 238 Editing MIDI parameters 00008 239 Keyboard Style Song parts 0 00008 239 MIDI System parame leS rr eretnek EEEE RER ENEE 240 TO MID SES ci icdcn kde ween ee eee sad aaen Erra 243 WY ICING at ND SC le catered ance nena eo es ce saad 243 Using MIDI SETS nc2ctconseeeeeaserssennnnnesuccaces 243 MIDI Set selection at power on 005 244 19 WSCC AM COUS vow chic owe nananana nan 245 Using VAIN s c c058 Se eead ace cae Hwan ode os 245 General settings n lt 2 lt t audeceeseenesnewenen 246 Song Arranger Start Priority i icceeiiieseiiiid 246 NOW eRe eM DEEP egira sissa SSIR Era 247 a a E eror r eaters 247 Hashing Metronome 22 45 255555255660eeeee40eaeaed 247 e a E EA 247 Initializing the E 80 Factory Reset 247 20 SPECA UOS o ny garoundeweus EENEN oe 248 21 Appendix nassaan n
648. uency 2000 4000 8000Hz Frequency of the high range you wish to boost or cut EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high range Negative values reduce the level EQ Mid 1 Frequency 200 8000Hz Frequency of the middle range 1 you wish to boost or cut This is a paramet ric EQ band EQ Mid 1 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Width of the middle range 1 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be boosted or cut EQ Mid 2 Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of middle range 1 EQ Mid 2 Frequency 200 8000Hz Frequency of the middle range 2 you wish to boost or cut This is a paramet ric EQ band EQ Mid 2 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Width of the middle range 2 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be boosted or cut EQ Mid 2 Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the middle range 2 Level 0 127 Output level Use this parameter to com pensate for exaggerated level differences resulting from the settings you made 3 Overdrive Creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by vacuum tube amplifiers Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Also changes the vol ume Panpot L64 0 63R Stereo location of the output sound This is a mono effect that combines incoming sig nals You can however place the processed signal any where between the left and right channels Amp Simulator Type Allows you to specify what kind of guitar amp will be simulated SMALL small amp BUILT IN single un
649. ul 52 Step Ring 53 Tremolo 54 Auto Pan 55 Step Pan 56 Slicer 57 VK Rotary 58 3D Chorus 59 3D Flanger 60 3D Step Figr 61 Band Chorus 62 Band Flanger 63 Band Step Flg 64 VS Overdrive 65 VS Distortion 66 GT Amp Simul 67 Gate 68 Long Delay 69 Serial Delay 70 MLT Tap DLY 71 Reverse DLY 72 Shuffle DLY 73 3D Delay 74 Long Time DLY 75 Tape Echo 76 LoFi Noise 77 LoFi Comp 78 LoFi Radio 79 Telephone 80 Phonograph 81 Step Pitch 82 Sympa Reso 83 VIB OD Rotary 84 Center Canc To avoid confusion we decided to explain the avail able parameters elsewhere See page 252 Here s how to edit the parameters Press the field of the parameter you wish to change the number of fields and their functions depend on the selected type If the required parameter is not displayed press the PAGE fields to jump to another page Some effects only have one parameter page Set the desired value with the dial or the DECI INC buttons 117 E 80 Music Workstation Using the mixer functions amp effects and upper right cor ner allow you to specify how strongly the multi effect s output signal should be processed by the Reverb and or Chorus processor If that is unneces sary set both parameters to 0 8 Press the button to return to the main page Note Do not forget to save your settings to a User Program if you want to keep them Equalizer 1 Press the EQUALIZER field to a
650. und W Level 0 127 Output level 77 LoFi Comp This is an effect that intentionally degrades the sound quality for creative purposes Pre Filter Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 Selects the type of filter applied to the sound before it passes through the Lo Fi effect LoFi Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Degrades the sound quality The sound quality grows poorer as this value is increased Post Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no fil ter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Post Filter Cutoff 200 8000 Bypass Basic frequency of the Post Filter EQ Low Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the low fre quency range EQ High Gain 15dB 0 15dB Gain of the high fre quency range Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Volume bal ance between the direct D and the effect sound W Level 0 127 Output level 78 LoFi Radio In addition to a Lo Fi effect this effect also generates radio noise LoFi Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Degrades the sound quality The sound quality grows poorer as this value is increased Post Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Type of filter OFF no fil ter is used LPF cuts the frequency range above the Cutoff value HPF cuts the frequency range below the Cutoff value Post Filter Cutoff 200 8000 Bypass Basic frequency of the Post Filter Radio Detune 0 127
651. us Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay between the incoming direct signal and the moment when the chorus starts working Chorus Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation speed Chorus Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Chorus Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Vol ume balance between the direct sound D and the chorus sound W Delay Time 0 0 500 0ms Adjusts the time until the delay is heard Delay Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the amount of the delay sound that s fed back into the effect Negative settings invert the phase Delay HF Damp 200 8000Hz Bypass Adjusts the fre quency above which sound fed back to the effect is filtered out If you don t want to filter out any high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance D100 0W D50 50W DO 100W Adjusts the volume balance between the sound that is sent through the delay W and the sound that is not sent through the delay D Level 0 127 Output level 37 Flanger gt DLY This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series Flanger Pre Delay 0 0 100 0ms Adjusts the delay time from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flanger Rate 0 05 10 0Hz Frequency i e modulation Speed Flanger Depth 0 127 Modulation intensity Flanger Feedback 98 0 98 Adjusts the propor tion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will inver
652. ving your Music Assistant registration under a new name the operation is confirmed and the E 80 returns to the MUSIC ASSISTANT LIST page A new User Program is created along with your Music Assistant registration If the Music Assistant database already contains a registration of the name displayed for NAME the fol lowing warning appears means that both the original Music Assistant registration and the underlying User Program are overwritten and replaced with the new versions leaves the entry intact and takes you back to the SAVE page where you can enter a different name Continue with step 2 above Press the button to return to the main page E 80 Music Workstation Song and Style Makeup Tools Mixing Song or Style parts Though accessible via separate buttons the Style and Song mixers are in fact part of the MAKEUP TOOLS functions In this entire chapter we never refer to tracks or parts only instruments The parameters dis cussed below are indeed related to individual sounds some tracks may use two or more sounds if you think the bass is too loud use the assigned slider and turn it down If the piano needs more reverb just add it It doesn t get any easier than that Important remark The parameters discussed in this section are primarily intended for real time changes to a Style or song They are not saved When you select a different Style or song the changes made here are lost You can
653. whose set tings you want to record Only switch this on for settings you want to change For safety reasons you might consider recording one change at a time 6 Press the EXPRESSION PANPOT REVERB SEND or CHORUS SEND field depending on the parameter you want to set 7 Use the dial or the DEC INC but tons to set the desired value The REVERB SEND and CHORUS SEND settings repre sent Send values and indicate how strongly the track in question should be processed by the reverb or cho rus effect The settings of the effects processors themselves need to be changed using the STYLE MAKEUP TOOLS after programming your Style the Style Composer does not recognize the MAKEUP TOOLS settings and discards them when you save your Style 4 on You can create interesting panning effects by slowly shifting the selected track from left to right or vice versa in the course of a pattern This is especially effective for synthesizer or guitar riffs Continuous changes mean that you have to keep recording until the end of the pattern 8 Press the RECORDER button 9 Press the button to start recording If you are changing a static setting you can stop recording on the second beat 10 Press again to stop recording 11 Press the field to return to the STYLE COMPOSER page About the Mixer The STYLE MIXER functions can be used in three ways to try out settings during playback without recording t
654. will the selected data filter start working Press the button to return to the main page Use the USER PROGRAM button to decide whether the filters you selected should be used button lights or not button dark 129 E 80 Music Workstation Working with User Programs Bypassing the AUTO FILL function Fill In On 3 Press the field User Program Change to switch this function on or off User Programs also contain the address of the Style FILL IN ON lights If the button lights division pattern to be used when you recall those reg a fill in is played when you recall a istrations By selecting a User Program you may there User Program that selects a Style fore switch from the VARIATION 1 pattern which you pattern which is different from the selected by hand to VARIATION 3 stored in the new one User Program for example FILL IN ON dark No fill in is played when you recall If the button lights any automated a User Program that selects a dif ferent pattern even if the changes to another Style pattern are usually preceded J ee ve button lights by a fill in phrase see the right illustration Current setting on the front panel This setting has no effect on situations where the AUTO FILL IN button doesn t light in which case no INTRO MAIN END RIT INTRO MAIN END RIT fill in is played AuTo VARIATION aur 4 Press the field to return to the menu or the OTD ool gp Rae Rte ee eG ee AUTO VARIATION
655. wo buttons light and the dis play changes to KEYBOARD ZONE The switch icon allows you switch the Guitar mode on or off If you selected this page by pressing EASY SETTING GUITAR it is already set to on Press the or switch icon to specify whether you need an electric or an acoustic guitar This is an important choice to make because it deter mines which guitar sounds can be selected electric or acoustic ones Select the desired sound see the upper left corner with the dial or the DEC INC but tons The possibilities are ELECTRIC ACOUSTIC 01 Jazz Man 01 Nylon 02 OpenHard 1 02 Steel 2 03 Dist FX 03 Steel 3 04 OpenHard 2 04 Steel 4 05 Overd FX 05 Steel 5 06 Strat Clean 06 12 Strings 07 CleanHalt 07 Nyl Steel 08 Distorsion 08 Nyl Steel 2 09 Warm Drv 10 Power 11 Dist Guitar E 80 Music Workstation Quick Start About the chord indications The GUITAR MODE page contains a window that shows you how the chords you play on the keyboard are transformed into guitar chords The small numbers refer to the lowest fret being used An x means that the string in question doesn t sound guitarists sometimes use only four or three strings for their chords And finally the strings are shown from high E top to low E bottom that s how guitar tablatures are usually printed The guitar neck has therefore been turned upside down Using the available STRUMM techniques While the A
656. y to establish a new link it is meant to cancel an existing link T 32 3 4 5 6 7 Press MAKE NEW TEXT BMP LINK The display changes to p Believe 5 INTERNAL Obladi oblada p Something Stupid Ve are the world EXTERNAL MEMORY i e Paa tA tE Press the or field depending on the kind of file you want to link to the selected User Program As a reminder TXT refers to text files and BMP to picture files The following steps are the same for both types and therefore described only once Bear in mind however that you cannot link both a TXT and a BMP file to a User Program Select the memory area that contains the text file you want to use press INTERNAL MEMORY or EXTERNAL MEMORY If you press EXTERNAL MEMORY insert the mem ory card with the desired file into the slot Press the field of the file you want to link to the currently selected User Program Press the field to establish the link to the file whose name appears on an orange back ground This takes you back to the User Program page The selection field now contains a small E7 or E icon On the main page User Programs with a link are indi cated by means of a picture or text file icon User Program Recall When you switch on the E 80 it automatically selects the Default mode i e no User Program page 126 But maybe you prefer to be operational right away In that case tell
657. y that the music song is turned softer but not muted altogether while you are talking 1 Press the button and speak into the micro phone All Vocal Harmonist transformations are now muted This includes the VO CODER and buttons 2 After your announcement press the button again to return to the previous singer settings and sing to the next song Here s what you need to do to change the level of the background music and the amount of Reverb and or Delay that is added to your speaking voice Note See page 121 for an in depth discussion of the effects settings E 80 Music Workstation Roland Vocal Harmonist function 3 Press and hold the button The display changes to HIC INPUT VOICE HARHONY Tak SMALL SUSTAIN LEY THRESHOLD REVERB SEND Gr Sm om Gm OUTPUT LEY MUSIC MUTE i CHORUS SEND DELAY SEND 4 Press the field and set the desired value with the dial The smaller the value the softer the song s and Key board parts volume will be Select 0 if you do not want the music to be any softer than it already is The and fields allow you to add some reverb and or delay to your voice While some reverb values between 10 and 40 for example could be useful delay should probably only be used as effect because it tends to blur your announcements Note See page 121 for details about these effects Automatic transposition Singer Key gt Only availabl
658. y the new sounds can be selected You may have grown fond of older sounds from the G and VA series and wish to select them In that case select EXTENDED Press the button The display changes to ae Tyaga Aia 2 Press the and the field UTILITY EAA USER PROGRAM RECALL US MIDI SET RECALL SOUND SET MODE RECALL Ea El cetEctioN EXTENDED 3 Press either or to make your choice This setting is memorized and used until you change it again Drumming on the keyboard The E 80 also allows you to play drums and percussion on the keyboard If you have ever worked with an older Roland arranger instrument you may remember that there used to be a part called M Drums for playing percussion phrases This part no longer exists because any of the following Keyboard parts can be used for drumming UP1 UP2 UP3 LW1 LW2 and MBS 1 Press the TONE ASSIGN button of the part you want to assign a Drum Set to the button lights 2 Press the TONE button TONE i E GUITAR SRX EXP PIANO KEYBOARD CHR PERC ORGAN ACCORDION A GUITAR BASS STRINGS cA SAX PAD PERCUSS HARMONIC VOCAL BRASS TRUMPET WIND SYNTH ETHNIC SFX DRUMS BAR 3 Press a field to select another Drum Set rums Fone E E i pvo eT Y R amp B Room LZR Standard 1 Fiesta Standard 2 New Pop Room New Folk PAGES PAGES i E 80 Music Workstation Roland Using the Keyboard parts You may have to use th
659. ynthesizer MP3 player etc connected to the EXTERNAL SOURCE sockets on the E 80 s rear panel 5 STYLE section These buttons allow you to select one of the twelve Music Style families The button of the selected fam ily lights 6 D BEAM buttons These buttons below it allow you to assign the desired function to the D Beam controller 45 See p 72 7 MARK JUMP section These buttons 1 4 allow you to jump to one of four stored locations inside the currently selected song You can program the desired locations for songs that do not yet contain them E 80 Music Workstation Roland Front panel ee D BEAM DJ GEAR SFX INST CTRL STYLE LIVE DISCO 8 BEAT 16 BEAT BAND ROCK DANCE CONTEMP p oe MARK amp JUMP 1 2 3 4 BALL JAZZ BOSSA ROOM BLUES 50 s amp 60 s SAMBA LATIN WORLD Hy PLAY NEXT MINUS 16 TRK LIST SONG ONE SEQ TOP BWD FWD PLAY STOP REC t pemo K lt lt gt gt gt H STYLE CONTROL BASS SYNC INTRO MAIN END RIT INVERSION START STOP se Ss se VARIATION START 2 3 AUTO 1 4 FILL IN STOP RECORDER section button Press this button to access the display where you can select a list of songs to be played back edit existing lists program new ones etc When the indicator of this button lights la 4 p gt are used to control playback of the current song Hold down while press ing to select the demo mode button You
660. you can save your song whenever you are happy with your latest recording or edits Bear in mind that a power failure is all it takes to lose your song Don t wait until it Is too late Press the field on the 16 track Sequencer s main page The display now responds with SAVEISONG Qi Bi Bi Blew ee ff cn afaxi_5 mvo 6 al on re T You can also select this page by pressing the button field gt field 2 Specify where you want to save your song Press the field to select the E 80 s internal memory as target this is a 50MB stor age area similar to a hard disk Insert a floppy disk into the drive and press the field Press the field This option is only available if you connected a memory card to the E 80 s PCMCIA slot You need to give your song two names a SONG NAME and a FILE NAME The FILE NAME is the one that allows the E 80 to recognize your song oe TC N E E KIS ma are sce ie 3 Press the button icon 4 Enter the name e Move the cursor to the desired position using and gt e Enter the character for that position using the alpha numeric keypad In many instances you will have to press the desired field several times to select the desired character Use the field to alternate between capitals and small letters Press the field to delete the character indi cated by the cursor Press and hold it to clear all characters Press to insert a space
661. you want to change If you set DIVISION to Fill Dwn or Fill Up there are only three button icons You can switch on several or all button icons if you like But you cannot switch off all four or three WE EXECUTE Press this field to confirm the new time signature and change the selected pattern s 2 19 E 80 Music Workstation Programming Styles Style Composer Editing individual Style events Style Micro Edit Select this mode if you need to change just one aspect of an otherwise perfect Style In this section we will use the word event for any kind of message An event is thus a command or instruction for the Arranger You can only view and edit one track at a time There fore be sure to check the TRACK setting before editing the events displayed on this page 1 Select and load a different Style This is not necessary if you want to edit the Style you have just recorded See Selecting Music Styles on p 27 and Style Finder quickly locating Styles on p 95 for how to load a Style 2 Press the button SPLIT amp TOUCH a Aane T a STYLE SETTING COMPOSER 3 Press the STYLE COMPOSER field STYLE COMPOSER 4 Press the field The display changes to YPAC Laro SDi 0 CC 0 Bank Select MSB CREATE 0 CC 32 Bank Select LSB 4 te EVENT FJ 01 000 Program Change 4 01 000 CC 10 Pan 64 01 000 CC 11 Expression 120 01 000 CC 3
662. ystem of the Arranger is indeed based on the assumption that all patterns are in the key of C Thus whenever you play a C in INTELLIGENT mode or a C chord in the chord recognition area the E 80 uses the original notes of the pattern no real time transposition If that pattern is in F and if you forgot to tell the E 80 that it is Ff is what you will hear when you play a C or C chord Note There is no need to specify the key for ADR tracks Tempo 20 250 Allows you to specify the default tempo of the Music Style Track ADrum ABass ACC1 6 ALL This is where you can specify the tracks that should be extracted and turned into a Music Style phrase In most instances you will probably select ALL You could however also extract each track separately 1993 E 80 Music Workstation Using the 16 track Sequencer Mode Allows you to select the mode of your pattern Major major m minor or 7th seventh Choose the mode that matches the chord being used in the excerpt You can also decide to use the same phrase for all three modes The E 80 then attempts to transform them in a musically useful way for the chords you play in real time By selecting an option indicated by you create several patterns at once see also p 204 Division Allows you to specify the pattern type that Should be created Main 1 Main 2 Main 3 Main 4 Main ALL Fill Up1 Fill Up2 Fill Up3 Fill Up ALL Fill Dw1 Fill Dw 2 Fill
663. zing Grace Strummlin Pop Gospel Love PROGR PARTS zo Te NaturalPiano owerz Pad With Vintage EP1 You can also select this page by pressing MENU but ton gt ARRANGER SETTINGS gt ARRANGER CHORD The display changes to ZONE TYPE HODE LEFT MEA o ia RIGHT FW O R WHOLE DED JEA 2 Press the ZONE LEFT WHOLE or field to select the chord recognition area 3 Press the button to return to the main page Note When you press the EASY SETTING button the setting is selected Note OFF can also be assigned to an ASSIGN SW button page 71 and an optional footswitch page 75 Arranger Type chord mode Another important choice is how you want to transmit note information to the Arranger 4 Press the STANDARD PIANO STYLE INTELLIGENT or field STANDARD This is the normal chord recognition mode The melodic accompaniment uses the notes you play in the chord recognition area ZONE If you play only one note in that area the accompaniment plays only that note i e it assumes that you deliberately chose to omit the third and fifth of your chord To have the Music Style sound a major minor or seventh chord you only need to play three notes by the way Other more complex chords require that you press four keys PIANO STYLE This mode works as follows the Arranger decodes every chord you play no matter where you play it Causing the Arranger to play another

Roland E-80 Musical Instrument User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents